JP2021062143A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To create a novel entertainment property.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a predetermined screen, a projector which projects light to display an image on the predetermined screen, a half mirror, and display means different from the predetermined screen. The half mirror disposed in a front face side of the predetermined screen can reflect an image displayed on the display means to the front face side.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure363

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-035066 JP-A-2009-240459

The present inventor has come up with the idea that a new type of entertainment can be created by devising a screen in the process of diligently studying a game machine using a projector as described above. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) A predetermined screen (for example, the central screen portion 9203C) and
A projector (for example, a projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen.
With a half mirror (for example, half mirror 9511a),
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal panel 9512) different from that of the predetermined screen is provided.
The image displayed on the display means can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), a predetermined screen, a half mirror, and a display means different from the predetermined screen are provided, and the display means is provided by the half mirror arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen. It is configured so that the image displayed on the screen can be reflected on the front side. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the image displayed on the predetermined screen and the mirror image displayed on the half mirror in a superimposed manner, and it is possible to create a novel visual effect.

(2) The game machine of (1) above.
The predetermined screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (2), the predetermined screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the light incident from the back side can display an image on the front side. ing. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the half mirror to block the passage of light projected by the projector, and it is possible to facilitate the arrangement design of the half mirror and a predetermined screen.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
A drive mechanism for driving the half mirror is provided.
The half mirror can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the drive mechanism, and when the half mirror is arranged at the second position, the display means. The image displayed in can be reflected to the front side,
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (3), the half mirror can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the drive mechanism, and is arranged at the second position. In some cases, the image displayed on the display means is configured to be reflective to the front side. As a result, when the effect using the predetermined screen and the effect using the half mirror are made to cooperate, the half mirror is arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen, while when these effects are not made to cooperate, the half mirror is used. It is possible to move away from the front side of the predetermined screen, and it is possible to prevent the visibility of the image displayed on the predetermined screen from being hindered by the half mirror when the effects are not cooperated.

According to the present invention, new entertainment properties can be created.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a back perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector device and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of the mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a top view which shows the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal for fixing a projector device. It is sectional drawing of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of the upper pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the posture adjustment method of the lower pedestal. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 19 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed diagonally from the front. It is a figure which looked at the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 from an oblique rear view. It is a perspective view of the case which accommodates the internal component of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower pedestal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the upper wall part of a projector cover is removed. It is a top view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. FIG. 25 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. It is the figure which looked at the projector cover with the upper wall part removed diagonally from above. It is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall part removed. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28. It is a perspective view of a blind. It is a top view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall part of a projector cover removed. It is a figure which shows the state which removed the fan for the opening vicinity and the duct cover in the cross section along the arrow view NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 30 and a case is arranged. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of an opening and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 3 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35. It is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of an opening. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of an opening from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening viewed from the front and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which attached the blind and the duct cover from the left. It is a perspective view which looked at the projector cover, a blind, and a duct cover from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 41. It is an exploded perspective view of a blind and a duct cover. It is a figure for demonstrating the method of attaching the upper door mechanism to a cabinet. It is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement position of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. It is a figure which shows the air flow path which can be formed inside the projector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the decorative unit and the frame member of a pachinko game machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of a display unit. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from a projector, and the screen on a cabinet side. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. (B) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. (C) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a figure for demonstrating the image displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen. It is a vertical sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower holding member, the upper holding member, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate and the screen sheet from the rear, while the lower holding member and the upper holding member were seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper holding member and the upper frame from the lower side. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper frame, the 1st structure, the 2nd structure, the 3rd structure, the 4th structure, and a screen sheet from the rear. It is a perspective view of a light transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member seen from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the cross section of a light transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a right side view of the cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking part, and the front side protruding member. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the lower side. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which light is projected from a projector device from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the rear. It is a vertical sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the lid for occlusion, and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of the game machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 90. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall. It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the irradiation unit is attached to the back wall of a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is a perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the rear. It is a vertical sectional view of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the lid for occlusion, and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a rear view of the game machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. It is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 102. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of the lid for closing and the back wall of a cabinet. It is a perspective view which looked at the lid for closure from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lid for closure from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back wall viewed from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the lid for closing is attached to the back wall. It is sectional drawing which shows the closing lid and the back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109. It is a perspective view of the screw for hooking an irradiation unit. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the screw for hooking an irradiation unit is temporarily fixed to the back wall. It is a front view of the projector cover plate. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate seen from slightly above. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the projector cover plate from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first cavity. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the protrusion for first engagement. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the 1st engaging protrusion is housed in 1st cavity. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the 1st engaging protrusion is housed in 1st cavity. It is sectional drawing around the screw for hooking an irradiation unit, and the screw for attaching a lid in a state where the closing lid and the irradiation unit are attached to the back wall. It is sectional drawing which shows the lid for closing, the back wall, and the projector cover plate. It is a front view which shows the periphery of the opening of the back wall and the projector cover plate by disassembling. It is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97. It is a perspective view of a cover part. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the duct cover from the left side. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the projector cover and the duct cover from the right side. It is sectional drawing in the state which the duct cover is seen from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the cover part. It is sectional drawing of the cover part. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover part from the right side. It is a perspective view which shows the state which a cover part and a case are connected with a duct adapter. It is a perspective view which looked at the duct adapter from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the duct adapter from the right rear. It is a left side view of the cross section in the left side part of a duct adapter. It is a right side view of the cross section in the right side part of a duct adapter. It is a front view of the duct adapter. It is a left side view of the state where the duct adapter is cut near the center of the connecting portion. It is a perspective view of a case. It is a partial enlarged perspective view around the right side part in a duct adapter. It is a partial enlarged perspective view around the 1st right side protrusion and the 2nd right side protrusion in a duct adapter. It is a partially enlarged front view of the right side protrusion shown in FIG. 140. It is a perspective view which looked at the duct cover from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover as seen from the direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface of the duct cover. It is sectional drawing of the duct cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the groove for engaging an adapter in a projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first protrusion in the projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the 2nd to 5th protrusions in a projector cover. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the duct adapter is connected to the projector cover. It is sectional drawing of the projector cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148. It is sectional drawing in the state which punching is attached to the duct cover. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the duct cover and punching from the bottom. It is a front view for demonstrating the schematic structure inside a cabinet. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154. (A) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front in a state where the front door is closed. (B) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front in a state where the front door is closed. (C) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front. (D) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the right rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear part of a reel adapter. It is a rear view of the right rear part shown in FIG. 159. It is sectional drawing in the lower protrusion part of the right rear part shown in FIG. 159. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter viewed from below. It is a front view of the state where the reel adapter is cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter from above. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around a step recess in a state where the reel adapter is cut in a vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel frame from the rear. It is a perspective view of a motor frame. It is a perspective view of a middle board. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel adapter is mounted on the middle board. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is slightly displaced with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 from the side. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 177 are cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel unit is mounted on a reel adapter. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179. FIG. 179 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 are cut in a vertical plane in the left-right direction. It is sectional drawing in the state which the reel unit is fastened to a reel adapter. It is a perspective view which looked at the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 from the rear. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel adapter and the reel frame shown in FIG. 183 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the reel unit is mounted on a middle board. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel unit and the middle board shown in FIG. 185 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. It is a front view of a lumbar panel. It is a perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the lumbar panel from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel film from a little above. It is sectional drawing of the lower panel film. It is a schematic view of the cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193. It is a perspective view which shows the state which arranged the lower panel frame on the front side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 192. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from the front and a little above. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from diagonally below. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel base from the rear and slightly above. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from the rear and slightly below. It is a perspective view which looked at the back of a lower panel from a little above. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel film from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back of the lower panel viewed from the rear and slightly below. It is a perspective view which looked at the lower panel frame from the front. It is a rear view of the lower panel frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the bottom of the lower panel from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the bottom of the lower panel from the rear. It is a perspective view which saw the lower panel right and the lower panel left from the left rear. It is a perspective view which saw the lower panel right and the lower panel left from the right rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which the lower panel frame was attached to the lower panel base from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which the lower panel frame was attached to the lower panel base from the rear. It is a perspective view from the rear view of the state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base and the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the state in which the lower panel lower portion is attached to the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear in the state shown in FIG. 211. It is sectional drawing of the lower panel base, the back of a lower panel, and the lower part of a lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 213. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the central screen unit and the upper screen unit from the upper door mechanism, and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the central screen unit and the upper screen unit from the upper door mechanism, and looked at from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is a partial enlarged perspective view around the left side part of a shielding wall member. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the shielding wall member and the harness protector for a speaker were removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 222. (A) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment as viewed from above. (B) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in another embodiment as viewed from above. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the front panel of a decorative unit is removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the harness protector for a speaker is removed from the upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper screen unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper screen unit. It is sectional drawing of the upper screen unit. It is sectional drawing of the upper screen unit. It is sectional drawing of the upper screen unit. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper door mechanism viewed from the rear and the lower side. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the front panel and the speaker grill of a decorative unit are removed from the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of the top side light emitting unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the 1st front panel lens, the 2nd front panel lens, and the speaker horn are removed from the top side light emitting unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the top side substrate, the top side substrate cover, and the top side speaker illumination lens from above. It is a perspective view which looked at the top side substrate, the top side substrate cover, and the top side speaker illumination lens from the bottom. It is a top view which shows the installation mode of the lower LED in the state which the top side speaker illumination lens is installed on the top side substrate cover. It is a top view which shows the installation mode of the lower side LED in the state which removed the top side speaker illumination lens from the top side substrate cover. It is sectional drawing of the top side speaker illumination lens. It is a top view which shows the positional relationship between a lower LED and a speaker horn. It is a perspective view which looked at the speaker horn from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the speaker horn from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the peripheral structure of a speaker. It is a front view which shows the peripheral structure of a speaker. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, the speaker seal, the speaker holder, the speaker, and the speaker harness protector are removed from the state shown in FIG. 244. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the speaker horn, a speaker seal, a speaker holder, and a speaker are assembled. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the speaker horn from the state shown in FIG. 247. It is a front view of a speaker seal, a speaker holder, and a speaker. It is a perspective view of a speaker seal. It is a perspective view which looked at the central screen sheet and the rear light-transmitting plate from the rear and the top. It is sectional drawing of the central screen sheet and the rear light-transmitting plate. (A) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in this embodiment is incident on the rear translucent plate as viewed from above. (B) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in another embodiment is incident on the rear transmissive plate as viewed from above. It is sectional drawing of the central screen sheet and the rear light-transmitting plate. It is a perspective view which looked at the rear side light-transmitting plate from the rear and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate viewed from the rear and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the rear side light-transmitting plate from the front and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate viewed from the front and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first reinforcing protrusion. It is a partially enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the 1st reinforcing protrusion and the 2nd reinforcing protrusion are in contact with a central screen sheet. It is a front view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the main screen unit from the upper door mechanism from the front. It is a front view of a decoration unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a decorative unit. It is sectional drawing of the decorative screen unit. It is a front view of a decorative frame. It is a side view which shows how the light projected from a projector device is incident on a decorative screen sheet. It is sectional drawing of a decorative unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the screen unit and the navigation lamp unit are assembled. It is a perspective view which looked at the decorative frame from the rear. It is a front view of the front light transmitting plate. It is a perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp cover from the front. It is a front view of the main screen sheet. It is a rear view which shows the appearance which the front light-transmitting plate was removed from the state which the screen unit and the navigation lamp cover were assembled. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover member, a lens member, and a decorative screen sheet from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the cover member, a lens member, and a decorative screen sheet from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the rear and the upper side. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the rear and the top. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 278. It is a perspective view which looked at the front panel from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the navigation lamp cover and the navigation lamp lens from the navigation lamp unit, and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the navigation lamp board cover from the state shown in FIG. 284 from the front. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a state in which the navigation lamp LED substrate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 285 as viewed from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the navigation lamp LED board from the state shown in FIG. 285, and looked at from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the decorative unit board cover from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp LED board and the navigation lamp board cover from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and five decorative units from the front. It is sectional drawing of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the decoration unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens from the rear. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the navigation lamp lens shown in FIG. 292 in an exploded manner. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the navigation lamp board cover and the navigation lamp lens from the front and the bottom. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the navigation lamp board cover viewed from the rear and the bottom. It is sectional drawing of the navigation lamp LED board, the navigation lamp board cover, and the navigation lamp lens. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance that the light-shielding sheet is installed on the navigation lamp board cover. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the light-shielding sheet is removed from the state shown in FIG. 297. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which removed the shielding wall member from the upper door mechanism from the rear and the upper side. It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the bonus lamp unit is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and the rear duct are removed from the state shown in FIG. 301. It is a perspective view of a bonus lamp unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the 1st bonus lamp lens and the 2nd bonus lamp lens are removed from a bonus lamp unit. It is a perspective view of the bonus lamp board cover, the bonus lamp board, and the front duct. It is an exploded perspective view of the front duct. It is a bottom view of the front duct base. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base viewed from above. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base viewed from below. It is a perspective view which looked at the front side duct cover from the rear and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the front duct from the rear and from the bottom. It is a front view which shows the front panel partially enlarged. It is a perspective view of the rear duct base. It is a perspective view which looked at the rear side duct cover from the front and the bottom. It is a perspective view which looked at the rear side duct and the duct seal from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which the duct seal was attached to the rear side duct from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from a little lower side. It is sectional drawing of the bonus lamp unit, the front panel, the rear duct, and the duct seal. It is a front view of the front light transmitting plate. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the mounting mode of a decorative unit. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the arrangement mode of the front side duct base. It is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a front view of the right side decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows by removing the right light emitting unit from the right decorative unit and disassembling the right light emitting unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the 1st lens on the right side from the front. It is a perspective view of the 1st lens on the right side seen from the lower side and the left side. It is a partially enlarged perspective view in the vicinity of the third protrusion. It is a partially enlarged perspective view in the vicinity of the third protrusion. It is a partially enlarged perspective view in the vicinity of the first protrusion and the second protrusion. It is a partially enlarged perspective view in the vicinity of the first protrusion and the second protrusion. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front surface of the first lens on the right side. It is a perspective view which looked at the 1st lens on the right side from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the 1st lens on the right side seen from the rear. It is a perspective view of the right side 1st lens, the 1st side irradiation LED, and the 2nd side irradiation LED seen from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right side first lens, the 1st side irradiation LED, and the 2nd side irradiation LED shown in FIG. 334. It is sectional drawing of the right side 1st lens, the 1st side irradiation LED, and the 2nd side irradiation LED shown in FIG. 334. It is sectional drawing of the right side 1st lens, the 1st side irradiation LED, and the 2nd side irradiation LED shown in FIG. 334. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd lens on the right side from the lower side and the right side. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd lens on the right side from the lower side and the left side. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd lens on the right side from the rear. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the second lens on the right side as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing of the right light emitting unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the 3rd lens on the right side from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the 3rd lens on the right side from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the upper door mechanism schematically. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit. It is an exploded front view of a screen unit. (A) is a front view of the screen unit. (B) is a plan view of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion related to the screen unit. (C) is a plan view of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion related to the screen unit. It is a side view which shows the main part structure of a screen unit. (A) is a side view which shows the main part structure of a screen unit. (B) is a front view showing a main part configuration of a screen unit. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen unit. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 352 (a). (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as viewed from the rear. (B) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as viewed from the front. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the arrangement state of the rotating screen part. (A) is a figure which shows an example of an image displayed on a flat screen part. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a curved screen portion. (A) is a schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement state of the rotating screen portion. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). (A) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as viewed from the front. (B) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as viewed from the rear. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 359. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 361. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a half mirror. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. (B) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in (a). It is a figure which shows an example of the production using the illumination unit.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachislot machine. The game machine 1 can be played using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, and other game media such as cards that are given or given to the player and that store game value information. , Hereinafter, it will be described assuming that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the game machine 1 toward the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the game machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction). The right side and the left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the game machine 1, respectively. Further, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as a vertical direction or a height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the game machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower surface arranged on the lower front surface of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. Then, a wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back surface side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in a parallel state (horizontally in a row) so that each of them can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. For the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, and RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, and RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c on a substantially horizontal plane are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion port DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted from the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of the liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects contact with a part of the human body (fingertip or the like) or an electrostatic pen and outputs the detection signal. It may be of a method of detecting contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputting the detection signal, or of another method or structure (in-cell structure or the like).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and on the display screen, for example, game information such as the number of games is displayed as the game progresses, and is selected by the player. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, as the game progresses, it is possible to display the content (effect information) according to the effect related to the game on the display screen. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a directing accessory, a jog dial, a push button, or the like may be attached as a dedicated attachment. Further, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating the function to the display unit A or the like described later.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided to rotate and drive the reels RL, RC, and RR by the operation of the player and to start the variable display of the symbol in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 switches the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by operating a push button. In the state where payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancellation shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are collected in the medal receiving unit DD15.

A lumbar panel DD18 (lumbar light guide plate) is arranged on the lower side of the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The lumbar panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the lumbar panel DD18, a name representing the model of the game machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout outlet DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by sounds such as voice and music. Further, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of winning a prize and the number of remaining medals credited. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the game machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. In the state where the maximum number of 50 medals is credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout outlet DD14. Further, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and is a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire game machine 1, and a sub control device SS (see FIG. 11). Etc. are housed. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the game machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. To do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is irradiated.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, its position (projection distance or angle) with respect to an accessory which is a screen described later. Etc.) and by projecting an image according to the effect information generated based on the shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful effect.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B is a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector device B2, and is arranged diagonally downward and backward from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector device B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being exteriorized by the case B22, and is arranged at the rear portion in the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a horizontally arranged flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 12) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via the lens or the like. There is. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are partially formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 / B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314 / B334 / B344, whereby the optical mirror is between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 / B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 inclined upward from the rear to the front in the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 is arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, the reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the upper wall portion B12. It has side wall portions B13 and B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward of the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. There is.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 5). As a result, the display unit A can unite the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each configured by applying a screen paint to a base material, and have a projection surface capable of causing an image to appear.

The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 each have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Specifically, the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 is flat, whereas the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has a side view arc shape. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, respectively, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. Driven by (not shown).

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 11, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-control device SS described above is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the effect operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 as a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A or the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used for adjusting the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and performing the initial focus setting. In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which an adjustment program (application software) is installed. Alternatively, it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 and a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 relates to an LED light source, DMD, and a projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 that emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color lights as components arranged around the lens unit B21. It is equipped with a focus mechanism for adjusting the focus (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on the command of the sub control device SS to adjust the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to the setting / adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24, and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. Guides you to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or the accessory to be projected, and an image corresponding to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible by, for example, setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. ing. As a result, the display unit A provided with the projector device B2 is constructed to be cheaper and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the game machine 1.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mechanical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 12, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to a suitable portion on the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end portion of the case B22 so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. The procedure for adjusting the mounting of the projector device B2 will be described later.

Further, the projector device B2 has a lens unit B21, an LED substrate (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD substrate (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is housed while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered with the lens unit cover B222, and the LED board, the DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

In such a projector device B2, video data related to an image such as an effect is transmitted from the sub control device SS, and the sub control device SS controls the projector device B2 so as to project the image on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the effect.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the image is displayed on the projection surface of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that it is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are partially in contact with the back surface of the LED substrate. The heat sink 243D is in partial contact with the back surface of the DMD substrate. In the present embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have relatively large fin external sizes, while the heat sink 243R and the heat sink 243G are relatively small, while the heat sink 243B and the heat sink 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D are efficient so as not to raise the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are significantly changed by dissipating the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air. It dissipates well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiating members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiating effect, and have a plurality of heat radiating fins in order to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged so as to be close to the back surface of the rear portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right front side of the case B22 in which the intake fan 244A is close, and an exhaust port B22E is provided in the right rear part of the case B22 in which the heat sink 243R is close to the intake port B22A. Has been done. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 to which the intake fan 244B is close, and in the other part of the left side of the case B22 along with the intake port B22B, the inside of the case B22 is provided. The intake port B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 to which the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. .. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, it is forcibly taken from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while taking heat from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G. A flow of air exhausted to the heat sink is formed. Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 is formed while mainly taking heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. ..

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231 and a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged in the case B22, and further to the focus mechanism.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Position / orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1, and is a rectangular main body portion 2200 and both left and right sides of the main body portion 2200. Is formed by bending downward and outward, and has a step with the main body 2200 and extends to both the left and right sides. The left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and the main body 2200 partially extend from the rear side to the rear side. It has a rear end 2202 to be ejected. The main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In the present embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that roughly corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. The lower pedestal B221 is integrally formed with three connecting screw portions 2210 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A while fitting the coil spring 2211 to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. By fastening the nut 2213 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, the nut 2213 is suspended from the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 12, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 15, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other in an adjustable distance at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is composed of a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the position and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 16 shows a mounting mode of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower part of FIG. 16A is a view showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened to the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper part of FIG. 16A is a view of FIG. 16A. It is sectional drawing which follows the BB'line shown in the figure below. Note that FIG. 16 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, but the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral A in FIG. 16A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 16A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion of the reference numeral A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 16B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of the arrow E with respect to FIG. 16A. The upper view of FIG. 16 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD'shown in the lower figure of FIG. 16 (b). In the state shown in FIG. 16B, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the shaded portion indicated by reference numeral C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 17 shows a connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that FIG. 17 shows one connecting portion R2, but the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. To. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is urged in a direction away from each other (vertical direction), so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Loosening is prevented at the joint.

In such a connecting portion R2, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 17). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in the direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

In the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 in the vicinity of the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the lines connecting the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nuts 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction. The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. As a result, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur as an image display mode.

The adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 11) connected to the projector device B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 adjusts the optical axis direction and checks the displayed image on the screen or the like at the time of inspection at a factory or the like. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are carried out. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 11). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, the optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, the focus adjustment, and the like in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as adjustment value data in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction (see FIG. 11). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 due to transportation after shipment from the factory, and even if the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it remains as it is. Can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is mainly positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction according to the mounting position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, and is in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The direction of the optical axis is adjusted according to the attitude of the projector.

In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three connecting portions for connecting to each other, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is satisfied, four locations are provided. The connecting portion may be provided above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates and is fixed to the lower pedestal.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described. The game machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images and
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that can be opened / closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) is provided.
The display unit (display unit A) is
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images and
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) and
A screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). And with
The projector (projector device B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized.
The position of the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. The position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so that the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above.
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A).
While the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), it is possible to irradiate light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so that the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) can be reflected diagonally downward and backward, and the main body thereof. It is possible to adjust the light reflection direction by changing the degree of screwing in the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the light reflection direction, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the game machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. As a result, the projection position can be adjusted even when the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate.

(2-1) A projection device (projector device B2) that projects an image with irradiation light, and
A plurality of projection planes capable of displaying the image projected by the projection device, and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one projection surface among the plurality of projection surfaces as a movable projection surface.
An upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device is provided.
The plurality of projection surfaces are surface-processed.
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device.
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall.
The upper pedestal is attached so that the in-plane position can be adjusted with respect to the upper wall, and the lower pedestal can adjust the distance with respect to the upper pedestal at three or more points while supporting the projection device. A game machine characterized by being attached to.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall portion B12, thereby appropriately adjusting the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned on the upper wall portion B12 at three or more connecting portions R1, R2, R3. It is attached so that the posture supported via the lower pedestal B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space posture of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted by using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and by extension, a high-quality image having a high visual visual effect can be displayed on a plurality of projection surfaces. It can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above.
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other by a plurality of connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line.
Each of the plurality of connecting portions
A connecting screw portion (connecting screw portion 2210) that protrudes from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and is screwed through the other.
A coil spring (coil spring 2211) that is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion and is arranged between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal is provided.

According to the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are not on the same straight line, and the distance between the three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 is such that the connecting screw portion 2210. It can be adjusted individually by simply adjusting the screw fastening amount, and the distance after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic urging force of the coil spring 2211, so that the space is orthogonal to each other in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction. Each posture of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions of the above, and for example, the projector device B2 can be held in an appropriate posture in any of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction.

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first embodiment also applies to the second embodiment.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the first embodiment.

FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 19 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 20 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 21 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 19 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a case that houses the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member having a rectangular shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 19, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by side A, side B, side C, and side D.

Square holes 2201c are provided on the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 26) by screwing.

In the first embodiment, when the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1, the upper pedestal B220 is screwed to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 to directly fix the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1. explained. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T that is inserted into and fastened to the square hole 2201c. Note that FIG. 19 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300. In the present embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened by using the fixing plate B321 and the cap bolt. In the first embodiment, the fixing plate B321 is not shown, but when the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened, a conventionally known member can be appropriately selected and used.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. The three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

The lower pedestal B221 has a rectangular main body portion B221a having a rectangular opening formed in the center, a right side portion B221b and a left side portion B221c extending forward with a step from the main body portion B221a, and a main body portion B221a. It is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d having a step and extending rearward.

As shown in FIG. 20, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left side of the front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 21, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

A connecting screw portion 2210 is integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

Similar to the first embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other so that the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting screw portions 2210. Will be done. Each of the three connecting portions is composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 12).

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, a case having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment can be adopted, but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. There is.

Similar to the first embodiment, the case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector device B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 12) is attached to the front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) covered with the lens unit cover B222.

Further, although not shown, in the case B22, two intake fans 244A are located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side portion B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 23)). -244B are arranged so as to be lined up in the front-rear direction. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 22), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 23). As a result, in the case B22, after being forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, a flow of air exhausted from the exhaust port B22E is formed while taking heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 23, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and its upper end surface (upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 22) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. Is in contact with. Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this respect, in the first embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above the lower pedestal B221. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is formed by forming an opening in the upper pedestal B220 and arranging the case B22 so that the upper end of the case B22 (upper wall portion B22F) inserts the opening upward. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

As described above, as compared with the first embodiment, the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) with respect to the upper pedestal B220 is moved upward, so that the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 is provided. A part of the upper pedestal B220 will be arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 22) (see FIG. 23). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 12) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the irradiation light is not blocked in this way. That is, in the present embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion in the vertical direction of the projection lens 210) is used when emitting the irradiation light. The light emitting position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. FIG. 23. The upper pedestal B220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 as described above exists above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is lower than the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d, the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are respectively above. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. As a result, while changing the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 from the first embodiment, the same configurations as those of the first embodiment can be adopted for the configurations of the three connecting portions.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as in the first embodiment. An advanced computer program is required for such adjustment of the optical axis direction, and a large amount of cost is incurred in the development of the program. In the present embodiment, the optical axis direction and the like can be adjusted using the same program as in the first embodiment, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F, but as in the first embodiment, the case B22 with the upper side open (see FIG. 12) may be used. Good. The method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 12) as in the first embodiment. It may be that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward as compared with the first embodiment. , A new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the first embodiment, and the same configuration as that of the first embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in the present embodiment, the projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the first embodiment is adopted in consideration of other effects. Hereinafter, the projector cover B1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 25 is a plan view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 26 is an exploded view of a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow LL of the projector cover shown in FIG. 25 and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 27 is a view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed, as viewed from diagonally above. FIG. 28 is a front view of the projector cover with the upper wall portion removed. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 28.

As shown in FIG. 24, the projector cover B1 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside the projector cover B1. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to project inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and the relay plate mounting surface B301a formed forward and rearward, the position adjusting surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and the front. It also has a connecting portion B301e for connecting the relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjusting surface B301d on the rear side.

A mounting hole B301b is formed on the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjusting hole B301c is formed on the position adjusting surface B301d. The mounting hole B301b is a screw hole for mounting the relay plate B300 to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing. The position adjusting hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 18) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 26, the relay plate B300 has a step between the main body portion B300A and the main body portion B300A and extends forward, and has a step between the main body portion B300A and the main body portion B300A and extends rearward. A rear side portion B300C is provided. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. As described above, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screwing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) whose upper side is open are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape similar to a hexagon having sides EJ (see FIG. 25) when viewed from above.

As shown in FIG. 27, a continuous wall surface (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) is formed with sides E to J as the upper ends. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) formed continuously from the side J has a shorter vertical length as compared with the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. The wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E is continuous to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and is a part of the inner side surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view when cut in a horizontal plane passing through the connecting portion B301e (a surface above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and passing below the position adjusting surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 29, the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and the cavity 402 formed below the position adjusting surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301 are formed. , Communicate inside the projector cover B1.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In the present embodiment, as a member provided on the lower side of the projector cover B1, a blind B500 is adopted instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 30 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31 along the arrow NN.

As shown in FIG. 30, the blind B500 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and is formed so as to have a substantially horizontal first horizontal portion B501 and a continuous inclination of the first horizontal portion B501. A second inclined portion B502a formed so as to have an inclination continuously with the first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally with the first inclined portion B502a, and a second horizontal portion B502b. After the third horizontal portion B502d so that the inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally to the second inclined portion B502c, and the width in the left-right direction of the third horizontal portion B502d are the same. It has a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall portion B504 constituting the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. The first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d have a certain range raised in the vicinity of the outer wall portion B504 and are higher than the inner portion of the range. It has such a structure.

Further, the blind B500 has a small room B507 having a rectangular shape in a plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front side wall portion B507a, an outer wall portion B507b, a rear side wall portion B507d, and an inner wall portion B505 formed in the vertical direction. The front side wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer side wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear side wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

As described above, since the small chamber B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, the small chamber B502 in the second inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower by the length of the width in the left-right direction in the front side wall portion B507a as compared with the width in the left-right direction in the first inclined portion B502a. The outer wall portion B507b is formed with a U-shaped notch 507c having an open upper portion. Further, the upper ends of the front side wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear side wall portion B507d are lower than the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a that is slightly erected upward at its front end, and a second wall portion B501b that is continuous from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a toward the rear. A third wall portion B501c that is continuous diagonally rearward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that is continuous rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a continuous inward direction from the fourth wall portion B501d. A fifth wall portion B501e and the like are formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

A screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing is formed in the area surrounded by the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e.

As shown in FIG. 32, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and is the second of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , It is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is substantially the same plane as the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. It is placed on top. There is a certain gap between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As will be described later, the gap is filled with the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 36). Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 32) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The upper part of the space P is covered by the projector cover B1 and the lower part is covered by the blind B500. Further, on the side of the space P, the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the inner wall portion B505, the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1. It is surrounded by surfaces B402a and B402b existing in the front and rear of the cavity B402, an inner surface 403, and the like.

A part of the space P above the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 24), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 29) via the cavity B402. See). In the state where the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled, the cavity B402 is a part of the space P.

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) are provided with punching B450s (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 30 and the case is arranged. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 36 is a right side view showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening is removed in the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 35.

As shown in FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat plate-like member, and the external shapes in the top view are the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, the inner wall portion B505, and the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b of the small room B507. (See FIG. 30) The shape is similar to that of a figure including the upper edge of each. As a result, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

Further, a duct cover B650 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat plate-shaped member, and although the external shape in the top view is different from that of the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 40), it covers the blind B500 from above like the duct cover B600.

As shown in FIG. 35, the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 is a space above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. For clarity, the duct cover B600 is shaded in FIG. 35.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, a fan B700 near the opening is placed in front of the upper side of the duct cover B600. The fan near the opening B700 is a fan for intake air, and the air existing in front of the fan B700 near the opening can pass through the air passage portion B710 (see FIG. 37) and move to the rear. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 34 and 35, the fan B700 near the opening is shaded.

Here, although not shown, in the present embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G , Housed in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 1). The two openings (not shown) formed on the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1, respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the right side of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23) of the case B22 is also arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air is introduced from the outside of the game machine 1 into the inside of the upper door mechanism UD through the opening formed on the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD (the opening on the right side of the two openings). Is incorporated. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 is above the duct cover B600 in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving backward in the space P1 (see FIG. 35), the projector cover B1 is turned inward, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and the intake port B22A. Enters the inside of the case B22 via.

The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the left while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

The air exiting the case B22 passes through the cavity B402 (the cavity B402 on the left side of the two cavities B402) and then changes its course forward to the space P (the space on the left side of the two spaces P). Of P), the space P1 above the duct cover B650 is moved forward. Then, the air goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has flowed out of the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and then passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Then, it is released to the outside of the game machine 1.

Of the air flows described above, the air flow path inside the projector cover B1 is indicated by a thick arrow in FIG. 29. Further, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. 35. In the present embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1.

Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD exists directly above the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a part of them overlap each other.

Therefore, when a foreign substance such as a liquid enters the game machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign substance enters the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid L is injected through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls on the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 30) of the blind B500.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 32, the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 29) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1. There is a certain gap between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to abut on both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination so as to descend toward the rear, the liquid L is the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, and the second. It flows backward through the inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. In this way, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The flow of such a liquid L is indicated by an arrow L in FIG. 35.

The liquid L that has flowed backward collides with the rear wall portion B503 and is stored in the area surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the outer wall portion B507b (and the inner wall portion B505) (FIG. 36). reference). The region is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 35) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For clarity, FIG. 36 shows the stored liquid L in shades.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 35 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1 are connected to each other through the opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, the opening B510 has a shape in which the side view is similar to a rectangle composed of sides K to N.

The side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper end edge B505a (see FIG. 30) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. Then, as shown in FIG. 30, the upper end edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 has a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (passage of liquid L).

Further, although not clearly shown in the drawing, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper end edge of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500, and the left end thereof hits the outer surface of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. Arranged so as to be in contact with each other, the main surface B610 (see FIG. 37) forms substantially the same plane as the upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 33). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L is separated from the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the opening B510. ) Is less likely to occur.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near the opening>
FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening as viewed from the rear and the bottom. FIG. 39 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening as viewed from the front and the bottom.

As shown in FIG. 37, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side portion B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), and screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b). It has.

The main surface B610 has a shape in which the left rear corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side portion B630 is formed so as to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole for inserting wiring for connecting various functional components (sub-control device SS or the like) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2 or the like. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engaging portion B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, a left rear engaging portion B622 erected from the main surface B610 behind the front engaging portion B621, and a right rear engaging portion. The side engaging portion B623 and the lower engaging portion B624 slightly erected from the main surface B610 and extending in the front-rear direction (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower side). It has a right engaging portion B624c) and.

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

The upper end edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621, the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622, and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper end edge B621a, the upper end edge B622a, and the upper end edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 37, the upper end edge B621a and the upper end edge B622a are shown by diagonal lines, and the air passage portion B710 is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 38, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the fan B700 in the vicinity of the opening is formed so as to project downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 has a front engaging portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400 and a rear engaging portion B422 formed behind the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. It has an extending upper upper engaging portion B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. The downward protrusion length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engaging portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 than in the upper engaging portion B423.

The lower end edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710 of the fan B700 near the opening. For the sake of clarity, the lower end edge B421a and the lower end edge B422a are shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 38.

The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched by the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front side engaging portion B621 and the left rear side engaging part B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front side engaging part B621 and the right rear side engaging part B623, and the front side engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joint portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is substantially equal to the length in the front-rear direction of the opening vicinity fan B700, respectively.

As a result, the left front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is in contact with the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left back surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is the left rear side engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is in contact with the front surface and is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the left rear side engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is in contact with the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right back surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is the front surface of the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front side engaging portion B621 and the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the fan B700 near the opening is in contact with the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the back surface of the fan B700 near the opening is in contact with the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 move upward from the main surface B610. The protrusion lengths of are almost equal to each other. Further, the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1 are downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. The protrusion lengths of are almost equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening.

As a result, the lower surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), And the upper surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is formed by the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is sandwiched between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is fixed by being sandwiched by the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the vertical direction.

In a state where the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is fixed, the front peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710 is attached to the upper end edge B621a of the front engagement portion B621 in the duct cover B600 and the lower end edge B421a of the front engagement portion B421 in the projector cover B1. Positioned along (see FIGS. 34 and 39). Although not shown, the rear outer edge of the air passage portion B710 is the upper end edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622 and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

That is, the air passage portion B710 is the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, the left rear engagement portion B622, the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement portion of the projector cover B1 when viewed from the front. It does not overlap with B421 and the rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passage portion B710 includes the front engagement portion B621 of the duct cover B600, the left rear engagement portion B622, the right rear engagement portion B623, and the front engagement portion B421 of the projector cover B1. Not covered by the rear engaging portion B422. As a result, the area of the air passing portion can be secured to the maximum.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper end edge of the engaging portion in the duct cover B600 (upper end edge B621a, upper end edge B622a, and upper end edge B623a) and the lower end edge (lower end edge) of the engaging portion in the projector cover B1. By matching B421a and the lower end edge B422a), the area of the portion where the fan B700 near the opening and the duct cover B600 abut and the area where the fan B700 near the opening and the projector cover B1 abut are increased. This makes it possible to stably fix the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 24) formed downward from the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a. See). As a result, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged behind the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the fan B700 near the opening exists at a position deeper than the right opening B400a, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to directly hit the fan B700 near the opening. It has become like. On the other hand, since the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged close to the right opening B400a, it is easy to take in air from the outside of the projector cover B1 through the right opening B400a. As a result, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

The left rear engaging portion B622 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600 are separately configured, whereas the front engaging portion B621 is connected without being divided into left and right parts. It has a unique shape. As a result, even if the liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter backward.

Further, the length of the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the length in the left-right direction of the front engaging portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engaging in the duct cover B600. The length from the left end of the portion B622 to the right end of the right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the rear engaging portion B422 in the projector cover B1. In addition, the lengths of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening in the left-right direction are all substantially equal. As a result, the space (cross section when the space P1 is cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction) from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 35) is substantially eliminated by the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. It is in a buried state. Also in this respect, the area of the air passing portion is secured to the maximum, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be improved.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the state where the blinds and the duct cover are attached as viewed from the left. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, the blind, and the duct cover shown in FIG. 41. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and the duct cover.

Note that FIG. 43 shows the blind B500 viewed from the front and above, while the duct cover B600 is viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 32) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 below the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 35) has entered the inside of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store the liquid (see FIG. 36).

As described with reference to FIG. 30, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, a third horizontal portion B502d, and a small room B507. Is formed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 5) below the blind B500 and maintain the strength of the blind B500 while increasing the capacity of the liquid that can be stored. There is.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the presence of the small room B507 increases the strength of the blind B500, and the liquid can be stored in the small room B507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small chamber B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small chamber B507 from the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small room B507 provided as the rib, the space in the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 40, the duct cover B650 has a shape in which the left front corner portion is cut out in a rectangular shape when viewed from above. For clarity, the duct cover B650 is shaded in FIG. 40. As described with reference to FIG. 33, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front side wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b (see FIG. 30) of the small room B507 in a top view. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned in front of the small room B507.

However, although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is from the surface B402b (see FIG. 29) existing behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 26) of the projector cover B1, that is, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. Is also placed behind. As a result, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L from the duct cover B600, and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 of the projector cover B1. It is less likely to invade the internal space Q (inside the case B22).

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube that communicates from the blind B500 to the outside of the game machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by inserting the liquid discharge hole S. Hereinafter, the liquid discharge hole S will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back surface side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the liquid discharge hole S is provided after the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the duct cover B600. It is composed of a side portion B630 (see FIG. 37).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch with an open lower portion in the back side wall portion B410 forming the back surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the first back side wall portion B510 constituting the back surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open upper portion in the second back side wall portion B511 formed in front of the first back side wall portion B510 of the blind B500. The second back side wall portion B511 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B508 which is continuously formed from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503 toward the rear. The first back side wall portion B510 is formed so as to stand upright from the rear end of the horizontal plane B509 which is continuously formed from the lower end of the second back side wall portion B511 toward the rear.

The rear side portion B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back side surface B631 and a downward projecting portion B632a and a downward projecting portion B632b projecting downward from the left and right both end edges of the surface B631. The downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b face each other so as to be substantially parallel with each other at a certain distance, and a space is formed between the downward protrusion B632a and the downward protrusion B632b. ..

With the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600. The space formed between the B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b overlaps in the rear view, whereby the liquid discharge hole S (for liquid discharge on the left side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 41). Hole S) is formed. Since the rear side portion B630 is not formed on the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 40), the liquid discharge hole S on the right side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 41 is the projector cover B1. It is formed by the wiring opening B411, the wiring opening B510a of the blind B500, and the wiring opening B511a.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted into the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts (sub-control device SS or the like) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B2 or the like. Wiring for this is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector device B2 and the fan B700 near the opening by inserting the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 37).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed in the internal space Q (see FIG. 29) of the projector cover B1. The position is separated from the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) opened toward the surface. As a result, it is difficult for the liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to express an image to the same extent as that of a liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface becomes large as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express an image that cannot be performed by a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projection device tends to generate heat and reach a high temperature as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projection device does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting an image. And.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 near the opening) arranged inside the cover member and
A partition member (duct cover B600) for partitioning the internal space of the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The partition member divides the space communicating from the first opening into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2) inside the cover member.
The first space and the second space communicate with each other through the second opening.
The fan is arranged in the second space and
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P1) by a partition member (duct cover B600). It is partitioned into space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate with each other through a second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1). As a result, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

On the other hand, since the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1), the cover member (projector cover B1 and Even if foreign matter is mixed inside the blind B500), the foreign matter is placed in the projector (projector device B2) due to the presence of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) (first space (space)). It is possible to make it difficult for Q) to invade the side). Further, the third space (space P2) is a partition member (duct cover B600) from the second space (space P1) (a space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists). ), So if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object invades from the third space (space P2) into the second space (space P1). It is possible to prevent it from being stored. As a result, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have invaded from the outside of the game machine, and the cause of the projector (projector device B2) failure can be eliminated. Unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a) can be suppressed to improve security.

(4-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space.
The fan is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, in the second space (space P), a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided, and the fan (fan B700 near the opening) is provided. , In the second space (space P), it is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600). In this regard, when installing the fan (fan B700 near the opening), if a structure such as a screw or a claw is separately provided, a new space is required (in the left-right direction) for the structure. On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to install a fan (fan B700 near the opening) in a space-saving manner, and air passes through the second space (space P). The space of the possible part can be secured as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of air movement between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and make the best use of the function of the fan (fan B700 near the opening). At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1) above.
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passable portion (air passage portion B710) in the fan (fan B700 near the opening). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being obstructed by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be further improved while maximizing the suction force of the fan (fan B700 near the opening).

(5-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible. ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The second space can store liquid by closing the lower part.
Further, the cover member has a wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and wiring of the blind B500) for inserting a wiring for connecting a device arranged outside the cover member and the projector. The opening B510a for wiring and the opening B511a for wiring) are formed.
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening.
The wiring opening can be inserted with a mechanism (tube included in the discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). As a result, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device and a projector (projector device) arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a and a wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring connecting with B2) is formed, and a second space is formed. (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) have a wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening B510a and a wiring opening B511a of the blind B500). Communicate through. Then, the second space (space P) can store the liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) is an opening for wiring (projector cover). It can be discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1 and the wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. As a result, the liquid (drinks poured by the player, etc.) enters the inside of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even in this case, the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from entering the device outside the second space (space P). can do. Further, the stored liquid is appropriately discharged from the wiring opening (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) to reduce the amount of liquid stored to a certain limit or less. It is possible to keep it in. As a result, the liquid is excessively stored in the second space (space P), so that the liquid invades the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). The situation can be avoided. In this way, according to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Since the internal temperature of the game machine 1 is relatively high (about 60 ° C.), the stored liquid evaporates naturally if left unattended even if it is not discharged using the above mechanism. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the discharge mechanism, and the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a wiring opening (projector cover B1 wiring opening B411, blind B500 wiring opening B510a, and wiring). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
A fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of an opening) arranged inside the cover member is provided.
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover) continuous from a part of the peripheral edge of the first opening (side j shown in FIG. 25) toward the inside of the cover member. The front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed.
The first space and the second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate with each other through the second opening.
The projector is arranged in the first space, and the projector is arranged in the first space.
The fan is arranged so as to abut the opening edge in the second space.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) are provided with cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are the second. It communicates through the opening (opening B510) of. The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, it is possible to move air between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air. The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of the above. In particular, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from a part of the peripheral edge (side j shown in FIG. 25) of the first opening (right opening B400a). An opening edge portion (front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed so as to face the opening, and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) has an opening edge portion (projector cover) in the second space (space P). It is arranged so as to abut the front engaging portion B421) of B1. As a result, if a foreign substance such as a liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) is mixed into the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even so, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (fan B700 near the opening). On the other hand, by moving the installation position of the fan (fan B700 near the opening) as close as possible to the first opening (right opening B400a), the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) can be arranged. The air movement between the two can be smoothly performed, and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In the second embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is the upper door mechanism UD (FIG. It was explained that it is housed in 1). When the front portion of the irradiation unit B projects to the front of the cabinet G in this way, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG. 44.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hooking portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screwing. On the other hand, on the inner side surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) is provided.

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the lower side surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front side projecting member G120 and hooked. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that air flows between the internal space and the external space of the game machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention. May allow air to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 1) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

Further, in order to reduce the amount of foreign matter entering the inside of the game machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is concerned. Should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening may be provided with some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to the punching B450) to prevent the intrusion of foreign matter. desirable.

Further, in the second embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). Have been described as being disposed. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is arranged only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is provided outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1). It may not be arranged. On the contrary, the fan may be arranged only outside the projector device B2 (internal space of the projector cover B1), and may not be arranged outside the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modification, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are slightly different from those in the second embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description will be omitted, but the blind B500 in this modification includes the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The inclined portion B502 is formed instead of the small chamber B507, and the small chamber B507 is not formed. Further, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned in front of the second embodiment, and the front surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b existing behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. ..

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 45, the position of the intake fan _{is surrounded by a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R 1} ), a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), and a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ). region, and illustrate the region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R _4).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 (see FIG. 36) on the right side, and when the intake fan is arranged in the area, the intake fan is a case. It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) provided on the right side surface of B22. As a result, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent to the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R _{2 ) is the area on the right side of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R 1} ), and is a portion where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R _{3 ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R 2} ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 24) of the projector cover B1. is there. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 can be smoothly flowed backward through the opening B400. ..

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ) is the front region of the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated _{by F (R 3), and is the lower region of the opening B400.} When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the inside of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

_{In FIG. 45, the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L 1} ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) are illustrated as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fan.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when the exhaust fan is arranged in the area, the exhaust fan is placed on the left side surface of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When the exhaust fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air discharged from the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 45, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. However, only the exhaust fan may be arranged.

Further, the intake fan includes _{an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R 1} ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line. , F (R ₄ ) may be arranged in only one of the regions surrounded by the dotted line, or may be arranged in two or more regions among these regions. May be good. The exhaust fan may be arranged in only one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L _2). It may be arranged in both areas.

In the second embodiment, it has been described that an air flow path as shown by a thick arrow in FIG. 29 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air in the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow completely along the path.

An air flow path that can be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an air flow path that can be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by the arrow X ₁ in FIG. 46, for example, air heated by the heat generated in the projector apparatus B2 is, there may be flow as out to the outside of the case B22 via the inlet B22a. Air flowing out of the air inlet B22A this way, as shown by the arrow X _2, it may move to the rear of the projector cover B1. Further, as shown by an arrow X _3, air exiting from the case B22 via the outlet B22E is, there may be a flow of air, such as toward the rear.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, the air that has moved backward as indicated by the arrow X ₂ or an arrow X ₃ is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. An exhaust fan may be provided in the rear region of the projector cover B1 so that the air can be smoothly discharged from the rear of the projector cover B1.

Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are arranged to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space. However, in the present invention, the partition members (duct cover). It is not essential to provide B600 and duct cover B650).

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, since the inclined portion B502 has an inclination so as to descend toward the rear, the rear portion of the inclined portion B502 has an upper end edge B505a (opening) of the inner wall portion B505. The vertical distance from the lower end of the 510 is longer than that of the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in the rear portion of such an inclined portion B502 (a region away from the lower end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from entering the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. can do.

Further, the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification has the following features.

(7-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side), and the lower end portion is the first opening. It is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an incline so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the above.
At least a part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) has the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening on the right side). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (space P on the left side) and forms a second opening (space P on the left side) above the second space (space P on the left side). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and an inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (space P on the right side). At the same time, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) includes an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination such that the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and the inclined portion B502) descends as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (the opening B400 on the right side) increases. Therefore, when a liquid (drink or the like poured by the player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). The liquid will flow through the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) so as to descend as the distance from the portion directly below the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). Here, since at least a part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the liquid is inclined. When the liquid flows down the portion (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), the third opening (right side) of the liquid is reached. Since the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the opening B510) is located above, the liquid is difficult to pass through the third opening (opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid is difficult to pass through the projector. It is unlikely that the projector device B2 will invade the side where the (projector device B2) is arranged. In this way, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquids that have invaded from the outside of the game machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the game machine. If it is discharged from the back of the projector, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be increased. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the fifth opening (right side opening G41) and the sixth opening (left side opening) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Since G41) exists above the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), the fifth opening (opening B400 on the left side) is present. When a foreign matter enters from the outside to the inside of the game machine through the right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign matter enters the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening. It is easy to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (opening B400 on the left side). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when a player injects a drink through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side), the drink passes through the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). If it penetrates into the projector (projector device B2), the projector (projector device B2) may break down. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) is provided from the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the first opening (opening B400 on the right side). And even when the liquid enters the inside of the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation occurs. Can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2).
A space is formed in which the lower part is closed by the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the wall portion (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) continuous with the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) and the inclined portion (tilted portion B502) is lowered. Since the closed space is formed, the liquid that has flowed down the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid level of the stored liquid is below the lower end of the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505), the third opening (opening B510 on the right side). It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector device B2) via the above.

(8-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image and
A cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged so as to surround the projector, and
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector, and
The main body (cabinet G) with an opening on the front and
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) capable of viewing the screen.
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left side of the two openings B400) that are open upward. Opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (a space P on the right side of the two spaces P) is formed by communicating with the first opening, while communicating with the second opening. Two spaces (the space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed.
The first space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left direction) by a third opening (opening B510 on the right side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. And
The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, while the second opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side). B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged so as to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) opened upward. ) And a second opening (opening B400 on the left side) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and a fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) opened in a direction different from the upper direction (left-right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (space P on the right side) while forming a second opening. (Opening B400 on the left side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side) communicate with each other, whereby a second space (space P on the left side) is formed. A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) and the fourth opening (opening B510 on the left side). As a result, the air that has flowed in from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (opening B400 on the right side) has the first space (space P on the right side) and the third opening (opening on the right side). After passing through the projector (projector device B2) via B510), the second opening (left side) is passed through the fourth opening (left side opening B510) and the second space (left space P). It is discharged to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the hot air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (space P on the left side) and forms a second opening (space P on the left side) above the second space (space P on the left side). It will be discharged smoothly from the opening B400) on the left side. As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such an air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above.
The projector has a fan (intake air) arranged between the first vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the first vent and the second vent. Equipped with fans for 244A and 244B)
The first vent (intake port B22A) and the third opening (opening B510 on the right side) face each other, while the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (opening on the left side) face each other. The projector is arranged so as to face B510).
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E), and a first. Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the vent (intake port B22A) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E), and the first vent (intake port B22A) is the first. Since the projector (projector device B2) is arranged so that the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510) and faces the opening 3 (opening B510 on the right side). By forcibly sucking air with a fan (intake fan 244A / 244B), the above-mentioned air flow can be smoothly created.

(8-3) The gaming machine according to (8-1) or (8-2).
On the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G), a fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side of the two openings G41) is placed above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) And a sixth opening (the opening G41 on the left side of the two openings G41) are formed.
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the above modification, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has a first opening (opening B400 on the right side) and a second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right side opening G41) and a sixth opening (left side opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left side opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After allowing this air to flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through (opening B400 on the right side), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is passed through the second cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the game machine through the opening (opening B400 on the left side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the discharge destination of the air warmed through the projector (projector device B2) is above the outside of the game machine. If it is discharged from the back of the projector, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game store, which will adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if air is discharged from the side surface of the game machine, the warmed air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, and as a result of a vicious cycle of warm air between the adjacent game machines, the projector It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be increased. Further, if the air is discharged to the front of the game machine, hot air may be blown to the player's face. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the above-described modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). It is housed in the cabinet G), and the arrangement position of the projector (projector device B2) is close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of the cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also increased. It is short, and accordingly, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) and the projector (projector device B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, in designing a flow path in which the air taken in from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) is discharged from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector device B2), the process is in progress. It is not necessary to make a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine has been described. Hereinafter, a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

FIG. 47 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing a decorative unit and a frame member of a pachinko gaming machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the pachinko gaming machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a launching device 6122 for launching a game ball, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including the board unit, a ball payout unit for giving a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. Further, an opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and a transparent protective glass 6124 is arranged in the opening 6116. Further, the base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above the plate unit 6115 and a lower plate 6126 below the plate unit 6115. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout outlets 6131A and 6131B for lending and paying out the game balls (prize balls), and when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, the game is played. The balls are discharged, and in particular, the upper plate 6125 stores the game balls for firing in the game area 6141.

The launcher 6122 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. The launching device 6122 is provided with a launching handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the pachinko game can be advanced by operating the launching handle 6132 by the player. When the launch handle 6132 is gripped by the player and is rotated clockwise, electric power is supplied to the launch motor according to the rotation angle, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 6125 is released. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 in front of the game board 6114 on which the launched game ball can roll. The game area 6141 is an area surrounded by a guide rail or the like and on which the game ball can roll. In this way, the game ball launched by the launching device 6122 is guided by the guide rail provided on the game board and moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then a plurality of obstacle nails provided in the game area 6141. It will flow down from the upper side of the game board while changing the direction of travel due to the collision with the game board.

As shown in FIG. 47, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper region on the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decorative unit 6258 is arranged so as to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decorative unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above-described embodiment is arranged in the cavity. FIG. 47 shows a state in which the inside of the decorative unit 6258 is seen through from above the decorative unit 6258.

As shown in FIG. 48, a screen device C (see FIG. 5) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1) of the screen device C is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B as in the above-described embodiment. You can do it.

The decorative unit 6258 is mounted on top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 49). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 49, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decorative unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation unit B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decorative unit 6258.

Further, the speaker 6152 and the speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-shaped openings.

In a state where the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B cover the front of the speaker 6152, respectively, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B, respectively. It can be released to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 49, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the right side of the front portion of the irradiation unit B. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the speaker hole 6151A.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) as in the second embodiment, and is generated by the projector device B2. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

The air that has come out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211, moves rearward, and is discharged to the outside from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 47 and 49. In the second embodiment, a case where air is taken in from the outside upper side of the game machine 1 and air is discharged to the outer upper side of the game machine 1 has been described. On the other hand, in this modification, air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100, and air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which the air for cooling the projector is taken in and the direction in which the air is discharged are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since the pachinko gaming machine has a shorter depth in the front-rear direction than the pachislot gaming machine, when another pachinko gaming machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko gaming machine in the same island facility. , There is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air warmed by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko gaming machine, it is considered that the island equipment of the pachinko gaming machine does not retain as much heat as the island equipment of the pachislot gaming machine.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 50, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decorative unit 6258. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 through the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the opening B400 on the right side of the two openings B400) and is generated by the projector device B2, as in the above-described modification. It travels inside the projector cover B1 while taking away the heat, and goes out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the opening B400 on the left side of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side surface of the decorative unit 6258 as well as the right side surface. As a result, the air discharged from the opening B400L to the outside of the projector cover B1 is discharged from the opening 6300L to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100.

Such an air flow is indicated by an arrow in FIG. In this modified example, it is considered that the warmed air may be taken into the adjacent game machine because the air discharge direction is set to the side of the game machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the air discharge direction is set to the side of the gaming machine, for example, the width of the decorative unit 6258 in the left-right direction is further shortened to make one pachinko machine. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the pachinko gaming machine are configured to be separated to some extent.

Hereinafter, another modification will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine.

In the above-described modification, the irradiation unit B has been described as being attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. The speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, the same air flow path as in the above-mentioned example can be formed.

Although FIG. 51 shows how the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed behind the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be arranged by using the space while forming a space on the back side of the game board.

For example, an opening portion is provided in the center of the game board, and the irradiation unit is arranged in the base door, the game board, or other rear members of the pachinko gaming machine so that the front portion of the irradiation unit penetrates through the opening portion. May be good. In that case, a game board of a conventional general pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine having an opening in the center of the game board so that a liquid crystal display device or the like behind the game board can be visually recognized through the opening). Can be diverted as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, arranging the screen mechanism, and further arranging the irradiation unit on the rear member of the game board or the like, the irradiation unit and the screen mechanism are mounted while keeping the shape of the game board as it is. It will be possible to make it a new game machine. When such a configuration is adopted, since a part of the front part of the irradiation unit protrudes forward from the game board, a larger space behind the pachinko game machine can be secured. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island equipment when the pachinko game machine with the irradiation unit is installed in the entire island equipment in the amusement park where the island equipment is narrow. Further, a small-sized liquid crystal display device that arranges a decorative member such as a logo according to the model or performs auxiliary decoration in front of the irradiation unit that can be visually recognized by the player (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11). By arranging an illumination board or the like, the irradiation unit can be blindfolded so as not to be seen by the player, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

The screen device C may be installed in a state of being attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state of being separated from the irradiation unit B.

In the modification described above, the air discharge direction is the rear or side of the game machine, but the air may be discharged from above the game machine as in the second embodiment. When the air discharge direction is upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form an opening in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged, and the path through which air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Further, in order to make the air flow smooth, an intake fan and / or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 49) may be arranged between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 50) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 50) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if intake and exhaust are sufficiently performed by the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B, it is not necessary to dispose the fan outside the irradiation unit B.

In the above-described modification, the projector cover B1 described with reference to FIG. 45 is shown as being adopted, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and an opening for taking in air for cooling the projector. Further, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately adopted. These openings can be formed at arbitrary locations such as the front and rear, above and below, and sides of the projector cover, and the position of forming the openings is appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector and the like. be able to. Further, the projector may be arranged inside the game machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the game machine is directly sent to the projector (via the projector cover). It can also be configured to hit (without doing).

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment and the second embodiment also applies to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a state in which the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 52.

The display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 52 is interchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) in the cabinet G, similarly to the display unit A described in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. It has a back plate 9014 erected on the part. By connecting the right side plate 9012, the left side plate 9013, and the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011 by screwing, a box-shaped housing in which the front side and the upper surface side are open is formed.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015.

The projector 9020 has the same configuration as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 12) described in the first embodiment (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210), and projects light including an image. It is possible to do. The projector 9020 is installed so that the lens is on the lower side, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

Below the projector installation member 9015, a mirror installation portion 9016 for installing the mirror 9030 is formed. The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016a and 9016b that are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

The mirror 9030 has the same configuration as the optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 7) described in the first embodiment, and can reflect the light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016a and 9016b of the mirror installation portion 9016. As a result, the mirror 9030 is in an inclined posture so that the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). In FIG. 55, the irradiation range of light is indicated by diagonal lines. The relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 55 is the relative positional relationship shown in FIG. 53 (the state in which the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 are installed in the unit housing 9010). It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 55 is an exploded view of the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030 while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the state shown in FIG. 53.

A cabinet-side screen 9040 is fitted to the front portion of the bottom plate 9011 to stand upright. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear-view mirror 9030 is incident on the cabinet-side screen 9040 from the rear (rear-view side).

The cabinet-side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is incident on a uniformly flat back-side incident surface 9040a to which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident. It has a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040a. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is formed, for example, of a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040. Will be done. The moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In the present specification, moving images and moving images are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side.

In FIG. 56, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded. The irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet side screen 9040. Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) (the region shown by shading in FIG. 56) and passes through the peripheral region of the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 56, the peripheral region of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown by a diagonal line.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through the area shown by the diagonal line in FIG. 56 travels in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. A part of the light traveling forward of the cabinet side screen 9040 will be incident on the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD as described below (FIG. 61). (B) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the first embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 57 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 4) according to the first embodiment. Is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 58, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. Further, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 3) at a central portion (a position where it overlaps with the cabinet side screen 9040 in the front view), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. It is provided. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the image becomes visible to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a curved shape of a flat screen (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and the reel screen mechanism described in the first embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 10) in the side view, the shape in the top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface.

Like the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are transparent screens that are displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 includes an incident surface 9050a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9050b on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9050a. Has. The left screen 9060 on the door side includes an incident surface 9060a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 9060b on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9060a. Has.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side, respectively. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050, and the entrance surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. There is.

FIG. 57 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged in the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet side screen 9040 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 57, the side forming the left end of the door side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the right end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 52) are close to each other. The side 9050c of the door side right screen 9050 is located slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet side screen 9040. Further, the side forming the right end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 60) and the side forming the left end of the cabinet side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. 52) are close to each other (or substantially in contact with each other). ), And the side 9060c of the door side screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet side screen 9040.

The sides 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, the sides 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and the sides 9040c and sides 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively located on substantially the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. It will be located.

Further, a side forming the lower end of the door side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 60), a side forming the lower end of the door side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 60), and a lower end of the cabinet side screen 9040. (Side 9040e shown in FIG. 52) has substantially the same position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on substantially the same plane). Further, the vertical lengths of the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (sides 9050c and side 9060c) are longer than the vertical lengths of the cabinet side screen 9040 (sides 9040c and side 9040d). There is. As a result, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at substantially the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are located at substantially the same height as the cabinet-side screen 9040. Has a taller structure.

<Display of images on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector and the screen on the cabinet side. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side right screen. FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing how the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen is incident on the door side left screen. 62 and 63 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet side screen, the door side right screen, and the door side left screen.

In FIG. 61 (a), the region shown by the diagonal line in FIG. 56 (the peripheral region of the cabinet side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020) is divided into three regions (region I, region II, for convenience. And, it is shown separately in region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region II is a region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040. Region III is a region located above the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 61A, the cabinet side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded as in FIG. 56.

As described above, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet side screen 9040. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region I in FIG. 61 (a) is the door side right screen 9050. It is incident on the incident surface 9050a. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door side right screen 9050.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the region II in FIG. 61 (a) is the door side left screen. It is incident on the incident surface 9060a of 9060. As a result, the image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to the game) are displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, respectively. In the present embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image. Images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the data.

62 and 63 show such image data. The shaded area (area A) in FIG. 62 (a) contains information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040. The shaded area (area B) in FIG. 62 (a) includes information indicating an image displayed on the door side right screen 9050. The shaded area (area C) in FIG. 62 (a) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door side left screen 9060. The remaining region (region D) in FIG. 62A contains information having a pixel value of 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of the pixels formed on the liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. When the pixel value is 0, it indicates that the light transmittance is the minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the region where the pixel value is 0 is black.

FIG. 62B shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 62B includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the fireworks image 9101 in the area B, and information indicating the character image 9102 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the character image 9102 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet side screen 9040 are The positions in the front-back direction are almost the same. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 are substantially equal in distance from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction, so that the focus is not significantly deviated. It has become.

FIG. 63A shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63A includes information indicating the effect image 9100 in the area A, information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B, and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. .. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060. ..

FIG. 63 (b) shows an example of still another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 63B includes information indicating the decorative image 9110 in the area B and information indicating the decorative image 9111 in the area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure includes information having a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door side left screen 9060.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, in a game machine in which an image is projected from such a projector onto a screen, there is a problem that the production expression becomes poor due to the flatness of the screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of performing various production expressions.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) Screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060)
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen is provided.
The screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
As the screen, a first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and a second screen arranged sideways, above or below the first screen in front view (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060). Is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while the light projected by the projector is the first. At least a part of the light that does not enter the first screen is arranged so as to enter the second screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) is arranged on the side of the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) in the front view. There is. Then, while a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), the first screen (cabinet) of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident. At least a part of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can be incident on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), respectively, and these images are viewed by the player. In that case, they are displayed in a positional relationship so as to be lined up side by side. Thereby, the player can visually see the player through the images displayed on such two screens (the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform a variety of directing expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1) above.
A main body (cabinet G) accommodating the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and having an opening on the front surface, and
An opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the first screen visible. With
The second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening / closing door.
It is characterized by that.

Generally, the opening / closing door of a game machine is decorated (modeled) according to the model, but such decoration requires a large amount of cost. Then, every time a new model is developed (for each project), if the opening / closing door is shaped and the decoration is changed, the cost will increase accordingly.

In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is provided with a second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), and the second screen. By displaying an image (an image similar to the decoration on the outside) on (the right screen 9050 on the door side and the left screen 9060 on the door side), the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not decorated with the decoration peculiar to the model. However, the same visual effect as when the decoration is applied can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a simple opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) without decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, it is not necessary to change the decoration of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) on a large scale, and image data according to the model (image data similar to the decoration peculiar to the model). ) Should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060) are adapted to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change. Cost can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region I (the region located on the right side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61A is incident on the door side right screen 9050. Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through the region II (the region located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61A is incident on the door side left screen 9060 on the door side. It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 are arranged respectively. That is, it has been described that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) in the front view.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is above or below the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view. It may be arranged. For example, while providing the door side upper screen on the upper side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 is located on the upper side of the region III (cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. 61 (a). The light that has passed through the region) may be configured to enter the upper screen on the door side. Further, while providing the door side lower screen under the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet side screen (for example, FIG. 61 (a)). ) And the region facing the cabinet side screen 9040) may be configured to enter the lower door side screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens, a door-side right screen, a door-side left screen, a door-side upper screen, and a door-side lower screen, may be provided, or any of the four screens may be provided. One, two, or three screens may be provided. A screen arranged on the side of such a cabinet-side screen (door-side right screen or door-side left screen) and a screen arranged above or below the cabinet-side screen (door-side upper screen or door-side lower). The screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, and door side lower screen) in the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) is provided in an area close to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) in front view. It may be provided in a region separated from the first screen (cabinet side screen) to some extent. For example, the structure of the arrangement position of the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE (see FIG. An upper screen, a left screen on the door side, a right screen on the door side, and the like may be provided. As a result, if the light projected from the projector is incident on the back side of these screens and the image is displayed on the front side, the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms can be designed unique to the model. The model information can be displayed, and such design and information can be easily changed by appropriately using the image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left side panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right side panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When a second screen (upper screen on the door side, left screen on the door side, right screen on the door side, etc.) is provided at these arrangement positions (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD). , It is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 56). For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the irradiation range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that the cabinet side screen is not provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate, and the light that travels forward without incident on the cabinet side screen is emitted from the top panel mechanism HA, left side. To reach the arrangement position of the panel mechanism HD, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE, etc. (the area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that the light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD). It is possible to design. As described above, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in the front view is irradiated by the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) may be irradiated in a wider range over the outer peripheral portion.

In the third embodiment, as an example of the image data, the area A, the area B, and the area C shown in FIG. 62A are separate images (in the example of FIG. 62B, the effect image 9100 and the fireworks image). Image data including information indicating 9101 and character image 9102) has been described. The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, information indicating one image (for example, an effect image 9100) so as to straddle the area A, the area B, and the area C. Image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, and each screen. The one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is formed by integrating a part of the images displayed in. As described above, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screens arranged in the peripheral area thereof (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door side lower screen, etc.). May be displayed individually, or one video expression may be performed as a whole by combining the images displayed on the screens.

Further, in the third embodiment, the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in a state of being exposed on the front side of the game machine 1 (door side right screen 9050 and door side left). No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (door side right screen and door side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's field of view, and it is considered that there is no hindrance for the player to visually recognize the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, the rigidity of the game machine can be ensured and the second screen can be prevented from being damaged. When the transparent panel is provided, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel having irregularities can be adopted. This makes it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the second screen (the right screen on the door side and the left screen on the door side), and gives an appearance similar to that when the opening / closing door itself is three-dimensionally decorated. Can be created.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been described that the shapes of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved shapes of a flat screen (the shape in the top view is an arc shape). However, the shape of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, and door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a screen having an arbitrary shape can be appropriately adopted. For example, the second screen may be a flat-shaped screen such as the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen having irregularities, or a screen having a rounded shape. , The screen may have an angular shape.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fourth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the third embodiment also applies to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 64 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet.

In FIG. 64, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown by using an alternate long and short dash line. Similar to the third embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55).

In the third embodiment, it has been described that a part of the light traveling forward in this way is incident on the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 53) from the rear (rear side). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the cabinet side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 66 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decorative unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Hereinafter, each unit will be described.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate and the screen sheet viewed from the rear, while the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member are viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the upper pressing member and the upper frame as viewed from below. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 67 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 68 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from diagonally rearward. In FIG. 69, the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 show a state in which they are assembled, and the lower frame UD100 shows a state in which they exist independently. There is. In FIG. 70, the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown in an assembled state, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown to exist independently. FIG. 71 shows how the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 each exist independently. FIG. 72 shows a state in which the translucent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the screen unit 1040 includes a light transmitting plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

The translucent plate 1045 is mainly made of a resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The light transmitting plate 1045 has a flat surface portion 1045a located at the center, a curved portion 1045b formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1045a toward the rear, and the curved portion 1045b from the rear end to the rear. The side surface portion 1045c formed continuously is provided. The flat surface portion 1045a and the side surface portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other. The curved portion 1045b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved, as in the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) in the third embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is a screen (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) according to the third embodiment. ), It has an incident surface on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1046 is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected. Shows color.

The screen sheet 1046 includes a flat surface portion 1046a located at the center and a curved portion 1046b formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 1046a toward the rear. The flat surface portion 1046a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape in which the flat plate is curved. The flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat surface portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the light transmitting plate 1045. Specifically, the front surface of the flat surface portion 1045a of the translucent plate 1045 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045. And the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (still image or still image) related to the game is projected on the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1046. Video) is displayed. Since the translucent plate 1045 is formed transparently and there is no structure in front of the translucent plate 1045 that blocks the player's view, when an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is displayed by the player. It becomes visible from.

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat surface portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the positions in the depth direction are different between the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, images are displayed on both the flat surface portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying the image, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. Further, in the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b are formed by forming (molding in an open space), respectively, and thereby, for example, when the curved portion is formed by vacuum processing or the like. Compared with, the deformation of the image can be suppressed.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state where the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. It is supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and is slightly projected upward at the horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and the front end of the bottom plate UD100a. The wall portion UD100b, the right end portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end portion of the bottom plate UD100a, and the left side portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end portion of the bottom plate UD100a are provided. The translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a in a state where the translucent plate 1045 is in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side portion UD100c, and the left side portion UD100d. In this state, the lower part of the front surface of the light transmitting plate 1045 comes into contact with the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the transparent plate 1045 can be brought into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 70, the lower holding member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and the front side surface (holding surface UD101a) thereof has a planar shape and a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. It has a formed part. With the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 mounted on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower holding member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, so that the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is formed by the lower frame UD100. It is sandwiched between the wall portion UD100b and the translucent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower holding member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 69) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially quadrangular outer shape in the front view, and the bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction and the bottom surface UD110a slightly downward from the front portion. It is provided with a protruding wall portion UD110b. In the state where the upper frame UD110 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, the upper end edge of the translucent plate 1045 abuts on the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 in the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, and the front surface of the translucent plate 1045. The upper portion is positioned so as to abut the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the upper front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with the light-transmitting plate 1045 over a certain range.

The front side surface of the upper pressing member UD102 (holding surface UD102a, see FIG. 70) has a portion formed in a planar shape and a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. The upper holding member UD102 has a screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110 by passing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 71) in a state where the upper surface thereof is in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing it into the UD110c. As a result, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b and the translucent plate 1045 of the upper frame UD110 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the lower portion of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a portion formed in a curved shape corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. As a result, the screen sheet 1046 can be brought into close contact with the light transmitting plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the light transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the occurrence of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being distorted.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the translucent plate 1045 are the flat portions of the screen sheet 1046. While the 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are covered, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), there is at least a gap corresponding to the length in the front-rear direction of the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045. For the sake of clarity, such gaps are shaded in FIG. 72.

An image is displayed on the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the portion of the translucent plate 1045 that is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed. No image is displayed on (the side surface portion 1045c, that is, the shaded portion in FIG. 72). This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position separated from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) in the front direction, and realizes a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decorative unit 1050>
FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet as viewed from the rear.

In addition, in FIG. 73, the first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 show the state in which they are assembled, and the upper frame UD110 and the screen sheet 1056 are shown. , And the screen sheet 1057 show how they exist independently.

As shown in FIG. 73, the decoration unit 1050 is adjacent to the first structure 1051 arranged in the center, the second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, and the second structure 1052. It includes a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged on the back side of these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. The screen sheet 1056 is arranged on the back side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is arranged on the back surface side of the third structure 1053 in a state of being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, and have a shape in which they can be fitted at the adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage portion UD110d together with the fourth structure 1054.

The first structure 1051 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape). The second structure 1052 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and has a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a flame). The third structure 1053 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like) and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and like the screen sheet 1046, the incident light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the back side. It has a surface and a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and are milky white and semi-white when not projected. It is transparent or has a gray color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057. , Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a structure in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front surface side thereof. The half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transmissive film sheet to the surface of a substrate or by depositing a metal film on a metal film by a conventionally known method, and a part of the incident light is emitted. While reflecting, it has the property of transmitting part of it.

By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when light is not projected from the projector 9020, an object existing around the third structure 1053 is reflected, for example, black plating is performed. It will look like a part with a plating. As an object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 65 can be provided. The structure having a shape imitating a chain may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a shape imitating a chain) is flowing and moving is displayed on the screen sheet 1057. This makes it possible to produce an effect in which the stationary object is moving when no light is projected from the projector 9020. As described above, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive effect by both the modeled object and the image related to the modeled object.

Further, the screen sheet 1056 has a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a shape convex on the incident surface side are arranged. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and in combination with the modeled object arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive effect can be produced. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the character shape of "GOD", the image corresponding to the character "GOD" is displayed on the screen sheet 1056 to obtain "GOD". It is possible to create an appearance in which the characters "" are shining. Further, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted from the vicinity of the optical axis of the projection lens) is incident on the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is arranged at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing the prism layer having a high light-collecting effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from being lowered. As with the screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member as viewed from the front. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of a cross section of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member as viewed from the front.

Note that FIG. 74 shows a state in which the light guide member 1062 is removed from the state in which the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are assembled. .. In FIG. 75, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are slightly displaced from the assembled state of the lower frame UD100 in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062. Is enlarged and shown. In FIG. 76, the light transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are cut in a horizontal plane in an assembled state, and the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 is enlarged. Is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66, the indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. There is.

As shown in FIG. 74, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED substrate 1061 and a light guide member 1062.

The LED substrate 1061 is arranged substantially parallel to the side surface portion 1045c on each of the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c of the lower frame UD100 and the slightly right side of the left side portion UD100d (slightly inside the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045). .. A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED substrate 1061 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged in the vicinity of the right side portion UD100c is installed so as to emit light in the right direction, and the LED 1061a of the LED substrate 1061 arranged in the vicinity of the left side portion UD100d is in the left direction. It is installed so as to emit light. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged so that a part thereof overlaps with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 in the side view, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. The LED substrate 1061 is arranged slightly separated from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and a plurality of openings 1062a that open inward are formed in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in each of the upper part and the lower part, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED board 1061 by a screw inserted through the screw hole 1061b formed in the LED board 1061. Will be done. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw inserted through the screw hole 1062c formed in the upper portion thereof and the screw hole UD100f formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d that open in the forward direction in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 74 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. 75 communicate with each other inside the light guide member 1062. Further, a plurality of openings UD100g penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 in the vertical direction. As a result, in a state where the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 76, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062, enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, changes the traveling direction from sideways to forward, and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , It is discharged forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). The arrow in FIG. 76 indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 76, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045. Further, the rear end of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) and the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c are substantially the same in the front-rear direction, and the length of the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) in the front-rear direction is the side surface. It is shorter than the length of the portion 1045c in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, the cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially in contact with) the rear end of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) are It is positioned on almost the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045 so as to have the above-mentioned positional relationship with the peripheral members. Then, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface portion 1045c of the light transmitting plate 1045. As described with reference to FIG. 72, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and the image is not displayed on the portion (the shaded portion in FIG. 72), so that the image stands out. It is possible to give such an impression to the player. In the present embodiment, the portion where the image is displayed and the image are displayed due to the light emitted from the LED 1061a (along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045) from the portion where such an image is not displayed. It is possible to emphasize the boundary with the part that is not displayed and give the player the impression that the image is raised more prominently.

<Installation of upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the cabinet, the hook portion, and the front protruding member as viewed from the side. FIG. 80 is a right side view of a cross section of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hooking portion, and the front protruding member. FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from below. FIG. 82 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the hook portion UD120 and the front side projecting member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. In FIG. 78, the hook portion UD120 is shown to be attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side projecting member G120 is shown to be removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 79 shows how the hooking portion UD120 and the front protruding member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hooking portion UD120, and the front side projecting member G120 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 80, the hook portion UD120 and the front surface side projecting member G120 are shown by diagonal lines. FIG. 81 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 82 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled and are viewed from different directions, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. doing. FIG. 83 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by the hooking portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the hooking portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b that is open downward is formed on the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed on the surface of the hooking portion UD120 orthogonal to the main surface UD120a, and the hooking portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. By fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front surface protruding member G120 is formed by bending the main surface G120a horizontally arranged, the front end central portion G120b formed by bending the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a upward, and the right side of the front end of the main surface G120a upward. The front end of the main surface G120a is upward between the formed front end right side portion G120c, the front end left side portion G120d formed by bending the front end left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end central portion G120b and the front end right portion G120c. The left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and backward between the right mounting portion G120e formed by bending rearward and the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side portion G120d. And a rear side portion G120g formed by bending the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a downward.

The front end right side portion G120c and the front end left side portion G120d are formed behind the front end central portion G120b, and the heights of the front end central portion G120b, the front end right portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d are substantially the same. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are formed behind the front end right portion G120c and the front end left portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are high. , The heights thereof are higher than the heights of the front end central portion G120b, the front end right portion G120c, and the front end left portion G120d. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f have horizontally arranged surfaces.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front side projecting member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, by fixing the front protruding member G120 to the cabinet G, the front portion of the main surface UD120a (front end central portion G120b, front end right portion G120c, front end left portion G120d, right). The mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f) project forward from the cabinet G.

On the other hand, on the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G, an inner surface side projecting member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2) is provided so as to project inward. The notch UD120b is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. As a result, the hooking portion UD120 is locked to the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 81, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing the lower side of the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 69). A plurality of downward projecting portions UD100i are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward projecting portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and extends from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h toward the front. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 69) is formed at the rear end of the downward projecting portion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 82, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction above the lower door mechanism DD. As shown in FIG. 83, in a state where the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is a downward projecting portion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is in close proximity (approximately contact) with the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While mounting the lower side surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front surface side projecting member G120, the notch UD120b of the hooking portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear end edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the downward protruding portion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. Is done. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G.

In the present embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. When a hinge is provided, the range in which an image can be displayed is limited on the side portion of the game machine. However, in the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the hinge is not present, so that the image is displayed on the side portion. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear end of the curved portion 1045b on both the left and right sides of the transmissive plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 in the left-right direction. Becomes possible. This makes it possible to produce a powerful effect on a large screen.

Further, three screens, a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057, are provided, and as in the third embodiment, information indicating an image displayed on each screen is combined into one image data. If included (see FIGS. 62 and 63), the image can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 80), but foreign matter enters through the gap. Even in the case where the foreign matter is present, the presence of the front-side protruding member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from invading the inside of the cabinet G.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment also applies to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 84 is a perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed, as viewed from the front. FIG. 85 is a perspective view of how light is projected from the projector device as viewed from the side.

As shown in FIG. 84, the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G. Similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2, and a mirror. It includes a projector cover B1 for accommodating the mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 88). .. Similar to the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7).

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is in a posture in which the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so as to be lower in the rear than in the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. Placed above. Since the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32) so that the rear side is lower than the front side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). In FIG. 85, the irradiation range of light is shown by diagonal lines. Similar to the fourth embodiment, all the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). The images are incident from the rear side (rear side) with respect to each of the screen sheets, and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjustment of the traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being exteriorized by the case B22 (see FIG. 12).

Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c. FIG. 16 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c. However, in the present embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (the screw head is on the upper back side). To be inserted). The upper pedestal B220 may be attached not to the projector cover B1 but to another member fixed inside the cabinet G.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing from below. Be done. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the case B22 having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape (see FIG. 22) is adopted. The case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), which is an internal component of the projector device B2, an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like. (See FIG. 12) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 16, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected by three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). .. As a result, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in the plane (in the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are located on the upper side in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the degree of inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 in the three-dimensional space. The details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be appropriately adjusted, and the projector device B2 can be arranged at an appropriate position. .. Further, the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 can be appropriately adjusted, and the posture of the case B22 (lens unit B21 or the like which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted. It can be appropriate. As described above, the projector device B2 is configured so that the position and the posture in the cabinet G can be changed to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light.

As shown in FIG. 86, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Further, although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 87, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

An angle adjusting hole B111 (see FIG. 9) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 from the upper side (back side). As described in the first embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. As a result, the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to do.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 88 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 90 is a rear view of the gaming machine in a state where the closing lid is removed from the back wall. FIG. 91 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 94 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine in the state where the closing lid is attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 88, in a state where the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned so as to face the closing lid G100. Behind the upper pedestal B220, a space is formed in which no other member exists.

Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G. Spaces in which other members do not exist are formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. In FIG. 88, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is shown by diagonal lines.

The irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by fastening screws. As shown in FIG. 87, screw holes B100a to B100a to d for inserting screws are formed in the rear portion of the projector cover B1. In the state where the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3, the surface B110a on which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b on which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c on which the screw holes B100c and d are formed are formed. , Each come into contact with the inner surface (front surface) of the back wall G3. These surfaces B110a to C are formed so as to be separated from each other, whereby the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are open. ing.

As shown in FIG. 89, an operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening in which the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 90, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and viewed from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are viewed through the operation window G10. , R3 (particularly nut 2213, see FIG. 17) and the head of the mounting screw T (not shown) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 are visible through the operating window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2. Can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 91, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower part on the back side, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 is seen through the operation window G10. The head of the screw (not shown) inserted through the adjusting hole B111 can also be visually recognized. As a result, the screw can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by turning the screw as appropriate.

Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 92 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 93 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally forward.

As shown in FIG. 92, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G at the peripheral edge of the opening G10a. The peripheral edge G10b formed so as to have a rectangular surface at a recessed position with respect to the peripheral surface), the four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, and the outer edge and the back wall of the peripheral edge G10b. It is provided with a connecting portion G10d for connecting to the outer surface of the G3. As shown in FIG. 93, the peripheral portion G10b is not visible from the front, but the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3, so that it can be confirmed from the front. A state in which a screw hole G10c is formed on the side is shown.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-shaped member, and has a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A peripheral portion G100c and a peripheral peripheral portion G100d formed so as to face forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a are provided. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and from the opening G10a of the operation window G10. Is also getting bigger. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operating window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operating window G10 and the closing The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 are overlapped with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw through which the screw hole G10c is inserted from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss portion G100c. Be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Then, the screw for fastening the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), so that the security for the inside of the cabinet G is secured. Can be secured.

In adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 are screwed with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD open. The screw may be released by operating from the front side and turning the screw as appropriate. Thereby, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, mounting inserted into the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11), the positions and orientations of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closing lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d (the length protruding forward of the peripheral edge portion G100d with respect to the front surface G100b) and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b. Is equal to the length up to (height of the boss portion G100c). Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts on the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 is also used for operation. It comes into contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 94 shows how the closing lid G100 is arranged in such a state. In FIG. 94, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the shaded portion indicates the back wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded portion (front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the shaded portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width (length in the front-rear direction) of the space S is the above. It corresponds to "the forward protruding length of the peripheral portion G100d" and "the height of the boss portion G100c".

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (front end of the peripheral edge G100d) and the back wall G3 (operation window G10) can be stably attached. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the peripheral portion G10b) and the peripheral portion G10b), and to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed so as to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length of the connecting portion G10d in the front-rear direction, and the peripheral edge portion of the closing lid G100. The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the length of the peripheral portion G100d protruding forward with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially coincides with the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (operation window). It is slightly shorter than the length of the connecting portion G10d of G10 in the front-rear direction). The length of the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 in the front-rear direction and the length of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction are constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100 forms substantially the same plane as the outer surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outer surface of the back wall G3). The presence of the closing lid G100 is difficult to recognize from the outside.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described.

Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a game machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the game machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of making adjustments to a projector with the projector mounted inside.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057) and
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Yes,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) has a projector (internal component of the projector device B2). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) Etc.))) from the outside of the housing unit (cabinet G) with the adjustment unit (connecting parts R1, R2, R3, upper side of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) while being mounted inside the housing unit (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-2) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057) and
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the screen (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) and
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector and has an opening on the front surface,
It is provided with an opening / closing door (upper door mechanism UD) which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area for making the image displayed on the screen visible.
In addition to the front surface, the main body is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid) capable of closing the opening. G100) is attached,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21 or the like)) has a projector (internal component of the projector device B2). (Lens unit B21, etc.)) To adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). An opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided at a position where the mounting portion, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is provided. ) Is attached with a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21)) Etc.)) is attached to the inside of the main body (cabinet G), and the adjustment part (connecting part R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, upper side) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). By operating the mounting portion of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal component of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects. The direction of travel of the light can be adjusted.

(10-3) The gaming machine according to (10-2) above.
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to release the screw from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). As a result, it is possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while ensuring security for the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closing lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing, or it may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner side surface or outer surface of the back wall G3) of the main body portion (cabinet G) is provided as a guide member. It may be formed in a rail shape on the inside or outside of the back wall G3), and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. When the closing member (closing lid G100) slides on the guide member in the left-right direction (or front-back direction), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed and the opening (operation window) is closed. If the opening G10a) of the G10 is configured to be switched between the open state and the open state, the adjustment unit can be operated from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, as in the fifth embodiment. In addition, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such an effect, in the present invention, the configuration of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not essential, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is not attached to the main body (cabinet G). The opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in (cabinet G) may be configured to be always open.

In the fifth embodiment, it has been described that the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided and closed on any wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, upper surface wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G). It can be configured to attach a member (closing lid G100). For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4 may be provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, the adjusting portion (for example, the connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3). The attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the upper surface wall G4. When the upper surface wall G4 is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and a closing member (closing lid G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 1) are provided with the operation window G10, respectively. It may be adopted as the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the above, or separately, a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the operation window G10 is adopted while not forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. It may be that.

Further, openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are opened in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three wall surfaces of the back wall G3, the side wall G2, and the upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). And a closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached. For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or an attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) are provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G so that the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided and the closing lid G10 is attached, while the adjustment for adjusting the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3. The opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided on the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. It may be that.

Further, a plurality of openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are provided on one wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, or upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and each opening is provided. A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, an adjustment unit for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, a connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, or an attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1). Etc.) can be operated from the outside by providing a first opening near the center of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and attaching a first closing lid capable of closing the first opening, while the mirror mechanism B3 A second opening is provided above the first opening so that the adjusting portion for adjusting the position (posture) (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11) can be operated from the outside. A second closing lid capable of closing the second opening may be attached as well as being provided. When a plurality of openings are provided, closing members capable of individually closing each opening may be attached as many as the number of openings, or only one closing member capable of closing a plurality of openings at the same time may be attached.

When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), in order to facilitate the operation for adjustment, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is opened from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in front. When viewed, the members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 in the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the mounting screws T inserted into the square holes 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw or the like inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) (FIG. 90). reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, all of these plurality of members can be visually recognized when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). (For example, it is desirable that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged so as to be visible). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) has a diameter larger than the distance between these members (distance between the farthest members). It is good to say. This facilitates adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted can be visually recognized through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). Being is not essential. For example, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjusting hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11)). Even if you cannot see the screw inserted in the window), if you can see the member when you look into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) by changing the angle (see FIG. 91), If a space in which no other member exists is formed between the member and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (screw, nut, etc. for adjustment) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1, and the display unit A (irradiation) is provided in the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD). It has been described that the control board (main control board MS, sub control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) while the unit B) is housed (see FIG. 5). ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be divided into an upper space and a lower space, and the space in which the projector (irradiation unit B) is housed and the control board (main control board MS or sub). It is not necessary to distinguish it from the space in which the control device SS or the like is accommodated. For example, the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) may be arranged in the rear space (see FIG. 88) of the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. As a result, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively utilized, and the phenomenon that the heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub control device SS) is trapped in the lower space can be alleviated. .. The opening / closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) or may be composed of one door.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the sixth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to fifth embodiments also applies to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Overview of the inside of Cabinet G>
FIG. 95 is a front view for explaining a schematic configuration inside the cabinet. FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 95. FIG. 97 is a perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit is attached to the back wall of the cabinet.

In the above-described embodiment, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1, and a display unit A (irradiation unit B) is provided in the upper space (a space behind the upper door mechanism UD). ) Is accommodated, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is accommodated in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) (FIGS. 4 and 5). reference). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the intermediate support plate G1 is not provided, and instead, the middle board 4000 is provided.

The middle board 4000 is arranged inside the cabinet G slightly below the substantially center in the vertical direction. A reel unit RU is placed on the upper surface of the middle board 4000. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged below the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 4), whereas in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged above the middle board 4000. There is.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided as the doors that close the opening in the cabinet G, but in the present embodiment, the cabinet is provided by one door (front door). The entire opening in G is configured to be closed. Although not shown, a main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is provided at substantially the center of the front door in the vertical direction. The formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) are substantially the same in the front view, and as described above, the reels RL, RC, and RR are routed through the main display window DD4. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of the reels and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, and RR.

As shown in FIG. 97, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. As a result, the irradiation unit B is arranged above the reel unit RU. 95 and 96 show a state in which the irradiation unit B is removed from the inside of the cabinet G, and the irradiation unit B is not shown. Further, in FIG. 97, only the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3 are shown, and the illustration of the configurations other than the irradiation unit B and the back wall G3 is omitted. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100 (see FIG. 89). The irradiation unit B will be arranged in the space in front of the closing lid G100.

Although not shown, the main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G, and the sub control device SS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G. (See FIG. 11) is attached. As a result, the main control board MS is positioned on the right side of the irradiation unit B, and the sub control device SS is positioned on the left side of the irradiation unit B.

Similar to the first embodiment (see FIG. 6), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2, and a mirror. It includes a projector cover B1 for accommodating the mechanism B3. The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the first embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 10) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 100). ..

Similar to the first embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 7). In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is in a posture in which the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so as to be lower in the rear than in the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. Placed above.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32) so that the rear side is lower than the front side. As a result, as in the fifth embodiment, the light projected upward from the projector device B2 is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). The light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward is incident on the screen (not shown) from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the screen. Will be.

As described above, the traveling path of the light projected from the projector device B2 is basically the same as that of the fifth embodiment. The screen may be provided inside the cabinet G like the cabinet side screen 9040 (see FIG. 52), or the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 65 to 68). As such, it may be provided on the front door.

<Adjustment of the traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the side. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as viewed from the rear.

As described in the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being exteriorized by the case B22 (see FIG. 12). Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right side portion and the left side portion of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 13). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 16) inserted into the square hole 2201c. Similar to the fifth embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (so that the screw head is on the upper back side).

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 12), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screwing from below. Be done. As the configuration of the case B22, the case B22 (see FIG. 22) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted as in the fifth embodiment. The case B22 houses a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 12), an LED substrate, a DMD substrate, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like, which are internal components of the projector device B2.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. Since the details of the method of adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 16, the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected by three connecting portions R1, R2, R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 12 and 14). .. As a result, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. Similar to the fifth embodiment, by appropriately changing the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, in the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination. The details of the method of adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG. 17, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 are connected by three connecting portions R4, R5 and R6. Although not shown, the reflector holding portion B11 is formed with three holes similar to the connecting hole 2200A, and the mirror holder B31 is formed with three protruding structures similar to the connecting screw portion 2210. The connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 correspond to these three holes and the three protruding structures, and have the same configuration as the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3.

As a result, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6. In this regard, in the above-described embodiment, the screw inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 (see FIG. 9) formed in the reflector holding portion B11 is loosened or tightened to be held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11. This has been described as changing the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the mirror holder B31 (optical mirror B32) with respect to the reflector holding portion B11 is formed by appropriately changing the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 in each of the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space of.

As described above, the projector device B2 is configured so that the position and the posture in the cabinet G can be changed to adjust the emission position, the traveling direction, and the irradiation range of the irradiation light. Further, the mirror mechanism B3 changes the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11, and reflects the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (progress of the irradiation light after reflection). It is configured so that the direction) can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 98, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is open. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Further, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

A projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back side of the projector cover B1, but the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape with an opening in the center, and the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, and attachments. The screw T faces the opening. That is, the rear exposure states of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3, and the mounting screws T are not hindered by the projector cover plate B1000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are open.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 100 is a vertical sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closing lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 102 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the back wall. FIG. 103 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 102. FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and the back wall of the cabinet.

As shown in FIG. 100, in a state where the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned so as to face the closing lid G100. Behind the upper pedestal B220, a space is formed in which no other member exists.

Further, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G. Spaces in which other members do not exist are formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220.

The projector cover B1 has the same appearance configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, and is attached to the back wall G3 via the projector cover plate B1000 arranged on the back side. Specifically, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back wall G3 by screwing, and the projector cover B1 is connected to the projector cover plate B1000 by screwing. As a result, the entire irradiation unit B is fixed to the back wall G3.

As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape having an opening in the central portion. As a result, the irradiation unit B has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened as a whole. In FIG. 100, the projector cover plate B1000 and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G are not shown, and the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is shown by diagonal lines. Further, FIG. 101 shows a state in which the projector cover plate B1000 is removed from the irradiation unit B.

As shown in FIG. 101, an operation window G10 is formed on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening in which the inside can be visually recognized from the outside of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 can be closed by the closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and viewed from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are viewed through the operation window G10. , R3 (particularly nut 2213, see FIG. 17) and the head of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 are visible through the operating window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the projector device B2 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213. Further, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2. Can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower part on the back side, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror are seen through the operation window G10. The connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 (particularly nuts 2213, see FIG. 17) with the holder B31 are visible through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the posture of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the nut 2213.

Hereinafter, the structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 105 shows a state in which the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are viewed from diagonally forward.

As shown in FIG. 104, the operation window G10 has an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G at the peripheral edge of the opening G10a. The peripheral edge G10b formed so as to have a rectangular surface at a recessed position with respect to the peripheral surface), the four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, and the outer edge and the back wall of the peripheral edge G10b. It is provided with a connecting portion G10d for connecting to the outer surface of the G3. As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral portion G10b cannot be seen from the front, but the screw hole G10c penetrates the back wall G3 and can be confirmed from the front. A state in which a screw hole G10c is formed on the side is shown.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. Have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral edge portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-shaped member, and has a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A peripheral portion G100c and a peripheral peripheral portion G100d formed so as to face forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a are provided. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral portion G10b), and from the opening G10a of the operation window G10. Is also getting bigger. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 so as to fill the recess). It has become.

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operating window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operating window G10 and the closing The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 are overlapped with each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw through which the screw hole G10c is inserted from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss portion G100c. Be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Then, the screw for fastening the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3 is screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), so that the security for the inside of the cabinet G is secured. Can be secured.

In adjusting the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, with the front door open, the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 are operated from the front side as appropriate. By turning it, the screw fastening may be released. Thereby, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be made to appear. In this state, the mounting is inserted into the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a. The positions and orientations of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by operating the connecting portions R4, R5, and R6 of the screw T, the reflector holding portion B11, and the mirror holder B31.

<Locking the closing lid G100 to the back wall G3>
FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the closing lid as viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the closing lid as viewed from the front. FIG. 108 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back wall as viewed from the front. FIG. 109 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the closing lid is attached to the back wall. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view showing a closing lid and a back wall in the state shown in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIG. 106, the closing lid G100 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical, and has a first engaging protrusion G101 and a first opening G102 formed in the vicinity of the left end in the rear view, and a first opening. The first recess G103 formed on the right side of the opening G102, the second engaging protrusion G111 and the second opening G112 formed near the right end in the rear view, and the second recess formed on the left side of the second opening G112. It is equipped with G113.

The first opening G102 and the second opening G112 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape as through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first engaging protrusion G101 is formed so as to protrude forward in the forming portion of the first opening G102. The second engaging projecting portion G111 is formed so as to project forward in the forming portion of the second opening G112. The first recess G103 and the second recess G113 each have a concave shape with respect to the back surface G100a of the closing lid G100, and are formed in a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 107, the first engaging protrusion G101 is formed so as to have a U-shape when viewed from above, and extends in the vertical direction, so that the first engaging protruding portion G101 is in the vertical direction. The length is substantially the same as the length of the long side of the first opening G102. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the first engaging protrusion G101 has the inner side surface G107 (the left side surface in the front view) and the closing lid G100 closer to the center of the closing lid G100 as the surfaces corresponding to the two straight portions. It has an outer surface G108 (the surface on the right side in front view) far from the center. The rear end of the inner surface G107 is along the long side G102a of the first opening G102 (the long side on the center side of the closing lid G100 among the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the first opening G102), and the outer surface. The rear end portion of G108 is positioned near the center of the first opening G102.

On the outer side surface G108, an upper locking piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b are formed slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 117). The upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b are formed as protrusions protruding from the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (right side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G108c is also formed at the rear end of the outer side surface G108. The upper locking piece G108a has an engaging surface G108d on the back surface side, and the lower locking piece G108b has an engaging surface G108e on the back surface side (see FIG. 106).

Similarly, the second engaging protrusion G111 is formed so as to have a U-shape when viewed from above, and extends in the vertical direction. It substantially matches the length of the long side of the second opening G112. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. As a result, the second engaging protrusion G111 has the inner side surface G117 (the right side surface in the front view) and the closing lid G100 closer to the center of the closing lid G100 as the surfaces corresponding to the two straight portions. It has an outer surface G118 (the surface on the left side in front view) far from the center. The rear end of the inner surface G117 is along the long side G112a of the second opening G112 (the long side on the center side of the closing lid G100 among the two long sides forming the peripheral edge of the second opening G112), and the outer surface. The rear end of the G118 is located near the center of the second opening G112.

Although the detailed structure of the second engaging protrusion G111 is not clear from FIG. 107, it has a symmetrical structure with the first engaging protrusion G101. That is, the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b are formed on the outer surface G118 slightly forward of the center in the front-rear direction. The upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b are formed as protrusions protruding from the side opposite to the center of the closing lid G100 (left side in FIG. 107). A protrusion G118c is also formed at the rear end of the outer side surface G118. The upper locking piece G118a has an engaging surface G118d on the back surface side, and the lower locking piece G118b has an engaging surface G118e on the back surface side.

Further, in FIG. 107, a first convex portion G109 is formed on the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101, and a second convex portion G119 is formed on the right side of the second engaging protruding portion G111. The first convex portion G109 and the second convex portion G119 correspond to the first concave portion G103 and the second concave portion G113 (see FIG. 106), respectively, and correspond to the concave portions of the first concave portion G103 and the second concave portion G113, respectively. It has a shape that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b.

Further, an upper protruding portion G121 is formed slightly below the upper edge portion G100e forming the upper edge (upper side) of the rectangular peripheral edge portion G100d, substantially parallel to the upper edge portion G100e. A lower protruding portion G122 is formed slightly above the lower edge portion G100f forming the lower edge (lower side) of the peripheral edge portion G100d, substantially parallel to the lower edge portion G100f.

Here, as shown in FIG. 104, the shape of the opening G10a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G is not strictly a rectangle, and the peripheral portion G10b is a part thereof (the left side portion in the rear view). It has a notched shape. As shown in FIG. 108, the right edge portion G10f is formed by the notch portion G10e. The right edge portion G10f is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the right edge of the peripheral edge in front view. The inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 is a surface on the front side of the back wall G3. For clarity, the right edge G10f is shaded in FIG. 108.

The notch portion G10e is a portion with which the first engaging protrusion G101 of the closing lid G100 engages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the engaging surface G108d and the lower locking of the upper locking piece G108a in the first engaging protrusion G101. The engaging surface G108e (see FIG. 106) of the piece G108b comes into contact with the inner surface G3a (the portion along the right edge portion G10f) of the back wall G3, and the outer surface G108 (engaging surface G108d and the engaging surface G108d) of the first engaging protrusion G101. The portion continuous with the engaging surface G108e) comes into contact with the right edge portion G10f of the back wall G3 (see FIG. 118).

Similarly, the second engaging protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100 is engaged in the vicinity of the left edge portion G10g. The left edge portion G10g is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and constitutes the left edge of the peripheral edge in front view. Specifically, although not shown, in a state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the engaging surface G118d and the lower locking piece G118b of the upper locking piece G118a in the second engaging protrusion G111. A portion where the engaging surface G118e abuts on the inner surface G3a (a portion along the left edge portion G10g) of the back wall G3 and is continuous with the outer surface G118 (engaging surface G118d and the engaging surface G118e) of the second engaging protrusion G111. ) Contact the left edge portion G10g of the back wall G3.

As described above, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108b of the first engaging protrusion G101, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b of the second engaging protrusion G111 The closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3.

FIG. 110 shows a state in which the closing lid G100 is fixed to the back wall G3 and cut on a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) of the closing lid G100 passing through the first recess G103. As shown in FIG. 110, the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is in contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10.

Here, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the lower protrusion G122 (the forward protrusion length of the lower protrusion G122 with respect to the front surface G100b) is from the front surface G100b to the peripheral edge. It is longer than the length to the front end of the G100d (the length of the peripheral portion G100d protruding forward with respect to the front surface G100b). As a result, the front end of the lower protrusion G122 is positioned between the peripheral edge G10b of the back wall G3 and the inner side surface G3a.

Further, the length from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100 to the front end of the upper protruding portion G121 (the length of the upper protruding portion G121 protruding forward when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) is from the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100. It is longer than the length to the front end of the lower protruding portion G122 (the forward protruding length of the lower protruding portion G122 with respect to the front surface G100b). As a result, the front end of the upper protruding portion G121 is positioned in front of the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

The lower surface of the lower protruding portion G122 and the lower edge portion G10h of the opening G10a are in close proximity (substantially abutting), and the upper surface of the upper protruding portion G121 and the upper edge portion G10i of the opening G10a are in close proximity (substantially abutting). )doing. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the lower protrusion G122 and the lower edge G10h of the opening G10a and the gap between the upper surface of the upper protrusion G121 and the upper edge G10i of the opening G10a are the peripheral edges G100d of the closing lid G100. It is smaller than the thickness in the vertical direction in.

As a result, when a slight gap is formed between the front end of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10, the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the back wall G3 Even if an attempt is made to intrude a wire-shaped instrument through a gap with the connecting portion G10d, the upper protruding portion G121 or the lower protruding portion G122 becomes an obstacle so that the invasion can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out through the gap.

The peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3 are basically in contact with each other, but between the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the connecting portion G10d of the back wall G3. May form a slight gap (for example, smaller than the vertical thickness of the peripheral portion G100d of the closing lid G100). As used herein, the term "contact" is a concept including a case of substantially contact and a case of close contact.

<Attachment of irradiation unit B and closing lid G100 to back wall G3>
The irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the back wall G3 through the following steps (i) to (v).

(I) Temporarily attach (temporarily fix) the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 to the back wall G3.
(Ii) The irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.
(Iii) The irradiation unit B is fixed to the back wall G3 by fastening with the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.
(Iv) The closing lid G100 is temporarily attached (temporarily fixed) to the back wall G3 by locking using the first engaging protrusion G101 and the second engaging protruding portion G111.
(V) The closing lid G100 is fixed to the back wall G3 by fastening with the lid mounting screw 5100.

Hereinafter, the steps (i) to (v) will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 to 115.

FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit hooking screw. FIG. 112 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the irradiation unit hooking screw is temporarily fixed to the back wall. FIG. 113 is a front view of the projector cover plate. FIG. 114 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover plate as viewed from slightly above. FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the projector cover plate as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 108, the back wall G3 is formed with two screw holes 5010 for hooking the irradiation unit and two screw holes 5020 for fastening the irradiation unit. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes 5010 are provided in the vicinity of the two upper corners of the opening G10a and above the two upper screw holes G10c, respectively. The two irradiation unit fastening screw holes 5020 are provided in the vicinity of the two lower corners of the opening G10a and below the two lower screw holes G10c, respectively.

The irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is screwed into the irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010. As shown in FIG. 111, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 includes a screw portion 5001 and a head portion 5002. The threaded portion 5001 has a cylindrical shape extending in a predetermined direction. The head portion 5002 has a shape that bulges around the screw portion 5001 when viewed from the front with respect to the extending direction (axial direction) of the screw portion 5001. The head 5002 includes a head body 5003 and a washer 5004, and both the head body 5003 and the washer 5004 have a diameter larger than that of the screw portion 5001, and the diameter of the washer 5004 is the head. It is larger than the diameter of the main body 5003.

FIG. 112 shows the back wall G3 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 at the time when the step (i) is performed. In this state, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 is loosely attached as compared with the state in which the irradiation unit B and the closing lid G100 are attached to the back wall G3 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed). The screwing amount (degree of screwing) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 on the back wall G3 is small. As shown in FIG. 112, a part of the screw portion 5001 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the entire head portion 5002 project forward from the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

In the step (ii) described above, the back surface side of the irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 that protrudes in this way. As described above, the projector cover plate B1000 is attached to the back side of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 98).

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 has a shape in which a rectangular opening B1001 is provided in a plate-shaped member having a rectangular front view. The projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two lid fastening screw holes B1002 on the right side portion and the left side portion of the opening B1001.

Further, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two screw holes B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit and two screw holes B1020 for fastening the cabinet. The two irradiation unit hooking screw holes B1010 are provided in the vicinity of the two upper corners of the opening B1001 and above the two upper lid fastening screw holes B1002, respectively. The two cabinet fastening screw holes B1020 are provided in the vicinity of the two lower corners of the opening B1001 and below the two lower lid fastening screw holes B1002, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 114, the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is formed as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is composed of an upper portion B1010a located on the upper side and a lower portion B1010b formed continuously with the upper portion B1010a, and has a gourd shape as a whole. .. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 114, the boundary between the upper portion B1010a and the lower portion B1010b (a straight line connecting the recessed portions) is shown by a virtual line. The diameter of the lower portion B1010b is larger than the diameter of the upper portion B1010a.

A peripheral wall portion B1011 is formed around the screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit at a position recessed with respect to the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, the vicinity of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 has a shape in which an elliptical recess is formed with respect to the main surface B1005 and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. ing. The opening corresponds to the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010, and the portion of the recess in which the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1011. For the sake of clarity, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is shown in diagonal lines in FIG. 114.

Further, around the lid fastening screw hole B1002, a peripheral wall portion B1003 is formed at a position recessed with respect to the main surface B1005 of the projector cover plate B1000. In other words, the vicinity of the lid fastening screw hole B1002 has a shape in which an elliptical concave portion is formed with respect to the main surface B1005 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the concave portion. There is. The opening corresponds to the screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid, and the portion of the recess where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion B1003. For the sake of clarity, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is shaded in FIG. 114.

In the step (ii) above, the irradiation unit is overlapped with the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 of the projector cover plate B1000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 (see FIG. 112) protruding from the back wall G3. Bring B closer to the back wall G3. The diameter of the upper portion B1010a of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 is smaller than the diameter of the head 5002 (washer portion 5004) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, but the diameter of the lower portion B1010b of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010. The diameter is larger than the diameter of the head 5002 (washer portion 5004).

Specifically, in the upper portion B1010a, the lengths in the left-right direction and the up-down direction (the lengths of the longest portions respectively) are smaller than the diameter of the seat portion 5004, whereas in the lower portion B1010b, the lengths in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. The length in the direction (the length of each of the longest portions) is larger than the diameter of the seat portion 5004. As a result, the head portion 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 cannot be inserted into the upper portion B1010a, but can be inserted into the lower portion B1010b.

When the irradiation unit B is moved slightly downward with the head 5002 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 inserted in the lower portion B1010b, the screw portion 5001 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 It comes into contact with the upper edge portion B1010c of (upper portion B1010a). The upper edge portion B1010c is a part of the peripheral edge of the upper portion B1010a (the portion connecting the back surface side peripheral edge portion B1012 and the peripheral wall portion B1011 of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and corresponds to the upper end of the upper portion B1010a. .. For clarity, FIG. 115 shows the back peripheral edge B1012 in diagonal lines. In this way, the projector cover plate B1000 can be hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.

As shown in FIG. 113, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with two upper screw holes B1030 for fastening the unit and two lower screw holes B1031 for fastening the unit. As shown in FIG. 115, the projector cover B1 is formed with two plate fastening upper boss portions B1040 and two plate fastening lower boss portions B1041.

The formation position of the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening corresponds to the formation position of the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening, and the screw through which the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening is inserted is inserted into the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening. Screwed into the formed hole. Further, the formation position of the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening corresponds to the formation position of the lower screw hole B1031 for unit fastening, and the screw through which the lower screw hole B1031 for unit fastening is inserted is for plate fastening. It is screwed into the hole formed in the lower boss portion B1041. As a result, the projector cover plate B1000 is fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

In the projector cover B1, the formed portion of the plate fastening upper boss portion B1040 and the formed portion of the plate fastening lower boss portion B1041 are connected by an inclined portion B1042. The inclined portion B1042 is formed so as to have an inclined posture so that the front portion is higher than the rear portion. A pedestal mounting portion B1043, which is a mounting location for the upper pedestal B220, is formed on the back surface side of the inclined portion B1042. As a result, the projector device B2 is also arranged in an inclined posture so that the front side is higher than the rear side.

Since the inclined portion B1042 is inclined, the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening is positioned in front of the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening. On the other hand, the projector cover plate B1000 is formed with a screw hole projecting portion B1035 having a structure projecting from the main surface B1005. The upper screw hole B1030 for fastening the unit is formed at the tip of the screw hole protrusion B1035. As a result, the unit fastening upper screw hole B1030 is positioned in front of the unit fastening lower screw hole B1031.

In this way, the upper screw hole B1030 for unit fastening and the lower side for unit fastening are located at the formation positions of the upper boss portion B1040 for plate fastening and the lower boss portion B1041 for plate fastening (boss portions whose positions in the front-rear direction are different from each other). It is possible to correspond the formation position of the screw hole B1031. The projector cover plate B1000 is arranged in the vertical direction (so as to be substantially parallel to the back wall G3 and the closing lid G100).

As described above, in the step (ii) above, the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. After that, in the above step (iii), the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is fixed to the back wall G3 by screwing. Specifically, as described above, at the time when the step (ii) is performed, the screwing amount (degree of screwing) of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 on the back wall G3 is small, and the screw is said to be. By increasing the degree of fitting, screwing is performed firmly.

Further, when the projector cover plate B1000 is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 (see FIG. 108) on the back wall G3 and the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 of the projector cover plate B1000 (see FIG. 108). (See FIG. 113) is superimposed. In this state, the screw through which the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is inserted (irradiation unit fastening screw) is screwed into the irradiation unit fastening screw hole 5020 to reinforce the fixed state between the back wall G3 and the projector cover plate B1000. be able to.

The diameter of the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 is smaller than the diameter of the head (not shown) of the irradiation unit fastening screw. Therefore, the irradiation unit fastening screw cannot be inserted into the cabinet fastening screw hole B1020 from the back side of the projector cover plate B1000, but only from the front side of the projector cover plate B1000. The irradiation unit fastening screw has the same configuration as the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000.

As described above, when the irradiation unit B is attached to the back wall G3 by the above steps (i) to (iii), subsequently, in the above step (iv), the closing lid G100 is engaged with the back wall G3. Stop it.

Specifically, the side surfaces of the first recess G103 and the second recess G113 (see FIG. 106) are grasped by the left and right thumbs, respectively, and the outer surface G108 and the second engaging protrusion G111 of the first engaging protrusion G101. The closing lid G100 is gripped by grasping the outer side surface G118 (see FIG. 107) with the left and right index fingers or the middle finger, respectively. Then, the closing lid G100 is brought close to the back wall G3 from the back side, and the front portions of the outer surface G108 and the outer surface G118 (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and The closing lid G100 is arranged so that the lower locking piece G118b (front of the lower locking piece G118b) is along the right edge portion G10f and the left edge portion G10g (see FIG. 108) of the back wall G3, respectively.

In this state, by pushing the closing lid G100 forward, the closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3 as shown in FIG. 109. At that time, if necessary, a force may be applied in the central direction of the closing lid G100 while putting a finger on the protrusion G108c formed on the outer surface G108 and the protrusion G118c formed on the outer surface G118. As a result, the outer surface G108 and the outer surface G118 are slightly deformed toward the center of the closing lid G100, and the locking can be performed smoothly.

When the closing lid G100 is locked to the back wall G3, the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 (see FIG. 107), the screw hole G10c of the back wall G3 (see FIG. 108), and the lid of the projector cover plate B1000. It overlaps with the fastening screw hole B1002 (see FIG. 113). In the step (v) above, in this state, the screw through which the lid fastening screw hole B1002 and the screw hole G10c are inserted (the lid mounting screw 5100 shown in FIG. 120) is screwed into the boss portion G100c. As a result, the closing lid G100 and the irradiation unit B can be integrally fixed to the back wall G3. Unlike the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid mounting screw 5100 does not have a washer (the head is composed of only the head body).

<Arrangement around the back wall G3>
FIG. 116 is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first cavity. FIG. 117 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the first engaging protrusion. FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging protrusion is housed in the first cavity. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the first engaging protrusion is housed in the first cavity. FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view of the periphery of the irradiation unit hooking screw and the lid mounting screw in a state where the closing lid and the irradiation unit are attached to the back wall. FIG. 121 is a cross-sectional view showing a closing lid, a back wall, and a projector cover plate. FIG. 122 is a front view showing the periphery of the opening on the back wall and the projector cover plate in an exploded manner. FIG. 123 is a partially enlarged front view of the inside of the cabinet in the state shown in FIG. 97.

As shown in FIG. 115, a first cavity B1050 and a second cavity B1060 are formed on the back surface side of the projector cover plate B1000. The first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and are formed as recesses recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (the vertical surface including the back peripheral peripheral portion B1012 and the like). That is, the recess has a shape in which one surface (the surface on the back surface side) of the rectangular parallelepiped is opened, and the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 are surrounded by the remaining five surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped. It is a part.

As shown in FIG. 116, in the first cavity B1050, the five surfaces (wall portions) are composed of a front wall portion B1050a, an upper wall portion B1050b, a lower wall portion B1050c, and left and right side wall portions B1050d and B1050e. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 116, the trailing edge B1050f of these wall portions B1050a to e are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the closing lid G100, a lateral projecting portion G130 projecting forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed on the side (left side in the front view) of the first engaging projecting portion G101. .. The lateral protrusion G130 has a plate-like shape, and the forward protrusion length of the side protrusion G130 with reference to the front surface G100b is larger than the protrusion length of the first engagement protrusion G101. It's getting shorter. The side protrusion G130 has a side surface G130a facing the inner side surface G107 of the first engagement protrusion G101, and a contact surface G130b formed continuously with the side surface G130a and substantially parallel to the front surface G100b. There is. For clarity, the contact surface G130b is shaded in FIG. 117.

Further, below the first engaging projecting portion G101, a downward projecting portion G131 projecting forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed. The downward protrusion G131 is configured such that the protrusion length on the left side portion is longer than the protrusion length on the right side portion. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 117, the upper surface G131a of the downward projecting portion G131 is shown by diagonal lines, and the front end surface G131b on the left side portion is shown in black. Above the first engaging protrusion G101, an upward protrusion G132 that protrudes forward with respect to the front surface G100b is formed. Similar to the downward protrusion G131, the upward protrusion G132 is configured such that the protrusion length on the left side portion is longer than the protrusion length on the right side portion.

In FIG. 118, with the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) attached to the back wall G3, the first engaging protrusion G101 was cut along a horizontal plane passing through the upper locking piece G108a. It shows the situation. In FIG. 119, the upper locking piece G108a and the lower locking piece G108a of the first engaging protrusion G101 are attached to the back wall G3 with the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) attached. It shows a state of cutting on a vertical surface (plane in the front-rear direction) passing through G108b.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 118, the cut surfaces of the first engaging protrusion G101 and the lateral protrusion G130 are shown by diagonal lines, and the front wall portion B1050a and the left and right side wall portions B1050d constituting the first cavity B1050 are shown. The cut surface of B1050e is shaded, and the cut surface of the back wall G3 is shown in black. In FIG. 119, the upper end of the first engaging protrusion G101 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the front wall portion B1050a, the upper wall portion B1050b, and the lower wall portion B1050c constituting the first cavity B1050 are shaded. The lower right edge G10j of the back wall G3 is shown in black. The lower right edge portion G10j is a part of the peripheral edge of the opening G10a (the portion connecting the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 and the peripheral edge portion G10b), and is continuous from the lower end of the right edge portion G10f (see FIG. 108). It is formed as a horizontal plane.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the first engaging protrusion G101 is housed in the first cavity B1050 of the projector cover plate B1000, and has a front wall portion B1050a, an upper wall portion B1050b, a lower wall portion B1050c, and left and right. It is surrounded by the side wall portions B1050d and B1050e.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118, the front side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the front wall portion B1050a. Further, the trailing end edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050d abuts (substantially abuts) with the contact surface 130b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (side protrusion G130), and the side wall portion The B1050d and the lateral protrusion G130 are arranged so as to be continuous. As a result, the left side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050d and the side protrusion G130. Further, the trailing end edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the side wall portion B1050e is in contact (substantially in contact) with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. As a result, the right side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the side wall portion B1050e and the back wall G3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the rear end edge B1050f (see FIG. 116) of the lower wall portion B1050c abuts on the front end surface G131b (see FIG. 117) of the closing lid G100 (downward protruding portion G131) on the left side portion. (Approximately in contact), and in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 (substantially in contact) on the right side portion. The upper surface of the lower wall portion B1050c and the lower right edge portion G10j are arranged so as to be continuous and are located on substantially the same plane. As a result, the lower side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered with the lower wall portion B1050c, the downward protrusion G131, and the back wall G3. Similarly, although not shown, the upper side of the first engaging protrusion G101 is covered by the upper wall portion B1050b, the upper protrusion G132, and the back wall G3.

As described above, the front, side, upper, and lower parts of the first engaging protrusion G101 are all surrounded by the wall portion. Similarly, the front, side, upper, and lower parts of the second engaging protrusion G111 are all surrounded by the wall portion. As a result, even if an attempt is made to invade a wire-shaped instrument through a gap such as the first opening G102 or the second opening G112 (see FIG. 106), these wall portions become an obstacle to prevent the invasion. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed through the gap.

In FIG. 120, in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the lid attaching screw 5100 pass through the center in the left-right direction. It shows the state of cutting on the vertical surface (plane in the front-back direction). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 120, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000, the lid mounting screw 5100, and the cut surface of the back wall G3 are shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the projector cover plate B1000 is shown by shading. The cut surface of the closing lid G100 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 120, in front of the peripheral wall portion B1011 of the projector cover plate B1000, there is a washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is in contact with the surface on the back surface side of the washer portion 5004. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. As a result, the irradiation unit B can be firmly attached to the back wall G3.

In the process of assembling the game machine 1, when the irradiation unit B is hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 (see the step (ii) above), the peripheral wall portion B1011 is arranged on the back side of the washer portion 5004. become. As a result, similarly to the above, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1011 is locked by the washer portion 5004, and the hooked state can be stabilized. As a result, the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 can be smoothly fastened.

Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which there is a gap between the upper ends of the screw portion 5001 and the washer portion 5004 of the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000 and the projector cover plate B1000, but in reality, the screw portion 5001 One or both of the upper end of the screw portion and the upper end of the washer portion 5004 may be in contact with the projector cover plate B1000. That is, the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) may be hooked on the irradiation unit hooking screw 5000. In the drawings, for convenience, the threaded portion may be shown in a thinner state than it actually is.

Further, in front of the peripheral wall portion B1003 of the projector cover plate B1000, the head of the lid mounting screw 5100 is present. That is, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is in contact with the surface on the back surface side of the head. Therefore, even if the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) tries to move forward, the peripheral wall portion B1003 is locked by the screw head, and the movement of the irradiation unit B is restricted. As a result, the mounting strength of the irradiation unit B on the back wall G3 can be increased.

In FIG. 121, a surface (vertical facing in the front-rear direction) of the closing lid G100 passing through the first recess G103 in a state where the closing lid G100 and the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) are attached to the back wall G3. It shows how it was cut with. FIG. 110 shows the state before the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached, but FIG. 121 shows the state after the projector cover plate B1000 (irradiation unit B) is attached. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 121, the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3 is shown by diagonal lines.

As described with reference to FIG. 110, the front end of the upper protruding portion G121 in the closing lid G100 is positioned in front of the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. As shown in FIG. 121, the back side of the upper portion of the opening B1001 (see FIG. 113) in the projector cover plate B1000 is substantially in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. The upper surface of the upper protruding portion G121 projecting forward from the inner side surface G3a is substantially in contact with the upper edge portion B1001a of the opening B1001 of the projector cover plate B1000. As a result, the structure is such that it is more difficult for the wire-shaped instrument to enter, and it is possible to effectively prevent the goto action.

As shown in FIG. 115, on the back side of the projector cover plate B1000, a substrate mounting portion B1070 is provided in the lower portion of the opening B1001. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 12) is fixed to the board mounting portion B1070. As shown in FIG. 121, the back side of the lower portion of the opening B1001 in the projector cover plate B1000 is substantially in contact with the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3. Therefore, the projector control board B23 is arranged in the space formed between the back side of the projector cover plate B1000 and the inner side surface G3a of the back wall G3.

As described with reference to FIG. 104, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the back wall G3 has a shape in which a part thereof (the left side portion in the rear view) is cut out. As a result, the opening G10a has a left-right asymmetrical shape. At this point, it is assumed that the shaded portion shown in FIG. 122 is formed as the opening G10a so that the opening G10a has a symmetrical shape. In this case, it is necessary to form the two screw holes G10c on the right side on the right side. Then, as a result, the irradiation unit B is arranged on the right side. According to the present embodiment, the space on the right side of the irradiation unit B can be effectively utilized by not setting the shaded portion shown in FIG. 122 as the opening G10a.

As shown in FIG. 123, in front view, the distance (R1) between the right end of the irradiation unit B (projector cover plate B1000) and the right end of the back wall G3 (inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G) is the irradiation unit B. It is larger than the distance (R2) between the left end of (projector cover plate B1000) and the left end of the back wall G3 (the inner surface of the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G).

Here, as described above, the main control board MS (see FIG. 4) is attached to the inner surface of the right side wall G2R of the cabinet G. A space for opening and sealing the caulking needs to exist in the vicinity of the installation location of the main control board MS. However, according to the present embodiment, the space can be secured.

Corresponding to the left-right asymmetry of the opening G10a of the back wall G3, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the right edge portion G10f of the opening G10a and the two screw holes G10c on the right side is the left edge of the opening G10a. It is shorter than the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the portion G10g and the two screw holes G10c on the left side. Correspondingly, in a state where the closing lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the first engaging protrusion G101 and the two screw holes G10c on the right side is determined. It is shorter than the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the second engaging protrusion G111 and the two screw holes G10c on the left side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 122, in the projector cover plate B1000, the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a constituting the first cavity B1050 (see FIG. 115) is located on the left side of the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001. However, the distance between the left edge of the front wall portion B1050a and the right edge portion B1001b of the opening B1001 is small (the positions in the left-right direction are substantially the same). On the other hand, the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a constituting the second cavity B1060 (see FIG. 115) is located considerably to the right of the left edge portion B1001c of the opening B1001 and is about the right half of the second cavity B1060. Is formed so as to project inside the opening B1001. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 122, the front wall portion B1050a and the front wall portion B1060a are shown by diagonal lines.

That is, the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 have different positional relationships with respect to the opening B1001, and the distance between the right edge of the front wall portion B1060a and the left edge portion B1001c of the opening B1001 is the front wall portion. It is larger than the distance between the left edge of B1050a and the right edge of opening B1001 B1001b. Correspondingly, the distance (distance in the left-right direction) between the first cavity B1050 (front wall portion B1050a) and the two screw holes B1002 for fastening the lid on the right side is the second cavity B1060 (front wall portion B1060a). ) And the two screw holes B1002 for fastening the lid on the left side (distance in the left-right direction).

As a result, the formation positions of the first cavity B1050 and the second cavity B1060 of the projector cover plate B1000 are made to correspond to the formation positions of the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111 of the closing lid G100. The formation position of the lid fastening screw hole B1002 of the projector cover plate B1000 can correspond to the formation position of the screw hole G10c of the back wall G3.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and duct cover B2100>
FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the cover portion. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as viewed from the left side. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the duct cover as viewed from the right side. FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 129 is a cross-sectional view of the cover portion. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the cover portion as viewed from the right side.

As shown in FIG. 124, a duct cover B2100 is attached to the left side portion of the projector cover B1. The duct cover B2100 has a configuration adopted in place of the blind B500 (see FIG. 30). A space P (see FIG. 32) is formed inside the structure (cover portion B2000) composed of the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100 so that air can pass through the space P. It has become. Hereinafter, the space P in the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 125, the projector cover B1 has a left side wall portion B2201 constituting the left end of the projector cover B1. As shown in FIG. 126, the left inner wall surface B2201a, which is the inner surface (right side surface) of the left side wall portion B2201, generally has side P, side Q, side R, side S, side T, side U, and side V. And, it is formed in a graphic shape surrounded by the side W.

Further, the projector cover B1 has a right side wall portion B2202 formed substantially parallel to the left side wall portion B2201. The shape of the right side wall portion B2202 is such that the trapezoidal shape shown in the shaded portion of FIG. 125 is cut out from the shape of the left side wall portion B2201. As a result, the surface (left surface) of the right side wall portion B2202 facing the left inner wall surface B2201a is divided into the upper right inner wall surface B2202a and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b.

Further, the projector cover B1 has a lower side wall surface B2203 connecting the lower end (side S) of the left inner wall surface B2201a and the lower end of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b, and the lower side wall surface 2203 facing upward from the rear end (side T). A rear side wall surface B2204 formed continuously (along the side), an inclined wall surface B2205 formed diagonally forward and upward from the upper end of the rear side wall surface B2204 (along the side U), and an inclined wall surface. The front side wall surface B2206 formed continuously upward (along the side V) from the front end of the B2205, and the upper side continuously formed forward (along the side W) from the upper end of the front side wall surface B2206. It has a wall surface B2207.

The upper portion of the rear side wall surface B2204 and the right end of the inclined wall surface B2205 are continuous with the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The front side wall surface B2206 extends to the right side of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. On the right side of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a, an opening wall surface B2208 substantially parallel to the upper upper wall surface B2207 is formed. The rear end of the opening wall surface B2208 coincides with the lower end of the front side wall surface B2206, and the left end of the opening wall surface B2208 coincides with the upper end of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The right end of the front side wall surface B2206 and the right end of the opening wall surface B2208 are connected by the opening wall surface B2209.

The duct cover B2100 has the outer shape of the projector cover B1 as described above (left inner wall surface B2201a, upper right inner wall surface B2202a, lower right inner wall surface B2202b, lower side wall surface B2203, side wall surface B2204, inclined wall surface B2205, and , The outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape formed by the front side wall surface B2206). As a result, the duct cover B2100 has a shape that can be fitted to the front surface side of the projector cover B1 as a whole.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, the duct cover B2100 has a left side wall portion B2101 constituting the left end of the duct cover B2100. The shape of the left side wall portion B2101 corresponds to the shape of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1, and the rear end edge of the left side wall portion B2101 is the front end edge (side P, side Q, and side) of the left side wall portion B2201. It can be fitted to R). The outer edge of the left side wall portion B2101 includes a side X substantially parallel to the side P, a side Y substantially parallel to the side Q, and a side Z substantially parallel to the side R.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an upper right wall portion B2102 and a lower right wall portion B2103 formed substantially parallel to the left wall portion B2101. The upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 are portions that are continuous with the right side wall portion B2202 of the projector cover B1 in a state where the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1, respectively. The outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102 includes a side x substantially parallel to the side X, a side y substantially parallel to the side Y, and a side z substantially parallel to the side Z. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 126 shows the upper right wall portion B2102 and the lower right wall portion B2103 with diagonal lines.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has a front lower side wall portion B2104 formed continuously from the front end (side Z) in the lower portion of the left side wall portion B2101 toward the right side, and a front end (side) in the upper portion of the left side wall portion B2101. It has a front upper side wall portion B2205 formed continuously from X) toward the right side. The front lower side wall portion B2104 and the front upper side wall portion B2105 are each formed in a rectangular shape. A lower right wall portion B2103 is continuously formed in the lower right portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104. A lower portion (a portion including the side z) of the upper right wall portion B2102 is continuously formed in the upper right portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104.

The left-right length of the front upper side wall portion B2105 is shorter than the left-right length of the front lower side wall portion B2104. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2106 formed continuously from the right end to the right side of the front upper side wall portion B2105 coincides with the side x forming the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102. The upper end of the front lower side wall portion B2104 and the lower ends of the front upper side wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106 are connected by the inclined wall portion B2107. The right end of the inclined wall portion B2107 coincides with the side y constituting the outer edge of the upper right wall portion B2102.

Further, the duct cover B2100 has an opening B2108 on the upper side of the front upper side wall portion B2105 and the inclined wall portion B2106. The opening B2108 has a shape in which two opposing surfaces (front surface and back surface) of the rectangular parallelepiped are opened. The lower wall surface B2108a constituting the lower wall surface of the rectangular parallelepiped has a shape as if the shape shown in the shaded portion of FIG. 127 is cut out. Further, the left wall surface B2108b constituting the side wall of the rectangular parallelepiped is continuous with the inner side surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left side wall portion B2101 (it is a part of the left inner wall surface B2101a). Note that FIG. 127 shows a state in which the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane.

Screw holes B2110 are formed on the right side and the left side of the opening B2108 in the duct cover B2100, respectively. Further, a screw hole B2111 is formed in the lower portion of the front lower side wall portion B2104. On the other hand, boss portions B2210 are formed on the right side and the left side of the front side wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1, respectively. Further, a boss portion B2211 is formed on the lower side wall surface B2203 so that a part thereof is raised.

The formation positions of the screw holes B2110 and the screw holes B2111 in the duct cover B2100 correspond to the formation positions of the boss portion B2210 and the boss portion B2211 in the projector cover B1, respectively. The duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1 by screwing the screw through which the screw hole B2110 and the screw hole B2111 are inserted into the holes formed in the boss portion B2210 and the boss portion B2211.

When the duct cover B2100 is attached to the projector cover B1, the rear end edge of the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100 fits into the front end edge of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the inner side surface (left inner wall surface B2201a) of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the inner surface surface (left inner wall surface B2101a) of the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

FIG. 128 shows a state in which the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 is cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction slightly to the right of the left side wall portion B2201 of the projector cover B1 and the left side wall portion B2101 of the duct cover B2100. FIG. 129 shows a state in which the cover portion 2000 shown in FIG. 124 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the screw hole B2110.

As shown in FIG. 128, the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the inner side surface (upper right wall surface B2102a) of the upper right wall portion B2102 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b and the duct cover of the projector cover B1 are substantially continuous. The inner side surface (lower right wall surface B2103a) of the lower right wall portion B2103 in B2100 is substantially continuous.

Further, the duct cover B2100 is formed with a lower side wall portion B2109 that is continuous from the lower end of the front lower side wall portion B2104 toward the rear, and the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall portion B2109 of the duct cover B2100. The inner side surface (lower side wall surface B2109a) is substantially continuous. Further, the upper wall surface 2207 of the projector cover B1 and the upper wall surface (upper wall surface B2108c) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 128, the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1, the upper right wall surface B2102a and the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100 are shown by diagonal lines, and the front lower side wall portion B2104 of the duct cover B2100 is shaded. The upper right inner wall surface B2202a and the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100 are shown in black. Actually, the boss portion B2211 is arranged on the upper portion of the lower side wall surface B2109a, but for convenience, the presence of the boss portion B2211 is ignored and the lower side wall surface B2109a is shown.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129, the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 and the lower wall (lower wall surface B2108a) of the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100 are substantially continuous, and the opening wall surface B2209 and the duct cover of the projector cover B1 are substantially continuous. The right wall (right wall surface B2108d) of the opening B2108 in B2100 is substantially continuous. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 129, the front side wall surface B2206 of the projector cover B1, the lower wall surface B2108a and the right wall surface B2108d of the duct cover B2100 are shown by diagonal lines, and the opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1 is shown by shading. The opening wall surface B2209 of the cover B1 is shown in black.

From the above, the space P (see FIG. 128) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the duct cover B2100 (cover portion B2000). The space P includes a left inner wall surface B2101a, an upper right inner wall surface B2202a, a lower right inner wall surface B2202b, a lower side wall surface B2203, a rear side wall surface B2204, an inclined wall surface B2205, a front side wall surface B2206, an upper wall surface B2207, and an opening wall surface B2208 of the projector cover B1. , And the opening wall surface B2209, the left inner wall surface B2101a of the duct cover B2100, the upper right wall surface B2102a, the right lower wall surface B2103a, the inner surface of the front lower side wall portion B2104 (front lower side wall surface B2104a), and the front upper side wall portion B2205. Inner surface (front upper wall surface B2205a), inner surface of inclined wall portion B2106 (inclined wall surface B2106a), inner surface of inclined wall portion B2107 (inclined wall surface B2107a), wall surfaces B2108a to d constituting the opening B2108, and lower It is surrounded by a side wall surface B2109a.

A part of the space P in front of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 via the opening B2108e. The opening B2108e is a portion surrounded by the front edge of each of the wall surfaces B2108a to d that constitutes the opening B2108. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 130, the front edge of each wall surface B2108a to d is shown in black.

Further, a part of the right side portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the cover portion B2000 via the opening B2010. The opening B2010 has a shape similar to the figure composed of the sides a to f shown in FIG. 130. The side a corresponds to the lower end edge of the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 (the upper side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side b corresponds to the right end edge of the rear side wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1 (the rear side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side c corresponds to the upper end edge of the lower right inner wall surface B2202b of the projector cover B1 (the lower side of the four sides forming the trapezoid shown in the shaded area in FIG. 125). The side d corresponds to the upper end edge of the lower right wall surface B2103a of the duct cover B2100. The side e corresponds to the right end edge of the front lower side wall surface B2104a in the duct cover B2100. The side f corresponds to the lower end edge of the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100.

Then, in the external space of the cover portion B2000, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22) of the case B22 is arranged in the vicinity of the opening B2010. As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 through an opening (not shown) formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door. This air is taken into the inside of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100. The air that has entered the inside of the cover portion B2000 moves rearward and downward through the space P, passes through the opening B2010, and enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the right while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. The air exiting the case B22 is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 through an opening formed in the cabinet G or the upper wall of the front door.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. In the second embodiment, it has been described that the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138).

In addition, in order to facilitate the formation of the above-mentioned air flow, an intake fan or an exhaust fan may be appropriately arranged. For example, a fan similar to the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening (see FIG. 33) may be installed in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. Further, by arranging the same member as the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 35) in the space P, the space P may be divided into an air passage space (space P1) and a liquid storage space (space P2).

<Duct adapter B2500>
FIG. 131 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover portion and the case are connected via a duct adapter. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as viewed from the front left. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the duct adapter as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 134 is a left side view of a cross section of the left side portion of the duct adapter. FIG. 135 is a right side view of a cross section on the right side of the duct adapter. FIG. 136 is a front view of the duct adapter. FIG. 137 is a left side view of the duct adapter cut near the center of the connecting portion.

As shown in FIG. 131, the duct adapter B2500 is arranged between the cover portion B2000 and the case B22. For clarity, the duct adapter B2500 is shaded in FIG. 131.

As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the duct adapter B2500 includes a left side portion B2510, a right side portion B2520, and a connecting portion B2530, and has a structure in which the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520 are connected by the connecting portion B2530. ing.

The left side portion B2510 has a flat plate-shaped left main body portion B2511 and an upper left side portion B2512 formed by bending the upper portion of the main body portion B2511 diagonally to the right. The left main body portion B2511 is formed with a left opening B2513 penetrating in the left-right direction. The right side portion B2520 has a flat plate-shaped right main body portion B2521, and the right main body portion B2521 is formed with a right opening B2522 penetrating in the left-right direction.

Further, the left side portion B2510 has a flat left side surface B2510a and a right side surface B2510b. In FIG. 132, the front edge B2510c of the left side portion B2510 is shown by an oblique line. In FIG. 133, the rear end edge B2510d of the left side portion B2510 is shown by diagonal lines, and the right end edge B2512a is shown in black.

In FIG. 134, the left opening B2513 is shaded. The left opening B2513 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. In FIG. 135, the right opening B2522 is shaded. The right opening B2522 has a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners. The shape of the right opening B2522 is generally similar to the shape of the left opening B2513, but the right opening B2522 is slightly smaller than the left opening B2513.

The lower end edge of the left side portion B2510 has a structure slightly protruding downward. As a result, a downward projecting portion B2511a is formed on the left main body portion B2511. For the sake of clarity, the downward protrusion B2511a is shaded in FIG. 134.

A cavity B2531 (see FIG. 139) is formed inside the connecting portion B2530, and the cavity B2531 communicates with the left opening B2513 and the right opening B2522. The connecting portion B2530 includes a connecting upper portion B2532 that defines the upper end of the cavity B2531, a connecting lower portion B2533 that defines the lower end of the cavity B2531, a connecting front side portion B2534 that defines the front end of the cavity B2531, and a rear end of the cavity B2531. It has a connecting rear side portion B2535, which defines the above. The connecting upper side portion B2532, the connecting lower side portion B2533, the connecting front side portion B2534, and the connecting rear side portion B2535 form a cylindrical shape with the left side and the right side open.

As shown in FIG. 136, the upper portion and the lower portion of the connecting portion B2530 have a recessed shape. Specifically, the vicinity of the center (point A) in the left-right direction in the upper part of the connection front side portion B2534 is lower than the contact B between the connection front side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the contact point C between the connection front side portion B2534 and the right side portion B2520. It is positioned in. Further, the vicinity of the center (point D) in the left-right direction in the lower part of the connection front side portion B2534 is positioned above the contact point E between the connection front side portion B2534 and the left side portion B2510 and the contact point F between the connection front side portion B2534 and the right side portion B2520. Has been done.

That is, the upper connecting portion B2532 has an inclination that goes downward from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the center, and has an inclination that goes downward from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the vicinity of the center. There is. Further, the lower connecting portion B2533 has an inclination that goes upward from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the vicinity of the center, and has an inclination that goes upward from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the vicinity of the center. ing.

Similarly, the connecting front side portion B2534 has an inclination toward the rear from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the vicinity of the center, and has an inclination toward the rear from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the vicinity of the center. ing. Further, the connecting rear side portion B2535 has an inclination toward the front from the connecting portion with the left side portion B2510 toward the vicinity of the center, and has an inclination toward the front from the connecting portion with the right side portion B2520 toward the vicinity of the center. ing.

As a result, the upper side portion B2532 of the connection, the lower side portion B2533 of the connection, the front side portion B2534 of the connection, and the rear side portion B2535 of the connection are inclined toward the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520, respectively, with the vicinity of the center as a boundary. The surface is formed so as to form an angle of less than 180 ° (for example, about 120 ° to 175 ° or about 150 ° to 170 °).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 137, when the duct adapter B2500 is cut near the center in the left-right direction of the connecting portion B2530, the opening corresponding to the cross section (cross-section opening B2536) is smaller than the left side opening B2513. .. Specifically, the cross-sectional opening B2536 has a rectangular shape, and both the vertical side (long side) and the front-back side (short side) are shorter than the left side opening B2513. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 137, the cross-sectional opening B2536 is shown by diagonal lines, and the inner side surfaces of the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are shown in black. There is.

The thickness of the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side portion B2533, connecting front side portion B2534, and connecting rear side portion B2535) is the thickness of the left side portion B2510 (left main body portion B2511 and upper left side portion B2512) and the right side. It is smaller than the thickness of the portion B2520 (right main body portion B2521). Specifically, the thickness of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520 is about 3 to 5 mm (for example, 4 mm), while the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 is about 0.5 to 1.2 mm (for example, 0.7). ~ 1.0 mm). The left side portion B2510, the right side portion B2520, and the connecting portion B2530 are formed to have a uniform thickness as a whole.

The duct adapter B2500 configured as described above is composed of an elastic member (rubber). As a result, the duct adapter B2500 can be flexibly deformed (has elasticity) when a force is applied from the right side or the left side, and has a repulsive force to return to the original shape. As the material of the duct adapter B2500, synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber (polyurethane) or silicon rubber can be appropriately adopted. The members (projector cover B1, duct cover B2100, and case B22) connected to the duct adapter B2500 are made of a material different from rubber (for example, a thermoplastic resin such as ABS resin). Flexible deformation like the duct adapter B2500 is impossible.

<Locking the duct adapter B2500 to the case B22>
FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the case. FIG. 139 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the duct adapter around the right side portion. FIG. 140 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the duct adapter around the first right-side protrusion and the second right-side protrusion. FIG. 141 is a partially enlarged front view of the right side protrusion shown in FIG. 140.

As shown in FIG. 138, an intake port B22A is formed on the left side surface B22X of the case B22. The intake port B22A is composed of a large number of slits B2022. Each slit B2022 is formed in a rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating the left side surface B22X of the case B22 in the left-right direction. Note that FIG. 138 shows the inside of the case B22 in a see-through state.

As shown in FIG. 139, three right-side projecting portions B2523 (first right-side projecting portion B2523a, second right-side projecting portion B2523b, and third right-side projecting portion B2523c) are formed on the right-side portion B2520 of the duct adapter B2500. ing. These right-side protrusions B2523 are formed as protrusions that protrude toward the right side from the right-side main surface B2524 formed around the right-side opening B2522.

The first right-side protrusion B2523a and the second right-side protrusion B2523b are formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction slightly above the upper edge of the right-side opening B2522, respectively. The third right-side protruding portion B2523c is formed so as to extend in the front-rear direction slightly below the lower edge of the right-side opening B2522. In FIG. 139, for convenience, the direction along the long side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the vertical direction, and the direction along the short side of the right opening B2522 is shown as the front-back direction.

The first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape with rounded apex portions. Further, the protruding directions of the first right protruding portion B2523a, the second right protruding portion B2523b, and the third right protruding portion B2523c are substantially perpendicular to the right main surface B2524, respectively.

In a state where the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (a state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the right main surface B2524 of the duct adapter B2500 and the left side surface B22X of the case B22 are substantially in contact with each other. The extending directions of the first right-side protruding portion B2523a, the second right-side protruding portion B2523b, and the third right-side protruding portion B2523c are substantially parallel to the long side direction of the rectangular slit B2022 formed in the case B22. The size and shape of the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are substantially the same as the size and shape of the slit B2022 (the slit B2022 can be press-fitted). It has a size and shape of about).

As a result, the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are each inserted into the case B22 via the slit B2022. In FIG. 138, the slit B2022 into which the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c are inserted is shown as slit B2022a, slit B2022b, and slit B2022c, respectively. ..

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the right-side protruding portion B2523 has a protruding upper surface B2523d and a protruding lower surface B2523e protruding from the right main surface B2524 toward the right side. The projecting upper surface B2523d and the projecting lower surface B2523e are formed in a direction perpendicular to the right main surface B2524, respectively, and form the upper surface and the lower surface of the right side projecting portion B2523. Since the first right-side protrusion B2523a, the second right-side protrusion B2523b, and the third right-side protrusion B2523c each have substantially the same structure, they are not distinguished here and are right-side protrusions. This will be described as part B2523.

On the protruding upper surface B2523d, an upper raised portion B2523f is formed near the center of the right protruding portion B2523 in the protruding direction. The upper raised portion B2523f has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface B2523d. Similarly, on the protruding lower surface B2523e, a lower raised portion B2523g is formed near the center of the right protruding portion B2523 in the protruding direction. The lower raised portion B2523g has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding lower surface B2523e. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 141, the upper raised portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g are shown by diagonal lines.

The distance between the protruding upper surface B2523d and the protruding lower surface B2523e is substantially the same as the short side of the slit B2022 formed in the case B22. Therefore, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the case B22 (the right protruding portion B2523 is inserted into the slit B2022) and a force is applied in the direction of removing the right protruding portion B2523 from the slit B2022, the upper raised portion B2523f And the lower raised portion B2523g is locked by the peripheral edge portion of the slit B2022. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the case B22 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the case B22.

As shown in FIG. 139, the third right side protrusion B2523c is formed at a position symmetrical to the second right side protrusion B2523b with respect to the right side opening B2522, whereas the first right side protrusion B2522 is below the right side opening B2522. No protrusion (right side protrusion B2523) is formed at a position symmetrical to the right side protrusion B2523a. Therefore, the right side protrusion B2523 is not inserted into the slit B2022d (see FIG. 138) formed in the case B22. As a result, it is possible to secure a space in the vicinity of the slit B2022d inside the case B22, and the wiring can be efficiently arranged inside the case B22 using the space.

<Locking the duct adapter B2500 to the cover B2000>
FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the duct cover as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the state in which the duct adapter is connected to the duct cover as viewed from a direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface of the duct cover. FIG. 144 is a cross-sectional view of the duct cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 143. FIG. 145 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the adapter engaging groove in the projector cover. FIG. 146 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the first protrusion on the projector cover. FIG. 147 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover around the second to fifth protrusions. FIG. 148 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the duct adapter is connected to the projector cover. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover and the duct adapter in the state shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 142, a right side standing portion B2031 and a left side standing portion B2032 are formed on the front lower side wall surface B2104a (see FIG. 127) of the duct cover B2100. The right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 are erected in a direction perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface B2104a. The left side wall portion B2101 is also erected with respect to the front lower side wall surface B2104a, but the height (protruding length) of the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 with respect to the front lower side wall surface B2104a is the left wall portion B2101. Is lower than.

The right side standing portion B2031 extends in a direction substantially parallel to the right end edge (side e shown in FIG. 130) of the front lower side wall surface B2104a. The left standing portion B2032 is a left standing main body portion B2032a extending in a direction substantially parallel to the right standing portion B2031 and a left standing bending portion extending from the end of the left standing main body portion B2032a. It has B2032b and. Of the ends of the left standing main body B2032a, the end opposite to the connecting portion with the left standing bent B2032b is continuous with the lower side wall surface B2109a (see FIG. 127). Of the ends of the left standing bent portion B2032b, the end on the side opposite to the connecting portion with the left standing main body portion B2032a is continuous with the upper right wall surface B2102a (see FIG. 128).

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, in the state where the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the right side standing portion B2031. It is arranged between the left side standing portion B2032.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 143, the left side portion B2510 is shown by diagonal lines, and the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032 are shown in black. FIG. 144 shows a state in which the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing main body portion B2032a are cut on a plane perpendicular to the front lower side wall surface B2104a and perpendicular to the extending direction of the right side standing portion B2031 and the left standing main body portion B2032a. In addition to being shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the duct adapter B2500 is shown in black.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially abuts on the right side wall surface of the left side standing main body portion B2032a of the duct cover B2100. Further, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the left side wall surface of the right side standing portion B2031 of the duct cover B2100. Further, the front end edge B2510c (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is substantially in contact with a part of the front lower side wall surface B2104a (between the right side standing portion B2031 and the left side standing portion B2032) of the duct cover B2100. Contact.

Here, the distance between the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b in the duct adapter B2500 (thickness of the left main body portion B2511) is the distance between the left side standing main body portion B2032a and the right side standing portion B2031 in the duct cover B2100 (left side standing). The distance between the right side wall surface of the main body portion B2032a and the left side wall surface of the right side standing portion B2031) is substantially the same. That is, the thickness of the left main body B2511 is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall of the left standing main body B2032a and the left wall of the right standing B2031, and the difference is 1 / of the thickness of the left main body B2511. It is 5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.).

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the duct cover B2100 and a force is applied in the right direction or the left direction, the left main body portion B2511 is locked by the right side standing portion B2031 or the left side standing main body portion B2032a. Ru. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the duct cover B2100 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the duct cover B2100.

As shown in FIG. 143, the degree of bending of the left standing bent portion B2032b with respect to the left standing main body portion B2032a is substantially the same as the degree of bending of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left main body portion B2511 in the duct adapter B2500. ing. As a result, the upper left side portion B2512 and the left side vertical bending portion B2032b are arranged so as to be substantially in contact with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the projector cover B1 is formed with an adapter engaging groove B2040. The adapter engaging groove B2040 is formed so as to straddle the lower side wall surface B2203, the rear side wall surface B2204, and the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. For clarity, the adapter engaging groove B2040 is shaded in FIG. 145.

The adapter engaging groove B2040 is formed as a recess recessed from the peripheral surface, and is composed of a groove bottom portion B2040a, an outer wall surface B2040b connecting the groove bottom portion B2040a and the peripheral surface, and an inner wall surface B2040c. .. The outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are formed so as to be substantially parallel to each other. For clarity, the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c are shaded in FIGS. 146 and 147.

On the edge of the adapter engaging groove B2040, the first protrusion B2041 (first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b), the second protrusion B2042 (second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b), and third protrusion B2043 (Third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b), fourth outer protrusion B2044 (fourth outer protrusion B2044a and fourth inner protrusion B2044b), and fifth outer protrusion B2045 (fifth outer protrusion B2045a and fifth inner protrusion B2045a). The protrusion B2045b) is formed.

The first outer protrusion B2041a, the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045a are continuous with a part of the outer wall surface B2040b, so that the adapter engaging groove B2040 It is formed as a protrusion that protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surrounding surface of the. On the other hand, the first inner protrusion B2041b, the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b are for adapter engagement so as to be continuous with a part of the inner wall surface B2040c. It is formed as a protrusion protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface around the groove B2040.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the adapter engaging groove B2040. Placed along. In FIG. 149, the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b of the left side portion B2510 are cut at a surface parallel to the right side surface B2510b (the surface passing through the connecting portion B2530), and the right side surface B2510b is shown by diagonal lines for easy understanding.

Specifically, the left side surface B2510a (see FIG. 132) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the outer wall surface B2040b of the projector cover B1. Further, the right side surface B2510b (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1. Further, the rear end edge B2510d (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the rear side wall surface B2204 of the projector cover B1.

Further, the downward projecting portion B2511a (see FIG. 134) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1. Further, the right end edge B2512a (see FIG. 133) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 substantially comes into contact with the groove bottom portion B2040a formed on the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1.

The adapter engaging groove B2040 has a bent shape from the rear side wall surface B2204 to the upper right inner wall surface B2202a. The degree of bending of the duct adapter B2500 is substantially the same as the degree of bending of the upper left side portion B2512 with respect to the left main body portion B2511. As a result, the entire left side portion B2510 (rear end edge B2510d) of the duct adapter B2500 can be fitted into the adapter engaging groove B2040.

Here, the distance between the left side surface B2510a and the right side surface B2510b of the duct adapter B2500 (thickness of the left side portion B2510) is the distance between the outer wall surface B2040b and the inner wall surface B2040c of the projector cover B1 (width of the adapter engaging groove B2040). It is almost the same. That is, the thickness of the left side portion B2510 is slightly shorter than the width of the adapter engaging groove B2040, and the difference is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, etc.) of the thickness of the left side portion B2510. It has become.

As a result, when the duct adapter B2500 is connected to the projector cover B1 and a force is applied to the left or right, the left side portion B2510 is locked by the outer wall surface B2040b or the inner wall surface B2040c. As a result, the connected state of the duct adapter B2500 and the projector cover B1 is maintained, and the duct adapter B2500 is hard to come off from the projector cover B1.

Further, since the first protrusion B2041, the second protrusion B2042, the third protrusion B2043, the fourth outer protrusion B2044, and the fifth outer protrusion B2045 are formed on the edge of the adapter engagement groove B2040, the duct adapter B2500 The state in which the left side portion B2510 of the above is fitted in the adapter engaging groove B2040 is easily maintained.

Further, although not clear from the figure, the portion of the outer wall surface B2040b that is integrated with the second outer protrusion B2042a, the third outer protrusion B2043a, and the fourth outer protrusion B2044a is compared with the other parts. As a result, it has a slightly raised shape (protruding toward the inner wall surface B2040c side). Similarly, of the inner wall surface B2040c, the portion integrated with each of the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third inner protrusion B2043b, and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b is slightly raised as compared with the other parts. (Like protruding toward the outer wall surface B2040b side). This makes it easier for the duct adapter B2500 to be locked by these protrusions.

A downward protruding portion B2511a (see FIG. 134) is formed on the lower end edge of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500, whereby the lower end edge is formed so as to have a step. Similarly, the right end edge B2512a (see FIG. 134) of the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 is also formed so as to have a step (see FIG. 132). These stepped portions are the connection portion between the lower side wall surface B2203 of the projector cover B1 and the lower side wall surface B2109a of the duct cover B2100, and the upper right inner wall surface B2202a of the projector cover B1 and the upper right wall surface B2102a of the duct cover B2100, respectively. It is positioned at the connection part. As a result, the left side portion B2510 of the duct adapter B2500 can be easily fitted to these connecting portions.

<Punching B450>
FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view in a state where punching is attached to the duct cover. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from the front. FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from the rear. FIG. 153 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and punching as viewed from below.

As shown in FIG. 150, a punching B450 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) is arranged in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. In FIG. 150, in order to make it easy to understand that the punching B450 is attached, the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane (the surface passing through the screw hole B2110), and the upper surface of the punching B450 is shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 151, a right protruding portion B2121 is formed on the right wall surface B2108d of the opening B2108. The right projecting portion B2121 projects from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108, and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). The right protruding portion B2121 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the apex portion is rounded. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 151, the left side surface of the right side protrusion B2121 is shown by diagonal lines.

The right side protrusion B2121 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and there is a certain distance between the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A right-side protrusion B2122 is formed between the right-side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The right projection B2122 projects from the right wall surface B2108d toward the inside (left side) of the opening B2108. The length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right side protrusion B2122 (the protruding length of the right side protrusion B2122 to the left side with respect to the right wall surface B2108d) is the length from the right wall surface B2108d to the left end of the right side protrusion B2121 It is shorter than the right protruding portion B2121 to the left) when the right wall surface B2108d is used as a reference.

The upper end of the right side protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121, and the lower end of the right side protrusion B2122 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. Further, the front end of the right side protrusion B2108f is continuous with the front end edge (see FIG. 130) of the right wall surface B2108d.

As shown in FIG. 152, a left front protrusion B2123 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left front protrusion B2123 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left front protrusion B2123 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded apex.

The left front protrusion B2123 is formed slightly above the lower wall surface B2108a, and there is a certain distance between the left front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. A left side protrusion B2124 is formed between the left side front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. The left protrusion B2124 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152). The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left side protrusion B2124 (the protrusion length of the left side protrusion B2124 to the right side with respect to the left wall surface B2108b) is the length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left front protrusion B2123. It is shorter than (the protrusion length of the left front protrusion B2123 to the right when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference).

The upper end of the left side protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower surface of the left front protrusion B2123, and the lower end of the left side protrusion B2124 is continuous with the lower wall surface B2108a. Further, the front end of the left front protrusion B2123 is continuous with the front end edge (see FIG. 130) of the left wall surface B2108b.

The length of the left front protrusion B2123 in the front-rear direction is shorter than the length of the right-side protrusion B2121 in the front-rear direction. Further, the shape and formation position of the left side protrusion B2124 are symmetrical with the shape and formation position of the right side protrusion B2122. The shape of the right side protrusion B2122 and the shape of the left side protrusion B2124 are arch-shaped (the arc and the ends of the arc are connected to each other) in a plan view, similarly to the upper raised portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g (see FIG. 141). It has a shape (a figure surrounded by a string) (see FIG. 153). FIG. 153 shows a state in which the opening B2108 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124, and the right side protrusion B2121 and the left side front protrusion B2123 are shown by diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 152, a left rear protrusion B2125 is formed on the left wall surface B2108b of the opening B2108. The left rear protrusion B2125 protrudes from the left wall surface B2108b toward the inside of the opening B2108 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 152) and extends in the front-rear direction (direction substantially parallel to the lower wall surface B2108a). ing. The left rear protrusion B2125 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a rounded apex. The upper surface of the left rear protrusion B2125 is integrated with the lower wall surface B2108a.

The length from the left wall surface B2108b to the right end of the left rear protrusion B2125 (the length of the left rear protrusion B2125 to the right when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference) is the right end of the left front protrusion B2123 from the left wall surface B2108b. Is substantially the same as the length up to (the length of protrusion to the right of the left front protrusion B2123 when the left wall surface B2108b is used as a reference).

The front end of the left rear protrusion B2125 is positioned slightly rearward of the rear end of the left front protrusion B2123. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 152, the right side surface of the left front protrusion B2123 and the right side of the left rear protrusion B2125 are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 150, the punching B450 has a shape in which the front portion of a rectangular flat plate is cut out, and a large number of through holes B451 are formed. As a result, the punching B450 can prevent foreign matter from entering the inner side of the space P while securing an air passage inside the space P (see FIG. 128). .. In FIG. 150, the lower wall surface B2108a is exposed corresponding to the notch shape in the front portion of the punching B450.

The thickness of the punching B450 is slightly thinner than the distance between the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a and the distance between the lower surface of the left side front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. As a result, the right side portion of the punching B450 is arranged between the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower wall surface B2108a, and the left side portion thereof is arranged between the lower surface of the left side front protrusion B2123 and the lower wall surface B2108a. .. The lower surface of the punching B450 is in contact with the lower wall surface B2108a, and the upper surface of the punching B450 is also substantially in contact with the lower surface of the right side protrusion B2121 and the lower surface of the left front protrusion B2123.

Further, the length in the left-right direction of the punching B450 is slightly shorter than the distance between the right wall surface B2108d and the left wall surface B2108b, and is substantially the same as the distance between the left end of the right side protrusion B2122 and the right end of the left side protrusion B2124. As a result, the right edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the left end of the right side protrusion B2122, and the left edge of the punching B450 substantially contacts the right end of the left side protrusion B2124.

From the above, the punching B450 can be slid forward in a state of being arranged between the lower wall surface B2108a and the right side protrusion B2121 and the left side front protrusion B2123. Then, while the punching B450 is moved forward, foreign matter and the like adhering to the punching B450 can be removed (cleaned).

Here, a slide locking projection B452 that projects upward is formed at the left rear corner portion of the punching B450. The length from the upper surface of the punching B450 to the upper end of the slide locking protrusion B452 (the upward protrusion length of the slide locking protrusion B452 when the upper surface of the punching B450 is used as a reference) is the upper and lower sides of the left front protrusion B2123. It is longer than the length in the direction. As a result, with the punching B450 arranged in the opening B2108, the upper end of the slide locking protrusion B452 is positioned above the upper surface of the left front protrusion B2123.

Therefore, when the punching B450 is slid forward, the front surface of the slide locking protrusion B452 comes into contact with the rear end of the left front protrusion B2123. As a result, the slide locking protrusion B452 is locked by the left front protrusion B2123, and the punching B450 is restricted from moving further forward. This makes it possible to prevent the punching B450 from coming out of the opening B2108.

Since the front ends of the right side portion and the left side portion of the punching B450 are arranged so as to protrude forward from the front end edge of the lower wall surface B2108a (see FIG. 150), by pulling these protruding portions, the punching B450 is arranged. It is easy to slide. Further, as described above, since the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124 have an arcuate shape and a rounded tip thereof, the punching B450 can be smoothly slid.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, the punching B450 is formed with notches B453 at one position on each side. The notch B453 fits with the right side protrusion B2122 and the left side protrusion B2124 with the punching B450 arranged in the opening B2108. As a result, the punching B450 can be stably attached to the opening B2108. Further, although the left rear portion of the lower wall surface B2108a has a notched shape (see FIG. 127), the punching B450 is placed on the left rear protrusion B2125, so that the punching B450 is more stable. Can be placed.

Although the punching B450 has been described above as being attached to the opening B2108, the punching B450 can be arranged at an arbitrary portion in the game machine 1 where foreign matter is likely to enter. For example, the mesh-like portion (a structure for emitting the sound generated from the speaker to the outside of the game machine, for example, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B shown in FIG. 49) may be formed by the punching B450.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important that the projector is arranged at an appropriate position. That is, if the projector is not arranged at an appropriate position, there will be a gap between the image projected by the projector and the projection surface such as a screen, and in such a case, the production content may be uncomfortable. turn into.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of arranging a projector at an appropriate position.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects inward of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member has the projector with respect to the connecting member. A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which the protrusion can be inserted is formed from the side opposite to the side where the protrusion is arranged (back side).
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion in a state of being hooked on the protruding portion inserted into the hole.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a projecting portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The hooking screw 5000) is provided, while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with the connecting member (projector cover). A hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted from the side (rear side) opposite to the side where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged with respect to the plate B1000). ) Is formed. Then, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is hooked on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) inserted in the hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010), and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is hooked. ) Is fixed. Therefore, the projector (projector device B2) can be appropriately adjusted by hooking the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) to align the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). Can be placed in any position.

(A-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member, and the projector and the accommodating portion are connected to each other.
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member penetrates from one side to the other side. A through hole (screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit) is formed.
The through hole includes a first region (lower side portion B1010b) and a second region (upper side portion B1010a) formed continuously with the first region.
When viewed from the front with respect to the forming direction of the through hole, the first region is larger than the protrusion and the second region is smaller than the protrusion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a protruding portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The hooking screw 5000) is provided, while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided from one side to the other side. A through hole (screw hole B1010 for hooking the irradiation unit) is formed. The through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is a second region (upper side) formed continuously with the first region (lower side portion B1010b) and the first region (lower side portion B1010b). When viewed from the front with respect to the forming direction of the through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) including the portion B1010a), the first region (lower side portion B1010b) is a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw). It is larger than 5000), and the second region (upper portion B1010a) is smaller than the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). Therefore, the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted into the first region (lower side portion B1010b), and the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is inserted into the protruding portion (irradiation) through the insertion. It can be engaged with the unit hooking screw 5000). By aligning the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) using such an engaged state, the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position.

(A-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector is arranged in an inclined posture so that the predetermined direction side (front side) is higher.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member, and the projector and the accommodating portion are connected to each other.
The accommodating portion is provided with a projecting portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) that projects toward the inside of the accommodating portion, while the connecting member is formed with a recess that is recessed from the periphery. At the same time, a through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is formed by penetrating a part of the recess.
The protruding portion includes a bulging portion (washer portion 5004) that bulges around the protruding direction.
The bulging portion is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) which is a portion of the recess where the through hole is not formed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) has a protruding portion (irradiation unit) protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The hooking screw 5000) is provided, while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) has a recess recessed from the surroundings. Along with the formation, a through hole (screw hole B1010 for hooking an irradiation unit) is formed by penetrating a part of the recess. The protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G) includes a protruding portion (washer portion 5004) that bulges around the protruding direction. Here, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged in an inclined posture so that the predetermined direction side (front side) is higher, and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) has a bulging portion (washer portion). The 5004) is a portion of the recess formed in the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) in which the through hole (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is not formed, with respect to the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011). It is arranged on the predetermined direction side (front side). Therefore, even when a force for moving the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) to the predetermined direction side (front side) is applied, the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) is caused by the bulging portion (washer portion 5004). Due to being locked, the movement of the non-penetrating portion (peripheral wall portion B1011) can be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the position of the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) from shifting with respect to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the projector (projector device B2) can be arranged at an appropriate position. it can.

(A-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The connecting member is fixed to the accommodating portion by a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw (lid mounting screw 5100).
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
A first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a part of the first screw can be inserted and a second screw into which a part of the second screw can be inserted into the connecting member. A screw insertion portion (screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid) is formed.
A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the first screw can be inserted is formed in the accommodating portion.
A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the second screw can be inserted is formed in the closing member.
When the first screw insertion portion is engaged with the first screw partially inserted into the third screw insertion portion in a state where the connecting member is not attached to the accommodating portion, the first screw insertion portion is engaged. The two screw insertion portions and the fourth screw insertion portion are arranged so as to face each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Further, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) includes a first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) and a second screw (a second screw). It is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by the lid mounting screw 5100). A first screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) into which a part of the first screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted into the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000), and a second screw hole B1010. A second screw insertion portion (screw hole B1002 for fastening the lid) into which a part of the screw (screw 5100 for attaching the lid) can be inserted is formed, and the first screw (irradiation) is formed in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). A third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010) into which a part of the unit hooking screw 5000) can be inserted is formed, and a second screw (lid) is formed on the closing member (closing lid G100). A fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) into which a part of the mounting screw 5100) can be inserted is formed. Here, in a state where the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) is not attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the first screw is partially inserted into the third screw insertion portion (irradiation unit hooking screw hole 5010). When the first screw insertion part (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010) is engaged with the screw (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000), the second screw insertion part (lid fastening screw hole B1002) and the fourth screw insertion part (Boss portion G100c) is arranged so as to face each other. In other words, a connecting member (projector cover) with respect to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) so that the second screw insertion portion (lid fastening screw hole B1002) and the fourth screw insertion portion (boss portion G100c) face each other. By arranging the plate B1000) and the closing member (closing lid G100), it is possible to align the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000), thereby making the projector (projector device B2) suitable. Can be placed in position. Further, a screw (second screw (lid mounting screw 5100)) for fixing the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) and a closing member (closing lid G100) are accommodated. By also serving as a screw for fixing to the portion (cabinet G), it is possible to reduce the number of screws used around the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and a simple configuration can be obtained. ..

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the accommodating portion (back wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) are composed of separate members. In the present invention, the accommodating portion (back wall G3 of the cabinet G) and the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) may be integrally formed as one member. That is, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) itself may be configured to have a protruding structure protruding inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G).

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a game machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the game machine, it is difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of making adjustments to a projector with the projector mounted inside.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member includes locking pieces (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, upper locking piece G118a, and upper locking piece G118a) that can be locked to a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodating portion. The lower locking piece G118b) is formed.
The closing member is locked by the locking piece and fixed to the accommodating portion by a screw.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) has a locking piece (upper locking) that can be locked to a part of the peripheral edge of the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). A piece G108a and a lower locking piece G108b, and an upper locking piece G118a and a lower locking piece G118b) are formed, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is a locking piece (upper locking piece G108a). And the lower locking piece G108b, and the upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b), and are fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by screws. Therefore, by locking the closing member (closing lid G100) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the screw can be fastened in a temporarily fixed state, and the closing member (closing lid G100) can be accommodated. It can be easily attached to the part (cabinet G).

(B-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), and protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second engagement protrusion G101) projecting inward of the accommodating portion. G111) is provided, and the protruding portion is provided with an engaging portion (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece) that are engaged with the accommodating portion. G118b) is formed,
A storage recess (first cavity B1050 and second cavity B1060) for accommodating the projecting portion is formed in the connecting member, and the projecting portion is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with protruding portions (first engaging protruding portion G101 and second engaging protruding portion G111) protruding toward the inside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G). The portions (first engaging protrusion G101 and second engaging protrusion G111) include engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b) that are engaged with the accommodating portion (cabinet G). , The upper locking piece G118a and the lower locking piece G118b) are formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closing lid G100) with the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the closing member (closing lid G100) can be attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G). Here, the closing member (closing lid G100) is provided with openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), and the inside of the gaming machine is provided through the openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112). There is a concern that various devices existing in the game may be illegally accessed (the game medium is illegally acquired by the so-called goto act). However, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) has a protruding portion (third). Storage recesses (first cavity B1050 and second cavity B1060) for accommodating the first engagement protrusion G101 and the second engagement protrusion G111) are formed, and the protrusions (first engagement protrusion G101 and second) are formed. The engaging protrusion G111) is arranged so as to be surrounded by the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000). As a result, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter the inside of the game machine from the openings (first opening G102 and second opening G112), the protruding portion (first engaging protruding portion G101 and the first engaging protrusion G101 and) It is possible to prevent the intrusion by the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) surrounding the second engaging protrusion G111), and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine.

(B-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector and
A connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) attached to the housing portion is provided.
The projector and the accommodating portion are connected via the connecting member.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. Ori,
The closing member is formed with engaging portions (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) that are engaged with the accommodating portion. Ori,
The closing member is fixed to the accommodating portion by one screw (lid mounting screw 5100), and the connecting member is also fixed to the accommodating portion by the one screw.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by one screw (lid mounting screw 5100), and the closing member (closing lid G100) has an accommodating portion. An engaging portion (upper locking piece G108a and lower locking piece G108b, and upper locking piece G118a and lower locking piece G118b) to be engaged with (cabinet G) is formed. Therefore, by engaging the closing member (closing lid G100) with the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the screw can be fastened in a temporarily fixed state, and the closing member (closing lid G100) can be accommodated. It can be easily attached to the part (cabinet G). Further, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) for connecting the projector (projector device B2) and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is also a screw (lid mounting screw 5100) (closing member (closing lid). G100) is fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by the same screw as the screw for fixing the accommodating portion (cabinet G). This makes it possible to reduce the number of screws used for fixing the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000) and the closing member (closing lid G100) to the accommodating portion (cabinet G). It can be a simple configuration.

(B-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
Adjusting parts for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism. B3 reflector holding part B11 attachment part, etc.) and
A housing unit (cabinet G) for accommodating the projector is provided.
The accommodating portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) penetrating the inside and outside of the accommodating portion at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a recess (periphery) is provided around the opening. Part G10b) is formed, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is fitted in the recess.
The closing member is formed with projecting portions (upper projecting portion G121 and lower projecting portion G122) protruding inward of the accommodating portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the opening provided in the accommodating portion. Has been
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) accommodating the projector (projector device B2) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, mounting parts of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mounting parts of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) from the outside. An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at an operable position, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is attached. Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) is made to appear. Is possible, and through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), from the outside of the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221). , The attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated. As a result, even after the projector (projector device B2) is fixed inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the projector (projector device B2) is accommodated while being mounted inside the accommodating portion (cabinet G). From the outside of the part (cabinet G) to the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, and the reflector holding part B11 of the mirror mechanism B3. The traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) can be adjusted by operating the mounting portion of the projector (projector device B2). Further, a recess (peripheral portion G10b) is formed around the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the closing member (closing lid G100) is the recess. It is fitted to (peripheral portion G10b). Here, unauthorized access to various devices existing inside the game machine is performed through a slight gap generated between the recess (peripheral portion G10b) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) and the closing member (closing lid G100). There is a concern that the game medium may be illegally acquired by the so-called goto act. However, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) has one of the peripheral edges of the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). Along the portion, a projecting portion (upper projecting portion G121 and lower projecting portion G122) projecting inward of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is formed. As a result, even if a wire-shaped device is attempted to enter the inside of the game machine through the gap, the protruding portion (upper protruding portion G121 and lower) formed on the closing member (closing lid G100) is formed. The side protrusion G122) can prevent the intrusion and prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projector tends to generate heat and become hot as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projector does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of releasing heat generated by a projector.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) With the projector (projector device B2),
A first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000).
A second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) having a second air passage space (cavity B2531) through which air can pass is provided.
A first opening (opening B2108e) and a second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion, and the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other. 1 Air passage space is formed,
A third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion, and the third opening and the fourth opening are communicated with each other. The second air passage space is formed, and the second air passage space is formed.
The first space forming portion and the projector are connected by the second space forming portion.
The first air passage space and the second air passage space communicate with each other through the second opening and the third opening.
The second space forming portion has elasticity.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, a first opening (opening B2108e) and a second opening (opening B2010) are formed in the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000), and the first opening (opening B2010) is formed. A first air passage space (space P) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening (opening B2108e) and the second opening (opening B2010). A third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), and a third opening (left side opening B2513) and a fourth opening are formed. A second air passage space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening (opening B2522 on the right side). The first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) communicate with each other through a second opening (opening B2010) and a third opening (left opening B2513), and a projector (a projector (opening B2513)). The projector device B2) is connected by a second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500). This makes it possible for the air that has passed through the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (cavity B2531) to flow into the projector (projector device B2), and through the flow of the air, the projector (the projector (cavity B2531). The heat generated by the projector device B2) can be released. Further, even after the projector (projector device B2) is once connected to the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), the projector (projector) is used to adjust the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). A situation is also assumed in which the position of the device B2) is finely adjusted. In this respect, since the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and is deformable, it is possible to flexibly cope with such position adjustment of the projector (projector device B2).

For example, by operating the adjustment unit (connecting portion R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, etc.), the projector (projector device B2) projects. When adjusting the traveling direction of the light, it is necessary to move the projector (projector device B2) within a range of about 5 mm. In this regard, if synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber is used as the material of the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500), the second space forming portion (duct adapter B2500) can be located in the moving region of the projector (projector device B2). It can be flexibly deformed within a range, and the traveling direction of light can be smoothly adjusted without creating a gap due to the movement.

(C-2) With the projector (projector device B2),
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the projector.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed,
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
The area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section when the elastic member is cut between the first opening and the second opening is the area of the first opening and the second opening. Smaller than the area of
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2), and the elastic member (duct). The adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be smoothly performed. Further, when the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is cut between the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the second opening (right side opening B2522) (the portion near the center of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500)). The area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section of is smaller than the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). That is, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has a shape in which the portion near the center is recessed. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be deformed along the recess when an external force is applied, so that the above-mentioned arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is more efficient. Can be done.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side portion B2533, connecting front side portion B2534, and connecting rear side portion B2535) is 0.5 to 0.5 to It is about 1.2 mm (for example, 0.7 to 1.0 mm), which is considerably thinner than the thickness (for example, 4 mm) of the left side portion B2510 and the right side portion B2520. As a result, the flexibility (stretchability) can be fully exhibited, and the efficiency of the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) can be further improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section when the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is cut between the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the second opening (right side opening B2522). ) Is smaller than the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). In the present invention, the area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section is not particularly limited, and is among the area of the first opening (left side opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522). It may be substantially the same as the area of at least one, and is larger than the area of at least one of the area of the first opening (left opening B2513) and the area of the second opening (right opening B2522). May be good. For example, the connection upper side portion B2532, the connection lower side portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535 are configured so that the surface closer to the right side portion B2520 is substantially perpendicular to the right side main surface B2524. You may. In this case, the area of the opening (cross-section opening B2536) corresponding to the cross section is substantially equal to the area of the second opening (right side opening B2522).

(C-3) With the projector (projector device B2),
A case (case B22) for accommodating the projector and
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the case.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming portion side, while the second opening is arranged on the case side.
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
The case is formed with a vent (intake port B22A) for taking in air.
On the second opening side of the elastic member, locking portions (first right side protrusion B2523a, second right side protrusion B2523b, and third right side protrusion B2523c) that can be inserted into the vent are formed. The elastic member can be locked by the locking portion inserted into the vent.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector accommodating case (case B22), and is elastic. The member (duct adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with the opening B2522). The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, since the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22). , The work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the case (case B22) can be smoothly performed. Further, the case (case B22) is formed with a ventilation port (intake port B22A) for taking in air, and is on the second opening (right side opening B2522) side (case (case)) of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500). On the B22) side), locking portions (first right-side protruding portion B2523a, second right-side protruding portion B2523b, and third right-side protruding portion B2523c) that can be inserted into the ventilation port (intake port B22A) are formed. , The elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is engaged by the locking portions (first right side protrusion B2523a, second right side protrusion B2523b, and third right side protrusion B2523c) inserted into the ventilation port (intake port B22A). It can be stopped. As a result, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is connected to the case (case B22) via the locking portions (first right-side protrusion B2523a, second right-side protrusion B2523b, and third right-side protrusion B2523c). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above can be performed more efficiently.

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the size and shape of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) are substantially the same as the size and shape of the vent (slit B2022). In the present invention, the size and shape of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) is such that it can be press-fitted into the vent (slit B2022) and cannot be easily disengaged (locked) after press-fitting. ) Can be appropriately adopted. For example, the length of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) in the short side direction (distance between the protruding upper surface B2523d and the protruding lower surface B2523e) is substantially the same as the short side of the vent (slit B2022), and the locking portion. The length in the long side direction (extending direction) of the (right protruding portion B2523) may be shorter than the long side of the vent (slit B2022). Further, the length of the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523) in the long side direction (extending direction) is substantially the same as the long side of the vent (slit B2022), and the end portion in the extending direction is raised upward. It may be raised like the portion B2523f and the lower raised portion B2523g. The position where such a raised portion (protruding for locking) is formed is not particularly limited, and the locking piece may be provided at an arbitrary position in the locking portion (right protruding portion B2523).

(C-4) With the projector (projector device B2),
A space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having an air passage space (space P) through which air can pass, and
With an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) having elasticity,
The elastic member is arranged between the space forming portion and the projector.
A first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522) are formed in the elastic member, and a space (cavity) is formed so as to communicate with the first opening and the second opening. B2531) is formed, and the first opening is arranged on the space forming portion side, while the second opening is arranged on the projector side.
The air passage space communicates with the space formed in the elastic member.
A locking portion (left side portion B2510) that can be locked to the space forming portion is formed on the first opening side of the elastic member, while two protruding portions (right side) are formed on the space forming portion. Standing part B2031 and left side standing part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a and third inner protrusion B2043b, fourth outer The protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b) are formed, and the locking portion is arranged between the two protrusions.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, an elastic member (duct adapter B2500) is arranged between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2), and the elastic member (duct). The adapter B2500) is formed with a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522), and a first opening (left side opening B2513) and a second opening (right side opening B2522). A space (cavity B2531) is formed so as to communicate with. The space (cavity B2531) communicates with the air passage space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). As a result, air that has passed through the space (space P) formed in the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the space (cavity B2531) formed in the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) flows into the projector (projector device B2). It is possible to release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) through the flow of the air. Further, the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) has elasticity and can be deformed according to the relative positional relationship between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2). Therefore, the work of arranging the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) between the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the projector (projector device B2) can be smoothly performed. Further, on the first opening (left side opening B2513) side (space forming portion (cover portion B2000) side) of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500), there is a locking portion that can be locked to the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). (Left side portion B2510) is formed, while the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) has two protrusions (right side standing part B2031 and left side standing part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion). B2041b, 2nd outer protrusion B2042a and 2nd inner protrusion B2042b, 3rd outer protrusion B2043a and 3rd inner protrusion B2043b, 4th outer protrusion B2044a and 4th inner protrusion B2044b, 5th outer protrusion B2045a and 5th inner protrusion B2045b) Is formed, and the locking portion (left side portion B2510) has the two protruding portions (right side standing portion B2031 and left standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a). And the second inner protrusion B2042b, the third outer protrusion B2043a and the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). As a result, the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is locked into the two protruding portions (right side standing portion B2031 and left standing portion B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second. Positioning is performed by arranging between the inner protrusion B2042b, the third outer protrusion B2043a and the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). Therefore, the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500) as described above can be performed more efficiently.

Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the thickness of the locking portion (left side portion B2510) is about 3 to 5 mm (for example, 4 mm), and the connecting portion B2530 (connecting upper portion B2532, connecting lower side). Compared with the thickness (for example, 0.7 to 1.0 mm) of the portion B2533, the connection front side portion B2534, and the connection rear side portion B2535), the thickness is considerably thicker. As a result, the two protrusions (right side standing part B2031 and left side standing part B2032, first outer protrusion B2041a and first inner protrusion B2041b, second outer protrusion B2042a and second inner protrusion B2042b, third outer protrusion B2043a Stable locking of the locking portion (left side portion B2510) between the third inner protrusion B2043b, the fourth outer protrusion B2044a and the fourth inner protrusion B2044b, the fifth outer protrusion B2045a and the fifth inner protrusion B2045b). It is possible to further improve the efficiency of the arrangement work of the elastic member (duct adapter B2500).

In the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the image is displayed on the screen when the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) is incident on the screen. In the present invention, a part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) may irradiate an object other than the screen, and the irradiated object may be a component provided in the game machine. However, it may be an object existing outside the game machine. For example, it is assumed that a part of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) (for example, the light that has passed around the screen) reaches the player and irradiates the clothes worn by the player. Good. When a part or all of the light projected from the projector (projector device B2) irradiates an object other than the screen, the screen may not be provided.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with a protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000), while the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is provided with a hole (irradiation unit). The hooking screw hole B1010) is formed, and by inserting the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) into the hole of the irradiation unit B (irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010). It has been described that the irradiation unit B is hooked on the protruding portion (irradiation unit hooking screw 5000). In the present invention, conversely, the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit) is provided with a protruding portion, while the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is provided with a hole (for example, the same as the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010). The irradiation unit may be hooked into the hole (recessed portion) of the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by inserting the protruding portion of the irradiation unit into the hole (recessed portion).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the connecting member (projector cover plate B1000: irradiation unit B) is attached to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by screwing. In the present invention, the mounting method of the irradiation unit and the accommodating portion (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the irradiation unit may be fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G) by locking instead of fastening with screws. Further, the irradiation unit may be directly fixed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), or may be indirectly fixed by interposing another member. For example, another member (intervening member) is arranged between the irradiation unit and the accommodating portion (cabinet G), the intervening member is screwed to the accommodating portion (cabinet G), and the irradiation unit is locked to the intervening member. You may do it.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the air taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 is taken into the inside of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e of the duct cover B2100, and the inside of the cover portion B2000 (space). After moving P), it is described that it enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A, proceeds inside the case B22 while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E. .. The projector device B2 can be cooled through such an air flow. In the present invention, the air for cooling the projector (projector device B2) can be taken into the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) from an arbitrary space in the accommodating portion (cabinet G). At that time, the air that existed outside the game machine until just before may be taken into the space forming part (cover part B2000), or the air that has stayed inside the game machine for a certain period of time may be taken into the space forming part (cover part B2000). It may be incorporated into Part B2000). Further, as in the second embodiment (as opposed to the sixth embodiment), the intake port B22A may be provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E may be provided on the left side of the case B22. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the air after passing through the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) flows into the case B22, but conversely, the air after passing through the case B22 flows into the space forming portion (cover). It may be configured to flow into the part B2000). Further, when cooling the projector (projector device B2), the space forming portion (cover portion B2000) is not an indispensable configuration, and air is taken into the inside of the case B22 without providing the space forming portion (cover portion B2000). May be.

[7th Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the seventh embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to sixth embodiments also applies to the seventh embodiment.

<Adjusting the height of the reel unit>
FIG. 154 is a front view for explaining a schematic configuration inside the cabinet. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit and the reel adapter are removed from the inside of the cabinet shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 (a) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front with the front door closed. FIG. 156 (b) is a schematic view of the game machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front with the front door closed. FIG. 156 (c) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment as viewed from the front. FIG. 156 (d) is a schematic view of the inside of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment as viewed from the front.

In the above-described embodiment, the game machine on which the display unit A (projection mapping device) is mounted has been described, but the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is not equipped with the projection mapping device. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the irradiation unit B is arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and the screen is provided in the upper space or the upper portion (upper door mechanism UD) of the front door. (See FIGS. 4, 5, 64, 97, etc.). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the irradiation unit B is not arranged in the upper space inside the cabinet G, and the screen is not provided in the upper space or the upper portion of the front door.

In the above-described embodiment (a form in which the projection mapping device is mounted), the upper portion of the game machine 1 is used to display the image projected from the projector on the screen, which is provided on the front door. The image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized by the player through the window (for example, the upper display window UD1 shown in FIG. 3). Then, below the window (the window for making the image displayed on the screen visible), the main display window DD4 (operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and drawing on each reel RL, RC, RR). A window) is provided to make the design visible.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projection mapping device is not mounted, a window for making the image displayed on the screen visible is not formed, and due to this, the main display window The DD4 is formed above the embodiment described above. This improves the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the visibility of the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in the present embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the upper surface of the middle board 4000, and the reel unit RU is mounted on the upper surface of the reel adapter 6000. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the reel unit RU is directly mounted on the middle board 4000 (see FIGS. 95 and 96), whereas in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is located between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. , The reel adapter 6000 is interposed. The configuration inside the cabinet G is basically the same between the sixth embodiment and the present embodiment except for the reel adapter 6000. In this embodiment, since the irradiation unit B is not provided, the operation window G10 is not formed on the back wall G3.

As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), in the present embodiment, the main display window DD4 is upward by a distance d (about 3 to 10 cm, for example, 6 cm) as compared with the sixth embodiment. It is formed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 156 (c) and 156 (d), the arrangement position (height) of the middle board 4000 in the cabinet G is the same in the sixth embodiment and the present embodiment. Then, in the present embodiment, the reel unit RU is arranged at a reel position as compared with the sixth embodiment, corresponding to the fact that the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU. It is upward by the height (distance d) of the adapter 6000.

As a result, in the present embodiment, both the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU are positioned upward by a distance d as compared with the sixth embodiment. As a result, as in the sixth embodiment, the formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel RL) are substantially coincident (superimposed) in the front view. As a result, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR are easily visible to the player.

Note that, in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), only the main display window DD4 and the reel unit RU are shown, and the other configurations are not shown. In FIG. 156 (c), only the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU are shown, and the illustration of other configurations is omitted. In FIG. 156 (d), only the middle board 4000, the reel adapter 6000, and the reel unit RU are shown, and the other configurations are not shown.

<Reel adapter 6000>
FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from the front right. FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from the rear right. FIG. 159 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right rear portion of the reel adapter. FIG. 160 is a rear view of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159. FIG. 161 is a cross-sectional view of the lower protruding portion of the right rear portion shown in FIG. 159. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from below. FIG. 163 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from below. FIG. 164 is a front view of the reel adapter cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the reel adapter as viewed from above. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter is cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the reel adapter 6000 has a box-shaped external shape, and the upper surface, the front surface, and the rear surface are the upper surface 6001 and the front surface 6002, respectively. And it has a rear surface 6003. The right side portion (right rear surface 6003R) and the left side portion (left rear surface 6003L) of the rear surface 6003 are formed so as to have a step with respect to the central portion (middle rear surface 6003C) of the rear surface 6003, respectively.

Further, the reel adapter 6000 has a right rear portion 6010 and a left rear portion 6020, respectively, as a structure protruding rearward in the right side portion and the left side portion of the rear end. The right rear portion 6010 includes an upper protruding portion 6011 projecting rearward with respect to the right rear surface 6003R at the upper portion of the right rear surface 6003R, and a lower projecting portion 6012 projecting rearward with respect to the right rear surface 6003R at the lower portion of the right rear surface 6003R. have.

The left rear portion 6020 includes an upper protruding portion 6021 projecting rearward with respect to the left rear surface 6003L at the upper portion of the left rear surface 6003L, and a lower projecting portion 6022 projecting rearward with respect to the left rear surface 6003L at the lower portion of the left rear surface 6003L. have. Since the left rear portion 6020 has substantially the same structure as the right rear portion 6010, only the right rear portion 6010 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 159, the upper protruding portion 6011 includes a right side portion 6011a and a left side portion 6011b extending in the vertical direction and a connecting portion 6011c extending in the left-right direction to connect the right side portion 6011a and the left side portion 6011b. ,have. The lower protruding portion 6012 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the rear upper portion is rounded. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 159, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end face of the lower protrusion 6012 are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c is positioned above the upper surface 6001, whereby the opening 6013 surrounded by the right side portion 6011a, the left side portion 6011b, the connecting portion 6011c, and the upper surface 6001 is opened. It is formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 160, the rear end surface of the upper protrusion 6011 and the rear end face of the lower protrusion 6012 are shown by diagonal lines, and the opening 6013 is shown by shading. Although not shown, similarly, the upper protruding portion 6021 has an opening including a right side portion 6021a, a left side portion 6021b, and a connecting portion 6021c, and is surrounded by a right side portion 6021a, a left side portion 6021b, a connecting portion 6021c, and an upper surface 6001. 6023 is formed.

FIG. 161 shows a state in which the lower protruding portion 6012 is cut in a vertical plane (plane in the left-right direction), and the cut plane is shown by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 161, the lower projecting portion 6012 has a projecting upper surface 6012a projecting rearward from the right rear surface 6003R. The protruding upper surface 6012a is formed so as to have an inclination that is slightly lower toward the rear, and constitutes the upper surface of the lower protruding portion 6012. An upper raised portion 6012b is formed on the protruding upper surface 6012a. The upper raised portion 6012b has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface 6012a.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the upper surface 6001 of the reel adapter 6000 is formed with three upper surface recesses 6030 (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right upper surface recess 6030R). The left upper surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R are each formed as recesses with respect to the upper surface 6001, and are one surface (one surface in a hexahedron surrounded by six rectangular surfaces). It has a shape with the upper surface) open.

The left upper surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R are formed so as to be arranged in the left-right direction, and are left side of the upper left surface recess 6030L, between the upper left surface recess 6030L and the middle upper surface recess 6030C. A recess non-forming region 6001a, a recess non-forming region 6001b, a recess non-forming region 6001c, and a recess non-forming region 6001d are formed between the upper surface recess 6030C and the right upper surface recess 6030R, respectively, on the right side of the right upper surface recess 6030R. Has been done. The recess non-forming region 6001a, the recess non-forming region 6001b, the recess non-forming region 6001c, and the recess non-forming region 6001d are a part of the upper surface 6001.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, three back surface convex portions 6031 (left back surface convex portion 6031L, middle back surface convex portion 6031C, and right back surface convex portion 6031R) are formed on the back side of the reel adapter 6000. .. The left back surface convex portion 6031L, the middle back surface convex portion 6031C, and the right back surface convex portion 6031R correspond to the upper left surface concave portion 6030L, the middle upper surface concave portion 6030C, and the right upper surface concave portion 6030R, respectively, and the upper left surface concave portion 6030L, It has a shape that protrudes downward with respect to the back surface 6004 (the surface opposite to the upper surface 6001) according to the recesses of the middle upper surface recess 6030C and the right upper surface recess 6030R.

The back surface convex portion 6031 has a bottom surface 6031a formed substantially parallel to the back surface 6004, and a side surface 6031b connecting the back surface 6004 and the bottom surface 6031a. Further, on the back side of the reel adapter 6000, a rib 6032 protruding downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the back surface 6004) or the bottom surface 6031a is formed. The rib 6032 is composed of left and right ribs 6032a extending in the left-right direction and five front-rear ribs 6032b extending in the front-rear direction.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 163, the side surface of the rib 6032 (the surface substantially perpendicular to the back surface 6004 or the bottom surface 6031a) is shown by diagonal lines. The left and right ribs 6032a intersect the five front and rear ribs 6032b below the bottom surface 6031a, respectively. The portion of the rib 6032 projecting downward from the back surface 6004 is continuous with the side surface 6031b, and the portion projecting downward from the back surface 6004 is integrated with the portion projecting downward from the bottom surface 6031a.

FIG. 164 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 is cut on a vertical surface (plane in the left-right direction) passing through the left and right ribs 6032a, and the cut surface is shown by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 164, the length from the bottom surface 6030a (see FIG. 157) of the top surface recess 6030 to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion of the left and right ribs 6032a protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (r in the figure). Is shorter than the length (R in the figure) from the upper surface 6001 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004.

Here, R is a length including the distance between the upper surface 6001 and the back surface 6004 (thickness of the reel adapter 6000 in the upper surface recess non-forming region), and r is the distance between the bottom surface 6030a and the bottom surface 6031a (upper surface recess forming region). The length including the thickness of the reel adapter 6000). The thickness of these reel adapters 6000 is substantially uniform. Therefore, of the left and right ribs 6032a, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the length protruding downward from the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference) is The length from the back surface 6004 to the lower ends of the left and right ribs 6032a in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the length of the left and right ribs 6032a projecting downward with respect to the back surface 6004) is shorter.

Similarly, the length from the bottom surface 6031a to the lower end of the front-rear rib 6032b in the portion of the front-rear rib 6032b protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a (the downward protrusion length of the front-rear rib 6032b when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference). Is shorter than the length from the back surface 6004 to the lower end of the front and rear ribs 6032b in the portion protruding downward from the back surface 6004 (the downward protrusion length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the back surface 6004 is used as a reference). The downward protrusion length of the front and rear ribs 6032b when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference is substantially the same as the downward protrusion length of the left and right ribs 6032a when the bottom surface 6031a is used as a reference.

As shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, two step recesses 6040 (left step recess 6040L and right step recess 6040R) are formed on the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. The left step recess 6040L and the right step recess 6040R are each formed to have a step, and the upper wall surface 6040a formed continuously from the upper surface 6001 and substantially parallel to the front surface 6002 and in front of the upper wall surface 6040a. It has a lower side wall surface 6040b formed substantially parallel to the upper wall surface 6040a. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 165, the upper wall surface 6040a and the lower side wall surface 6040b are shown by diagonal lines.

FIG. 166 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 is cut on a vertical surface (surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the left step recess 6040L. As shown in FIG. 166, a lower protrusion 6041 is formed in the lower portion of the step recess 6040. The front surface 6041a of the lower projection 6041 is formed continuously from the lower end of the lower side wall surface 6040b downward. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 166, the cut surface of the lower protrusion 6041 is shown in black, and the cut surface other than the lower protrusion 6041 is shown by diagonal lines. The lower end of the lower side wall surface 6040b is substantially the same height as the lower end of the region where the step recess 6040 is not formed on the front surface 6002, and the lower protrusion 6041 is a portion protruding downward from these lower ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, two screw hole recesses 6050 (left screw hole recess 6050L and right screw hole recess 6050R) are formed on the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. The left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R are each composed of a lower surface 6050a that defines the lower end and a side surface 6050b that is formed so as to have a tapered shape that is narrower at the lower end. A screw hole 6050c is formed on the lower surface 6050a so as to penetrate the lower surface 6050a.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 157 and 165, three front upper recesses 6060 (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are formed on the upper portion of the front surface 6002 of the reel adapter 6000. It is formed. The left front upper recess 6060L, the middle front upper recess 6060C, and the right front upper recess 6060R each have a rectangular parallelepiped shape at the boundary between the front 6002 and the top 6001. The left side of the left front upper recess 6060L communicates with the left step recess 6040L, and the left side of the right front upper recess 6060R communicates with the right screw hole recess 6050R.

<Reel unit RU>
FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the reel unit. FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right unit is removed from the reel unit shown in FIG. 167. FIG. 169 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from below. FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the reel frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the motor frame.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the reel unit RU includes a reel frame R10, a left unit R30L, a middle unit R30C, and a right unit R30R, and the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R are the reel frame R10. Is housed in. Since the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R have the same configuration, the configuration of the right unit R30R will be mainly described below.

The right unit R30R includes a right reel RR, a right motor frame R50R, and a right front guard R70R. FIG. 168 shows a state in which the right motor frame R50R and the right front guard R70R are removed from the right unit R30R. The right reel RR has a tubular right reel drum R31R, and a right reel band R32R on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed to the right reel drum R31R. Further, although not shown, a rotary gear having the same central axis as the right reel drum R31R is arranged inside the right reel drum R31R.

The right motor frame R50R is arranged on the right side of the right reel RR. An opening R51R is formed in the center of the right motor frame R50R, and a motor cover R52R is attached so as to fill the opening R51R. The motor cover R52R is housed in a state of covering the motor drive unit. Although not shown, the motor drive unit includes a stepping motor and a drive gear that meshes with a rotary gear.

The driving force of the stepping motor is transmitted to the right reel RR via the driving gear and the rotating gear. As a result, the right motor frame R50R supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the right reel RR. The right front guard R70R is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the right reel RR and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the right reel RR.

Similarly, the left unit R30L includes a left reel RL, a left motor frame R50L, and a left front guard R70L. The left motor frame R50L supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the left reel RL. The left front guard R70L is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the left reel RL and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the left reel RL.

Further, the middle unit R30C includes a middle reel RC, a middle motor frame R50C, and a middle front guard R70C. The middle motor frame R50C supports the stepping motor and rotatably supports the middle reel RC. The middle front guard R70C is arranged at the lower part on the front side of the middle reel RC and covers a part of the symbols arranged on the middle reel RC.

As shown in FIG. 169, the reel frame R10 is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The reel frame R10 has three first lower side surfaces R11 (left first lower side surface R11L, middle first lower side surface R11C) as surfaces defining the lower ends of the accommodation space of the left unit R30L, the middle unit R30C, and the right unit R30R. , And a right first lower side surface R11R), and three second lower side surfaces R12 (left second lower side surface R12L, middle second lower side surface R12C, and right second lower side surface R12R). For clarity, FIG. 169 shows the second lower side surface R12 with diagonal lines.

The left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R are on the right side of the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. Is formed as a recess slightly recessed with respect to these first lower side surfaces R11. A left reel RL, a middle reel RC, and a right reel RR are arranged above the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. The left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R are mounted on the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively.

The first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12 are formed to be substantially flat. Further, the reel frame R10 is a downward protruding portion that projects downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12) at the front ends of the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12. It has R13. In the lower protrusion R13, three mounting holes R14 (left mounting hole R14L, middle mounting hole R14C, and right mounting hole R14R) and one screw hole R15 are used to move the lower protrusion R13 back and forth. It is formed so as to penetrate in the direction.

On the front surface side of the downward protrusion R13, a pair of protrusions R16 are formed on the left and right sides of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R, respectively, at predetermined distances. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 170, on the back surface side of the downward protrusion R13, one on each side in the vicinity of the peripheral edges of the left mounting hole R14L, the middle mounting hole R14C, and the right mounting hole R14R, respectively. The protrusion R17 is formed.

The reel frame R10 has three first back side surfaces R18 (left first back side surface R18L, middle first back side surface R18C, and middle first back side surface R18C) as surfaces on the back side (opposite side of the first lower side surface R11 and the second lower side surface R12). It has a right first back side surface R18R) and three second back side surfaces R19 (left second back side surface R19L, middle second back side surface R19C, and right second back side surface R19R). The left first back side surface R18L, the middle first back side surface R18C, and the right first back side surface R18R correspond to the left first lower side surface R11L, the middle first lower side surface R11C, and the right first lower side surface R11R, respectively. The left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R are the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface, respectively. It corresponds to the side surface R12R.

The left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R are recesses of the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively. It has a shape that slightly protrudes downward with respect to the left first back side surface R18L, the middle first back side surface R18C, and the right first back side surface R18R.

These first back side surface R18 and second back side surface R19 are formed substantially flat, are continuous with the downward projecting portion R13 at the front end, and are continuous with the rear wall portion R20 at the rear end. The downward projecting portion R13 and the rear wall portion R20 are formed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first back surface surface R18 and the second back surface surface R19, respectively. The lower end edge of the rear wall portion R20 is positioned on the same plane as the second back surface surface R19.

As shown in FIG. 171, the reel frame R10 has two rear projecting portions R21 (right rear projecting portion R21R and left rear projecting portion R21L) projecting rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The rear projecting portion R21 has a projecting upper surface R21a projecting rearward from the rear wall portion R20. The protruding upper surface R21a is formed so as to have an inclination that is slightly lower in the rear portion, and constitutes the upper surface of the rear protruding portion R21. An upper raised portion R21b is formed on the protruding upper surface R21a. The upper raised portion R21b has a raised shape with respect to the flat protruding upper surface R21a. The size and shape of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L are substantially the same as the size and shape of the lower protrusion 6012 and the lower protrusion 6022 (see FIG. 158) in the reel adapter 6000, respectively. ing.

As shown in FIG. 172, the motor frame R50 (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) has a mounting surface R52 as a surface that defines the lower end. For the sake of clarity, the mounting surface R52 is shaded in FIG. 172. The width of the mounting surface R52 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the width of the second lower side surface R12 of the reel frame R10 in the left-right direction.

In the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R, the mounting surface R52 abuts on the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second lower side surface R12R, respectively. In this state, it is housed in the reel frame R10. As a result, the motor frame R50 is supported by the reel frame R10, and as a result, each reel RL, RC, RR and the stepping motor are also supported by the reel frame R10.

Further, the motor frame R50 has a downward projecting portion R53 projecting downward (in a direction substantially perpendicular to the mounting surface R52) at the front end of the mounting surface R52. A mounting hole R54 is formed in the downward projecting portion R53 so as to penetrate the downward projecting portion R53 in the front-rear direction. The width of the downward protrusion R53 in the left-right direction corresponds to the distance between the pair of protrusions R16 formed on the downward protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10.

In the state where the motor frame R50 is housed in the reel frame R10 (the state in which the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward protrusion R53 of the motor frame R50 is a pair of protrusions on the front side of the downward protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10. It is arranged so as to be sandwiched between R16, and the mounting hole R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 and the mounting hole R14 formed in the downward protruding portion R13 overlap each other. In this state, the motor frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10 by using the fastening member inserted through the mounting hole R54 and the mounting hole R14. In this embodiment, Niflact (registered trademark) is used as the fastening member.

<Middle board 4000>
FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the middle board.

As shown in FIG. 173, the middle board 4000 has a plate-like shape, and the upper surfaces are the first upper surface 4010, the second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the first surface. It is composed of 5 upper surfaces 4080. The second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the fifth upper surface 4080 are each formed as recesses recessed with respect to the first upper surface 4010. For clarity, FIG. 173 shows the first upper surface 4010 in diagonal lines.

A right side mounting wall portion 4001 is erected on the right side portion of the trailing edge of the middle board 4000. A screw hole 4002 is formed in the right side mounting wall portion 4001. Further, a left side mounting wall portion 4003 is erected on the left side portion of the trailing edge of the middle board 4000. A screw hole 4004 is formed in the left side mounting wall portion 4003. The middle board 4000 is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G by the screws through which the screw holes 4002 and the screw holes 4004 are inserted.

Further, the middle board 4000 is attached to another member (not shown) by a screw through which four screw holes 4005 formed in the first upper surface 4010 are inserted. The other members are attached to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L of the cabinet G, whereby the middle board 4000 is fixed to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L.

The second upper surface 4030 is formed in front of the right side mounting wall portion 4001. A rectangular opening 4031 is formed in the second upper surface 4030, and a right opening is provided along the trailing edge (rear side) of the opening 4031 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the second upper surface 4030. The installation section 4032 is erected. A rectangular opening 4033 is formed in the central portion of the standing portion 4032 with a right opening. The size and shape of the opening 4033 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the upper protrusion 6011 of the reel adapter 6000. Further, the lower edge of the opening 4033 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010.

The third upper surface 4050 is formed in front of the left side mounting wall portion 4003. A rectangular opening 4051 is formed in the third upper surface 4050, and a standing position with a left opening is formed along the trailing edge (rear side) of the opening 4051 in a direction substantially perpendicular to the third upper surface 4050. The installation section 4052 is erected. A rectangular opening 4053 is formed in the central portion of the standing portion 4052 with a left opening. The size and shape of the opening 4053 are substantially the same as the size and shape of the opening 4033 formed in the standing portion 4032 with the right opening. Further, the lower edge of the opening 4053 has substantially the same height as the first upper surface 4010.

The fourth upper surface 4070 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction in front of the second upper surface 4030 and the third upper surface 4050. The fifth upper surface 4080 is formed in front of the fourth upper surface 4070 toward the front end of the middle board 4000. The fifth upper surface 4080 includes a first raised surface 4081, a second raised surface 4082, a third raised surface 4083, and a fourth raised surface 4084 as raised portions with respect to the surrounding surface.

The second raised surface 4082 is formed with a front hole 4082a, a rear hole 4082b, and a notch 4082c. The front side hole 4082a and the rear side hole 4082b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the extending direction of the front hole 4082a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4082b are substantially parallel to each other. The front hole 4082a and the rear hole 4082b are substantially the same in size and shape.

Similarly, the third raised surface 4083 is formed with a front hole 4083a, a rear hole 4083b, and a notch 4083c. The front side hole 4083a and the rear side hole 4083b are formed in a rectangular shape with slightly rounded corners as through holes that penetrate the middle board 4000 in the vertical direction. The front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and the extending direction of the front hole 4083a and the extending direction of the rear hole 4083b are substantially parallel to each other. The front hole 4083a and the rear hole 4083b are substantially the same in size and shape. A notch 4084a is formed on the fourth raised surface 4084.

A screw hole 4085 is formed between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082. A screw hole 4086 is formed between the second raised surface 4082 and the third raised surface 4083. A screw hole 4087 is formed between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084.

The first upper surface 4010, the second upper surface 4030, the third upper surface 4050, the fourth upper surface 4070, and the fifth upper surface 4080 (first raised surface 4081, second raised surface 4082, third raised surface 4083, and , 4th raised surface 4084) are all formed substantially flat and arranged substantially horizontally.

<Mounting of reel adapter 6000 on middle board 4000>
FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is mounted on the middle board. FIG. 175 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is slightly displaced with respect to the middle board from the state shown in FIG. 174. FIG. 176 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the step recess in a state where the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 are cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 174 as viewed from the side. FIG. 178 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the middle board shown in FIG. 177 in a state of being cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

When the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000 (see FIG. 174, the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the upper surface 6001, the front surface 6002, the rear surface 6003, and the lower end of the side surface 6005 of the reel adapter 6000. The edge and the lower edge of the rib 6032 (see FIG. 163) protruding downward from the bottom surface 6031a come into contact with the first upper surface 4010 (see FIG. 173) of the middle board 4000.

In this state, the recess 6050L for the left screw hole of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 located between the first raised surface 4081 and the second raised surface 4082. , The right side screw hole recess 6050R of the reel adapter 6000 is arranged above the portion of the fifth upper surface 4080 of the middle board 4000 that is located between the third raised surface 4083 and the fourth raised surface 4084 (FIG. 175). reference).

At this time, the screw hole 6050c of the screw hole recess 6050 (the left screw hole recess 6050L and the right screw hole recess 6050R) overlaps with the screw hole 4085 and the screw hole 4087 of the middle board 4000, and these screw holes are inserted. The reel adapter 6000 is fastened to the middle board 4000 using the screw. Although not shown, a downwardly projecting portion is formed on the back side of the lower surface 6050a (see FIG. 165) of the screw hole recess 6050, and the portion is stable when it comes into contact with the fifth upper surface 4080. Can be screwed to.

FIG. 176 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut on a vertical surface (plane in the front-rear direction) passing through the left step recess 6040L in a state where the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000. As shown in FIG. 176, in this state, the lower protrusion 6041 (see FIG. 166) formed in the lower part of the left step recess 6040L of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4082a of the middle board 4000. Similarly, although not shown, a lower protrusion 6041 formed in the lower part of the right step recess 6040R of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the front hole 4083a of the middle board 4000.

The size and shape of the lower protrusion 6041 correspond to the size and shape of the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, and when the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, the lower side The protrusion 6041 is substantially in contact with or close to the wall portions (wall portions formed in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, respectively) forming the peripheral edges of the front side hole 4082a and the front side hole 4083a, and the lower protrusion 6041 and the peripheral wall portion The interval is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the movement of the lower protrusion 6041 in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the misalignment in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. It can be carried out.

In the present embodiment, the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a, but in other embodiments, the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b. There is also. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device is not mounted on the front door, but the present invention can be applied to a game machine equipped with the liquid crystal display device. When the liquid crystal display device is mounted on the front door, the thickness of the front door increases, and it is necessary to arrange the reel unit RU rearward by the amount of the increase in the thickness of the front door.

In this regard, if the reel adapter 6000 is placed on the middle board 4000 so that the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b, the reel unit RU can be positioned rearward from the present embodiment. It is possible to easily respond to such design changes. The screw hole 6050c of the reel adapter 6000 has an elliptical shape that is long in the front-rear direction. As a result, the reel can be used regardless of whether the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the front hole 4082a and the front hole 4083a or the lower protrusion 6041 is inserted into the rear hole 4082b and the rear hole 4083b. The screw hole 6050c of the adapter 6000 overlaps with the screw hole 4085 and the screw hole 4087 of the middle board 4000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 177, when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the lower protrusion 6012 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is a vertical portion with a right opening of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into the opening 4033 (see FIG. 173) formed in 4032, and a part of the lower protrusion 6012 projects rearward of the opening 4033. Similarly, the lower protrusion 6022 (see FIG. 158) of the reel adapter 6000 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the left opening standing portion 4052 of the middle board 4000, and the lower protrusion 6022 A part protrudes to the rear of the opening 4053.

FIG. 178 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the middle board 4000 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion 6012b (see FIG. 161) of the lower protruding portion 6012. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the standing portion 4032 with the right opening are shown in black, the back surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown. Is shaded, and the portion of the lower protruding portion 6012 of the reel adapter 6000 other than the cut surface is indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 178, the upper end of the lower protrusion 6012 is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protrusion 6012 and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the lower protrusion 6022 is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the lower protrusion 6022 and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the upward movement of the lower protrusion 6012 and the lower protrusion 6022 is restricted, and when the reel adapter 6000 is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the vertical displacement. It can be carried out.

<Mounting of reel unit RU on reel adapter 6000>
FIG. 179 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is mounted on the reel adapter. FIG. 180 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel adapter is shifted downward with respect to the reel unit from the state shown in FIG. 179. FIG. 181 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a state in which the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 are cut in the vertical direction in the left-right direction. FIG. 182 is a cross-sectional view in a state where the reel unit is fastened to the reel adapter. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame in the state shown in FIG. 179 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 184 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel adapter and the reel frame shown in FIG. 183 in a state of being cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

In the state where the reel unit RU is mounted on the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 179, the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the left reel RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR are reel adapters, respectively. It is arranged above the upper left surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R (see FIG. 157) of the 6000. Further, the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R (see FIG. 168) have the recess non-forming region 6001b, the recess non-forming region 6001c, and the recess non-forming region 6001d of the reel adapter 6000, respectively. It is located above (see FIG. 157) (see FIG. 180). Note that FIG. 180 shows a state in which the left front guard R70L, the middle front guard R70C, and the right front guard R70R are removed from the reel unit RU.

FIG. 181 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the left-right direction) passing through the upper left surface recess 6030L, the middle upper surface recess 6030C, and the right upper surface recess 6030R. As shown in FIG. 181, in this state, the left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the right second back side surface R19R (see FIG. 170) of the reel frame R10 are reel adapters 6000, respectively. In contact with the concave non-formed region 6001b, the concave non-formed region 6001c, and the concave non-formed region 6001d. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 181, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown in black, and the left second lower side surface R12L, the middle second lower side surface R12C, and the right second side are shown. 2 The lower side surface R12R (the left second back side surface R19L, the middle second back side surface R19C, and the front side surface corresponding to the right second back side surface R19R, see FIG. 169) is shaded.

In FIG. 182, when the reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the vertical plane (front-back direction) passes through the right front upper recess 6060R (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000. (Surface) shows how it was cut. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 182, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown in black, the cut surface of the right motor frame R50R is shown by shading, and the fastening member R100R (FIG. A part of (see 180) is shown by diagonal lines.

As described above, when the motor frame R50 is housed in the reel frame R10 (the assembly of the game machine 1 is completed), the downward protrusion R53 (see FIG. 172) of the motor frame R50 is below the reel frame R10. A mounting hole R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 and a mounting hole R14 formed in the downward protruding portion R13, which are arranged on the front surface side of the protruding portion R13 (see FIG. 169), overlap each other. In this state, a motor is used by using a fastening member (in this embodiment, a Nif latch (registered trademark), a fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R shown in FIG. 180) inserted through the mounting hole R54 and the mounting hole R14. The frame R50 is fastened to the reel frame R10.

As shown in FIG. 182, the mounting hole R54 formed in the downward protruding portion R53 of the right motor frame R50R and the right mounting hole R14R formed in the downward protruding portion R13 of the reel frame R10 are right front surfaces of the reel adapter 6000. It is arranged on the front side of the upper recess 6060R, and a part of the fastening member R100R is housed in the right front upper recess 6060R. Further, the back surface of the lower protrusion R53 of the right motor frame R50R and the front surface of the lower protrusion R13 of the reel frame R10 are in contact with each other, and the back surface of the reel frame R10 of the lower protrusion R13. And the front surface 6002 (see FIG. 157) of the reel adapter 6000 are in contact with each other.

Note that FIG. 182 shows that a part of the fastening member R100R for fastening the right motor frame R50R to the reel frame R10 is housed in the right front upper recess 6060R of the reel adapter 6000. A part of the fastening member R100L for fastening the left motor frame R50L to the reel frame R10 is housed in the left front upper recess 6060L of the reel adapter 6000, and for fastening the middle motor frame R50C to the reel frame R10. A part of the fastening member R100C is housed in the middle front upper recess 6060C of the reel adapter 6000.

Further, as described above, the screw hole R15 is formed in the downward protruding portion R13 of the reel frame R10, while the boss portion 6070 is formed in the upper portion of the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 180). In the state where the reel unit RU is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the screw hole R15 and the boss portion 6070 are overlapped with each other, and the screw through which the screw hole R15 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 6070. The reel unit RU is fastened to the reel adapter 6000.

Further, as shown in FIG. 183, when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the right rear protruding portion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is above the reel adapter 6000. It is inserted into the opening 6013 (see FIG. 160) formed by the protrusion 6011, and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R projects rearward of the opening 6013. Similarly, the left rear protrusion R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 6023 formed by the upper protrusion 6021 of the reel adapter 6000, and a part of the left rear protrusion R21L is rearward of the opening 6023. It stands out.

FIG. 184 shows a state in which the reel adapter 6000 and the reel frame R10 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear protruding portion R21R. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the reel adapter 6000 and the rear end surface of the upper protruding portion 6011 (see FIG. 159) are shown in black, the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shaded, and the right rear protruding portion R21R of the reel frame R10 is shown. Of these, the parts other than the cut surface are indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c in the upper protruding portion 6011, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear protruding portion R21R and the lower end of the connecting portion 6011c. Is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear protruding portion R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the lower end of the connecting portion 6021c in the upper protruding portion 6021, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear protruding portion R21L and the lower end of the connecting portion 6021c. Is less than or equal to a predetermined distance (for example, 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.). As a result, the upward movement of the right rear protruding portion R21R and the left rear protruding portion R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU (reel frame R10) is mounted on the reel adapter 6000, the displacement in the vertical direction is suppressed. At the same time, alignment can be performed.

<Mounting of reel unit RU on middle board 4000>
FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel unit is mounted on the middle board. FIG. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the reel unit and the middle board shown in FIG. 185 in a state of being cut in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reel adapter 6000 is interposed between the middle board 4000 and the reel unit RU, whereas in the sixth embodiment, the reel unit RU is directly mounted on the middle board 4000. It is placed (see FIGS. 95 and 96). FIG. 185 shows a state in which the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000 in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000, the right rear protrusion R21R (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is mounted on the right opening vertical portion 4032 of the middle board 4000. It is inserted into the formed opening 4033 (see FIG. 173), and a part of the right rear protrusion R21R projects rearward of the opening 4033. Similarly, the left rear protrusion R21L (see FIG. 171) of the reel frame R10 is inserted into the opening 4053 (see FIG. 173) formed in the left opening standing portion 4052 of the middle board 4000, and the left rear protrusion R21L A part protrudes to the rear of the opening 4053.

FIG. 186 shows a state in which the reel unit RU and the middle board 4000 are cut at a surface (vertical surface in the front-rear direction) passing through the highest portion of the upper raised portion R21b (see FIG. 171) of the right rear protruding portion R21R. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the middle board 4000 and the standing portion 4032 with the right opening are shown in black, the back surface of the right mounting wall portion 4001 of the middle board 4000 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the reel frame R10 is shown. Is shaded, and the portion of the reel frame R10 on the right rear protruding portion R21R other than the cut surface is indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 186, the upper end of the right rear protrusion R21R is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4033, and the distance between the upper end of the right rear protrusion R21R and the upper edge of the opening 4033 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. Although not shown, similarly, the upper end of the left rear protrusion R21L is substantially in contact with or close to the upper edge of the opening 4053, and the distance between the upper end of the left rear protrusion R21L and the upper edge of the opening 4053 is a predetermined distance (for example). , 0.5 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.1 mm, etc.) or less. As a result, the upward movement of the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L is restricted, and when the reel unit RU is mounted on the middle board 4000, the alignment is performed while suppressing the vertical displacement. It can be carried out.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The stepping motor is operated based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

As such a conventional game machine, a game machine in which the layout of the front door can be easily changed is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-128389).

However, even if the layout of the front door can be easily changed, if the position of the reel (variable display unit) is changed, it is necessary to drastically change the design inside the housing. There was a problem that the cost increased.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily and at low cost to change the position of the variable display unit.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A visible area (main display window DD4) that makes the variable display of the variable display unit visible to the player, and
A mounting member (reel adapter 6000) on which the variable display unit is mounted and having a predetermined height,
It is equipped with an installation unit (middle board 4000) on which the above-mentioned mounting members are installed.
The installation portion and the visible area are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.
The above-mentioned mounting member is installed in the mounting portion, and the variable display unit is placed on the mounting member.
The vertical position of the variable display unit is fixed so that the variable display unit can be easily viewed through the visible area.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the player displays the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) via the visible area (main display window DD4). The visible area (main display window DD4) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. A mounting member (reel adapter 6000) is installed in the installation unit (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). The mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a predetermined height, and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is visible via a visible area (main display window DD4). The vertical position of the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is fixed so that it can be easily seen. That is, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned higher by interposing a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU). This makes it possible to make the arrangement position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) correspond to the height of the visible area (main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily see the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Therefore, the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed easily and at low cost.

In the seventh embodiment, the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) are described as being superimposed in front view. “Superimposition” means that when viewed from a predetermined direction, the position of at least a part of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) coincides with the visible area (main display window DD4). This means that at least a part of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). In the present invention, it is not necessary that the visible area (main display window DD4) and the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) completely match in front view. .. For example, when the player looks down on the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) through the visible area (main display window DD4) from diagonally above ( For example, when the present invention is applied to a game machine in which a large liquid crystal is provided but the reels are small and low (below the liquid crystal), the variable display is displayed when viewed from diagonally above. Since the position of at least a part of the unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) matches the visible area (main display window DD4), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel) At least a part of the RC and the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4). Further, when the player looks up at the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) through the visible area (main display window DD4) from diagonally below ( For example, when the present invention is applied to a game machine in which the reel is arranged slightly above the housing (above the liquid crystal), the variable display unit (left reel) is viewed from diagonally below. Since the positions of at least a part of the RL, the middle reel RC, and the right reel RR match the visible area (main display window DD4), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) At least a part of the right reel RR) may be visible through the visible area (main display window DD4).

In the present invention, when the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is viewed from the height assumed as the height of the player's line of sight (viewpoint assumed position), the variable display is displayed. The parts (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) should be at a height that makes it easy to see (for example, when the player looks down at the reel, the reel is placed slightly lower than the main display window. It is possible to design the height of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) so that when the player looks up at the reel, the reel is arranged slightly higher than the main display window). Further, in the present invention, by interposing a mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is not only positioned upward (raised upward) but also as a result of raising (raised). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be positioned diagonally upward (compared to the previous case). That is, the mounting surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a structure for tilting the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting surface. When placed, the reel is slightly tilted toward the player's point of view assumption position so that the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be easily seen by the player (for example, the player's viewpoint is assumed. It may be configured so that it is arranged so as to be tilted). For example, an inclined portion may be provided on the top surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) (the upper surface of the mounting member may be configured to have an inclination). In this case, the visible area (main display window DD4) may also be arranged in an inclined state. For example, the upper surface of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) may be configured to have an inclination substantially perpendicular to the inclination of the visible region (main display window DD4).

(D-1') The game machine according to (D-1).
The above-mentioned placing member includes a first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022).
The variable display unit includes a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L).
The installation portion includes a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with a right opening and standing portion 4052 with a left opening).
The first position defining unit and the third position defining portion define the relative positions of the above-mentioned placing member and the variable display unit within a predetermined range.
The second position defining portion and the fourth positioning portion define the relative positions of the above-mentioned mounting member and the installation portion within a predetermined range.
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation unit without using the above-mentioned placing member, the third position defining unit and the fourth position defining unit are relative to the variable display unit and the installation unit. Position can be specified within a predetermined range,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) has a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and an upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) is provided with a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) is provided with 6012 and a lower protruding portion 6022). , A fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening) is provided. The first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) are a mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and a variable display unit (reel adapter 6000). The position relative to the reel unit RU) is defined within a predetermined range, and the second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining portion (standing with a right opening) are defined. The portion 4032 and the standing portion with opening on the left side (4052) define the relative positions of the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the installation portion (middle board 4000) within a predetermined range. As a result, the mounting member (reel adapter 6000) uses the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L). And the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be aligned, and the second position defining part (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining part (standing with right opening). The mounting member (reel adapter 6000) and the mounting portion (middle board 4000) can be aligned by using the setting portion 4032 and the standing portion 4052 with a left opening. Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation unit (middle board 4000) without using the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), the third position defining unit (right rear protrusion) The variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation unit (middle board 4000) are the part R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) and the fourth position defining part (right side opening standing part 4032 and left side opening standing part 4052). It is possible to specify the relative position with and within a predetermined range. As a result, in this case, the third position defining part (right side rear protruding part R21R and left side rear protruding part R21L) and the fourth position defining part (right side opening standing part 4032 and left side opening standing part 4052) are separated. It can be used to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) and the installation unit (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000), while via the mounting member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to place it directly on the installation part (middle board 4000) without any need. Therefore, regardless of the position change (presence or absence of mounting member (reel adapter 6000)) of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and It is possible to use the installation unit (middle board 4000), and the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed more easily, and the cost is further increased. You can try to go down.

(D-2) A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A visible area (main display window DD4) that makes the variable display of the variable display unit visible to the player, and
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the visible area by a predetermined distance, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance, and has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance.
The intervening member is installed in the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
The intervening member has recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) on the upper surface, and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) on the bottom surface on the back side of the recess. The length of the provided rib is shorter than the length of the rib provided on the back side of the region where the recess is not formed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the player displays the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) via the visible area (main display window DD4). The installation unit (middle board 4000) is arranged below the visible area (main display window DD4) by a predetermined distance. An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is installed in the installation portion (middle board 4000), and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Here, since the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a height corresponding to the predetermined distance, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and) The arrangement position of the right reel RR)) can be made to correspond to the height of the visible area (main display window DD4). Therefore, as a result of using the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily see the variable display of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Yes, the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed easily and at low cost. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is provided with recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) on the upper surface, and the bottom surface. Ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) are provided on the back side of the recesses (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right upper surface recess 6030R), and the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) are provided. ) Is the length of the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) provided on the back side of the region where the recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) are not formed. It is shorter than the length. In this regard, a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) receives a corresponding load associated with the variable display unit (reel unit RU). Although it occurs, the present inventor forms recesses (upper left recess 6030L, middle upper recess 6030C, and right upper recess 6030R) and ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) in such an manner. It has been found that sufficient strength can be obtained to withstand the load. Further, the present inventor has made the ribs (left and right ribs 6032a and front and rear ribs 6032b) different in length in such an manner, so that the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be used at the molding stage of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). Was found to be easier to remove from the mold. As a result, the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be improved while efficiently molding the intervening member (reel adapter 6000).

(D-2') The gaming machine according to (D-2).
The intervening member includes a first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022).
The variable display unit includes a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L).
The installation portion includes a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with a right opening and standing portion 4052 with a left opening).
One of the first position defining part and the third position defining part can be inserted into the other.
One of the second positioning portion and the fourth positioning portion can be inserted into the other.
When the variable display unit is installed on the installation portion without the intervention member, one of the third position defining portion and the fourth position defining portion can be inserted into the other. ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) includes a first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and an upper protruding portion 6021) and a second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012). The variable display unit (reel unit RU) is provided with a third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L), and the installation portion (middle board 4000) is provided. It is provided with a fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening). One of the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) can be inserted into the other. One of the second position defining part (lower protrusion 6012 and lower protrusion 6022) and the fourth position defining part (right side opening standing part 4032 and left side opening standing part 4052) is the other. Can be inserted into. As a result, by using the first position defining portion (upper protrusion 6011 and upper protrusion 6021) and the third position defining portion (right rear protrusion R21R and left rear protrusion R21L) (by inserting one into the other). ), The intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be aligned, and the second position defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) and the second position are defined. Intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and installation part (middle board 4000) using four position defining parts (standing part 4032 with right opening and standing part 4052 with left opening) (by inserting one into the other) It can be aligned with. Here, if the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is installed on the installation portion (middle board 4000) without the intervention member (reel adapter 6000), the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion) is installed. One of the R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052) can be inserted into the other. As a result, in this case, the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) and the fourth position defining portion (right side opening standing portion 4032 and left side opening standing portion 4052) are formed. It can be used (by inserting one into the other) to align the variable display unit (reel unit RU) with the installation unit (middle board 4000). Therefore, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000) via the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), but without intervening member (reel adapter 6000). It is also possible to place it directly on the installation part (middle board 4000). Therefore, regardless of the position change (presence or absence of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000)) of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR), the common variable display unit (reel unit RU) and installation. It is possible to use the unit (middle board 4000), and the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) can be changed more easily, and the cost can be further reduced. Can be planned.

In the seventh embodiment, the third position defining portion (right rear protruding portion R21R and left rear protruding portion R21L) can be inserted into the first position defining portion (upper protruding portion 6011 and upper protruding portion 6021), and the second position can be inserted. The defining portion (lower protruding portion 6012 and lower protruding portion 6022) can be inserted into the fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening), and the third positioning portion (3rd position defining portion ( It has been described that the right rear protrusion R21R and the left rear protrusion R21L) can be inserted into the fourth position defining portion (standing portion 4032 with right opening and standing portion 4052 with left opening). In the present invention, the first position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be inserted into the third position defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position defining portion (projecting in a predetermined direction) may be inserted. (Structure) may be inserted into the second position defining portion (opening or recess), or the fourth position defining portion (structure protruding in a predetermined direction) may be inserted into the third position defining portion (opening or recess). It may be insertable.

(D-3) A plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and a plurality of drive units for driving each of the variable display units. A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a (motor drive unit) and a plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) that support each of the drive units.
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
On the upper part of the intervening member, three recesses, a first recess (upper left recess 6030L), a second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C), and a third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R), are formed in the left-right direction. Formed to line up,
In the upper part of the intervening member, between the first recess and the second recess, between the second recess and the third recess, and the second recess in the third recess. On the opposite side to each other, a recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001c, and recess non-forming region 6001d) in which the recess is not formed is formed.
The plurality of variable display units are respectively positioned above the recess, and the plurality of support members are respectively positioned above the recess non-forming region.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation portion (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel) is placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned upward by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) as compared with the case where the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right). The effect of raising the position of the reel RR) has been obtained, which makes it possible to easily and inexpensively change the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). it can. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the upper portion of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) has a first recess (upper left recess 6030L), a second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C), and an upper surface recess 6030C. , The third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R) is formed so as to be lined up in the left-right direction. Thereby, the wall portion can be provided in the height direction of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), and the strength of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be improved. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, in the upper part of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), between the first recess (upper left recess 6030L) and the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C). , Between the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) and the third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R), and with the second recess (middle upper surface recess 6030C) in the third recess (right upper surface recess 6030R). On the opposite side, recess non-forming regions (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001c, and recess non-forming region 6001d) are formed, respectively. Here, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) and each variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and A plurality of drive units (motor drive units) for driving the right reel RR) and a plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor) that support each drive unit (motor drive unit). The frame R50R) and the plurality of variable display units (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) have recesses (upper left surface recess 6030L, middle upper surface recess 6030C, and right), respectively. The plurality of support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are positioned above the upper surface recess 6030R), and the recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming, respectively). It is positioned above the region 6001c and the recess non-forming region 6001d). The support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) supports the drive unit (motor drive unit), and the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) supports the support member (left motor frame R50L). , Middle motor frame R50C and right motor frame R50R), a corresponding load is generated by the drive unit (motor drive unit), but the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C) , And the right motor frame R50R) is positioned above the recess non-forming region (recess non-forming region 6001b, recess non-forming region 6001c, and recess non-forming region 6001d), so that the load is concentrated locally. It is possible to prevent this. Thereby, the load can be dispersed and the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) (drive unit (motor drive unit)) can be supported in a well-balanced manner.

(D-4) A variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and a support member (left motor frame R50L, middle) that supports the variable display unit. A variable display unit (reel unit RU) having a motor frame R50C and a right motor frame R50R), an accommodating portion (reel frame R10) for accommodating the variable display unit and the support member, and a variable display unit (reel unit RU).
An installation unit (middle board 4000) arranged below the variable display unit, and
An intervening member (reel adapter 6000) arranged between the variable display unit and the installation portion is provided.
The intervening member is installed on the installation portion, and the variable display unit is arranged on the intervening member.
A plurality of recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are formed on the front side of the intervening member.
The support member is attached to the accommodating portion by using an attachment member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R).
Mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) through which at least a part of the mounting members are inserted are formed in the support member and the accommodating portion, respectively.
A part of the mounting member through which the mounting hole is inserted is arranged in the recess.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the installation portion (middle board 4000) is arranged below the variable display unit (reel unit RU), and the intervening member (reel) is placed on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The adapter 6000) is installed, and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is arranged on the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). As a result, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is positioned upward by the height of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) as compared with the case where the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) is not installed. That is, by interposing an intervening member (reel adapter 6000) between the installation unit (middle board 4000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU), the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right). The effect of raising the position of the reel RR) has been obtained, which makes it possible to easily and inexpensively change the position of the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). it can. Further, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is a support member (left) that supports the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR). Motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R), variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) and support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, It also has an accommodating portion (reel frame R10) for accommodating the right motor frame R50R), and the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are support members (reel frame R50R). Partially inserted into the mounting holes (mounting holes R54 and mounting holes R14) formed in the left motor frame R50L, the middle motor frame R50C, and the right motor frame R50R) and the accommodating portion (reel frame R10), respectively. It is attached to the accommodating portion (reel frame R10) by using an attachment member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R). As a result, when the support members (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) are attached to the accommodating portion (reel frame R10), the attachment holes (attachment holes R54 and attachment holes R14) are attached. A part of the mounting members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R) through which the above is inserted is in a state of protruding in the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Here, if a recess is not formed at a position corresponding to the mounting hole (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) on the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000), the protruding mounting member Intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and variable display unit (reel unit RU) (support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and middle motor frame R50C) , Right motor frame R50R) or accommodating portion (reel frame R10)) must be separated to some extent. However, according to the game machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, there are a plurality of recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060C) on the front side of the intervening member (reel adapter 6000). 6060R) is formed, and a part of the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R) through which the mounting hole (mounting hole R54 and mounting hole R14) is inserted is the recess (left front upper recess 6060L). , The middle front upper recess 6060C and the right front upper recess 6060R) are arranged (stored). Therefore, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) (support member (left motor frame R50L, middle motor frame R50C, and right motor frame R50R) or accommodating portion (reel frame R10)) Even if these are arranged in contact with each other, the recesses (left front upper recess 6060L, middle front upper recess 6060C, and right front upper recess 6060R) are attached to the mounting members (fastening members R100L, 100C, 100R). Since it can be used as an arrangement space, it is possible to realize such an arrangement in a contact state. As a result, the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) and the variable display unit (reel unit RU) can be fixed in contact with each other, and the variable display unit (reel unit) with respect to the intervening member (reel adapter 6000) can be fixed. The mounting strength of RU) can be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that Nifratch (registered trademark) is used as the mounting member (fastening member R100L, 100C, 100R). In the present invention, in addition to general screws (screws), conventionally known mounting members such as (button type) panel fasteners can be appropriately adopted.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the number of reels adopted as the variable display unit (left reel RL, middle reel RC, and right reel RR) is three. However, in the present invention, the number of reels is not limited to this, and may be one, two, or four or more. Further, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be provided with a number of recesses (upper surface recesses 6030) corresponding to the number of reels (the same number as the number of reels).

Further, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) in the present invention includes four reels in a housing on the premise that three reels are arranged when one reel is added (for example, three reels are arranged). It may be used for (when repairing to the mounted housing). In such a case, although the original housing has an installation part for installing three reels, the addition is made because there is no installation part for installing one additional reel. It may be necessary to provide an installation part for installing one reel to be added, or it may be necessary to adjust the height of one additional reel. In such a case, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be used for the arrangement portion of the reel to be added.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the variable display unit (reel unit RU) includes a main reel (variable display unit relating to the progress of the game and winning a prize), and the height of the main reel is adjusted. However, in the present invention, in order to adjust the height of the effect reel (variable display device for effect, sub reel) that does not affect the winning, the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is used as in the seventh embodiment. ) Etc. may be used. Further, the mechanism may be adopted for the effect reel (reel for producing the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the game) in the pachinko gaming machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). However, in the present invention, a game machine component other than the variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be mounted on a pedestal mechanism similar to the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). For example, a height adjusting mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) having the same function as that of the seventh embodiment is used so that the movable decorative unit for directing and the like can be easily seen by the player. May be. The movable decorative portion may move only inside the game machine, or may move from the inside of the game machine to the outside (above or in front of the game machine, etc.). In this way, by adjusting the height of the arrangement of various gaming machine components using the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000), the housing of the pachislot gaming machine and the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine (outside). Since it is not necessary to make major design changes (frame, main body frame), it is possible to reduce costs when creating a new gaming machine.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is arranged on the installation portion (middle board 4000). The installation portion in the present invention is not limited to the middle board, and a member on which a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) can be installed can be appropriately adopted. For example, a bottom plate of a housing (cabinet) is adopted as an installation portion, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on the bottom plate, and the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is placed on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). A variable display unit (reel unit RU) may be mounted. Further, in the present invention, when the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is installed on a member other than the middle board, the middle board may not be provided in the housing (cabinet). For example, in a managed gaming machine that can be played only by using the gaming value managed by electronic data without using a gaming medium such as a medal, parts such as a hopper are unnecessary. In this case, a middle board is used. A mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) may be installed on the bottom plate of the housing without the provision.

In the seventh embodiment, it has been described that the installation portion (middle board 4000) is attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and is fixed to the right side wall G2R and the left side wall G2L. In the present invention, the installation portion (middle board 4000) may be fixed to any of the plates (back plate, left and right plates, bottom plate, etc.) constituting the housing (cabinet), for example, the back wall G3. It may be attached only to the right side wall G2R and / or only one of the left side wall G2L.

Another example of the installation part in the present invention is a middle door. The middle door is a small door (a door placed between the front door and the cabinet) that is placed behind the front door (front door), and is configured to be rotatable with respect to the front door and has a variable display. A unit (reel unit RU) is mounted. In this example, a mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000) is mounted on an installation portion provided on the middle door, and a variable display unit (reel unit RU) is mounted on the mounting member (intervening member: reel adapter 6000). May be placed.

[8th Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to seventh embodiments also applies to the eighth embodiment.

<Lumbar panel 7000>
FIG. 187 is a front view of the lumbar panel. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 189 is a perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the rear. FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 191 is an exploded perspective view of the lumbar panel as viewed from the rear.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 1) is provided with the lumbar panel DD18 (see FIG. 3). On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the lumbar panel 7000 shown in FIG. 187 is provided in the region below the center of the front door.

As shown in FIGS. 187 to 191, the lumbar panel 7000 includes a lower panel film 7100, a lower panel base 7200, a lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L), and a lower panel back 7400. The lower panel lower 7500, the lower panel right 7600, and the lower panel left 7700 are provided.

The lower panel base 7200 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel film 7100, the lower panel frame 7300 is arranged on the front side of the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel film 7100. , The lower panel lower 7500 is arranged on the back side in the lower portion of the lower panel back 7400. Further, the lower panel right 7600 and the lower panel left 7700 constitute a right side portion and a left side portion (right side wall and left side wall) of the lumbar panel 7000, respectively. Although not shown, a light emitting mechanism in which a plurality of LEDs are installed on an LED substrate may be arranged on the back side of the lower panel back 7400 and above the lower panel lower 7500.

The lower panel base 7200 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and is decorated in the shape of a three-dimensional shape (for example, a character shape indicating a logo or the like according to the model) which is not shown. There is. The lower panel film 7100 is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) and is provided with a pattern or pattern (for example, a pattern or pattern corresponding to the decoration applied to the lower panel base 7200) which is not shown. There is. The lower panel film 7100 can be formed by printing a light-shielding ink on a pattern printing sheet.

Similar to the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, the lower panel lower 7500, the lower panel right 7600, and the lower panel left 7700 also have translucency. On the other hand, the lower panel frame 7300 does not have translucency, and the portion of the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel base 7200 that overlaps with the lower panel frame 7300 in the front view is the lower panel frame 7300. It is covered and invisible. In FIG. 187, the lower panel frame 7300 is shown in black. The lower panel frame 7300 is three-dimensionally decorated with irregularities.

<Lower panel film 7100>
FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the lower panel film viewed from slightly above. FIG. 193 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel film. FIG. 194 is a schematic view of a cut surface of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 193. FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing a state in which the lower panel frame is arranged on the front surface side of the lower panel film shown in FIG. 192.

As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the lower panel film 7100 has a curved shape of a flexible flat sheet. FIG. 193 shows a state in which the lower panel film 7100 is cut on a horizontal plane, and the cut surface is shown thick for easy understanding.

Specifically, the lower panel film 7100 includes a central portion 7101 extending to the left and right, and a right curved portion 7102 formed having a curved shape from the right end (point A shown in FIG. 193) of the central portion 7101 to the rear. , From the left curved portion 7103 formed with a curved shape from the left end of the central portion 7101 (point B shown in FIG. 193) to the rear and the right end (rear end: point C shown in FIG. 193) of the right curved portion 7102. It has a right rear portion 7104 extending rearward and a left rear portion 7105 extending rearward from the left end (rear end: point D shown in FIG. 193) of the left curved portion 7103.

The lower panel film 7100 has a shape that is substantially symmetrical except that a notch 7102a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7102. Further, the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, and the left curved portion 7103 are each curved so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The central portion 7101 is only slightly curved, and the curvatures of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 are considerably larger than the curvature of the central portion 7101. For example, the radius of curvature of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 is 1/5 or less (or 1/10 or less, 1/20 or less, 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the radius of curvature of the central portion 7101. ).

The curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of bending of a curve or curved surface, but the degree of local bending can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the radius of curvature of the circumference of radius r is 1 / r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc, while if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature is represented by a predetermined function that represents the degree of bending of the curve. Can be done.

The curvature at any position on the right curved portion 7102 and at any position on the left curved portion 7103 is larger than the curvature at any position on the central portion 7101. Correspondingly, the left-right length of the right-curved portion 7102 and the left-right length of the left-curved portion 7103 (r ₂ shown in FIG. 194 (a)) are the left-right lengths of the central portion 7101. _{While shorter than (r 1} shown in FIG. 194 (a)), the length in the front-rear direction of the right curved portion 7102 and the length in the front-rear direction of the left curved portion 7103 (r _{4 shown in FIG. 194 (a)).} ) is longer than the longitudinal length of the central portion 7101 _{r 3} shown in (FIG. 194 (a)).

Further, before and after the _{straight line (L 2} (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) perpendicular to the _{tangent line (L 1} (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) at an arbitrary point Y on the right curved portion 7102. The angle (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) with the straight line in the direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is a tangent line at an arbitrary point X on the central portion 7101 (L _{1 shown in FIG. 194 (b)). The angle between the straight line perpendicular to (X)) (L 2} (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and the straight line in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) (in FIG. 194 (b)). It is larger than α) shown.

Similarly, although not shown, the angle formed by the straight line perpendicular to the tangent at any point on the left curved portion 7103 and the straight line in the front-rear direction (L shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is on the central portion 7101. _{A straight line perpendicular to the tangent line (L 1} (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) at an arbitrary point X ( _{L 2} (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and a straight line in the front-rear direction (FIG. 194 (b)). ) Is larger than the angle formed by L) (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)).

FIG. 195 shows the lower panel film 7100 and the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) in a state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationships. Therefore, the illustration of other components is omitted. For the sake of clarity, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 195, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are arranged at positions where they overlap with a part of the right bending portion 7102 and the left bending portion 7103 of the lower panel film 7100, respectively, in front view. There is. As a result, a part of the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103 is hidden.

<Lower panel base 7200>
FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as viewed from the front and slightly above. FIG. 197 is a perspective view of the lower panel base viewed from diagonally below. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower panel base as viewed from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the lower panel base as viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIGS. 196 to 198, the lower panel base 7200 has a main body portion 7210 having a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100, and a lower side portion 7220 formed by bending the lower end of the main body portion 7210 rearward. And have.

The lower side portion 7220 is a first inclined portion 7221 formed continuously from the lower end of the main body portion 7210 toward the diagonally rearward, and a first inclined portion 7221 which is continuously formed from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7221 toward the diagonally rearward. It has a second inclined portion 7222 formed so as to have a gentler inclination than 7221, and a horizontal portion 7223 formed continuously from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7222 toward the rear. The horizontal portion 7223 is arranged substantially horizontally. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 197, the first inclined portion 7221 is shaded, the second inclined portion 7222 is shown by an oblique line, and the horizontal portion 7223 is shown in black.

The main body 7210 has a central portion 7211 extending to the left and right, a right curved portion 7212 formed to have a curved shape from the right end to the rear of the central portion 7211, and a curved shape from the left end to the rear of the central portion 7211. 7213, a right rear portion 7214 extending from the right end to the rear of the right curved portion 7212, and a left rear portion 7215 extending from the left end to the rear of the left curved portion 7213. ing.

In the state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled, the central portion 7211, the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 are the central portion 7101 and the right curved portion 7101 of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

Three screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c) are formed in the right curved portion 7212, and one temporary fixing hole 7235 is formed. Three screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c) are formed in the left curved portion 7213, and one temporary fixing hole 7245 is formed. These screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240, as well as temporary fixing holes 7235 and temporary fixing holes 7245 are formed as through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 199, a peripheral wall portion 7231 is formed around the screw hole 7230 at a position recessed with respect to the back surface 7216 of the main body portion 7210. In other words, the vicinity of the screw hole 7230 has a shape in which a concave circular recess 7232 is formed with respect to the back surface 7216 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the recess 7232. The opening corresponds to the screw hole 7230, and the portion of the recess 7232 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7231.

Further, around the temporary fixing hole 7235, a peripheral wall portion 7236 is formed at a position recessed with respect to the back surface 7216 of the main body portion 7210. In other words, the vicinity of the temporary fixing hole 7235 has a shape in which an elliptical recess 7237 is formed with respect to the back surface 7216 and an opening is formed by penetrating a part of the recess 7237. There is. The opening corresponds to the temporary fixing hole 7235, and the portion of the recess 7237 where the opening is not formed corresponds to the peripheral wall portion 7236.

Regarding the point that the recesses are formed around the screw hole 7230 and around the temporary fixing hole 7235 as described above, the circumference of the irradiation unit hooking screw hole B1010 and the lid fastening screw hole described in the sixth embodiment are described. The same description as in which a recess is formed around B1002 (see FIG. 114) is valid. For clarity, FIG. 199 shows the peripheral wall portion 7231 and the peripheral wall portion 7236 with diagonal lines. Although not shown, similarly, a recess 7242 and a recess 7247 are formed around the screw hole 7240 and around the temporary fixing hole 7245, respectively.

Further, the lower panel base 7200 has an upper edge portion 7250 formed by slightly bending the upper end of the main body portion 7210 rearward. The upper edge portion 7250 has a locking protrusion 7251 (right side locking protrusion 7251R and left side locking protrusion 7251L) formed by projecting a part of the right side and the left side from the center to the rear. doing.

The right-side locking protrusion 7251R and the left-side locking protrusion 7251L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and are arranged substantially horizontally. Further, the right-side locking protrusion 7251R and the left-side locking protrusion 7251L have locking holes 7252 (right-side locking hole 7252R and left-side locking) as rectangular through holes penetrating in the vertical direction, respectively. Hole 7252L) is formed.

Further, the lower panel base 7200 has a horizontal portion 7217 formed continuously from the lower end of the central portion 7211 (back surface 7216) toward the rear. The horizontal portion 7217 is arranged in a substantially horizontal direction. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7217 is shaded in FIG. 198.

The lower side portion 7220 has a right side portion 7225 formed by slightly bending the right end upward and outward, and a left side portion 7226 formed by bending the left end upward and outward. A boss portion 7233 is formed on the front portion of the right side portion 7225 (below the right curved portion 7212), and a boss portion 7243 is formed on the front portion of the left side portion 7226 (below the left curved portion 7213).

The right rear portion 7214 has an upper right edge portion 7214a and a lower right edge portion 7214b formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The upper right edge portion 7214a and the lower right edge portion 7214b are vertically separated from each other. The left rear portion 7215 has an upper left edge portion 7215a and a lower left edge portion 7215b formed by slightly bending the rear end to the left. The upper left edge portion 7215a and the lower left edge portion 7215b are vertically separated from each other.

Screw holes 7234 (screw holes 7234) are formed in the upper part of the upper right edge portion 7214a, the upper part of the lower right edge portion 7214b, and the portion protruding to the right from the upper right end of the lower portion 7220 (the forming position of the boss portion 7233). Screw holes 7234a, 7234b, 7234c) are formed. Screw holes 7244 (screw holes 7244) are formed in the upper part of the upper left edge portion 7215a, the upper part of the lower left edge portion 7215b, and the portion protruding to the left from the upper left end of the lower portion 7220 (the forming position of the boss portion 7243). Screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c) are formed.

Further, at the rear end of the lower portion 7220, two locking pieces 7260 that protrude rearward and are bent downward are formed. The lumbar panel 7000 is attached to the front door by locking the locking piece 7260 to the front door. Further, a notch 7212a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7212. The notch 7212a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<7400 behind the lower panel>
FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the back of the lower panel as viewed from slightly above. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the lower panel film as viewed from the rear. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear and slightly below.

As shown in FIG. 200, the lower panel back 7400 has a curved shape corresponding to the lower panel film 7100. Specifically, the lower panel back 7400 has a central portion 7401 extending to the left and right, a right curved portion 7402 formed to have a curved shape from the right end to the rear of the central portion 7401, and a central portion 7401 from the left end to the rear. The left curved portion 7403 formed with a curved shape, the right rear portion 7404 extending from the right end to the rear of the right curved portion 7402, and the left rear portion 7405 extending from the left end to the rear of the left curved portion 7403. And have.

In the state where the lumbar panel 7000 is assembled, the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 are the central portion 7101 and the right curved portion of the lower panel film 7100, respectively. It is arranged so as to face (overlap in front view) the portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the lower panel back 7400 has an upper edge portion 7450 formed by slightly bending the upper end rearward. The upper edge portion 7450 has a locking protrusion 7451 (right side locking protrusion 7451R and left side locking protrusion 7451L) formed by projecting a part of the right side and the left side from the center to the rear. doing.

The right-side locking protrusion 7451R and the left-side locking protrusion 7451L are each formed in a rectangular shape with rounded corners and are arranged substantially horizontally. Further, locking pieces 7452 (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L) are formed on the right side locking protrusion 7251R and the left side locking protrusion 7251L, respectively. The right side locking piece 7452R and the left side locking piece 7452L are formed in a rectangular shape in a plan view as protrusions erected on the upper surface 7451a of the right side locking protrusion 7451R and the left side locking protrusion 7451L, respectively. ing.

Further, the lower panel back 7400 has a horizontal portion 7411 formed continuously from the lower end of the central portion 7401 (back surface 7410) toward the rear, and a vertical portion formed substantially perpendicular to the horizontal portion 7411 below the horizontal portion 7411. It has a part 7412 and. The horizontal portion 7411 is arranged in the substantially horizontal direction, and the vertical portion 7412 is arranged in the substantially vertical direction. For clarity, the horizontal portion 7411 is shaded in FIG. 201.

A plurality of rear protrusions 7413 are formed at substantially equal intervals on the back surface side of the vertical portion 7412. The rear protruding portion 7413 is formed as a protrusion protruding rearward from the vertical portion 7412, and extends in the vertical direction. The rear end edge of the horizontal portion 7411 and the rear protruding portion 7413 are continuously formed and positioned on substantially the same plane.

A notch 7402a is formed in the upper part of the right curved portion 7402. The notch 7402a has a shape similar to the notch 7102a of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel frame 7300>
FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the lower panel frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 204 is a rear view of the lower panel frame.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) each has a columnar shape extending in the vertical direction.

On the back side of the lower right panel frame 7300R, three screw fastening boss portions 7310 (screw fastening boss portions 7310a, 7310b, 7310c) are formed, and one temporary fixing boss portion 7315 is formed. .. On the back side of the lower left panel frame 7300L, three screw fastening boss portions 7320 (screw fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c) are formed, and one temporary fixing boss portion 7325 is formed.

A notch 7301 is formed in the upper part of the lower right panel frame 7300R. The notch 7301 has a shape similar to the notch 7102a (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100, and is arranged so as to overlap the notch 7102a.

<Lower panel lower 7500>
FIG. 205 is a perspective view of the lower part of the lower panel as viewed from the front. FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the lower part of the lower panel as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the lower panel lower 7500 is formed as a member extending in the left-right direction, and has a front side portion 7501 formed in a substantially vertical direction and an obliquely rearward portion from the upper end of the front side portion 7501. The first inclined portion 7502 formed continuously toward the rear, the upper portion 7503 formed continuously from the rear end of the first inclined portion 7502 toward the rear, and formed substantially horizontally, and diagonally rearward from the lower end of the front side portion 7501. A second inclined portion 7504 formed continuously toward the surface, and a second inclined portion 7504 formed so as to have a gentle inclination than the second inclined portion 7504, which is continuously formed from the rear end of the second inclined portion 7504 toward the diagonally rearward direction. It has three inclined portions 7505 and a lower portion 7506 formed continuously from the rear end of the third inclined portion 7505 toward the rear in a substantially horizontal direction.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 205, the front surface 7501a of the front side portion 7501 is shown by diagonal lines, and the upper surface of the upper side portion 7503 is shaded. In FIG. 206, the upper surface of the upper portion 7503 is shown by diagonal lines, the upper surface of the lower portion 7506 is shown by shading, and the back surface 7501b of the front side portion 7501 (the surface opposite to the front surface 7501a) is shown in black.

An L-shaped right side portion 7510 is formed at the right end of the lower panel lower 7500, and an inverted L-shaped left side portion 7520 is formed at the left end of the lower panel lower 7500. The right edge bent portion 7511, which is a portion of the right side portion 7510 extending in the front-rear direction, has a shape formed by slightly bending the right end of the lower portion 7506 to the right. Similarly, the left edge bent portion 7521, which is a portion of the left side portion 7520 extending in the front-rear direction, has a shape formed by slightly bending the left end of the lower portion 7506 to the left side.

A screw hole 7512 is formed in the upper portion of the right side portion 7510 (near the right end of the upper portion 7503), and a screw hole 7522 is formed in the upper portion of the left side portion 7520 (near the left end of the upper portion 7503).

<Lower panel right 7600 and lower panel left 7700>
FIG. 207 is a perspective view of the lower panel right and the lower panel left as viewed from the left rear side. FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the lower panel right and the lower panel left as viewed from the rear right side.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the lower panel right 7600 has a right side wall 7601 forming the right side portion of the lumbar panel 7000 and a side view triangular-shaped protrusion formed so as to project forward and left from the right side wall 7601. It has 7602 and. The lower panel left 7700 has a left side wall 7701 that constitutes the left side portion of the lumbar panel 7000, and a side view triangular-shaped protrusion 7702 that is formed so as to project forward and to the right from the left side wall 7701.

On the inner side surface (left side surface) of the lower panel right 7600, a boss portion 7610 is formed along the left edge, and a boss portion 7611 is formed on the upper portion and the lower portion. On the inner side surface (right side surface) of the lower panel left 7700, a boss portion 7710 is formed along the right edge, and a boss portion 7711 is formed on the upper portion and the lower portion. Screws for fastening the lumbar panel 7000 to the front door are screwed into the holes formed in the boss portion 7611 and the boss portion 7711.

<Assembly of lumbar panel 7000>
FIG. 209 is a perspective view of the state in which the lower panel frame is attached to the lower panel base as viewed from the front. FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the lower panel frame attached to the lower panel base as viewed from the rear. FIG. 211 is a perspective view of a state in which the back of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base and the lower panel frame in the state shown in FIG. 210 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 212 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base and the back of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of the lower panel base, the lower panel frame, and the state in which the lower panel lower portion is attached to the back of the lower panel as viewed from the rear in the state shown in FIG. 211. FIG. 214 is a cross-sectional view of the lower panel base, the back of the lower panel, and the lower part of the lower panel in the state shown in FIG. 213.

The lumbar panel 7000 is assembled through the following steps (i) to (v).
(I) The lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is attached to the lower panel base 7200.
(Ii) The lower panel film 7100 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel base 7200.
(Iii) The back 7400 of the lower panel is locked to the lower panel base 7200.
(Iv) The lower panel lower 7500 is attached to the lower panel base 7200.
(V) The lower panel right 7600 and the lower panel left 7700 are attached to the lower panel base 7200.

In the step (i) above, first, a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 of the lower right panel frame 7300R and a hole formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 of the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 204). ), The temporary fixing member 7800 (see FIG. 210) is press-fitted into each. Then, the lower panel base 7200 is brought close to the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L in the state where the temporary fixing member 7800 is press-fitted, and the temporary fixing hole 7235 and the temporary fixing hole 7245 of the lower panel base 7200 ( (See FIG. 198), the temporary fixing member 7800 is press-fitted. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are temporarily attached (temporarily fixed) to the lower panel base 7200 via the temporary fixing member 7800.

In this state, the screw holes 7230 (screw holes 7230a, 7230b, 7230c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw fastening boss portion 7310 (screw fastening boss portion 7310a shown in FIG. 204) of the lower right panel frame 7300R. , 7310b, 7310c) are superimposed, and the screw holes 7240 (screw holes 7240a, 7240b, 7240c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 (screws shown in FIG. 204) of the lower left panel frame 7300L. The lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are arranged so as to overlap with the fastening boss portions 7320a, 7320b, 7320c). Then, the screw 7810 (see FIG. 210) through which the screw hole 7230 and the screw hole 7240 are inserted is screwed into the holes formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L are fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

At that time, since the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are temporarily fixed by using the temporary fixing member 7800, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 are maintained in a relative positional relationship. It is possible to turn over the panel base 7200 and fasten the screws, which facilitates the mounting work. The holes formed in the temporary fixing boss portion 7315 and the temporary fixing boss portion 7325 are formed in the screw fastening boss portion 7310 and the screw fastening boss portion 7320 so that the temporary fixing member 7800 can be press-fitted. The temporary fixing hole 7235 and the temporary fixing hole 7245 are larger than the screw hole 7230 and the screw hole 7240.

Here, as described above, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7232 and 7242) are formed around the screw holes 7230 and around the screw holes 7240 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the screw 7810 used for screwing the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 is housed in the recess, and the rear end of the screw 7810 (the end on the head side of the screw) is the lower panel base. It is positioned anterior to the back surface 7216 of the 7200 (screws 7810 do not project rearward of the back surface 7216). Similarly, in the lower panel base 7200, recesses (recesses 7237 and 7247) are formed around the temporary fixing holes 7235 and around the temporary fixing holes 7245 (see FIG. 199). As a result, the temporary fixing member 7800 used for temporarily fixing the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel frame 7300 is housed in the recess, and the rear end of the temporary fixing member 7800 is the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200. Positioned in front of (the temporary fixing member 7800 does not protrude rearward from the back surface 7216).

As described above, in the state where the lower panel frame 7300 (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is attached to the lower panel base 7200, the lower right panel frame 7300R has a right curved portion 7212 in the lower panel base 7200. It is arranged on the front side of the left curved portion 7213 in the lower left panel frame 7300L (see FIG. 209).

In this state, in the step (ii), the lower panel film 7100 is pressed against the lower panel base 7200 from the back side of the lower panel base 7200. Then, the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100 are the central portion 7211 of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. The lower panel film 7100 is arranged so as to face the right curved portion 7212, the left curved portion 7213, the right rear portion 7214, and the left rear portion 7215 (see FIG. 196).

In this state, in the step (iii), the central portion 7401, the right curved portion 7402, the left curved portion 7403, the right rear portion 7404, and the left rear portion 7405 (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are respectively. On the back side of the lower panel film 7100 so as to face the central portion 7101, the right curved portion 7102, the left curved portion 7103, the right rear portion 7104, and the left rear portion 7105 (see FIG. 192) of the lower panel film 7100. The back 7400 of the lower panel is arranged. Then, the right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L (see FIG. 200) of the lower panel back 7400 are inserted into the right locking hole 7252R and the left locking hole 7252L (see FIG. 196) of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. By doing so, the lower panel back 7400 is locked to the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 211).

FIG. 212 shows a state in which the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are cut in the vertical direction (the surface passing through the right locking piece 7452R) at the time when the step (iii) is completed, for easy understanding. Therefore, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is shown in black. As shown in FIG. 212, the rear ends of the right locking piece 7452R and the left locking piece 7452L substantially contact the trailing edges of the right locking hole 7252R and the left locking hole 7252L to the rear of the lower panel back 7400. Movement is restricted. Further, the upper surface 7451a (see FIG. 202) of the right side locking protrusion 7451R and the left side locking protrusion 7451L of the lower panel back 7400 is the right side locking protrusion 7251R and the left side locking protrusion of the lower panel base 7200. It substantially comes into contact with the lower surface 7251a (see FIG. 199) of the 7251L, and the upward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. Further, the lower surface of the horizontal portion 7411 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the upper surface of the horizontal portion 7217 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200, and the vertical portion 7412 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400. The lower end of the lower panel base 7200 is substantially in contact with the upper surface of the first inclined portion 7221 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the downward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted. The lower end of the vertical portion 7412 is formed so as to have an inclination similar to that of the first inclined portion 7221. Further, the front side of the vertical portion 7412 of the lower panel back 7400 substantially contacts the rear end edge of the horizontal portion 7217 of the lower panel base 7200, and the forward movement of the lower panel back 7400 is restricted.

Further, at this time, the space formed between the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200 (see FIG. 198) and the front surface 7420 of the lower panel back surface 7400 (the surface opposite to the back surface 7410, see FIG. 200) is placed below. The panel film 7100 is arranged. As a result, the front surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the back surface 7216 of the lower panel base 7200, and the back surface of the lower panel film 7100 substantially contacts the front surface 7420 of the lower panel back surface 7400. As shown in FIG. 212, the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 are arranged so close to each other (substantially in contact with each other), but since the lower panel film 7100 is configured as a thin sheet, It can be accommodated in the gap formed between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400. The lower panel film 7100, the lower panel base 7200, and the lower panel back 7400 have substantially the same curved shape, and the space formed between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel back 7400 is lower. It is filled with the panel film 7100 so that there is almost no gap.

After that, in the step (iv) above, the boss portion 7233 and the boss portion 7243 (see FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the screw holes 7512 and the screw holes 7522 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel lower 7500 are superimposed, respectively. As described above, the lower panel lower 7500 is arranged on the back side of the lower panel back 7400. At this time, the lower portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) of the lower panel lower 7500 is placed on the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, and the right edge bent portion 7511 and the left edge bent of the lower panel lower 7500. Section 7521 (see FIG. 206) is placed on the right side portion 7225 and the left side portion 7226 (see FIG. 198) of the panel base 7200, respectively (see FIG. 213). Then, the screw 7820 (see FIG. 213) through which the screw hole 7512 and the screw hole 7522 are inserted is screwed into the holes formed in the boss portion 7233 and the boss portion 7243 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel lower 7500 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

In FIG. 214, the lower panel base 7200, the lower panel back 7400, and the lower panel lower 7500 at the time when the step (iv) is completed pass through the vertical facing surface in the front-rear direction (the rear protruding portion 7413 of the lower panel back 7400). The cut surface of the lower panel base 7200 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the lower panel back 7400 is shaded, and the cut surface of the lower panel lower 7500 is shown in black to show the state of cutting with the lower panel). ing. As shown in FIG. 214, the front side portion 7501 (see FIG. 205) of the lower panel lower 7500 substantially contacts the rear side protrusion 7413 (see FIG. 201) of the lower panel back 7400, and the second inclined portion of the lower panel lower 7500. The 7504, the third inclined portion 7505, and the lower portion 7506 (see FIG. 206) are the first inclined portion 7221, the second inclined portion 7222, and the horizontal portion 7223 (see FIG. 197) of the lower panel base 7200, respectively. It is almost in contact. As a result, the lower panel back 7400 is in a state of being sandwiched between the lower panel base 7200 and the lower panel lower 7500, and is difficult to come off even when an impact is applied by opening and closing the front door, for example. ..

In this state, in the step (v) above, the screw holes 7234 (screw holes 7234a, 7234b, 7234c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7610 (see FIG. 207) of the lower panel right 7600 are superimposed. The lower panel right 7600 is arranged so as to do so. Then, the screw through which the screw hole 7234 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7610 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel right 7600 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing. Further, the lower panel left 7700 is arranged so that the screw holes 7244 (screw holes 7244a, 7244b, 7244c shown in FIG. 198) of the lower panel base 7200 and the boss portion 7710 (see FIG. 208) of the lower panel left 7700 overlap. To do. Then, the screw through which the screw hole 7244 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 7710 from the back surface side. As a result, the lower panel left 7700 is fixed to the lower panel base 7200 by screwing.

As described above, the assembly of the lumbar panel 7000 is completed, and the lumbar panel 7000 is completed. The lower end of the lower right panel frame 7300R has a shape that can be fitted with the front portion of the protruding portion 7602 (see FIG. 207) in the lower panel right 7600, and the lower end of the lower left panel frame 7300L is the lower panel left 7700. It has a shape that can be fitted to the front portion of the protruding portion 7702 (see FIG. 208) in

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, a game machine provided with a curved decorative sheet is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198777). According to such a game machine, the decoration applied to the decorative sheet can be visually recognized by the player, and the decorativeness of the game machine can be enhanced.

However, when the printed flat sheet is arranged in a curved shape, the curved portion looks distorted, which causes a problem that the appearance is poor and the design is deteriorated. On the other hand, in order to improve the appearance, it is conceivable to create a design assuming a curved state, but it is difficult to create such a design, and it is possible to create a design. Even so, there is a problem that the development man-hours required for that purpose increase.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily realizing good-looking visibility.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1-1) A gaming machine provided with a visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by a player.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and the visual target surface formed over the first region and the second region. Have and
In the portion of the visible object surface formed in the first region, the visible object surface is formed in the first direction (direction L ₁ (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)).
The portion formed in the second region of the visible object surface, the direction of the is the visual target surface first in the second direction different from the direction (L ₁ shown in FIG. 194 _(b) (Y) ) Is formed and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) that makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the viewing target portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And a left curved portion 7103), and has a visible object surface formed over a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). The portion of the visible target surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is in the direction of surface formation as compared with the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101). Is different. A shielding member (lower right) that makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) on the outer side of the game machine from the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100). The panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) looks poor, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

(E-1-1') The gaming machine according to (E-1-1).
The visual object surface has a curved shape and has a curved shape.
The degree of curvature in the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region is greater than the degree of curvature in the portion of the visible object surface formed in the first region.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object surface has a curved shape, and is formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visible object surface. The degree of curvature in the portion is larger than the degree of curvature in the portion of the visual object surface formed in the first region (central portion 7101). As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) appears to be distorted, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel frame). It can be hidden by the 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

The present invention can also be applied to a game machine having the following features.
(E-1-1 ″) The gaming machine according to (E-1-1) above.
The visual object portion is configured by joining a plurality of members.
The second region corresponds to a joint portion between one member of the plurality of members and the other member.
The first region corresponds to a portion other than the joint.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine, the visual object portion is formed by joining a plurality of members, and the second region corresponds to a joint portion between one member of the plurality of members and the other member. doing. As a result, even if the portion of the visual object surface formed in the second region (the joint portion between one member of the plurality of members and the other member) appears to be distorted, the relevant portion is concerned. The portion can be hidden by a shielding member, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

The present invention is not particularly limited as long as the shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to visually recognize a region of the visual target portion whose surface formation direction is different from that of other regions. Also in the game machine of the above (E-1-1 ″), since the direction of surface formation at the joint portion is different from the direction of surface formation at the portion other than the joint portion, the present invention is applicable. In addition to the above forms, it can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make the unevenness difficult to see when, for example, an unevenness is generated in the visual object portion due to a molding problem. is there. Also in this case, since the direction of surface formation is different between the region where the unevenness is generated and the other region, the present invention is applicable. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the direction of the tangent line in the region is different from the direction of the tangent line in the other region (see FIG. 194 (b)). However, it can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make a region different from other regions difficult to see. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the angle of incidence of light on the region is different from the angle of incidence of light on other regions (see FIG. 194 (b)). It can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to see a region where the incident angle of light is different from other regions. Further, in the joint portion and the uneven portion, the traveling direction of the light incident on the region is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the other region. It can also be applied to a form in which a shielding member is arranged so as to make it difficult to see a region whose direction is different from other regions.

(E-1-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) that allows the player to visually recognize at least a part thereof, and
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) located on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the visual object sheet,
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member is provided.
The visual inspection target sheet has a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) at least in a part thereof.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion of the visual inspection target sheet.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) that can be visually recognized by the player has at least a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). ing. On the other hand, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is located on the outer side of the game machine from the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is a shielding member. (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the left curved portion 7103). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized.

(E-2-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visibility target portion, and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the cover member is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and has a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. Assuming that the light is incident from the above, the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region and the traveling direction of the light incident on the second region are different.
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member.
The cover member includes openings (screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240) for accommodating the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual object portion.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And left curved portion 7103), and assuming that light is incident on the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) from a predetermined direction, the second region The traveling direction of the light incident on (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is different from the traveling direction of the light incident on the first region (central portion 7101). Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). And the lower left panel frame 7300L) can be hidden, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is a cover member (lower right panel frame 7300L). It is arranged on the surface side of the lower panel base 7200). Specifically, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is covered by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has an opening (screw hole) for accommodating the fixing member (screw 7810) so that the fixing member (screw 7810) does not interfere with the visible portion (lower panel film 7100). It has a 7230 and a screw hole 7240). This makes it possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100), and due to distortion or the like caused by the interference, the visible object portion (lower panel). It is possible to prevent the visibility of the film 7100) from being lowered.

(E-2-2) A visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) in which curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curved shape are formed at least in a part thereof.
A cover member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) fixed to the cover member is provided.
The shielding member is fixed to the cover member by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member.
The cover member includes openings (screw holes 7230 and screw holes 7240) for accommodating the fixing member so that the fixing member does not interfere with the visual inspection target sheet.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with curved portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curved shape at least in part. Has been done. On the other hand, a cover member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and a shielding member (lower right panel frame) is arranged on the cover member (lower panel base 7200). 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are fixed. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the left curved portion 7103). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is fixed to the cover member (lower panel base 7200) by a fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). The cover member (lower panel base 7200) has an opening (screw hole 7230 and a screw hole 7230) for accommodating the fixing member (screw 7810) so that the fixing member (screw 7810) does not interfere with the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100). It has a screw hole 7240). This makes it possible to prevent the fixing member (screw 7810) from interfering with the visible object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and due to distortion or the like caused by the interference, the visible object sheet (lower panel). It is possible to prevent the visibility of the film 7100) from being lowered.

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is replaced by the cover member (lower panel base) by the fixing member (screw 7810) that can be attached from the back surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200). It has been described as being fixed to 7200). In the present invention, the method of fixing the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is not particularly limited, and the shielding member can be attached to any member by any means. For example, locking claws are provided on the back surface side of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) to shield the front surface side of the cover member (lower panel base 7200) or other members. The members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be locked.

(E-3-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target portion is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and has a predetermined direction (forward direction) with respect to the first region and the second region. The incident angle in the second region (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) is larger than the incident angle in the first region (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)), assuming that light is incident from the light. ,
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And left curved portion 7103), and assuming that light is incident on the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) from a predetermined direction, the first region The incident angle (β shown in FIG. 194 (b)) in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is larger than the incident angle in (central portion 7101) (α shown in FIG. 194 (b)). It's getting bigger. Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R). And the lower left panel frame 7300L) can be hidden, and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is the first member. It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object portion (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered.

(E-3-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least in part having a predetermined curvature.
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual inspection target sheet is provided.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature at least in a part thereof. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the left curved portion 7103). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) will be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered.

(E-4-1) A visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player, and
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target portion,
A third member (lower 7500 under the lower panel) arranged on the back surface side of the second member is provided.
The visual object portion includes a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), and the visual target surface formed over the first region and the second region. Have and
_{The first tangent line (L 1} (shown in FIG. 194 (b)) as a virtual tangent line in the portion formed in the first region and the portion formed in the second region of the visible object surface, respectively. When X)) and the second tangent line (L ₁ (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b) are drawn, the direction of the first tangent line and the direction of the second tangent line are different.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the second region in the visual object portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) to be visually recognized by the player is the first region (central portion 7101) and the second region (right curved portion 7102). And a left curved portion 7103), and has a visible object surface formed over a first region (central portion 7101) and a second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103). In the portion of the visual object surface formed in the first region (central portion 7101) and the portion formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103), the first as virtual tangents, respectively. _{When the tangent line (L 1} (X) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) and the second tangent line (L ₁ (Y) shown in FIG. 194 (b)) are drawn, the first tangent line (FIG. 194 (b)) is drawn. the direction of the direction and the second tangent line _L 1 (X)) shown in _L 1 shown in (Fig. 194 (b) (Y)) is different. That is, the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) is surface-formed as compared with the portion formed in the first region (central portion 7101). The direction of is different. Then, at least a part of the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) becomes difficult to see due to the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured as follows. As a result, even if the portion of the visible object surface formed in the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) looks poor, the portion is shielded by the shielding member (lower right panel). It can be hidden by the frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is the first member. It is arranged on the surface side of the member (lower panel base 7200). On the other hand, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the portion (lower panel film 7100) may be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object portion (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered. Further, a third member (lower panel lower 7500) is arranged on the back surface side of the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500) are arranged. ) Is fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) can be stably placed between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500). It can be arranged, and the visibility of the visibility target portion (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

(E-4-2) A visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) having a bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) formed at least in part having a predetermined curvature.
The first member (lower panel base 7200) arranged on the surface side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) arranged on the surface side of the first member, and
A second member (lower panel back 7400) arranged on the back side of the visual inspection target sheet and
A third member (lower 7500 under the lower panel) arranged on the back surface side of the second member is provided.
The shielding member makes it difficult to see at least a part of the bent portion.
The first member and the second member are locked by locking portions (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L).
The first member and the third member are fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is formed with bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) having a predetermined curvature at least in a part thereof. ing. On the other hand, the first member (lower panel base 7200) is arranged on the surface side of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the shielding member is arranged on the surface side of the first member (lower panel base 7200). (Lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged. Then, at least a part of the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is made difficult to be visually recognized by the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). It is configured in. As a result, even if the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) appears to be distorted, the portion is covered with the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and the left curved portion 7103). It can be hidden by the lower left panel frame 7300L), and good-looking visibility can be easily realized. Further, a second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged on the back surface side of the visual inspection target sheet (lower panel film 7100), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are arranged. ) Is locked by a locking portion (right side locking piece 7452R and left side locking piece 7452L, right side locking hole 7252R and left side locking hole 7252L). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) is arranged between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the second member (lower panel back 7400) is arranged. ) Is locked to the first member (lower panel base 7200), so that it is not necessary to attach the second member (lower panel back 7400) to the first member (lower panel base 7200) by screwing. Here, if the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) are fastened with screws, there are individual differences in the size of the screw holes. As a result, when the screw is strongly tightened, the visual object sheet (lower panel film 7100) is pushed by the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the second member (lower panel back 7400), so that the visual object is visible. There is a concern that the sheet (lower panel film 7100) will be distorted. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring, and the visual object sheet (lower panel film) due to such distortion. It is possible to prevent the visibility of 7100) from being lowered. Further, a third member (lower panel lower 7500) is arranged on the back surface side of the second member (lower panel back 7400), and the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500) are arranged. ) Is fixed by a fixing member (screw 7820). As a result, the visible target sheet (lower panel film 7100) and the second member (lower panel back 7400) can be stably placed between the first member (lower panel base 7200) and the third member (lower panel lower 7500). It can be arranged, and the visibility of the visibility target sheet (lower panel film 7100) can be maintained in a high state.

In the eighth embodiment, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) makes it difficult to see at least a part of the visual object portion (visual target sheet: lower panel film 7100 provided in the waist panel 7000). Explained as being. The visual object portion (visual object sheet) in the present invention is not limited to the decorative sheet (lower panel film 7100) provided on the waist panel (decorative unit provided at the lower part of the front door), and is not limited to the top panel (on the upper part of the front door). It may be a decorative sheet provided with a decorative unit provided (see FIG. 65). Further, the visual object portion (visual object sheet) in the present invention is not limited to a sheet to which decoration (pattern or pattern) is previously applied, and a sheet (screen, screen, which can display an image corresponding to the pattern or pattern). For example, the screen sheet 1046) shown in FIG. 67 may be used.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are the shielding member arranged on the right side (lower right panel frame 7300R) and the shielding member arranged on the left side (lower left panel frame). It has been described as being composed of 7300L). In the present invention, only one of the right side shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R) and the left side shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) may be provided. For example, of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) and the right curved portion (right curved portion 7102), the appearance of the left curved portion (left curved portion 7103) is problematic in terms of design, but the right curved portion is on the right side. If the appearance of the bent part (right curved part 7102) does not matter, only the left shielding member (lower left panel frame 7300L) is arranged so that only the left bent part (left curved part 7103) is difficult to see. You may do it.

As a case where the appearance of the bent portion does not matter, for example, there is a case where the bent portion is merely colored. For example, a predetermined pattern is drawn on the entire visual target portion (visual target sheet: lower panel film 7100), and the predetermined pattern is colored with a main part (contour, etc.) constituting the pattern and a single color. It is assumed that the part (single color part) that is only made is included. In such an example, when the monochromatic portion of the predetermined pattern is arranged at the bent portion, the shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes the bent portion difficult to see should not be arranged. May be.

Regarding the placement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame), considering the viewpoint of the player, it is reasonable to arrange the shielding member (lower panel frame) so as to make it difficult to see the bent portion having the maximum curvature. However, in the present invention, the arrangement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not limited to the surface side (front) of the bent portion having the maximum curvature. For example, when the visual object portion (visual object sheet) has a first curved portion and a second curved portion, and the curvature of the first curved portion is larger than the curvature of the second curved portion, the first While the shielding member (lower panel frame) is not arranged in front of the bent portion (player side), the shielding member (lower panel frame) may be arranged in front of the second bent portion (player side). Good. For example, in the case where the main portion is arranged in the second bent portion of the predetermined pattern and the monochromatic portion is arranged in the first bent portion, the shielding member (lower panel). The frame) may be arranged in this way. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the shielding member (lower panel frame) can be appropriately determined in consideration of the aesthetic appearance comprehensively created by the viewing target portion (visualizing target sheet) and the shielding member (lower panel frame). It is possible.

Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be decorated. The decorations applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) include decorations (for example, a logo depending on the model) applied to the visual object portion (visual object sheet: lower panel film 7100). A decoration that is related to the corresponding pattern, design of the pattern, etc.) can be mentioned. Further, the color of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) can be the same as or similar to the color of the visual inspection target portion (visual recognition target sheet: lower panel film 7100). As a result, it is possible to harmonize with the design of the visual object portion (visual object sheet: lower panel film 7100) without making the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) conspicuous. Can enhance the aesthetics of.

On the other hand, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) may be plated with silver or gold. As a result, the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) can be reliably shielded while emphasizing the beauty of the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L).

Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is arranged as a protruding three-dimensional decoration in the decoration unit (lumbar panel), and the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). When a game machine equipped with the above is installed in the game hall, the player who is considering which game machine the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) plays in the game hall Easy to catch your eyes. Therefore, in order to appeal the existence and attractiveness of the game machine to the player, the model name, the manufacturer logo, and the game information (for example, the winning probability for the bonus) are used in the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L). Or a part of the dividend table), etc. may be displayed (described). Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) is provided with a decorative sheet, and characters, items, and the like related to the contents adopted in the game machine may be printed on the decorative sheet. Further, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) itself may be formed as a three-dimensional shape (shape corresponding to a character, an item, etc.) related to the content. As a result, the degree of attention to the game machine can be increased.

The decorations (design, color, etc.) applied to the shielding members (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) have been described above, but only one of the above is adopted as the device for the decoration. Alternatively, a plurality of them may be used in combination, or other devices may be used in combination. The cover member (lower panel base 7200) may be decorated or may be colorless and transparent. When the cover member (lower panel base 7200) is decorated, the cover member (lower panel base 7200) constitutes the visible object portion in the present invention together with the visible object sheet (lower panel film 7100).

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided apart from each other, a plurality of shielding members are provided so as to make each bent portion individually difficult to see. It has been described that (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) are arranged apart from each other. In the present invention, when a plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided apart from each other in this way, the plurality of bent portions (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) are provided. As a shielding member (lower panel frame) that makes it difficult to see, a plurality of shielding parts (for example, lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) for making each bent portion difficult to see, and the plurality of shielding members. One shielding member (for example, right) composed of a part connecting the parts (for example, a part having substantially the same width as the central part 7101 and connecting the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L). The lower panel frame 7300R, the lower left panel frame 7300L, the parts extending left and right so as to connect the upper parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L, and the lower parts of the lower right panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L. One panel frame composed of a portion extending to the left and right so as to connect the two) may be adopted.

Further, in the present invention, the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame) for making the second region (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) in the visible target portion (lower panel film 7100) difficult to see. In addition to 7300L), a shielding member (additional panel frame) may be provided. As such an additional panel frame, for example, a panel frame having a predetermined shape (for example, V-shape) is provided on the surface side of the first region (central portion 7101) in the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the lower right panel is provided. The frame 7300R, the lower left panel frame 7300L, and the additional panel frame may function as an integrated three-dimensional decorative portion (create an integrated three-dimensional effect). For that purpose, a panel frame (decoration) may be added to the surface side (front side of the lumbar panel) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100), and the design of the additional panel frame itself and the cover member of the additional panel frame ( It is possible to create the three-dimensional effect only by designing the mounting structure to the lower panel base 7200) or the like. In this regard, when adding a three-dimensional decoration to the space on the back side (back side of the waist panel) of the visual object part (lower panel film 7100), it is necessary to change the arrangement of wiring, medal chute, substrate, etc. According to the method of adding the panel frame (decoration) to the surface side (front side of the waist panel) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) as described above, such an arrangement change is unnecessary and relatively. The impression of the appearance of the game machine can be renewed at low cost and in a short development period.

Further, in the present invention, some game machine component is arranged between the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200), or the shielding member (lower right). The game machine components may be arranged in the panel frame 7300R and the lower left panel frame 7300L). In that case, it is preferable to use a shielding member (panel frame) that is larger than the shielding member (lower right panel frame 7300R and lower left panel frame 7300L) described in the eighth embodiment. This makes it possible to add such game machine components. Such a game machine component may be provided on only one of the right shielding member (panel frame) and the left shielding member (panel frame), or on both shielding members (panel frames). It may be provided. When the game machine components are provided on both the left and right shielding members (panel frames), the same game machine components may be provided on the left and right, or different game machine components may be provided on the left and right. Further, when three or more shielding members (panel frames) are provided, the game machine components may be provided only on any one shielding member (panel frame), or any plurality of shielding members (panels) may be provided. The game machine component may be provided on the frame), or the game machine component may be provided on all the shielding members (panel frames). Further, one shielding member (panel frame) may be provided with only one gaming machine component (mechanism), or a plurality of mechanisms may be provided together.

Examples of the game machine component include a light emitting substrate. By installing the LED on the light emitting substrate and controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to illuminate the shielding member (panel frame), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, in addition to the light emitting substrate (first light emitting substrate), a light emitting substrate (second light emitting substrate) is also formed on the back surface side of the portion of the visible object portion (lower panel film 7100) that is not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame). ) May be provided. The light emission by the first light emitting substrate and the light emission by the second light emitting substrate (light emission effect pattern) may be performed as an integrated light emission pattern (both light emission or both are extinguished, etc.), or light emission by each light emission substrate. May be controlled separately. For example, the three-dimensional decoration of the shielding member (panel frame) can be emphasized by performing an effect such that the portion not shielded by the shielding member (panel frame) is turned off while the shielding member (panel frame) emits light. .. When such a light emitting board is provided, an opening for passing a harness for power supply and connection to the effect control unit (sub control device SS) is provided in the lower part of the lumbar panel (7500 below the lower panel, etc.). It is good to provide it. Further, a polarizing member such as a light diffusion sheet may be provided together with the light emitting substrate, or the front surface or the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame) may be processed for polarization. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the light emitting substrate itself, or the bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left) may be shielded separately from the light emitting substrate. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the curved portion 7103) may be provided. As the light emitting effect by the light emitting substrate, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the game state, an effect of notifying predetermined information (information advantageous to the player, bonus winning, etc.), and an error due to the light emission. It may be notified.

Further, examples of the game machine component include a game operation unit (start lever, stop button, settlement button, bet button, etc.). For example, while a part of the game operation unit is arranged on the front surface of the shielding member (panel frame), a sensor for detecting that the game operation unit has been operated inside the shielding member (panel frame) may be used. It is possible to arrange a substrate or the like. By performing such a design, for example, when the shielding member (panel frame) is large and the control panel portion (operation means arrangement portion) on the lumbar panel is narrow, the space can be effectively utilized. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, an effect operation unit (effect button, effect lever, jog dial, etc.) can be mentioned. For example, while the above-mentioned effect operation unit is arranged on the front surface of the shielding member (panel frame), a sensor, a substrate, or the like for detecting that the effect operation unit has been operated is placed inside the shielding member (panel frame). It is possible to place it. For example, while the control panel unit (operation means arranging unit) is provided with a normal effect button (first effect button), the shielding member (panel frame) is provided with a second effect button, which is the target of an operation instruction during the operation effect. Depending on which of the first effect button and the second effect button is used as the operation means, the degree of expectation such as hitting differs (for example, it is prompted to operate the second effect button). In that case, the degree of expectation is high, the hit is confirmed, etc.). The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, examples of the game machine component include a vibration mechanism (motor, solenoid, etc.) for vibrating the shielding member (panel frame). By vibrating the shielding member (panel frame) using the vibration mechanism, it is possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the gaming state and the degree of expectation. Further, by arranging both the vibration mechanism and the effect operation unit on the shielding member (panel frame), the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand when the effect operation unit is operated (when the button is pressed). You may. When such a vibration mechanism is provided, a shock absorbing member (synthetic rubber such as urethane rubber or silicone rubber) for shock absorption is used between the shielding member (panel frame) and the cover member (lower panel base 7200). (Sheet, etc.) may be arranged. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a speaker can be mentioned. When arranging the speaker, an opening for sound output (a mesh-like portion on the surface of the speaker) may be provided on either one or both of the front surface and the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame). If speakers are arranged on both the right-side shielding member (panel frame) and the left-side shielding member (panel frame), a powerful sound effect can be produced with a stereo sound source from a position close to the player. The bent portion (right curved portion 7102 and left curved portion 7103) of the visual object portion (lower panel film 7100) may be shielded by the game machine component itself, or the bent portion (bent portion (right curved portion 7102) and left curved portion 7103) may be shielded separately from the game machine component. A member (sheet, plate, etc.) for shielding the right curved portion 7102 and the left curved portion 7103) may be provided.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a blower mechanism (a fan such as a sirocco fan) can be mentioned. When arranging the ventilation mechanism, it is possible to perform an effect of blowing air toward the player side by providing an opening for ventilation on either one or both of the front surface and the side surface of the shielding member (panel frame). It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to suggest or notify the game state and the degree of expectation as a sensational effect.

Further, as the above-mentioned game machine component, for example, a drive mechanism can be mentioned. For example, it may function as a movable accessory by providing a drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) while providing a movable decorative portion on a part of the shielding member (panel frame). The game machine components include, for example, a sensor (proximity sensor such as an infrared sensor) that can detect when a player brings a hand or the like close to the player, or a touch sensor (touch panel) that can detect when a player touches a hand or the like. ) Etc. can be mentioned. By arranging such a sensor, it may be used for the production operation. Further, as the game machine component, for example, an image display unit can be mentioned. For example, the effect may be performed by arranging a small liquid crystal screen.

[9th Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the ninth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to eighth embodiments also applies to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). Then, all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen sheet 8012 and an upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIGS. 217 and 218). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the central screen sheet 8012 and the upper screen sheet 8023 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. become. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 215 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 216 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 217 is a perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front. FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the upper screen unit are removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen unit 8010 and an upper screen unit 8020. As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the central screen unit 8010 includes a front translucent plate 8011, a central screen sheet 8012, and a rear translucent plate 8013. The upper screen unit 8020 includes an outer lens 8021, an inner lens 8022, and an upper screen sheet 8023.

The front translucent plate 8011 is mainly made of a resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Like the light transmitting plate 1045 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, the front light transmitting plate 8011 is continuous from the centrally located flat surface portion 8011a and the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 8011a toward the rear. 8011b, which is a curved portion formed of the above. The flat surface portion 8011a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 8011b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved as in the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 59) in the third embodiment. ing.

The central screen sheet 8012 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is a screen (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen) according to the third embodiment. Similar to 9060), it has an incident surface on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The central screen sheet 8012 is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, translucent, or translucent when not projected. It has a gray color.

The central screen sheet 8012 is formed continuously from the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 8012a located at the center and the flat surface portion 8012a as shown in the screen sheet 1046 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment. The curved portion 8012b and the curved portion 8012b are provided. The flat surface portion 8012a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 8012b has a curved flat plate shape. The flat surface portion 8012a and the curved portion 8012b of the screen sheet 8012 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat surface portion 8011a and the curved portion 8011b of the front light transmitting plate 8011.

The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 is mainly made of a resin such as an acrylic plate having a light-transmitting property, a glass plate, or the like, and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 includes a flat surface portion 8013a located at the center and a curved portion 8013b formed continuously from both the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 8013a toward the rear. The flat surface portion 8013a is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 8013b has a curved flat plate shape. The flat surface portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat surface portion 8012a and the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012.

The central screen sheet 8012 is arranged on the back side of the front translucent plate 8011, and the rear transmissive plate 8013 is arranged on the back side of the central screen sheet 8012. Specifically, the front surface of the front translucent plate 8011 on the flat surface 8011a and the front surface of the central screen sheet 8012 on the flat surface 8012a are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the front translucent plate 8011 on the curved portion 8011b. The side surface and the front surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 are in close contact with each other. Further, the front surface of the flat surface portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 8013a of the rear translucent plate 8013 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 is in close contact with each other. And the front surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other.

Since the rear translucent plate 8013 has translucency, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear translucent plate 8013 and passes through the incident surface (rear surface) of the central screen sheet 8012. Incident. As a result, images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the central screen sheet 8012. Since the front translucent plate 8011 is formed transparently and there is no structure in front of the front translucent plate 8011 that blocks the player's field of view, when an image is displayed on the central screen sheet 8012, the image is displayed. , Be visible to the player.

The rear light transmitting plate 8013 has an upper portion 8013c on the upper side of the flat portion 8013a. A circular upper screen unit installation opening 8013d is formed in the upper portion 8013c, and the upper screen unit 8020 is attached so as to fill the upper screen unit installation opening 8013d.

The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (rear surface) of the upper screen sheet 8023. As a result, an image related to the game (for example, an image corresponding to a predetermined character) is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the upper screen sheet 8023. The outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022 are transparently formed, and there is no structure in front of these lenses that blocks the player's field of view. Therefore, when an image is displayed on the upper screen sheet 8023, the image is displayed. , Be visible to the player. The upper screen unit 8020 will be described in detail later.

The upper screen unit 8020 constitutes a part of the decorative unit 8000. The decorative unit 8000 is provided so as to project forward in the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD.

<Adjustment of irradiation range by shielding wall member 8030>
FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the front. FIG. 220 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shield wall member around the left side portion. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the rear. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the harness protector for the speaker are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 222. FIG. 224 (a) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment as viewed from above. FIG. 224 (b) is a schematic view of how light is projected from the projector in another embodiment as viewed from above. FIG. 225 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel of the decorative unit is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 226 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 219 to 221 the shielding wall member 8030 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical and has a rectangular annular shape with an opening at the center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 8030 includes a lower side portion 8032, a left side portion 8033, a right side portion 8034, and an upper portion 8035 arranged around the light passage opening 8031.

The lower side 8032 has a lower side surface 8032a. The lower side surface 8032a constitutes an upper surface (a surface facing the light passage opening 8031) of the lower side portion 8032, and is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Although not shown, the lower side surface 8032a is textured to form fine irregularities. The wrinkle processing is a processing in which a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as a light diffusion treatment.

As shown in FIG. 220, the left side portion 8033 includes a first left inner wall surface 8033a, a second left side inner wall surface 8033b, a third left side inner wall surface 8033c, and a fourth left side inner wall surface 8033d. The first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left side inner wall surface 8033b, the third left side inner wall surface 8033c, and the fourth left side inner wall surface 8033d form the right side surface (the surface facing the light passage opening 8031) of the left side portion 8033. It is configured and is formed in a substantially vertical direction. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 220 shows a state in which the left side portion 8033 is cut in a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 8033a is formed continuously from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 8033 toward the diagonally rearward direction. The second left inner wall surface 8033b is continuously formed from the rear end (right end) of the first left side inner wall surface 8033a toward the rear at a steeper slope than the first left side inner wall surface 8033a. The third left inner wall surface 8033c is continuously formed from the rear end of the second left side inner wall surface 8033b toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left side inner wall surface 8033a and a gentle slope than the second left side inner wall surface 8033b. Has been done. The fourth left inner wall surface 8033d is continuously formed from the rear end of the third left side inner wall surface 8033c toward the rear at a steeper slope than the second left side inner wall surface 8033b.

Further, the left side portion 8033 has a left side rear end portion 8033e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 8033f of the left rear end portion 8033e is formed continuously from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d toward the right side. The front surface 8033f and the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d are substantially orthogonal to each other. The length of the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d becomes shorter in the front-rear direction toward the upper side, and the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d is not formed on the upper part of the left side portion 8033, and the left rear end portion is formed. The front surface 8033f of the 8033e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 8033c.

Similarly, although detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 8034 includes a first right side inner wall surface 8034a, a second right side inner wall surface 8034b, a third right side inner wall surface 8034c, a fourth right side inner wall surface 8034d, and a right rear end portion. It is equipped with 8034e. The first right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right side inner wall surface 8034b, the third right side inner wall surface 8034c, the fourth right side inner wall surface 8034d, and the right rear end portion 8034e are the first left side inner wall surface 8033a and the second left side inner wall surface 8033a, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 8033b, the third left inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left inner wall surface 8033d, and the left rear end portion 8033e.

The left rear end portion 8033e and the right rear end portion 8034e are each formed in a substantially vertical direction. For clarity, FIG. 221 shows the back surface 8033 g of the left rear end 8033e and the back surface 8034 g of the right rear end 8034e with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the lower portion 8032 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged above the relay board 8006 and the relay board cover 8007. As a result, the relay board 8006 and the relay board cover 8007 are substantially completely covered by the lower side portion 8032 (lower side surface 8032a). The position in the front-rear direction on the front end edge 8032b of the lower portion 8032 of the shielding wall member 8030 substantially coincides with the position in the front-rear direction on the rear end edge of the lower portion 8013d of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013. That is, the front end edge 8032b of the lower side portion 8032 substantially coincides with the rear end edge of the lower side portion 8013d in a plan view, and the lower side portion 8032 and the lower side portion 8013d are arranged with substantially no gap. The lower portion 8013d of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 is formed continuously from the lower ends of the flat portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b toward the rear, and is arranged substantially horizontally.

The right side portion 8034 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged on the left side of the right side LED substrate 8008R and the right side key receiving member 8009R. As a result, the upper portion of the right side LED substrate 8008R and the right side key receiving member 8009R is formed on the right side portion 8034 (first right side inner wall surface 8034a, second right side inner wall surface 8034b, third right side inner wall surface 8034c, and fourth right side inner wall surface 8034c). It is almost completely covered by 8034d). Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are installed on the right side surface of the right side LED substrate 8008R so as to emit light in the right direction.

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 8033 of the shielding wall member 8030 is arranged on the right side of the left side LED substrate 8008L and the left side key receiving member 8009L. As a result, the upper portion of the left side LED substrate 8008L and the left side key receiving member 8009L becomes the left side portion 8033 (first left side inner wall surface 8033a, second left side inner wall surface 8033b, third left side inner wall surface 8033c, and fourth left side inner wall surface 8033c). It is almost completely covered by 8033d). Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs are installed on the left side surface of the left side LED substrate 8008L so as to emit light in the left direction.

The right LED substrate 8008R and the left LED substrate 8008L each constitute a light emitting unit (for example, the indirect lighting unit 1060 shown in FIG. 66), and the light emitted from the LED can be changed in the traveling direction by the light guide member. After that, it is released to the outside of the game machine 1.

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 (light reflected by the mirror 9030) travels forward (the side on which the central screen sheet 8012 is arranged) (see FIG. 64). In FIG. 224, the irradiation range of such light is indicated by diagonal lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 224 (a), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 8031 of the shielding wall member 8030 and reaches the central screen sheet 8012. On the other hand, a part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the left side portion 8033 (the right side portion of the left rear end portion 8033e) and the right side portion 8034 (the left portion of the right rear end portion 8034e) of the shielding wall member 8030. To do. Since the shielding wall member 8030 does not have translucency, the light cannot pass through the left side portion 8033 and the right side portion 8034 and is reflected by the left side portion 8033 and the right side portion 8034, so that the central screen It does not reach sheet 8012.

On the other hand, the other embodiment shown in FIG. 224 (b) has the same configuration as the present embodiment except that the shielding wall member 8030 is not provided. In this embodiment, the irradiation range shown in FIG. 224 (b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 224 (a) because the progress of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is not hindered by the shielding wall member 8030. It has become. Specifically, in FIG. 224 (a), the region I and the region II are not the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 224 (b), the region I and the region II are the irradiation range. Regions I and II are regions located on the periphery of the central screen sheet 8012 in front view.

The left side LED substrate 8008L and the left side key receiving member 8009L are arranged in the area I. Further, in the area II, the right side LED substrate 8008R and the right side key receiving member 8009R are arranged. Therefore, in another embodiment, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left LED substrate 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED substrate 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R, and is reflected. A situation may occur in which the light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the area I and the area II are not included in the irradiation range, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is the left side LED substrate 8008L, the left side key receiving member 8009L, and the right side LED. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the light is reflected by the substrate 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R (the reflected light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012).

In the present embodiment, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is the first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left side inner wall surface 8033b, the third left side inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left side inner wall surface 8033d, and the first. These inner wall surfaces are formed so as not to enter the right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right side inner wall surface 8034b, the third right side inner wall surface 8034c, and the fourth right side inner wall surface 8034d. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and a part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 may be configured to be incident on the inner wall surface thereof. In this case, a part of the light may be configured to be reflected by these inner wall surfaces and then incident on the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 (not incident on the flat portion 8012a). In the present embodiment, the curved portion 8012b may be included in the irradiation range or may not be included in the irradiation range.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221, a right side ventilation opening 8036R and a left side ventilation opening 8036L are formed in the upper portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030. The right side ventilation opening 8036R and the left side ventilation opening 8036L are each formed so that air can pass in the front-rear direction. For clarity, FIG. 221 shows the right ventilation opening 8036R and the left ventilation opening 8036L in diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, the front panel 8001 of the decorative unit 8000 has an upper surface wall 8001a. The front panel 8001 is a member constituting the skeleton of the decorative unit 8000. A plurality of right vents 8002R and a plurality of left vents 8002L are formed on the upper wall 8001a. The right vent 8002R and the left vent 8002L have a shape corresponding to the pattern formed around these vents. Inside the decoration unit 8000, a right cavity 8003R and a left cavity 8003L are formed. The right vent 8002R and the left vent 8002L communicate with the right cavity 8003R and the left cavity 8003L, respectively. The right cavity 8003R and the left cavity 8003L communicate with the right ventilation opening 8036R and the left ventilation opening 8036L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the game machine 1 through, for example, the left side ventilation port 8002L, the left side cavity 8003L, and the left side ventilation opening 8036L. This air enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A (see FIG. 22). The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the right while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). The air exiting the case B22 is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 through the right ventilation opening 8036R, the right cavity 8003R, and the right ventilation port 8002R.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. In the second embodiment, it has been described that the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138). ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 221, the boundary portion (upper right corner portion 8040R) between the right side portion 8034 and the upper side portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030 has a structure that bulges toward the light passage opening 8031. A speaker opening 8041 is formed in the upper right corner 8040R. For clarity, the speaker opening 8041 is shaded in FIG. 221. FIG. 226 shows that a part of the speaker 8042 is exposed through the speaker opening 8041.

Below the speaker opening 8041, a speaker tilt portion 8043 having a slope that descends toward the rear is provided. As a result, a harness arrangement space 8044 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 8043. As shown in FIG. 226, the harness 8045 for connecting to the speaker 8042 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 8044. The harness 8045 is connected to the speaker 8042 via the speaker opening 8041.

A speaker harness protector 8046 is arranged on the back side of the speaker opening 8041. The speaker harness protector 8046 has a structure in which a predetermined step is formed by a surface in the front-rear direction and a surface in the up-down direction. As a result, the harness arrangement space 8044 is closed by the speaker harness protector 8046, and the harness 8045 is surrounded by the wall portion composed of the speaker inclined portion 8043 and the speaker harness protector 8046.

Similarly, a speaker opening 8041 and a speaker inclined portion 8043 are formed at the boundary portion (upper left corner portion 8040L) between the left side portion 8033 and the upper side portion 8035 of the shielding wall member 8030. Since the upper left corner portion 8040L has a structure symmetrical to the upper right corner portion 8040R, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Upper screen unit 8020>
227 and 228 are exploded perspective views of the upper screen unit. 229 to 231 are cross-sectional views of the upper screen unit. FIG. 232 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear and below.

FIG. 227 shows how each component of the upper screen unit 8020 is viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 228 shows how each component of the upper screen unit 8020 is viewed from diagonally rearward. FIG. 229 shows a state in which the upper screen unit 8020 is cut in a horizontal plane near the center. In FIG. 230, the upper screen unit 8020 shown in FIG. 229 is partially enlarged. FIG. 231 shows a state in which the upper screen unit 8020 is cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction near the center.

As shown in FIGS. 227 to 231, the upper screen unit 8020 includes an outer lens 8021, an inner lens 8022, and an upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

The outer lens 8021 has a substantially hemispherical shape as if a sphere is divided in half, and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The outer lens 8021 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. As a result, the outer lens 8021 is formed with a front surface (front surface 8021a) and a back surface (back surface 8021b). The outer lens 8021 is a convex lens (so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8021a and the back surface 8021b are convex toward the front surface, and the thickness of the central portion is larger than the thickness of the peripheral portion.

The inner lens 8022 has a substantially hemispherical shape as if a sphere is divided in half, and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The inner lens 8022 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. As a result, the inner lens 8022 is formed with a front surface (front surface 8022a) and a back surface (back surface 8022b). The inner lens 8022 is a convex lens (so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8022a and the back surface 8022b are convex toward the front surface, and the thickness of the central portion is larger than the thickness of the peripheral portion.

The upper screen sheet 8023 has a curved shape of a flat screen (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. .. The cross-sectional shape when the upper screen sheet 8023 is cut in a horizontal plane or a vertical plane is the shape in the top view (bottom view) of the door side right screen 9050 and the door side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 59) described in the third embodiment. Similar to the above, it has an arc shape.

The upper screen sheet 8023 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, like the central screen sheet 8012. The upper screen sheet 8023 is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The upper screen sheet 8023 has an incident surface 8023a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a display surface 8023b on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. Have. The upper screen sheet 8023 is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. That is, the incident surface 8023a and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020.

The upper screen sheet 8023 is arranged on the back side of the inner lens 8022, and the inner lens 8022 is arranged on the back side of the outer lens 8021. Specifically, the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 face each other, and the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 face each other. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 229, the cut surface of the outer lens 8021 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the inner lens 8022 is shaded, and the cut surface of the upper screen sheet 8023 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 230, a slight gap (gap I) is formed between the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. The back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 are substantially parallel to each other. The distance between the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 is about 1/3 (or about 1/10 to 2 times, about 1/5 to 1 times) the thickness of the upper screen sheet 8023. Or about 1/4 to 1/2). However, a part or all of the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023 may be in contact with each other.

Similarly, a slight gap (gap II) is formed between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022. The back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 are substantially parallel to each other. The distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 is about 1/3 (or about 1/10 to 2 times, about 1/5 to 1 times, or about 1/5 to 1 times the thickness of the upper screen sheet 8023, or It is about 1/4 to 1/2). However, a part or all of the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be in contact with each other.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 is slightly shorter than the distance between the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. .. However, the distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be longer than the distance between the back surface 8022b of the inner lens 8022 and the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. Any one of the distances may be 0.

As described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 8023a of the upper screen sheet 8023, and an image related to the game (for example, an image corresponding to a predetermined character) on the display surface 8023b of the upper screen sheet 8023. Is displayed. The image is magnified by the outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022, and can create a three-dimensional effect as if the image emerged on a sphere (crystal).

As a result, for example, the upper screen sheet 8023 is displayed in black in a normal gaming state, while a predetermined character appears on the upper screen unit 8020 in a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. It can be performed. In addition, in the normal gaming state (non-specific gaming state), the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted through the characters appearing on the upper screen unit 8020 (determines whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state). It is also possible to perform an effect that suggests that the lottery was won. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko gaming machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted.

Here, it has been described that a translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is arranged on the back side of the central screen sheet 8012 (see FIGS. 217 and 218), but the upper screen sheet 8023. No translucent member is arranged on the back side of the. Therefore, the light projected from the projector 9020 is directly incident on the incident surface 8023a of the upper screen sheet 8023. Therefore, for example, when the member arranged on the back side of the upper screen sheet 8023 is scratched, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the scratch is enlarged and displayed.

A front panel relay board 8025 having no translucency is arranged in a substantially vertical direction on the back side of the upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIG. 232), and the upper portion of the upper screen sheet 8023 is arranged in a substantially vertical direction (see FIG. 232). It is covered by the front panel relay board 8025 (see FIG. 226). However, as described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). As a result, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 travels diagonally upward, and the progress of the light is not hindered by the front panel relay board 8025.

However, a part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 may be configured to be incident on the front panel relay board 8025. This prevents, for example, a part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 from reaching the bottom surface 8026 of the decorative unit 8000, and prevents the light reflected by the bottom surface 8026 from entering the upper screen sheet 8023. can do. That is, it is also possible to allow the front panel relay board 8025 to have the same function as the shielding wall member 8030.

<Top side light emitting unit 8050>
FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and the speaker grill of the decorative unit are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 234 is a perspective view of the top side light emitting unit. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first front panel lens, the second front panel lens, and the speaker horn are removed from the top side light emitting unit. FIG. 236 is a perspective view of the top side substrate, the top side substrate cover, and the top side speaker illumination lens as viewed from above. FIG. 237 is a perspective view of the top side substrate, the top side substrate cover, and the top side speaker illumination lens as viewed from below.

As shown in FIG. 233, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a right side top side light emitting unit 8050R and a left side top side light emitting unit 8050L. Since the right side top side light emitting unit 8050R and the left side top side light emitting unit 8050L have a symmetrical structure, only the right side top side light emitting unit 8050R will be described below. Further, the right side top side light emitting unit 8050R and the left side top side light emitting unit 8050L are not distinguished and are referred to as the top side light emitting unit 8050.

The speaker grill 8005 (right speaker grill 8005R and left speaker grill 8005L) is attached to the front side of the right side 8001b and the left side 8001c of the front panel 8001. As a result, the speaker grill 8005 is positioned in front of the speaker 8042. A plurality of holes are formed in the right side portion 8001b, the left side portion 8001c, and the speaker grill 8005, and the sound output from the speaker 8042 is emitted forward through the holes.

As shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the top-side light emitting unit 8050 includes a first front panel lens 8051, a second front panel lens 8052, a top-side substrate 8060, a top-side substrate cover 8070, and a speaker horn 8080. , Is equipped.

The first front panel lens 8051 and the second front panel lens 8052 are made of a translucent material. The first front panel lens 8051 has protrusions 8051a and 8051b protruding rearward. The second front panel lens 8052 has mounting portions 8052a and 8052b for mounting the protruding portions 8051a and 8051b. In the first front panel lens 8051, most of the first front panel lens 8051 is positioned in front of the second front panel lens 8052 in a state where the protruding portions 8051a and 8051b are mounted on the mounting portions 8052a and 8052b, respectively. Be done.

In this state, the front panel 8001 is arranged above the protrusions 8051a and 8051b of the second front panel lens 8052 and the first front panel lens 8051. As a result, the entire second front panel lens 8052 is covered by the front panel 8001. On the other hand, in the first front panel lens 8051, the protruding portions 8051a and 8051b are covered by the front panel 8001, while the portions other than the protruding portions 8051a and 8051b are not covered by the front panel 8001 and are exposed.

The top side substrate 8060 is arranged substantially horizontally under the second front panel lens 8052, and is entirely covered by the second front panel lens 8052. A plurality of upper LEDs 8062 are provided on the surface (upper surface 8061) of the top side substrate 8060. The upper LED 8062 is installed so as to emit light in the upward direction. As a result, the light emitted from the upper LED 8062 is guided by the second front panel lens 8052 and emitted from the first front panel lens 8051 to the outside of the game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 236, the top side substrate cover 8070 has a substrate mounting portion 8071. The shape of the board mounting portion 8071 is in line with the outer shape of the top side board 8060. The top side substrate 8060 is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 8071. For the sake of clarity, the substrate mounting portion 8071 is shown in black in FIG. 236. An illumination lens mounting portion 8072 is provided inside the substrate mounting portion 8071 (the region surrounded by the black portion in FIG. 236, that is, the lower side of the top side substrate 8060).

A top-side speaker illumination lens 8075 is installed in the illumination lens installation portion 8072. The top-side speaker illumination lens 8075 is a component of the top-side light emitting unit 8050. The top-side speaker illumination lens 8075 is made of a translucent material and has a recess 8076 recessed from the surrounding surface. Further, the illumination lens installation portion 8072 is formed with a light irradiation opening 8073 that penetrates in the vertical direction. For clarity, FIG. 236 shows the light irradiation opening 8073 with diagonal lines. Further, the top side substrate cover 8070 is formed with a connector opening 8074.

As shown in FIG. 237, a plurality of lower LEDs 8064 are provided on the back surface (lower surface 8063) of the top side substrate 8060. The LED8064 is installed so as to emit light in the downward direction. The light emitted from the lower LED 8064 passes through the light irradiation opening 8073, reaches the speaker horn 8080, and irradiates the speaker horn 8080. The irradiation of the speaker horn 8080 will be described in detail below. A connector 8065 is provided on the lower surface 8063 of the top side substrate 8060. The connector 8065 is installed via the connector opening 8074.

<Light emission from the lower LED 8064>
FIG. 238 is a top view showing an installation mode of the lower LED in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens is installed on the top side substrate cover. FIG. 239 is a top view showing an installation mode of the lower LED in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens is removed from the top side substrate cover. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the top side speaker illumination lens. FIG. 241 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the lower LED and the speaker horn.

FIG. 238 shows the positional relationship between the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 and the lower LED 8064 in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is installed on the illumination lens installation portion 8072 of the top side substrate cover 8070. FIG. 239 shows the positional relationship between the light irradiation opening 8073 and the lower LED 8064 in a state where the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is not installed on the illumination lens installation portion 8072 of the top side substrate cover 8070. FIG. 240 shows a state in which the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 is cut in a vertical plane in the left-right direction. In FIG. 241, other members are erased in order to make it easier to understand the positional relationship between the lower LED 8064 and the speaker horn 8080.

As shown in FIG. 238, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the recess 8076 of the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 in the top view. As shown in FIG. 240, the recess 8076 is formed with a step, and includes a bottom surface 8077 and an intermediate surface 8078. The bottom surface 8077 is formed at a position lower than the intermediate surface 8078, and constitutes the bottom portion of the recess 8076. The bottom surface 8077 has a zigzag shape in cross section. Specifically, the bottom surface 8077 is a surface in which an inclined surface that rises from left to right and an inclined surface that descends from left to right are continuously formed.

As a result, the light emitted from the lower LED 8064 is incident on the bottom surface 8077 of the top side speaker illumination lens 8075. The light incident on the bottom surface 8077 is diffusely refracted and passes through the top side speaker illumination lens 8075. Here, as shown in FIG. 239, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the light irradiation opening 8073 of the top side substrate cover 8070 in the top view. Therefore, the bottom surface 8077 and the light irradiation opening 8073 overlap each other in the top view, and the light transmitted through the top side speaker illumination lens 8075 passes through the light irradiation opening 8073.

As shown in FIG. 241, the lower LED 8064 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the speaker horn 8080 in the top view. Therefore, the light that has passed through the light irradiation opening 8073 reaches the speaker horn 8080. From the above, the speaker horn 8080 is irradiated by the light emitted from the lower LED 8064.

<Peripheral structure of speaker 8042>
FIG. 242 is a perspective view of the speaker horn as viewed from the front. FIG. 243 is a perspective view of the speaker horn as viewed from the rear. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing the peripheral structure of the speaker. FIG. 245 is a front view showing the peripheral structure of the speaker. FIG. 246 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, the speaker seal, the speaker holder, the speaker, and the speaker harness protector are removed from the state shown in FIG. 244. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn, the speaker seal, the speaker holder, and the speaker are assembled. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker horn is removed from the state shown in FIG. 247. FIG. 249 is a front view of the speaker seal, the speaker holder, and the speaker. FIG. 250 is a perspective view of the speaker seal.

As shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the speaker horn 8080 includes a rectangular base 8081 and a bulge 8085 that bulges forward from the base 8081. A sound emitting opening 8082 is formed in the base portion 8081. For clarity, the rear end face 8083 of the base 8081 is shaded in FIG. 243. The portion surrounded by the shaded portion is the sound emitting opening 8082.

The bulging portion 8085 is formed in a C shape when viewed from the front. Specifically, the bulging portion 8085 includes an upper wall portion 8086, a lower wall portion 8087, and a side wall portion 8088 connecting the upper wall portion 8086 and the lower wall portion 8087. The upper wall portion 8086 is formed so as to bulge forward from a part (upper edge portion) of the peripheral edge of the sound emitting opening 8082. The lower wall portion 8087 is formed so as to bulge forward from a part (lower edge portion) of the peripheral edge of the sound emitting opening 8082. The side wall portion 8088 is formed to the left of a part of the peripheral edge (left edge portion) of the sound emitting opening 8082. As a result, the peripheral edge of the sound emitting opening 8082 is surrounded by the bulging portion 8085.

As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the speaker 8042 is arranged on the back side of the speaker horn 8080, and the speaker 8042 can be visually recognized through the sound emitting opening 8082. Note that FIGS. 244 and 245 show a state in which the front panel 8001, the speaker grill 8005, the first front panel lens 8051, the second front panel lens 8052, and the top side substrate 8060 are removed. Further, for the sake of clarity, in FIG. 245, the front end edge of the bulging portion 8085 in the speaker horn 8080 is shown in black.

The light emitted from the lower LED 8064 is incident on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086 of the speaker horn 8080 (see FIG. 241). The light incident on the upper wall portion 8086 is diffused in the left-right direction on the upper wall portion 8086, and a part of the light reaches the side wall portion 8088. Further, a part of the light incident on the upper wall portion 8086 passes through the upper wall portion 8086 and reaches the lower wall portion 8087. As a result, the light emitted from the lower LED 8064 causes the entire speaker horn 8080 (that is, the periphery of the speaker 8042) to dimly shine. The speaker horn 8080 is formed mainly of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and the diffusion effect is enhanced by mixing the opalescent agent.

As shown in FIGS. 246 to 250, a speaker holder 8090 and a speaker seal 8095 are provided between the speaker 8042 and the speaker horn 8080. The speaker holder 8090 is a member for supporting the speaker 8042, and a circular sound emitting opening 8091 is formed. The speaker 8042 is attached to the speaker holder 8090 so that sound is emitted forward through the sound emitting opening 8091.

The speaker seal 8095 includes an upper speaker seal 8095a, a right speaker seal 8095b, a lower speaker seal 8095c, and a left speaker seal 8095d. The upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d each have the same configuration, and are configured as a rectangular parallelepiped foam system sound absorbing material. Examples of the foam system sound absorbing material include polyurethane foam, ethylene / propylene / diene rubber foam (EPDM foam), polystyrene foam, polyolefin foam, chloroprene foam, polyester foam, and the like. For example, EHW (polyurethane foam, manufactured by Inoac Corporation), Ept Sealer (registered trademark, ethylene, propylene, diene rubber foam, manufactured by Nitto Denko Corporation) and the like can be adopted as the speaker seal 8095.

On the front surface of the speaker holder 8090, around the sound emitting opening 8091, the speaker seal contact surface 8092 (upper speaker seal contact surface 8092a, right speaker seal contact surface 8092b, lower speaker seal contact surface 8092c, and , Left speaker seal contact surface 8092d) is formed. In the speaker seal 8095, the back surfaces of the upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d are the upper speaker seal contact surface 8092a, the right speaker seal contact surface 8092b, and the lower side. It is arranged so as to abut the speaker seal contact surface 8092c and the left side speaker seal contact surface 8092d.

At this time, the front surfaces of the upper speaker seal 8095a, the right speaker seal 8095b, the lower speaker seal 8095c, and the left speaker seal 8095d come into contact with the rear end surface 8083 (see FIG. 243) of the speaker horn 8080. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration generated in the speaker 8042 from being transmitted to the speaker horn 8080 via the speaker holder 8090. If the vibration generated by the speaker 8042 is transmitted to the speaker horn 8080, the speaker horn 8080 and the speaker holder 8090 may rub against each other and damage each other, and as a result, these members may be scraped and powder may be blown. is assumed. If the powder adheres to the central screen sheet 8012, there is a concern that the appearance of the image displayed on the central screen sheet 8012 may be deteriorated. In this regard, in the present embodiment, such a concern can be dispelled by the presence of the speaker seal 8095 having sound insulation.

When manufacturing a new game machine different from the game machine 1, it is conceivable that the speaker 8042 and the speaker holder 8090 are reused, but the speaker horn 8080 is not reused. In this case as well, there is a possibility that the speaker holder 8090 and other members may come into contact with each other in the new game machine, and there is a concern that the same situation as described above may occur. However, by using the speaker seal 8095 as described above, it is possible to effectively prevent such a situation from occurring.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix F>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to make the image displayed on the screen clear.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of displaying a clear image.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(F-1-1) Screen (center screen sheet 8012) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) that is arranged in a passage path of light projected by the projector and does not have translucency is provided.
The wall portion is arranged so as to block a part of the light projected by the projector from traveling ahead of the wall portion.
A game machine characterized by that.

As factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), the present inventors consider the light directly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) and the screen (center screen sheet 8012). It was hypothesized that light indirectly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) due to reflection by members other than) may be mixed. Then, in order to verify the hypothesis, the present inventor disposes a wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) having no translucency in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020), and also disposes of the projector (shielding wall member 8030). A part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is blocked from traveling ahead of the wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) (a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is a screen (projector 9020). It is possible to prevent reflection on members other than the central screen sheet 8012)). With this configuration, the present inventor has succeeded in improving the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), and has arrived at the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment.

(F-1-2) The gaming machine according to (F-1-1).
The wall portion is formed around an opening (opening for light passage 8031).
Light projected by the projector and passed through the aperture is applied to the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the wall portion (shielding wall member 8030) is formed around the opening (light passage opening 8031), and is projected by the projector (projector 9020) to open (light). The light that has passed through the passage opening 8031) is configured to irradiate the screen (center screen sheet 8012). By providing such a wall portion (shielding wall member 8030), the present inventor has found that the image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

(F-2-1) Screen (center screen sheet 8012) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A partition member (shielding wall member 8030) for partitioning a portion through which the light projected by the projector passes and a portion through which the light does not pass is provided.
The partition member has irregularities formed on a portion (lower side surface 8032a) facing a portion through which the light projected by the projector passes.
A game machine characterized by that.

As factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), the present inventors consider the light directly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) and the screen (center screen sheet 8012). It was hypothesized that light indirectly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) due to reflection by members other than) may be mixed. Then, in order to test the hypothesis, the present inventor arranges a partition member (shielding wall member 8030) to set a region through which a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) does not pass. (It is possible to block the progress of a part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020), thereby preventing the part of the light from being reflected by a member other than the screen (center screen sheet 8012). Designed (possible). At that time, the present inventor devised a method of forming irregularities on the portion (lower side surface 8032a) of the partition member (shielding wall member 8030) facing the portion through which the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) passes. .. With this configuration, the present inventor has succeeded in improving the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), and has arrived at the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment.

(F-2-2) The game machine of the above (F-2-1).
The partition member has an opening (light passage opening 8031), and is arranged so that the light projected by the projector passes through the opening but does not pass through the peripheral portion of the opening.
The unevenness is formed in a portion of the partition member facing the opening.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the partition member (shielding wall member 8030) has an opening (opening 8031 for passing light), and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is the opening (light). It is arranged so as to pass through the passage opening 8031) but not to pass through the peripheral portion of the opening (light passage opening 8031), and the unevenness is formed on the opening (for light passage) in the partition member (shield wall member 8030). It is configured to be formed on a portion (lower side surface 8032a) facing the opening 8031). By providing such a partition member (shielding wall member 8030), the present inventor has found that the image display on the screen (central screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the lower side surface 8032a of the shielding wall member 8030 is textured. This makes it possible to prevent the light projected by the projector 9020 from being linearly reflected on the lower side surface 8032a, reducing the brightness of the reflected light so that the streaks of light are not reflected on the central screen sheet 8012. Can be. In the present invention, the portion forming the unevenness (the portion to be textured) is not particularly limited, and the unevenness is appropriately formed on the inner wall surface (the surface in contact with the space in which light enters) of the partition member (shielding wall member 8030). It is possible (to apply grain processing). For example, as described above, the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is the first left inner wall surface 8033a, the second left side inner wall surface 8033b, the third left side inner wall surface 8033c, the fourth left side inner wall surface 8033d, and the first. When it is configured to be incident on the right inner wall surface 8034a, the second right side inner wall surface 8034b, the third right side inner wall surface 8034c, and the fourth right side inner wall surface 8034d, unevenness is formed on these inner wall surfaces (texture processing is performed). ) May be. The shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by the grain processing is not particularly limited, and patterns such as satin finish, wood grain, rock grain, sand grain, cloth grain / silk grain, geometric pattern, and parallel thin lines are included. It is possible to appropriately form patterns and the like that are lined up at equal intervals.

In the ninth embodiment, by providing the shielding wall member 8030, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is the left LED substrate 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED substrate 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R. It has been described that it is possible to prevent the reflected light from being reflected by the central screen sheet 8012. In this regard, in order to prevent such unintended reflection, the area I and the area II (see FIG. 224) are not included in the irradiation range in the first place (projected from the projector 9020 even without the shielding wall member 8030). It is also conceivable to limit the irradiation range in advance so that the light does not enter the left LED substrate 8008L and the left key receiving member 8009L, and the right LED substrate 8008R and the right key receiving member 8009R). However, if the irradiation range is limited in such an manner, it is assumed that it will be difficult to adjust the irradiation range after the fact. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned unintended reflection while ensuring the degree of freedom regarding the adjustment of the irradiation range, thereby displaying on the central screen sheet 8012. The sharpness of the resulting image can be improved.

<Appendix G>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a light emitting decoration unit and capable of producing an effect by emitting light from a light source (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

The present inventor thinks that a new entertainment property can be created by devising the arrangement of the light emitting means in the process of diligently studying the game machine provided with such a light emitting means. It came to.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a light emitting means.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(G-1-1) With a speaker (speaker 8042),
An irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) arranged on the front side of the speaker and
A light emitting means (lower LED8064) capable of irradiating the irradiation target member is provided.
The light emitting means and the irradiation target member are arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the irradiation target member from above, below, or from the side.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is arranged on the front side of the speaker (speaker 8042), and the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED8064) is upward. Alternatively, it is configured to be incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from below or from the side. As a result, it is possible to make the effect using the sound by the speaker (speaker 8042) and the effect using the light by the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) cooperate with each other, and stimulate the player's hearing and vision. It is possible to create a novel production effect.

(G-1-2) The game machine according to (G-1-1).
The irradiation target member has a wall surface (upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086) formed so as to surround an opening (sound emitting opening 8082) penetrating in the front-rear direction.
The light emitting means and the irradiation target member are arranged so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the wall surface.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is a wall surface (upper wall portion 8086) formed so as to surround an opening (sound emitting opening 8082) penetrating in the front-rear direction. It has an upper surface), and is configured so that light emitted from a light emitting means (lower LED 8064) is incident on the wall surface (upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086). As a result, the sound output from the speaker (speaker 8042) is emitted to the player side through the opening (sound emission opening 8082), and the irradiation target is irradiated so as to surround the opening (sound emission opening 8082). It is possible to illuminate the member (speaker horn 8080), and the sound effect and the light effect can be more attractively linked.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED8064) is incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from above. In the present invention, the direction of incidence of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is not particularly limited, and the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is irradiated from below. It may be incident on the member (speaker horn 8080), or may be incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from the side (left or right). When the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from below, the substrate (top side substrate 8060) is arranged below the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080). , It is preferable to install a light emitting means (LED) capable of emitting light upward on the upper surface of the substrate (top side substrate 8060). Further, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is incident on the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) from the side (left or right), the side (speaker horn 8080) of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is (speaking horn 8080). The substrate (top side substrate 8060) can be arranged substantially vertically on the left or right side, and light can be emitted to the right or left on the side surface (right side or left side) of the substrate (top side substrate 8060). It is advisable to install a light emitting means (LED).

That is, in the ninth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting means (lower LED 8064) is incident on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 8086 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080), but the light emitting means (LED) The light emitted from the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) may be incident on the lower surface of the lower wall portion 8087 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080), or may be output from the side surface (speaker 8042) of the side wall portion 8088 of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080). It may be incident on the side opposite to the side facing the space through which the sound is passed. In the present invention, the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) is the outer wall surface of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) (the surface opposite to the side facing the space through which the sound output from the speaker 8042 passes). It is possible to inject from any location in.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) has a wall portion (bulging portion 8085) having a substantially C-shape in front view. In the present invention, the shape of the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) in the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is not particularly limited, and may be a substantially circular shape in front view or a substantially elliptical shape in front view. It may have a substantially rectangular shape in front view, a U-shape in front view, a U-shape in front view, or a parabolic shape in front view. You may. In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the two end points (points A and B shown in FIG. 245) of the front end edge of the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) are separated from each other, but these two points coincide with each other. The shape of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) may be designed so that the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080 does not exist). That is, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) may be formed in an annular shape. In the present invention, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) can have a structure in which an arbitrary portion around the opening (sound emitting opening 8082) is bulged forward. Is. For example, the wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) is any one or any combination of the upper wall portion 8086, the lower wall portion 8087, and the side wall portion 8088. You may. The wall portion (bulging portion 8085) of the irradiation target member (speaker horn 8080) may or may not be superimposed on the speaker (speaker 8042) in the front view.

<Appendix H>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor can create new entertainment by devising the arrangement of the screen and the translucent member in the process of diligently studying a game machine equipped with such a projector. I came up with the idea that it might be.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine equipped with a projector.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(H-1-1) Screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency is provided.
The screen has a convex shape on the predetermined direction side (front side), while the translucent member also has a convex shape on the predetermined direction side.
The translucent member is arranged on the predetermined direction side of the screen, and a predetermined gap is provided between the translucent member and the screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) has a convex shape in a predetermined direction side (front side), while the translucent member (inner lens 8022) also has a convex shape. It has a convex shape on the predetermined direction side (front side). The translucent member (inner lens 8022) is arranged on the predetermined direction side (front side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) are arranged. A predetermined gap is provided between them. With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) can be given a desired stereoscopic effect and a novel visual effect can be created.

(H-1-2) The gaming machine according to (H-1-1).
The screen and the translucent member are characterized in that the surface of the screen on the predetermined direction side and the surface of the translucent member on the side opposite to the predetermined direction are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to each other. And.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) are surfaces on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) on the predetermined direction side (front side). And the surface of the translucent member (inner lens 8022) on the side opposite to the predetermined direction (back surface side) are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to each other. By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventor is more realistic with respect to the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). We have found that it is possible to realize a three-dimensional expression.

(H-2-1) Screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
The first translucent member (outer lens 8021) having translucency and
A second translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency is provided.
The first translucent member is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the second translucent member, and the second translucent member is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the screen. Yes,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) are provided as the translucent member, and the first translucent member. (Outer lens 8021) is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the second translucent member (inner lens 8022), and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) is a screen (upper screen sheet 8023). It is located on the outer side of the game machine. With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) can be given a desired stereoscopic effect and a novel visual effect can be created.

(H-2-2) The gaming machine according to (H-2-1).
A predetermined gap is provided between the second translucent member and the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a predetermined gap is provided between the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventor makes the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) more realistic. We have found that it is possible to realize a rich three-dimensional expression.

(H-3-1) Screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A translucent member (inner lens 8022) having translucency is provided.
The translucent member has a convex outer surface on the gaming machine.
The translucent member is arranged on the outer side of the game machine with respect to the screen, while is translucent on the inner side of the game machine with respect to the screen and in the passage path of the light projected by the projector. No member is placed,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the light transmitting member (inner lens 8022) has a convex shape on the outer surface of the game machine. The translucent member (inner lens 8022) is arranged on the outer side of the game machine from the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), while on the inner side of the game machine and on the inner side of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). No translucent member is arranged in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) can be given a desired stereoscopic effect and a clear image display can be realized. In this way, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, it is possible to create a novel visual effect.

(H-3-2) The gaming machine according to (H-3-1).
The translucent member has a concave shape on the inner surface of the gaming machine.
The screen has a convex shape on the outer surface of the game machine.
The translucent member and the screen are arranged so that the concave surface of the translucent member and the convex surface of the screen are substantially parallel to each other.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the translucent member (inner lens 8022) has a concave inner surface of the game machine, and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) is the game machine. The outer surface of the lens has a convex shape. Then, the translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) are such that the concave surface of the translucent member (inner lens 8022) and the convex surface of the screen are substantially parallel to each other. Is located in. By arranging the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and the translucent member (inner lens 8022) in this way, the present inventor is more realistic with respect to the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). We have found that it is possible to realize a three-dimensional expression.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) are provided as the translucent member (lens). By duplicating the translucent member (lens) in this way, it is possible to easily and inexpensively mold the lens as compared with the case where one thick lens is used, and mass productivity is realized. At the same time, cost reduction can be achieved. However, in the present invention, only one of the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) may be provided. .. As described above, the distance between the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface 8022a of the inner lens 8022 may be 0, and in this case, the outer lens 8021 and the inner lens 8022 are substantially combined with one lens. It is possible to see.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, both the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) have a convex outer surface of the gaming machine, while the inside of the gaming machine. It was explained that the surface on the side side has a concave shape. In the present invention, the shape of the translucent member (lens) is not particularly limited, and for example, the inner surface of the game machine may have a convex shape or a flat shape. That is, the translucent member in the present invention is not limited to the convex meniscus lens, and may be a biconvex lens or a plano-convex lens.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, on the premise that the upper screen unit 8020 is provided on the front surface of the game machine 1 (upper door mechanism UD), the upper screen unit 8023 is on the outer side (front side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). Explained that the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) is arranged and the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) is arranged on the outer side (front side) of the second translucent member (inner lens 8022). did. In the present invention, the place where the upper screen unit 8020 is provided is not particularly limited, and the upper screen unit 8020 may be provided on the side surface of the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G. For example, when the upper screen unit 8020 is provided on the right side wall to the left side wall of the upper door mechanism UD, the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) is on the outer side (right side to left side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). ), And the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) can be arranged on the outer side (right side to left side) of the second translucent member (inner lens 8022).

Further, in the ninth embodiment, it has been described that the member having translucency is not arranged on the inner side (back side) of the upper screen sheet 8023. In the present invention, for example, a translucent member (transparent acrylic panel) is arranged on the inner side (rear side) of the screen (upper screen sheet 8023), whereby the translucent member (outer lens 8021 to inner lens) is arranged. It is also conceivable to fit and fix the 8022) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023). However, in this case, the member having translucency (transparent acrylic panel) and the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) cause friction due to vibration or the like generated during the game, so that the member having translucency (transparent acrylic panel) (upper screen sheet 8023). The transparent acrylic panel) or the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) may be scratched. When the image displayed on the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) is enlarged by the translucent member (outer lens 8021 to inner lens 8022), even a small scratch has a great influence on the projected image. Is a concern. From such a viewpoint, it is desirable not to arrange a member having translucency on the inner side (back side) of the upper screen sheet 8023 as in the ninth embodiment.

[10th Embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the tenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment also applies to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Countermeasures against reflection of irradiation light>
FIG. 251 is a perspective view of the central screen sheet and the rear light-transmitting plate as viewed from the rear and above. FIG. 252 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen sheet and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 253 (a) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in this embodiment is incident on the rear light-transmitting plate as viewed from above. FIG. 253 (b) is a schematic view of how the light projected from the projector in another embodiment is incident on the rear transmissive plate as viewed from above. FIG. 254 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen sheet and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 255 is a perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate as viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 256 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate as viewed from the rear and below.

FIGS. 251 and 252 show a state in which the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are assembled. FIG. 252 shows a state in which the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are cut in a horizontal plane. FIG. 253 schematically shows the cut surfaces of the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 shown in FIG. 252. In FIG. 254, the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear translucent plate 8013 shown in FIG. 252 are partially enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, in the present embodiment, the rear light transmitting plate 8013 is arranged on the back side of the central screen sheet 8012. This point is the same as that of the ninth embodiment (see FIGS. 217 and 218). Then, as in the ninth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the central screen sheet 8012 is continuously formed from the flat surface portion 8012a located at the center and the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 8012a toward the rear. It is provided with a curved portion 8012b. The rear light-transmitting plate 8013 includes a flat surface portion 8013a located at the center and a curved portion 8013b formed continuously from both the left and right side edges of the flat surface portion 8013a toward the rear.

Here, in the ninth embodiment, the back surface of the flat surface portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 8013a of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other, and the curved portion of the central screen sheet 8012 is in close contact with each other. It has been described that the surface on the back surface side of the 8012b and the surface on the front surface side of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are in close contact with each other. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front surface of the flat surface portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the flat surface portion 8013a of the rear translucent plate 8013 are in close contact with each other (or close to each other (omitted). A gap is formed between the back surface of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear translucent plate 8013. ..

For clarity, FIG. 251 shows the upper edge of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the upper edge of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 in black. Further, in FIG. 252, the cut surfaces of the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear light transmitting plate 8013 are shown in black. The curved portion 8013b of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 appears to be pulled backward (if the curved portion 8013b is made of a flexible material) (of the light projected from the projector 9020). It has a shape (as if it is inclined toward the upstream side in the direction of travel).

As a result, the degree of curvature of the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 at the curved portion 8013b is smaller than the degree of curvature of the central screen sheet 8012 at the curved portion 8012b. That is, the curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 is smaller than the curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012. For example, the radius of curvature of the curved portion 8013b is 5 times or more (or 10 times or more, 20 times or more, 50 times or more, 100 times or more, etc.) of the radius of curvature of the curved portion 8012b. In the present embodiment, a part of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 will be described as being substantially flat (curvature is 0).

As described in the eighth embodiment, the curvature is a quantity representing the degree of bending of a curve or a curved surface, but the degree of local bending can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is the curvature. It is called a radius. For example, the radius of curvature of the circumference of radius r is 1 / r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc, while if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature is represented by a predetermined function that represents the degree of bending of the curve. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, as in the ninth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 64). As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the rear light transmitting plate 8013. FIG. 253 (a) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point X on the rear transmissive plate 8013. The point X is a point on the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013, and the curved portion 8013b is formed substantially flat. Therefore, the direction of the tangent line (L ₁ (X)) with respect to the curved portion 8013b at the point X substantially coincides with the forming direction of the curved portion 8013b. The straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) are substantially orthogonal to each other, _{and the angle α formed by the straight line L and the straight line L 1} (X) is approximately 90 °. That is, the incident angle (90 ° −α) with respect to the curved portion 8013b of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L is approximately 0 °.

On the other hand, the other embodiment shown in FIG. 253 (b) corresponds to the configuration of the ninth embodiment. The curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear translucent plate 8013 according to the ninth embodiment is larger than the curvature of the curved portion 8013b of the rear translucent plate 8013 according to the present embodiment, and the curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012. It is almost the same as the curvature. The curvature of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 is substantially the same in the present embodiment and the ninth embodiment. FIG. 253 (b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear transmissive plate 8013. The point Y is a point on the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 according to the ninth embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light with respect to the point X. _{The angle β between the straight line (L 2 (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent line (L 1} (Y)) to the curved portion 8013b at the point Y and the straight line L, that is, the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L. The incident angle with respect to the curved portion 8013b is larger than the incident angle (90 ° −α) in the present embodiment.

Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L with respect to the curved portion 8013b is as described above, in the ninth embodiment, the light reflected at the point Y is on the flat surface portion 8012a side of the central screen sheet 8012. It is easier to progress to. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, such reflection can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the reflected light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012.

As shown in FIG. 254, in the vicinity of the left end portion of the surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 8013b of the rear light transmitting plate 8013, fine irregularities are formed by performing the grain processing over a predetermined range. There is. Further, in the vicinity of the left end portion of the surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012, fine irregularities are formed by performing the embossing processing over a predetermined range. In FIG. 254, the area where the grain processing is performed is shown by a diagonal line. The rear translucent plate 8013 and the central screen sheet 8012 have a symmetrical structure, and although not shown, the rear translucent plate 8013 has a curved portion 8013b near the right end of the rear surface and the central screen sheet. Similar grain processing is applied to the vicinity of the right end portion of the surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 8012b of the 8012. The grain processing is as described in the ninth embodiment. As a result, it is possible to more effectively prevent a situation in which the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the central screen sheet 8012 due to reflection.

As shown in FIGS. 255 and 256, the rear light transmitting plate 8013 has a rear upper end surface 8013f formed so as to project rearward from the upper end of the back surface 8013e (the rear surface of the flat surface portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b). have. The rear upper end surface 8013f is formed substantially perpendicular to the back surface 8013e. For clarity, FIG. 255 shows the rear upper end surface 8013f in diagonal lines. The rear upper end surface 8013f has an arc-shaped portion 8013g and a horizontal portion 8013h as portions continuous with the surface on the back surface side of the flat surface portion 8013a. The arc-shaped portion 8013g is formed in an arc shape along the opening 8013d for installing the upper screen unit. The horizontal portion 8013h is continuously formed from both the left and right side edges of the arc-shaped portion 8013g, and constitutes a substantially horizontal surface.

Although not shown, a black sheet is attached to the rear upper end surface 8013f. As the black sheet, a non-woven fabric such as Himeron (registered trademark of Ambic Co., Ltd.) can be used. As a result, it is possible to more effectively prevent a situation in which the light projected from the projector 9020 is absorbed and the reflected light is incident on the central screen sheet 8012 (or the upper screen sheet 8023). Instead of attaching the black sheet, the rear upper end surface 8013f may be textured, but from the viewpoint of preventing reflection of the light projected from the projector 9020, it is desirable to attach the black sheet. ..

<Improved strength of central screen unit>
FIG. 257 is a perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate as viewed from the front and the bottom. FIG. 258 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rear light transmitting plate viewed from the front and the bottom. FIG. 259 is a partially enlarged perspective view around the first reinforcing protrusion. FIG. 260 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the first reinforcing protrusion and the second reinforcing protrusion are in contact with the central screen sheet.

As shown in FIG. 257, the rear light-transmitting plate 8013 has a front upper end surface 8013j formed so as to project forward from the upper end of the front surface 8013i (front surface of the flat surface portion 8013a and the curved portion 8013b). ing. The front upper end surface 8013j is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 8013i. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 257 shows the front upper end surface 8013j in black.

The front upper end surface 8013j has a shape corresponding to the upper end edge of the front light transmitting plate 8011 and the upper end edge of the central screen sheet 8012. As a result, the front translucent plate 8011 and the central screen sheet 8012 are attached to the rear translucent plate 8013 in a state where the upper end edge of the front translucent plate 8011 and the upper end edge of the central screen sheet 8012 are fitted to the front upper end surface 8013j, respectively. On the other hand, it is fixed, and in combination with the rear upper end surface 8013f, the strength of the central screen unit 8010 is improved.

Further, the rear light transmitting plate 8013 has a first reinforcing protrusion 8014a, a second reinforcing protrusion 8014b, a third reinforcing protrusion 8014c, and a fourth reinforcing protrusion 8014d. Since the third reinforcing protrusion 8014c and the fourth reinforcing protrusion 8014d have a symmetrical structure with the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a and the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b, respectively, the first reinforcing protrusion 8014b will be described below. Only 8014a and the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b will be described.

As shown in FIG. 258, the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a is provided at the upper right corner of the rear light transmitting plate 8013. A screw hole 8015a and a screw hole 8015b are provided in the vicinity of the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a. The shielding wall member 8030 (see FIG. 223) is attached to the rear light transmitting plate 8013 by the screws inserted through the screw holes 8015a and the screw holes 8015b from the rear to the front, respectively. The first reinforcing protrusion 8014a, the screw hole 8015a, and the screw hole 8015b are arranged so as to be the vertices of an isosceles triangle.

As shown in FIG. 259, the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a is formed as a protrusion that projects substantially vertically toward the front from the upper right flat surface 8016. The first reinforcing protrusion 8014a has a quadrangular pyramid shape with a rounded apex. The upper right flat surface 8016 constitutes a plane substantially parallel to the flat surface portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012. Therefore, the protruding direction of the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a is substantially perpendicular to the flat surface portion 8012a of the central screen sheet 8012.

As shown in FIG. 258, the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b is formed continuously with the right end portion of the front upper end surface 8013j. Specifically, the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b is formed as a protrusion protruding forward from the front surface 8013i. The upper right end surface 8017 formed at the right end of the front upper end surface 8013j constitutes the side surface of the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b. Further, an upper side surface 8019 is formed continuously from the upper end edge of the front end surface 8018 of the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b toward the front. For clarity, FIG. 258 shows the upper right end face 8017 in diagonal lines and the front end face 8018 in black.

As shown in FIG. 260, when the central screen sheet 8012 and the rear translucent plate 8013 are assembled, the front end of the first reinforcing protrusion 8014a and the upper portion of the rear end edge 8012c in the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012. And come into contact. Further, the front end surface 8018 of the second reinforcing protrusion 8014b and the upper portion of the back surface 8012d (the surface on the back surface side of the curved portion 8012b) of the central screen sheet 8012 come into contact with each other. At this time, the upper side surface 8019 is positioned above the upper end edge 8012e of the central screen sheet 8012. For clarity, in FIG. 260, the trailing edge 8012c is shaded and the top edge 8012e is shaded.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the back surface (back surface 8012d) of the curved portion 8012b of the central screen sheet 8012 and the front surface of the curved portion 8013b of the rear translucent plate 8013. , A gap is formed. This may reduce the strength of the central screen unit 8010, but the presence of the first reinforcing protrusions 8014a and the second reinforcing protrusions 8014b makes it possible to reinforce the central screen unit 8010. ..

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix I>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to make the image displayed on the screen clear.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of displaying a clear image.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(I-1-1) Screen (center screen sheet 8012) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) having translucency is provided.
The translucent member is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector.
The angle of incidence when the light projected by the projector is incident on the translucent member and the angle of incidence when the light projected by the projector is incident on the screen when it is assumed that the translucent member does not exist. Is different,
A game machine characterized by that.

As factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), the present inventor presents the light directly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) and the translucent member (rear side). It was hypothesized that light indirectly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) due to reflection on the translucent plate 8013) may be mixed. Then, in order to test the hypothesis, the present inventor presents the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear side translucent plate 8013) and the translucent member (rear Assuming that the side transmissive plate 8013) does not exist, the angle of incidence when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) is different (projector (projector 9020)). The light projected by the projector was designed so that it would not be easily reflected on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) side in the translucent member (rear side translucent plate 8013). With this configuration, the present inventor has succeeded in improving the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), and has arrived at the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment.

(I-1-2) The gaming machine according to (I-1-1).
The screen includes a first region (flat portion 8012a) formed substantially flat and a second region (curved portion 8012b) having a curved shape.
The translucent member includes a third region (curved portion 8013b) having a curvature smaller than that of the second region.
The angle of incidence when the light projected by the projector is incident on the third region of the translucent member, and the light projected by the projector when it is assumed that the transmissive member does not exist is the light projected by the projector. The angle of incidence when incident on the second region is different,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the screen (center screen sheet 8012) has a first region (flat portion 8012a) formed substantially flat and a second region (curved portion 8012b) having a curved shape. On the other hand, the light-transmitting member (rear-side light-transmitting plate 8013) includes a third region (curved portion 8013b) having a curvature smaller than that of the second region (curved portion 8012b). Then, the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the third region (curved portion 8013b) of the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) and the translucent member (rear translucent). Assuming that the plate 8013) does not exist, the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the second region (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (central screen sheet 8012) is different. .. With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the image display on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

In the tenth embodiment, the incident angle (90 ° -α) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) (see FIG. 253 (a)). , The incident angle β (see FIG. 253 (b)) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) according to the ninth embodiment. explained. The above-mentioned "incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) when it is assumed that the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) does not exist" is the said. It can be regarded as substantially the same as the incident angle β. If the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is not arranged, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is the second region (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (center screen sheet 8012). It is also assumed that the light is reflected toward the first region (plane portion 8012a) when it is incident on the surface. According to the gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) from being lowered due to such reflection.

From this point of view, the light-transmitting member (rear-side light-transmitting plate 8013) is the back side (direction of travel of light projected by the projector) of the second region (curved portion 8012b) of the screen (center screen sheet 8012). It may be arranged only on the upstream side). For example, the light-transmitting member (rear-side light-transmitting plate 8013) may include only the curved portion 8013b and not the flat surface portion 8013a.

The incident angle (90 ° -α) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013) is not particularly limited, but is a relatively small value (for example,). It is possible to adopt 30 ° or less (or 15 ° or less, 10 ° or less °, 5 ° or less, etc.).

(I-2-1) Screen (center screen sheet 8012) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A reinforcing member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) for reinforcing the screen is provided.
The reinforcing member is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector.
The end of the reinforcing member is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

As factors that reduce the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), the present inventors consider the light directly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) and the screen (center screen sheet 8012). ) Is reflected by the reinforcing member (rear side translucent plate 8013) to reinforce the screen (center screen sheet 8012), and the light indirectly incident on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) may be mixed. It was. Then, in order to test the hypothesis, the present inventor so that the end portion of the reinforcing member (rear side translucent plate 8013) is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). (It is possible to adjust the incident angle when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the reinforcing member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013)). With this configuration, the present inventor has succeeded in improving the sharpness of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), and has arrived at the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment.

(I-2-2) The gaming machine according to (I-2-1).
Concavities and convexities are formed in a predetermined region near the end of the reinforcing member.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, unevenness is formed in a predetermined region near the end portion of the reinforcing member (rear light transmitting plate 8013). With such a configuration, the present inventor has found that the image display on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) can be performed more effectively.

By arranging the reinforcing member (rear side translucent plate 8013), the strength against external pressure can be secured, but if the function of such a reinforcing member (rear side translucent plate 8013) is emphasized, the reinforcing member It is desirable that the (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) has an appropriate thickness. However, if the thickness of the reinforcing member (rear translucent plate 8013) is increased, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is emitted by the transmissive member (rear translucent plate 8013) (particularly at the end, that is, the projector). There is also a concern that the light may travel in an unintended direction due to the effect of refraction that occurs when the light is incident on a position away from the center of the range. In this regard, according to the game machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the end portion of the reinforcing member (rear side translucent plate 8013) is inclined toward the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the incident angle (90 ° -α) when the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the translucent member (rear translucent plate 8013). The effect of refraction can be reduced.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the texture processing is applied to the vicinity of the end portion of the rear light transmitting plate 8013 and the vicinity of the end portion of the central screen sheet 8012. However, in the present invention, the reinforcing member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) and the screen (center screen sheet 8012) may not be textured (the above irregularities are not formed). In particular, when unevenness is formed (textured) on the screen (center screen sheet 8012), there is a concern that the appearance of the image displayed on the screen (center screen sheet 8012) may deteriorate. In this regard, in the tenth embodiment, even if the reinforcing member (rear light-transmitting plate 8013) and the screen (center screen sheet 8012) are not formed with irregularities (they are not textured), the ninth embodiment is performed. Compared with the form, it is possible to appropriately prevent the reflection of the light projected from the projector (projector 9020).

[11th Embodiment]
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the eleventh embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to tenth embodiments also applies to the eleventh embodiment.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the light projected from the projector device B2 travels upward and is then reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 85). .. Then, the light projected from the projector device B2 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a main screen sheet 8112 and five decorative screen sheets 8133 (see FIGS. 262 to 264). The light projected from the projector device B2 is incident on the main screen sheet 8112 and each of the five decorative screen sheets 8133 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. Will be done. The details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 261 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 262 is a perspective view of a state in which the main screen unit is removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main display window DD4 (see FIG. 3) is provided slightly below the center of the upper door mechanism UD in the vertical direction. A main screen unit 8110 is provided on the upper portion of the upper door mechanism UD. Five decorative units 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and fifth decorative unit 8120e) near the lower edge of the main screen unit 8110. Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 262, the main screen unit 8110 includes a front light transmitting plate 8111 and a main screen sheet 8112.

The front translucent plate 8111 is mainly made of a translucent resin such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is basically formed in a flat shape over the entire surface and has a uniform thickness. ing.

The main screen sheet 8112 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is displayed from the projector device B2 in the same manner as the central screen sheet 8012 (see FIG. 217) described in the ninth embodiment. It has an incident surface on the back side on which the projected light is incident, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The main screen sheet 8112 is formed so that, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film is mainly used as a main material, and the main screen sheet 8112 is basically formed into a flat shape over the entire surface and has an even thickness. It is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projected.

The main screen sheet 8112 is arranged on the back side of the front light transmitting plate 8111. Specifically, the front surface of the front translucent plate 8111 and the front surface of the main screen sheet 8112 are in close contact with each other. The light projected from the projector device B2 is incident on the incident surface (rear surface) of the main screen sheet 8112. As a result, images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the main screen sheet 8112. The front translucent plate 8111 is formed to be transparent, and there is basically no structure (except for the peripheral structure of the decorative unit 8120) that blocks the player's field of view in front of the front transmissive plate 8011. When the image is displayed on the screen sheet 8112, the image becomes visible to the player.

The light projected from the projector device B2 is also incident on the incident surface (rear surface) of the five decorative screen sheets 8133. As a result, images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface (front surface) of each decorative screen sheet 8133. The decorative screen sheet 8133 is a component of the decorative unit 8120. The decorative unit 8120 will be described in detail later.

<Decorative unit 8120>
FIG. 263 is a front view of the decorative unit. 264 and 265 are exploded perspective views of the decorative unit. FIG. 266 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative screen unit. FIG. 267 is a front view of the decorative frame. FIG. 268 is a side view showing how the light projected from the projector device is incident on the decorative screen sheet. FIG. 269 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative unit.

FIG. 264 shows a state in which each component of the decorative unit 8120 is viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 265 shows a state in which each component of the decorative unit 8120 is viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 266 shows a state in which the decorative screen unit 8130 (the decorative frame 8140 is removed from the decorative unit 8120) is cut in a horizontal plane near the center. FIG. 268 shows a state in which the decorative screen sheet 8133 is cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction near the center. FIG. 269 shows a state in which the decorative unit 8120 is cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction near the center.

Since the basic configurations of the five decoration units 8120 are the same, the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration are described below. Unit 8120e will be described without distinction. In FIG. 263 and below, a diagram of the third decorative unit 8120c is shown on behalf of the first decorative unit 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 263 to 265, the decorative unit 8120 includes a decorative screen unit 8130 and a decorative frame 8140. The decorative screen unit 8130 includes a cover member 8131, a lens member 8132, and a decorative screen sheet 8133.

The cover member 8131 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The cover member 8131 is mainly made of a resin such as a translucent acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. As a result, the cover member 8131 is formed with a front surface (front surface 8131a) and a back surface (back surface 8131b).

The lens member 8132 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. The lens member 8132 is mainly made of translucent polycarbonate or the like, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness. As a result, the lens member 8132 is formed with a front surface (front surface 8132a) and a back surface (back surface 8132b). The lens member 8132 is a convex lens (so-called convex meniscus lens) in which both the front surface 8132a and the back surface 8132b are convex toward the front surface, and the thickness of the central portion is larger than the thickness of the peripheral portion.

The decorative screen sheet 8133 has a curved shape of a flat screen (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion), and is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. .. The cross-sectional shape when the decorative screen sheet 8133 is cut in a horizontal plane or a vertical plane is an arc similar to the cross-sectional shape when the upper screen sheet 8023 (see FIG. 217) described in the ninth embodiment is cut in a horizontal plane or a vertical plane. It has a shape.

Like the main screen sheet 8112, the decorative screen sheet 8133 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear. The decorative screen sheet 8133 is formed, for example, of a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The decorative screen sheet 8133 includes an incident surface 8133a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector device B2 is incident, and a display surface 8133b on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. Has. The decorative screen sheet 8133 is arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. That is, the incident surface 8133a and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 266, the decorative screen sheet 8133 is arranged on the back side of the lens member 8132, and the lens member 8132 is arranged on the back side of the cover member 8131. Specifically, the back surface 8131b of the cover member 8131 and the front surface 8132a of the lens member 8132 face each other, and the back surface 8132b of the lens member 8132 and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 face each other. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 266, the cut surface of the cover member 8131 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the lens member 8132 is shaded, and the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is shown in black.

The back surface 8131b of the cover member 8131 and the front surface 8132a of the lens member 8132 are close to each other (substantially in contact with each other), but there is a slight gap (the back surface 8021b of the outer lens 8021 and the front surface of the inner lens 8022 described in the ninth embodiment). A gap similar to the gap formed between the lens and the 8022a) may be formed. Further, the back surface 8132b of the lens member 8132 and the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133 are close to each other (substantially in contact with each other), but there is a slight gap (the back surface 8022b and the upper side of the inner lens 8022 described in the ninth embodiment). A gap similar to the gap formed between the screen sheet 8023 and the display surface 8023b) may be formed (see FIG. 230).

The decorative frame 8140 is arranged from the front side to the side of the decorative screen unit 8130 configured as described above. The decorative frame 8140 has a curved shape (for example, a bowl shape obtained by cutting a sphere at a predetermined portion) like the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133. The shape of the back side of the decorative frame 8140 corresponds to the shape of the front surface 8131a of the cover member 8131, and the decorative screen unit 8130 can be fitted to the back side of the decorative frame 8140. As a result, the decorative screen unit 8130 is housed in the recessed portion on the back side of the decorative frame 8140.

As shown in FIG. 267, the decorative frame 8140 includes an upper portion 8141 and a lower portion 8142 formed apart from each other, and four crosslinks connecting the upper portion 8141 and the lower portion 8142 so as to bridge. Section 8143 (first cross-linking section 8143a, second cross-linking section 8143b, third cross-linking section 8143c, and fourth cross-linking section 8143d) is provided. Three cross-linking portions 8143 form three openings 8144 (left side opening 8144a, central opening 8144b, and right side opening 8144c).

The left opening 8144a is partitioned by a first cross-linking portion 8143a and a second cross-linking portion 8143b. The central opening 8144b is partitioned by a second cross-linking portion 8143b and a third cross-linking portion 8143c. The right opening 8144c is partitioned by a third cross-linking portion 8143c and a fourth cross-linking portion 8143d. For clarity, FIG. 267 shows the left opening 8144a, the central opening 8144b, and the right opening 8144c with diagonal lines.

The decorative frame 8140 is provided with a predetermined decoration, and a modeling portion 8141a is provided on the upper portion of the upper portion 8141. In the first decorative unit 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e, the shapes of the modeling portions 8141a are different from each other.

The light projected from the projector device B2 is incident on the incident surface 8133a of the decorative screen sheet 8133, and an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 8133b of the decorative screen sheet 8133. The image is magnified by the lens member 8132. When the image is displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133, the cover member 8131 is transparently formed and there is no structure that blocks the player's field of view in front of the three openings 8144 formed in the decorative frame 8140. The image becomes visible to the player through the opening 8144.

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector device B2 travels upward and is then reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (see FIG. 85). As a result, the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 travels diagonally downward. In FIG. 268, the irradiation range of light is indicated by diagonal lines. Further, for the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 268, the decorative screen sheet 8133 has a projected region 8133c as a region on which an image can be displayed. The projectable region 8133d, which occupies most of the projected region 8133c, is irradiated with the light projected from the projector device B2, whereas the difficult-to-project region 8133e near the upper edge of the projected region 8133c is a projector. It is difficult to irradiate the light projected from the device B2. In the present embodiment, the upper portion 8141 of the decorative frame 8140 is arranged on the front side of the difficult-to-project region 8133e. In front view, the difficult-to-project area 8133e is completely covered by the upper portion 8141, and the decorative frame 8140 does not have translucency, so that the difficult-to-project area 8133e is visible to the player. There is no such thing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the difficult-to-project region 8133e from being deteriorated due to being visually recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 269, the image displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is magnified by the lens member 8132, so that the image actually viewed by the player is the image displayed in the projectable area 8133d. It becomes a part (the image displayed in the part shown in black in the figure).

<Screen unit 8150>
FIG. 270 is a front view showing a state in which the screen unit and the navigation lamp unit are assembled. FIG. 271 is a perspective view of the decorative frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 272 is a front view of the front light transmitting plate. FIG. 273 is a perspective view of the navigation lamp cover as viewed from the front. FIG. 274 is a front view of the main screen sheet. FIG. 275 is a rear view showing a state in which the front light transmitting plate is removed from the state in which the screen unit and the navigation lamp cover are assembled. FIG. 276 is a perspective view of the cover member, the lens member, and the decorative screen sheet as viewed from the rear. FIG. 277 is a perspective view of the cover member, the lens member, and the decorative screen sheet as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 270, the screen unit 8150 includes a main screen unit 8110 and five decorative units 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and first. It is composed of 5 decorative units 8120e). The navigation lamp unit 8160 has a navigation lamp cover 8161, and the first decoration unit 8120a, the second decoration unit 8120b, the third decoration unit 8120c, the fourth decoration unit 8120d, and the fifth decoration unit 8120e, respectively. , It is placed on the upper surface of the navigation lamp cover 8161.

The first decorative unit 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e are arranged on the front side of the main screen unit 8110, respectively. Specifically, the first decorative unit 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e are screwed to the front light transmitting plate 8111, respectively. It is attached. Hereinafter, a more detailed description will be given.

As shown in FIG. 271, the decorative frame 8140 is formed with two boss portions 8145 (upper boss portion 8145a and lower boss portion 8145b). As shown in FIG. 272, 10 screw holes (five upper screw holes 8111a and five lower screw holes 8111b) are formed in the front light transmitting plate 8111. As shown in FIG. 273, the navigation lamp cover 8161 has five holes for arranging the lower boss portion 8162 (holes for arranging the lower boss portion 8162a, holes for arranging the lower boss portion 8162b, and holes for arranging the lower boss portion). 8162c, a hole for arranging the lower boss portion 8162d, and a hole for arranging the lower boss portion 8162e) are formed.

Formation of the upper boss portion 8145a of each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and fifth decorative unit 8120e). The positions correspond to the formation positions of the five upper screw holes 8111a of the front light transmitting plate 8111, respectively. Further, the lower boss portion of each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and fifth decorative unit 8120e). The forming position of 8145b corresponds to the forming position of the five lower screw holes 8111b of the front light transmitting plate 8111, respectively.

As a result, the screw through which the upper screw hole 8111a of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the upper boss portion 8145a of the decorative frame 8140, and the lower screw hole 8111b of the front light-transmitting plate 8111 is inserted. The decorative frame 8140 can be fixed to the front light transmitting plate 8111 by screwing the screw into the hole formed in the lower boss portion 8145b of the decorative frame 8140. Since the upper boss portion 8145a and the lower boss portion 8145b are each formed on the back side of the decorative frame 8140, these screws are not visible to the player.

Further, the formation positions of the five lower boss portion arranging holes 8162 of the navigation lamp cover 8161 are the formation positions of the lower boss portion 8145b of each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120 and the five front translucent plates 8111. It corresponds to the formation position of the lower screw hole 8111b, respectively. When the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front light transmitting plate 8111 by screwing, the lower boss portion 8145b is arranged in the lower boss portion arranging hole 8162. The shape of the lower boss portion arranging hole 8162 is such that the lower boss portion 8145b can be fitted. The shape of the lower boss portion 8145b is different from each other in each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120. Correspondingly, the shape of the lower boss portion arranging hole 8162 is also the lower boss portion. The placement holes 8162a, the lower boss placement hole 8162b, the lower boss placement hole 8162c, the lower boss placement hole 8162d, and the lower boss placement hole 8162e are different from each other.

In a state where the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front light transmitting plate 8111, the peripheral portion 8163 of the lower boss portion arranging hole 8162 in the navigation lamp cover 8161 is the peripheral portion 8145c of the lower boss portion 8145b in the decorative frame 8140. It is positioned on the back side and the front side of the front light transmitting plate 8111. As a result, the peripheral portion 8163 of the navigation lamp cover 8161 is sandwiched between the peripheral portion 8145c of the decorative frame 8140 and the front light transmitting plate 8111.

Further, as shown in FIG. 274, the main screen sheet 8112 is formed with five openings (light passing openings 8112a) having a tree-like shape. The five light passing openings 8112a are formed at the five decorative units 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and fifth decorative unit, respectively. It corresponds to the arrangement position of 8120e). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 274, the light passage opening 8112a is shaded.

The upper portion of the light passage opening 8112a is a screw insertion hole 8112b. As shown in FIG. 275, the formation positions of the five screw insertion holes 8112b are the formation positions of the upper boss portion 8145a of each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120 and the five positions of the front light transmitting plate 8111, respectively. It corresponds to the formation position of the upper screw hole 8111a, respectively. As a result, when the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front light transmitting plate 8111 by screwing, the screw can be inserted into the screw insertion hole 8112b. Further, the shape (diameter) of the screw insertion hole 8112b substantially matches the shape (diameter) of the head of the screw, and the head of the screw is used for screw insertion in the assembled state of the screen unit 8150. It can be arranged in the hole 8112b.

Further, the forming position of the lower opening 8112c in each of the five light passing openings 8112a is the forming position of the lower boss portion 8145b of each decorative frame 8140 in the five decorative units 8120, and the forming position of the front translucent plate 8111. It corresponds to the formation position of the five lower screw holes 8111b and the formation position of the five lower boss placement holes 8162 of the navigation lamp cover 8161, respectively. As a result, when the decorative frame 8140 is attached to the front light transmitting plate 8111 and the navigation lamp cover 8161 by screwing, the screw can be inserted into the lower opening 8112c. Further, in the assembled state of the screen unit 8150, the head of the screw can be arranged in the lower opening 8112c.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the decorative screen unit 8130 in the assembled state of the screen unit 8150 (arrangement relationship of the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133) will be supplemented.

As shown in FIG. 276, the decorative screen sheet 8133 includes a rear flat surface 8133f, a lower flat surface 8133g, an upper flat surface 8133h, and a rear curved surface 8133i. The rear flat surface 8133f constitutes the rear end surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and is formed substantially flat. The lower flat surface 8133g has a substantially arcuate shape, and is formed substantially perpendicular to and substantially flat with the rear flat surface 8133f. Although not shown in FIG. 276, the upper flat surface 8133h has a substantially arcuate shape (a shape similar to the lower flat surface 8133g), and is substantially perpendicular to the rear flat surface 8133f and substantially flat on the lower side. It is formed above the flat surface 8133 g. The rear curved surface 8133i has a curved shape, and is formed continuously from the front edge of each of the lower flat surface 8133g and the upper flat surface 8133h. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 276, the rear flat surface 8133f is shaded and the lower flat surface 8133g is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 275, in rear view, the outer shape of the portion of the main screen sheet 8112 excluding the screw insertion hole 8112b and the lower opening 8112c in the light passage opening 8112a is approximately the same as the outer shape of the decorative screen sheet 8133. It corresponds. As a result, the entire rear curved surface 8133i (projectable region 8133d) is superimposed on the light passing opening 8112a of the main screen sheet 8112. Therefore, most of the light projected from the projector device B2 that has passed through the light passage opening 8112a can reach the projectable region 8133d (see FIG. 268).

As shown in FIG. 271, the decorative frame 8140 has an upper protruding portion 8146 that protrudes downward from the lower surface 8145d of the upper boss portion 8145a and extends in the front-rear direction. Further, the decorative frame 8140 has a lower protruding portion 8148 that protrudes upward from the lower flat surface 8147 and extends in the front-rear direction. The lower flat surface 8147 is a surface on which the cover member 8131 is placed. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 have notches (notch 8134a, notch 8134b, and notch 8134c, respectively) at the upper ends. ) Is formed. Grooves 8135 are continuously formed in the notch 8134a. Further, the cover member 8131 is formed with a groove 8136 at the lower portion.

The notch 8134a, the notch 8134b, and the notch 8134c each have a shape that can be fitted with the lower surface 8145d of the upper boss portion 8145a, and the groove 8135 has a shape that can be fitted with the upper protruding portion 8146. It has become. Further, the groove 8136 has a shape that can be fitted with the lower protruding portion 8148. As a result, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 are housed in the recessed portion on the back surface side of the decorative frame 8140.

In this state (the state in which the decorative unit 8120 is assembled), the front flat surface 8133j (the surface opposite to the rear flat surface 8133f) of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the rear flat surface 8132c of the lens member 8132 are substantially abbreviated. The front flat surface 8132d (the surface opposite to the rear flat surface 8132c) of the lens member 8132 and the rear flat surface 8131c of the cover member 8131 are substantially in contact with each other. The rear flat surface 8132c constitutes the rear end surface of the lens member 8132 and is formed substantially flat. The rear flat surface 8131c constitutes the rear end surface of the cover member 8131 and is formed substantially flat. In FIG. 276, the rear flat surface 8132c and the rear flat surface 8131c are shown by diagonal lines. The front flat surface 8133j is a surface formed substantially flat along the peripheral edge on the front surface side of the decorative screen sheet 8133. The front flat surface 8132d is a surface formed substantially flat along the peripheral edge on the front surface side of the lens member 8132. In FIG. 277, the front flat surface 8133j and the front flat surface 8132d are shown by diagonal lines.

Further, the front curved surface 8133k (the surface opposite to the rear curved surface 8133i) of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the rear curved surface 8132e of the lens member 8132 are substantially in contact with each other, and the front curved surface 8132f (rear side) of the lens member 8132 is substantially in contact with each other. The surface opposite to the curved surface 8132e) and the rear curved surface 8131d of the cover member 8131 are substantially in contact with each other. The rear curved surface 8132e and the rear curved surface 8131d are surfaces having a curved shape formed on the back surface side of the lens member 8132 and the cover member 8131, respectively, like the rear curved surface 8133i. The front curved surface 8133k and the front curved surface 8132f are surfaces having a curved shape formed continuously with the front flat surface 8133j and the front flat surface 8132d on the front side of the decorative screen sheet 8133 and the lens member 8132, respectively. The front curved surface 8133k corresponds to the display surface 8133b (see FIG. 264) and the projectable region 8133d (see FIG. 268). Further, the side edge 8133l of the decorative screen sheet 8133, the side edge 8132g of the lens member 8132, and the front curved surface 8131e of the cover member 8131 form a substantially continuous curved surface.

Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the front light transmitting plate 8111 is formed with a first recess 8121a, a second recess 8121b, a third recess 8121c, a fourth recess 8121d, and a fifth recess 8121e. The first recess 8121a, the second recess 8121b, the third recess 8121c, the fourth recess 8121d, and the fifth recess 8121e are recesses that are slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface, respectively, and are the first decorative unit. It has a shape corresponding to the back side shape of the 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e. As a result, the first decorative unit 8120a, the second decorative unit 8120b, the third decorative unit 8120c, the fourth decorative unit 8120d, and the fifth decorative unit 8120e are combined with the first recess 8121a, the second recess 8121b, and the third recess 8121c. , 4th recess 8121d and 5th recess 8121e can be fitted.

<Shielding wall member 8190>
FIG. 278 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear and above. FIG. 279 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the front. FIG. 280 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member as viewed from the rear and above. FIG. 281 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 278. FIG. 282 is a perspective view of the front panel as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 278, a shielding wall member 8190 is arranged on the back surface side of the screen unit 8150. The shielding wall member 8190 has a function of adjusting the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2, similarly to the shielding wall member 8030 (see FIG. 221) described in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the shielding wall member 8190 has a structure that is substantially symmetrical and has a rectangular annular shape with an opening at the center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 8190 includes a lower side portion 8192, a left side portion 8193, a right side portion 8194, and an upper portion 8195 arranged around the light passage opening 8191.

The lower side portion 8192 has a lower side surface 8192a. The lower side surface 8192a constitutes the upper surface of the lower side portion 8192 (the surface facing the light passage opening 8191). The lower side surface 8192a is arranged with an inclination so as to descend toward the front.

The left side portion 8193 includes a first left inner wall surface 8193a and a second left side inner wall surface 8193b. The first left inner wall surface 8193a and the second left side inner wall surface 8193b form a right surface (a surface facing the light passage opening 8191) in the left side portion 8193, and are formed in a substantially vertical direction.

The first left inner wall surface 8193a is formed continuously from the front end edge of the left side portion 8193 toward the diagonally rearward direction. The second left inner wall surface 8193b is formed continuously from the rear end of the first left side inner wall surface 8193a toward the rear with a gentler inclination than the first left side inner wall surface 8193a. Further, the left side portion 8193 has a left side rear end portion 8193c formed by bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 8193d of the left rear end portion 8193c is formed continuously from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 8193b toward the right side.

Similarly, the right side portion 8194 includes a first right side inner wall surface 8194a, a second right side inner wall surface 8194b, and a right side rear end portion 8194c. The first right inner wall surface 8194a, the second right inner wall surface 8194b, and the right rear end portion 8194c are symmetrical with the first left inner wall surface 8193a, the second left inner wall surface 8193b, and the left rear end portion 8193c, respectively. It has become.

The left rear end portion 8193c and the right rear end portion 8194c are each formed in a substantially vertical direction. For clarity, FIG. 280 shows the back 8193e of the left rear end 8193c and the back 8194e of the right rear end 8194c with diagonal lines. The lower side portion 8192 has a lower rear end portion 8192b that is erected at the rear end of the lower side surface 8192a and connects the left rear end portion 8193c and the right rear end portion 8194c.

Further, the left side portion 8193 has a left upper end portion 8193f formed continuously from the upper end of the left rear end portion 8193c toward the front. The left upper end portion 8193f has a shape in which the upper ends of the first left inner wall surface 8193a and the second left inner wall surface 8193b are bent to the right. Further, the right side portion 8194 has a right upper end portion 8194f formed continuously from the upper end of the right rear end portion 8194c toward the front. The right upper end portion 8194f has a shape in which the upper ends of the first right inner wall surface 8194a and the second right side inner wall surface 8194b are bent to the left.

In the present embodiment, by arranging the shielding wall member 8190 configured as described above on the back side of the screen unit 8150, for example, a part of the light projected from the projector device B2 is a part of the inner wall portion 8196 (FIG. 281). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the reflected light is reflected by (see) (the reflected light is incident on the main screen sheet 8112 or the decorative screen sheet 8133). The inner wall portion 8196 constitutes a wall portion facing the screen unit opening 8198 formed in the front panel 8197 (see FIG. 282). The front panel 8197 is a member constituting the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD, and the screen unit 8150 is arranged so as to close the opening 8198 for the screen unit in the front view.

<Navi lamp unit 8160>
FIG. 283 is a perspective view of the navigation lamp unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the state in which the navigation lamp cover and the navigation lamp lens are removed from the navigation lamp unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the state in which the navigation lamp board cover is removed from the state shown in FIG. 284 as viewed from the front. FIG. 286 is a perspective view of a state in which the navigation lamp LED substrate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 285 as viewed from the front. FIG. 287 is a perspective view of the state in which the navigation lamp LED substrate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 285 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 288 is a perspective view of the decorative unit substrate cover as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 283 to 287, the navigation lamp unit 8160 includes a navigation lamp cover 8161, a navigation lamp lens 8165, a navigation lamp board cover 8170, a navigation lamp LED board 8175, and a decorative unit board cover 8180. I have.

The navigation lamp cover 8161 is formed with three navigation lamp openings 8164 (left navigation lamp opening 8164a, middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and right navigation lamp opening 8164c). The navigation lamp cover 8161 is arranged above the main display window DD4 (see FIG. 261).

Although not shown, a reel unit RU (see FIGS. 167 and 168) is arranged on the back side of the main display window DD4 as in the sixth embodiment. The formation position of the main display window DD4 and the arrangement position of the reel unit RU (reel) are substantially the same in front view, and the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and each reel RL are performed through the main display window DD4. , RC, RR can be visually recognized. The left navigation lamp opening 8164a is positioned above the left reel RL, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b is positioned above the middle reel RC, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c is positioned above the right reel RR. ing.

The navigation lamp lens 8165 is made of a translucent material. The navigation lamp lens 8165 is formed with convex portions 8166 (left convex portions 8166a, middle convex portions 8166b, and right convex portions 8166c) that bulge slightly forward with respect to the surrounding surface. The left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c have shapes corresponding to the left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c, respectively. ..

The navigation lamp lens 8165 is arranged on the back side of the navigation lamp cover 8161. At this time, the left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c are fitted into the left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c, respectively. The left convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c close the left navigation lamp opening 8164a, the middle navigation lamp opening 8164b, and the right navigation lamp opening 8164c.

The navigation lamp board cover 8170 has a rectangular main surface 8171. Five openings 8172 (first opening 8172a, second opening 8172b, third opening 8172c, fourth opening 8172d, and fifth opening 8172e) are formed on the main surface 8171.

A plurality of decorative unit irradiation LEDs 8177 are provided on the surface (upper surface 8176) of the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175. Specifically, the first decorative unit irradiation LED8177a, the second decoration unit irradiation LED8177b, the third decoration unit irradiation LED8177c, the fourth decoration unit irradiation LED8177d, and the fifth decoration unit irradiation LED8177e, respectively. Two are provided. The decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface.

A plurality of navigation lamp LEDs 8179 are provided on the back surface (lower surface 8178) of the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175. Specifically, two left navigation lamp LEDs 8179a, two middle navigation lamp LEDs 8179b, and two right navigation lamp LEDs 8179c are provided. The navigation lamp LED8179 is installed so as to emit light in a direction parallel to the back surface of the substrate.

The decorative unit board cover 8180 has a board mounting portion 8181, and the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is installed in the board mounting portion 8181. As shown in FIG. 288, specifically, the board installation portion 8181 includes the left side installation portion 8181a, the right side installation portion 8181b, the upper installation portion 8181c, the first lower installation portion 8181d, the second lower installation portion 8181e, and the third. It has a lower installation portion 8181f and a fourth lower installation portion 8181g. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 288 shows the left side installation portion 8181a, the right side installation portion 8181b, and the upper side installation portion 8181c in black.

The navigation lamp LED board 8175 is installed in a state where the left end portion and the right end portion of the lower surface 8178 are placed on the left side installation portion 8181a and the right side installation portion 8181b, respectively, and the upper edge portion is in contact with the upper installation portion 8181c. In the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160, the decorative unit board cover 8180 is arranged so that the left side installation portion 8181a and the right side installation portion 8181b have an inclination that descends from the rear to the front. As a result, the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 is also arranged so as to have a similar inclination.

The first lower installation portion 8181d, the second lower installation portion 8181e, the third lower installation portion 8181f, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g are each formed as protrusions protruding forward. The first lower installation portion 8181d is continuously formed from the front end of the left side installation portion 8181a, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g is continuously formed from the front end of the right side installation portion 8181b. As a result, the lower end edge of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is the upper surface of each of the first lower installation portion 8181d, the second lower installation portion 8181e, the third lower installation portion 8181f, and the fourth lower installation portion 8181g. It is designed to be placed in.

The decorative unit substrate cover 8180 is formed with six openings 8182. The left and right edges of each opening 8182 have the same inclination as the left side installation part 8181a and the right side installation part 8181b (inclination that descends from the rear to the front). The leftmost opening 8182 is larger than the other openings 8182.

<Light irradiation from the navigation lamp LED board 8175>
FIG. 289 is a perspective view of the navigation lamp LED substrate and the navigation lamp substrate cover as viewed from the front. FIG. 290 is a perspective view of the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the five decorative units as viewed from the front. FIG. 291 is a cross-sectional view of the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the decorative unit.

FIG. 292 is a perspective view of the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the navigation lamp lens as viewed from the rear. FIG. 293 is a perspective view showing the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the navigation lamp lens shown in FIG. 292 in an exploded manner. FIG. 294 is an exploded perspective view of the navigation lamp substrate cover and the navigation lamp lens as viewed from the front and the bottom. FIG. 295 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the navigation lamp substrate cover as viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 296 is a cross-sectional view of the navigation lamp LED substrate, the navigation lamp substrate cover, and the navigation lamp lens. FIG. 297 is a perspective view showing a state in which a light-shielding sheet is installed on the navigation lamp substrate cover. FIG. 298 is a perspective view showing a state in which the light-shielding sheet is removed from the state shown in FIG. 297. FIG. 299 is a perspective view of the state in which the shielding wall member is removed from the upper door mechanism as viewed from the rear and above.

Hereinafter, the irradiation of light from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 to the decorative unit 8120 and the irradiation of light from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165 will be described. A full-color LED is used as the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 and the navigation lamp LED 8179. Further, as the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 and the navigation lamp LED 8179, a surface mount type LED is used, but a bullet type LED may also be used.

First, the irradiation of light from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 to the decoration unit 8120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 and the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 in a state where the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationships, and the other components are shown. The illustration is omitted. In FIG. 290, the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the five decorative units 8120 in the assembled state of the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are maintained in their relative positional relationship. It is the figure shown, and the figure is omitted about other components.

In FIG. 291, the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the third decorative unit 8120c in the state where the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled are maintained in their relative positional relationship. It is the figure shown, and the figure is omitted about other components. Further, FIG. 291 shows a state in which the LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the third decorative unit 8120c are cut in the vertical direction in the front-rear direction near the center in the left-right direction. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is shown by diagonal lines. Further, the cut surface of the cover member 8131 is shown by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the lens member 8132 is shown by shading, and the cut surface of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 289, in the state where the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled, the decoration unit irradiation LED8177 (first decoration unit irradiation LED8177a, second decoration unit irradiation LED8177b, third decoration unit irradiation LED8177c, fourth The installation location of the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177d and the fifth decoration unit irradiation LED 8177e) and the five openings 8172 (first opening 8172a, second opening 8172b, third opening 8172c) formed in the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, The fourth opening 8172d and the fifth opening 8172e) are overlapped with each other. As a result, the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 is exposed through the opening 8172. Therefore, the light emitted from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 passes through the opening 8172 and travels forward.

As shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the decoration unit 8120 (first decoration unit 8120a, second decoration unit 8120b, third decoration unit 8120c, fourth decoration unit 8120d,) is located at the destination of the light passing through the opening 8172. And the fifth decorative unit 8120e) is arranged. As a result, the light that has passed through the opening 8172 is incident on the back side (rear curvature surface 8133i) of the decorative screen sheet 8133.

FIG. 291 shows how the light emitted from the third decorative unit irradiation LED 8177c passes through the third opening 8172c and irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the third decorative unit 8120c, but other decorative units. The light emitted from the irradiation LED 8177 also irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 in the same manner. That is, the light emitted from the first decorative unit irradiation LED 8177a passes through the first opening 8172a, irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the first decorative unit 8120a, and emits light from the second decorative unit irradiation LED 8177b. Passes through the second opening 8172b and irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the second decorative unit 8120b, and the light emitted from the fourth decorative unit irradiation LED 8177d passes through the fourth opening 8172d and the fourth decorative unit. The decorative screen sheet 8133 of the 8120d is irradiated, and the light emitted from the illumination LED 8177e of the fifth decorative unit passes through the fifth opening 8172e and irradiates the decorative screen sheet 8133 of the fifth decorative unit 8120e.

As described above, the navigation lamp LED board 8175 is arranged so as to have an inclination that descends from the rear to the front, and the main surface 8171 of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is abbreviated as the navigation lamp LED board 8175. They are arranged so as to be parallel. This makes it easy to adjust the position between the installation location of the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 and the formation location of the opening 8172, and the light emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 can be irradiated to a desired position on the decorative screen sheet 8133. You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to irradiate the decorative screen sheet 8133 with the light emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177. On the other hand, it is also possible to display an image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 by the light projected from the projector device B2. Further, as described above, the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, the hue of the image displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133 can be arranged by emitting light of a predetermined color from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177.

For example, when light for displaying a red image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is projected from the projector device B2, it is displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133 by emitting blue light from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177. The image can be made to look purple. Further, when the light for displaying the red image on the decorative screen sheet 8133 is projected from the projector device B2, the red light is emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 to be displayed on the decorative screen sheet 8133. The image can be made to look clearer red.

By the way, the game machine may be provided with a function (luminance adjustment function) for adjusting the brightness (luminance) of the LED for a player or a hall clerk. This is a function that the player or the clerk can adjust the brightness to an appropriate level because the LED light is not suitable for a long-time game if the light is too strong. The light emitted from the decorative unit irradiation LED 8177 to the decorative screen sheet 8133 may be emitted without changing the brightness even when the brightness setting is changed by the brightness adjustment function. Since it is assumed that the color of the projected image is changed by synthesizing the projected light from the projector device B2 and the projected light from the decoration unit irradiation LED8177, for example, from the projector device B2. If only the amount of projected light from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 was reduced while maintaining the intensity of the projected light, the balance of the amount of light between the two would be different from what was originally planned, and the colors were mixed. In some cases, the color may look different from the planned color. When the brightness is adjusted by a player or the like, the brightness of the LED 8177 for illuminating the decorative unit is also changed (along with other LEDs) only in a part of the game state (when the effect of color mixing is not performed). (The adjusted brightness is reflected) On the other hand, when the effect of color mixing is performed, the light is emitted from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 with a constant amount of light (initially set amount of light) regardless of the brightness adjustment. It may be the one.

Subsequently, the irradiation of light from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165 will be described with reference to FIGS. 292 to 296.

FIG. 292 is a diagram showing the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 in the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160 while maintaining their relative positional relationships. , Other components are not shown.

FIG. 296 is a diagram showing the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 in the assembled state of the navigation lamp unit 8160 while maintaining their relative positional relationships. , Other components are not shown. Further, in FIG. 296, the surface of the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, and the navigation lamp lens 8165 passing through the left right navigation lamp LED 8179c of the two right navigation lamp LEDs 8179c (vertical surface in the front-rear direction). ) Shows how it was cut. For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 is shown in black, the cut surface of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is shown by diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is shown by shading.

As shown in FIG. 292, when the navigation lamp unit 8160 is assembled, the navigation lamp LED8179 (left navigation lamp LED8179a, middle navigation lamp LED8179b, and right navigation lamp LED8179c) is located on the lower side of the navigation lamp board cover 8170. It is positioned above the main body 8167 of the 8173 and the navigation lamp lens 8165.

As shown in FIGS. 293 and 294, the lower portion 8173 of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is formed in a plate shape and is arranged substantially horizontally. The upper surface 8173a of the lower portion 8173 is formed to be substantially flat as a whole. On the other hand, the lower surface 8173b of the lower side portion 8173 has a flat portion 8173c formed substantially flat in the front and a concave-convex portion 8173d in which irregularities are formed in the rear. As shown in FIG. 295, the uneven portion 8173d is formed by continuously forming a curved shape (a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and has a so-called semi-cylindrical shape. There is.

For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 293, the upper surface 8173a of the navigation lamp board cover 8170 is shown by diagonal lines. Further, in FIG. 295, the structure near the left end of the lower surface 8173b of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is enlarged and shown. In addition, four grooves 8173e are formed in the lower side portion 8173.

Further, the main body portion 8167 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is formed in a plate shape, and is arranged so as to have an inclination that rises from the rear to the front. The convex portion 8166 (left convex portion 8166a, middle convex portion 8166b, and right convex portion 8166c) is formed on the front surface 8167a of the main body portion 8167. The back surface 8167b of the main body 8167 is formed to be substantially flat as a whole.

As shown in FIG. 296, the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 travels in a direction parallel to the back surface (lower surface 8178) of the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 (diagonally downward), and under the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170. It is incident on the upper surface 8173a of the side portion 8173. The navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 is made of a translucent material, and the light incident on the upper surface 8173a is transmitted through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170. The light transmitted through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 enters the back surface 8167b of the main body portion 8167 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 and is emitted to the outside from the convex portion 8166 of the front surface 8167a.

FIG. 296 shows how the light emitted from the right navigation lamp LED 8179c irradiates the right convex portion 8166c of the navigation lamp lens 8165, but the light emitted from the other navigation lamp LED 8179 is also convex. Irradiate part 8166. That is, the light emitted from the left navigation lamp LED 8179a passes through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170 and then irradiates the left convex portion 8166a of the navigation lamp lens 8165, and the light emitted from the middle navigation lamp LED 8179b is the navigation lamp substrate. After passing through the cover 8170, the mid-convex portion 8166b of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is irradiated.

A part of the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 passes through the uneven portion 8173d when passing through the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170. Since the light is diffusely refracted when passing through the uneven portion 8173d, the convex portion 8166 (left convex portion 8166a, middle convex portion 8166b, and right convex portion 8166c) of the navigation lamp lens 8165 should be uniformly irradiated. Can be done.

In order to enhance such an effect, as shown in FIGS. 297 and 298, the light-shielding sheet 8185 may be installed on the lower portion 8173 of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170. In this example, the light-shielding sheet 8185 is placed on the upper surface 8173a of the lower side 8173, and most of the upper surface 8173a is covered with the light-shielding sheet 8185. The light-shielding sheet 8185 has a light-shielding property and blocks the passage of light. For clarity, the shading sheet 8185 is shaded in FIG. 297.

Specifically, the light-shielding sheet 8185 has substantially the same outer shape as the upper surface 8173a of the lower portion 8173, and is formed with a plurality of rectangular notches 8186. In a state where the light-shielding sheet 8185 is placed on the upper surface 8173a, the rear end of the light-shielding sheet 8185 and the rear end of the upper surface 8173a are positioned so as to substantially coincide with each other. The notch 8186 is formed from the rear end to the front over a predetermined length. Here, the length of the notch 8186 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the length of the uneven portion 8173d in the front-rear direction. Therefore, substantially all of the portion of the upper surface 8173a on the lower surface 8173b side corresponding to the portion not covered by the light-shielding sheet 8185 (the portion corresponding to the notch 8186) is the uneven portion 8173d. Therefore, of the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED8179, almost all the light that has passed through the upper surface 8173a (the portion not covered by the light-shielding sheet 8185) passes through the uneven portion 8173d. As a result, the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED8179 can be efficiently refracted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the convex portion 8166 (left) of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is generated by the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 (left navigation lamp LED 8179a, middle navigation lamp LED 8179b, and right navigation lamp LED 8179c). It is possible to irradiate the convex portion 8166a, the middle convex portion 8166b, and the right convex portion 8166c). Further, the left convex portion 8166a is positioned above the left reel RL, the middle convex portion 8166b is positioned above the middle reel RC, and the right convex portion 8166c is positioned above the right reel RR. As a result, the navigation lamp LED 8179 and the navigation lamp lens 8165 can be used to perform a light emitting effect (for example, a push order navigation effect or an effect associated with the reel stop) related to rotation or stop of each reel RL, RC, RR. it can.

For example, through the irradiation of light from the navigation lamp LED 8179 to the navigation lamp lens 8165, an effect of notifying (suggesting) information on a stop operation advantageous to the player may be performed. As such an effect, for example, one of the navigation lamp LEDs 8179 (for example, the left navigation lamp LED8179a) repeats light emission with high brightness and light emission with low brightness, so that the corresponding convex portion 8166 (for example, left convex portion) is emitted. 8166a) can be mentioned as if it were blinking. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation on one reel (for example, the left reel RL) as the first stop operation (first stop operation) (for example, a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined combination). It is notified (suggested) that it is necessary to display the stop. That is, the blinking of the left convex portion 8166a corresponds to the navigation "press left!". In addition, an effect may be performed in which the convex portion 8166 corresponding to the reel for which the stop operation has been completed is lit. As such an effect, for example, when the conditions for starting a specific gaming state (for example, 7 sets at the start of the pseudo BB) are satisfied, each convex portion 8166 is given a predetermined color (for example, red-red). − Red) can be mentioned as a lighting effect.

As shown in FIG. 299, the upper end surface 8180a of the decorative unit substrate cover 8180 is positioned at the same height as the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197. The lower inner wall portion 8196a is a wall portion facing the opening 8198 for the clean unit, and constitutes a part of the inner wall portion 8196 (see FIG. 281). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 299, the upper end surface 8180a of the decorative unit substrate cover 8180 is shown in diagonal lines, and the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197 is shown in black. The navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 is arranged below the upper end surface 8180a of the decorative unit substrate cover 8180. As a result, the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175 is positioned below the passage path of the light projected from the projector device B2. Therefore, the progress of the light projected from the projector device B2 is not hindered by the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175.

Further, FIG. 299 shows that the upper end surface 8180a of the decorative unit substrate cover 8180 and the lower inner wall portion 8196a of the front panel 8197 are visible, but in reality, the upper end surface 8180a and the lower inner wall portion 8196a are visible. A lower portion 8192 (see FIG. 280) of the shielding wall member 8190 is arranged on the upper side, and the upper end surface 8180a and the lower inner wall portion 8196a are covered with the shielding wall member 8190. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the light projected from the projector device B2 from being reflected by the upper end surface 8180a and the lower inner wall portion 8196a. On the other hand, FIG. 299 shows that the openings 8172 (first opening 8172a, second opening 8172b, third opening 8172c, fourth opening 8172d, and fifth opening 8172e) are visible. Is the same even when the shielding wall member 8190 is provided. Since the shielding wall member 8190 is arranged so as not to cover the main surface 8171 of the navigation lamp substrate cover 8170, even if the shielding wall member 8190 is provided, the progress of the light emitted from the decoration unit irradiation LED 8177 is shielded. It is not blocked by the wall member 8190.

Although not shown, the navigation lamp LED 8179 is visible through the opening 8182 (see FIG. 288) of the decorative unit substrate cover 8180 in a state where the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160 are assembled. This makes it easier to fine-tune the arrangement position of the navigation lamp LED 8179 when assembling the screen unit 8150 and the navigation lamp unit 8160. On the other hand, as described above, the left and right edges of the opening 8182 have the same inclination as the board mounting portion 8181 (left side mounting portion 8181a and right side mounting portion 8181b) of the decorative unit board cover 8180. As a result, the penetration direction of the opening 8182 is positioned substantially perpendicular to the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175. Since the light emitted from the navigation lamp LED 8179 travels in a direction parallel to the navigation lamp LED substrate 8175, the light is difficult to be emitted rearward from the opening 8182. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from the opening 8182 from being reflected in an unintended direction.

<Bonus lamp unit 8210>
FIG. 300 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 301 is a perspective view showing a state in which the bonus lamp unit is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 302 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front panel and the rear duct are removed from the state shown in FIG. 301. FIG. 303 is a perspective view of the bonus lamp unit. FIG. 304 is a perspective view showing a state in which the first bonus lamp lens and the second bonus lamp lens are removed from the bonus lamp unit. FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the bonus lamp board cover, the bonus lamp board, and the front duct. FIG. 306 is an exploded perspective view of the front duct. FIG. 307 is a bottom view of the front duct base. FIG. 308 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base as viewed from above. FIG. 309 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front duct base as viewed from below. FIG. 310 is a perspective view of the front duct cover as viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 311 is a perspective view of the front duct as viewed from the rear and below.

The bonus lamp unit 8210 is mainly in a state advantageous to the player in a predetermined light emitting pattern during a bonus (during the operation of the accessory), an AT state (a state in which a stop operation instruction advantageous to the player is generated), and the like. The name "bonus lamp" is given because it is intended to suggest that there is something. However, the bonus lamp unit 8210 emits light according to the progress of the game even in a game state other than during the bonus or AT (a state suggestion effect, an effect suggesting the expected degree of hit, and light emission for error notification). Etc.) are provided as a feasible decorative lamp.

As shown in FIGS. 300 to 302, a bonus lamp unit 8210 is provided on the upper part of the upper door mechanism UD so as to project forward. A front panel 8197 is provided on the back side of the bonus lamp unit 8210, and a rear duct 8250 is provided so as to be covered from above by the upper wall of the front panel 8197.

As shown in FIGS. 303 to 305, the bonus lamp unit 8210 includes a first bonus lamp lens 8215, a second bonus lamp lens 8220, a bonus lamp board cover 8225, a bonus lamp board 8230, and a front duct 8235. It has.

The first bonus lamp lens 8215 and the second bonus lamp lens 8220 are made of a translucent material. The first bonus lamp lens 8215 is arranged from the upper side to the front side of the second bonus lamp lens 8220, whereby the second bonus lamp lens 8220 is entirely covered by the first bonus lamp lens 8215.

A bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 is arranged on the back side of the second bonus lamp lens 8220. A substrate locking piece 8226 is formed on the bonus lamp substrate cover 8225, and the bonus lamp substrate 8230 is installed so as to be locked by the substrate locking piece 8226.

The bonus lamp substrate 8230 is arranged in a substantially vertical direction so that the longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. The bonus lamp board 8230 is provided with a plurality of bonus lamp LEDs 8231. The bonus lamp LED 8231 is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction. As a result, the light emitted from the bonus lamp LED 8231 is guided by the second bonus lamp lens 8220 and emitted from the first bonus lamp lens 8215 to the outside of the game machine 1.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, the front duct 8235 includes a front duct base 8240 and a front duct cover 8245. The front duct base 8240 has a basic structure composed of a plate-shaped portion 8240a and ribs 8241 (left and right ribs 8241a and front and rear ribs 8241b) protruding upward with respect to the plate-shaped portion 8240a. ing. That is, the front duct base 8240 has a shape similar to the back side of the reel adapter 6000 (see FIG. 162) described in the seventh embodiment.

A left side opening 8242L, a central opening 8242C, and a right side opening 8242R are formed behind the plate-shaped portion 8240a. The left opening 8242L has 6 openings 8242 (openings 8242a-8242f), the central opening 8242C has 10 openings 8242 (openings 8242g-8242q), and the right opening 8242R. Has 6 openings 8242 (openings 8242r-8242w). The openings 8242a to 8242w penetrate the flat plate portion 8240a in the vertical direction.

As shown in FIGS. 308 and 309, the left opening 8242L has a first compartment 8243a extending in the left-right direction and a second compartment 8243b extending in the front-rear direction. The first section 8243a and the second section 8243b form a grid-like partition structure. Six openings 8242 (openings 8242a to 8242f) are partitioned from each other by the first compartment 8243a and the second compartment 8243b. That is, the first compartment 8243a and the second compartment 8243b divide the large opening into six.

Similarly, in the central opening 8242C, 10 openings 8242 (openings 8242g to 8242q) are partitioned from each other by the first compartment 8243a and the second compartment 8243b. Further, in the right opening 8242R, six openings 8242 (openings 8242r to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by the first compartment 8243a and the second compartment 8243b. For clarity, some of the openings 8242 are shaded in FIGS. 308 and 309.

As a result, the openings 8242a to 8242w are relatively small, respectively. Specifically, the diameters of the openings 8242a to 8242w are all less than a predetermined value (for example, 25 mm). The diameter is the maximum length of a line segment connecting any two points on the periphery of the opening. As a result, the opening 8242 having the largest diameter among the openings 8242a to 8242w is the opening 8242m and the opening 8242n, but the opening 8242m and the opening 8242n are formed to a size that does not allow the medal to pass through. The diameters of the openings 8242m and 8242n can be defined as the longer diagonal of the two diagonals when these openings are regarded as rectangles.

The lower end of the first compartment 8243a and the lower end of the second compartment 8243b are substantially the same in the vertical direction, and are positioned above the lower surface 8240b of the plate-shaped portion 8240a. On the other hand, the upper end of the second compartment 8243b is positioned above the upper end of the first compartment 8243a. That is, the vertical length of the first compartment 8243a is shorter than the vertical length of the second compartment 8243b. The upper end of the second compartment 8243b is continuous with the upper end of the left and right ribs 8241a.

The left opening 8242L and the central opening 8242C are partitioned by a third compartment 8243c. The third compartment 8243c is formed so that the left edge and the right edge are rounded and the central portion in the left-right direction bulges upward. Although not shown, similarly, the right opening 8242R and the central opening 8242C are partitioned by a third compartment 8243c.

As shown in FIG. 310, the front duct cover 8245 has a front side surface 8246a and an upper side surface 8246b. The front side surface 8246a is the back surface of the front wall of the front side duct cover 8245, and is formed substantially flat. The upper side surface 8246b is formed continuously with the front side surface 8246a in a substantially perpendicular direction to the front side surface 8246a and in the front-rear direction. As a result, the front side surface 8246a and the upper side surface 8246b form a space in which the lower side and the rear side are open. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 310, the front side surface 8246a is shaded and the upper side surface 8246b is shaded. Further, for convenience, the space is divided into a left space 8247L, a central space 8247C, and a right space 8247R, but these spaces are actually connected. In the central space 8247C, the upper wall is lower than that of the left space 8247L and the right space 8247R.

As shown in FIG. 306, a boss portion 8244 (boss portion 8244a, boss portion 8244b, and boss portion 8244c) is formed on the front duct base 8240. On the other hand, the front duct cover 8245 is formed with screw holes 8248 (screw holes 8248a, screw holes 8248b, and screw holes 8248c). The forming position of each boss portion 8244 corresponds to the forming position of each screw hole 8248. Thereby, the front duct cover 8245 can be fixed to the front duct base 8240 by screwing the screw through which each screw hole 8248 is inserted into the hole formed in each boss portion 8244.

The front duct cover 8245 is formed with screw holes 8249 (screw holes 8249a, screw holes 8249b, and screw holes 8249c). The front duct cover 8245 is fastened to the bonus lamp board cover 8225 by a screw inserted through the screw hole 8249.

FIG. 311 shows a state in which the front duct base 8240 and the front duct cover 8245 are assembled by screwing as described above (front duct 8235). In the front duct 8235, the left opening 8242L communicates with the left space 8247L. Further, the central opening 8242C communicates with the left side space 8247L, the central space 8247C, and the right side space 8247R. Further, the right opening 8242R communicates with the right space 8247R.

<Formation of air flow path>
FIG. 312 is a partially enlarged front view of the front panel. FIG. 313 is a perspective view of the rear duct base. FIG. 314 is a perspective view of the rear duct cover as viewed from the front and the bottom. FIG. 315 is a perspective view of the rear duct and the duct seal as viewed from the rear. FIG. 316 is a perspective view of a state in which the duct seal is attached to the rear duct as viewed from the front. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as viewed from slightly below. FIG. 318 is a cross-sectional view of the bonus lamp unit, the front panel, the rear duct, and the duct seal.

As shown in FIG. 312, the front panel 8197 has a first air passage opening 8199a, a second air passage opening 8199b, a third air passage opening 8199c, and a fourth air passage opening 8198 above the screen unit opening 8198. An air passage opening 8199d is formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 312, the first air passage opening 8199a, the second air passage opening 8199b, the third air passage opening 8199c, and the fourth air passage opening 8199d are shown by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 313, the rear duct base 8255 has a plate-shaped lower side wall portion 8256, and a first side wall portion 8257 and a second side wall portion erected upward from the lower side wall portion 8256. It is equipped with 8258. The first side wall portion 8257 is formed in the left side portion of the rear duct base 8255 in the substantially front-rear direction. The second side wall portion 8258 is formed so as to be inclined to the left from the front to the rear in the right portion of the rear duct base 8255. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 313, the upper end edge of the first side wall portion 8257 and the upper end edge of the second side wall portion 8258 are shown in black, respectively.

A duct seal 8260 is arranged near the rear ends of the first side wall portion 8257 and the second side wall portion 8258. Further, screw holes 8259 (screw holes 8259a and 8259b) are formed in the rear duct base 8255. The rear duct base 8255 is fastened to the front panel 8197 with screws through which the screw holes 8259 are inserted.

As shown in FIG. 314, the rear duct cover 8265 has a plate-shaped upper side wall portion 8266, and a first side wall portion 8267 and a second side wall formed so as to project downward from the upper side wall portion 8266. The unit 8268 is provided. The first side wall portion 8267 is formed in the left side portion of the rear duct cover 8265 substantially in the front-rear direction. The second side wall portion 8268 is formed so as to be inclined to the left from the front to the rear in the right portion of the rear duct cover 8265. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 314, the lower end edge of the first side wall portion 8267 and the lower end edge of the second side wall portion 8268 are shown in black, respectively.

Further, a boss portion 8269 (boss portion 8269a, boss portion 8269b, boss portion 8269c, boss portion 8269d, and boss portion 8269e) is formed on the rear duct cover 8265. The rear duct cover 8265 is fastened to the rear duct base 8255 by a screw screwed into a hole formed in the boss portion 8269, thereby forming the rear duct 8250 (see FIG. 302). FIG. 315 shows a state in which the rear duct 8250 is assembled in this way.

The shape of the first side wall portion 8267 and the shape of the second side wall portion 8268 of the rear duct cover 8265 correspond to the shape of the first side wall portion 8257 and the shape of the second side wall portion 8258 of the rear duct base 8255, respectively. It has become. As a result, in the rear duct 8250, the first side wall portion 8267 of the rear duct cover 8265 is arranged on the left side of the first side wall portion 8257 so as to be along the first side wall portion 8257 of the rear duct base 8255. .. Further, the second side wall portion 8268 of the rear duct cover 8265 is arranged on the rear side of the second side wall portion 8258 so as to be along the second side wall portion 8258 of the rear duct base 8255.

Further, in FIG. 315, the rear end edge 8267a of the first side wall portion 8267 and the rear end edge 8268a of the second side wall portion 8268, and the rear end edge 8267a and the rear end edge 8268a of the rear duct cover 8265 are connected on the upper side. The seal contact portion 8263a to be formed is indicated by a diagonal line. Further, the rear end edge 8257a of the first side wall portion 8257 and the rear end edge 8258a of the second side wall portion 8258 of the rear duct base 8255, and the seal contact that connects the rear end edge 8257a and the rear end edge 8258a on the lower side. The contact portion 8263b is shown in black. The trailing edge 8257a, trailing edge 8258a, trailing edge 8267a, trailing edge 8268a, seal contact 8263a, and seal contact 8263b are each formed substantially flat and on substantially the same plane as each other. It is formed so that it can be positioned in.

From the above, an opening 8263 surrounded by the rear end edge 8257a, the rear end edge 8258a, the seal contact portion 8263a, and the seal contact portion 8263b is formed on the back surface side of the rear duct 8250. The duct seal 8260 has a rectangular shape with a large opening at the center, and has an upper portion 8262a, a lower portion 8262b, a left side portion 8262c, and a right side portion 8262d. As a result, an opening (air passage opening 8261) surrounded by the upper portion 8262a, the lower portion 8262b, the left side portion 8262c, and the right side portion 8262d is formed. The shape of the air passage opening 8261 is substantially the same as the shape of the opening 8263.

In the duct seal 8260, the front surfaces of the upper portion 8262a, the lower portion 8262b, the left side portion 8262c, and the right side portion 8262d are the seal contact portions (seal contact portion 8263a, seal contact portion 8263b, seal) in the rear duct 8250. It is arranged so as to abut the contact portion 8263c and the seal contact portion 8263d). The seal contact portion 8263c is composed of a part of the rear end edge 8257a of the rear duct base 8255 and a part of the rear end edge 8267a of the rear duct cover 8265. The seal contact portion 8263d is composed of a part of the rear end edge 8258a of the rear duct base 8255 and a part of the rear end edge 8268a of the rear duct cover 8265. By arranging the duct seal 8260 on the back side of the rear duct 8250, the air passage opening 8261 communicates with the opening 8263, and these openings are integrated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 316, an opening surrounded by the front end edge 8264 is formed on the front side of the rear duct 8250. The front end edge 8264 is the front end edge of the lower side wall portion 8256 in the rear duct base 8255, the front end edge of the first side wall portion 8257, the front end edge of the second side wall portion 8258, and the front end edge of the upper side wall portion 8266 in the rear duct cover 8265. Consists of. For clarity, FIG. 316 shows the front edge 8264 in black. The upper side wall portion 8266 is formed so as to be curved so that the front side is lower than the rear side. As a result, the vertical length of the opening surrounded by the front edge 8264 is shorter than the vertical length of the opening 8263 (air passage opening 8261). In addition, in FIG. 316, the air passage opening 8261 is seen through the opening on the front side (the opening surrounded by the front end edge 8264), and the air passage opening 8261 is shown by an oblique line.

As shown in FIG. 317, when the upper door mechanism UD is looked up from below, the left opening 8242L, the central opening 8242C, and the right opening 8242R of the front duct base 8240 can be visually recognized above the screen unit 8150. it can. As described above, the front duct cover 8245 is formed with a left space 8247L, a central space 8247C, and a right space 8247R (see FIG. 310), and the left opening 8242L communicates with the left space 3247L. The central opening 8242C communicates with the left space 3247L, the central space 8247C, and the right space 8247R, and the right opening 8242R communicates with the right space 8247R.

Further, the front panel 8197 is formed with a first air passage opening 8199a, a second air passage opening 8199b, a third air passage opening 8199c, and a fourth air passage opening 8199d (see FIG. 312). ). The front panel 8197 is arranged on the back side of the front duct base 8240 and the front duct cover 8245, and the formation positions of the first air passage opening 8199a and the second air passage opening 8199b overlap with the left space 3247L in the front view. The formation positions of the third air passage opening 8199c and the fourth air passage opening 8199d overlap with the right space 8247R in the front view. The front panel 8197 and the front duct cover 8245 are arranged so as to be substantially in contact with each other, whereby the first air passage opening 8199a and the second air passage opening 8199b are continuous with the left space 3247L and the third air passage. The opening 8199c and the opening 8199d for passing the fourth air are continuous with the right space 8247R. Therefore, the air passage opening 8199 (first air passage opening 8199a, second air passage opening 8199b, third air passage opening 8199c, and fourth air passage opening 8199d) and space 8247 (left space 8247L, The central space 8247C and the right side space 8247R) are all in communication with each other.

A rear duct 8250 is arranged on the back side of the front panel 8197, and in this state, the front end edge 8264 (see FIG. 316) of the rear duct 8250 and the peripheral edge of the air passage opening 8199 in the front panel 8197. Approximately contact. That is, where the front duct 8235 and the rear duct 8250 are arranged at a predetermined distance, the front panel 8197 is arranged so as to fill the gap between the front duct 8235 and the rear duct 8250. .. Further, the vertical length of the front end edge 8264 is substantially the same as the vertical length of the air passage opening 8199. As a result, the air passage opening 8199 communicates with the internal space of the rear duct 8250. The internal space of the rear duct 8250 is opened rearward by the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 318, when air is taken in from the outside of the game machine 1 (below the left opening 8242L) through the left opening 8242L of the front duct base 8240 (I in the figure). The air, for example, has passed through the left space 8247L of the front duct cover 8245 and the first air passage opening 8199a of the front panel 8197 (II in the figure), and then travels backward in the internal space of the rear duct 8250. , Reach the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260 (III in the figure). Although detailed description is omitted, similarly, the air taken in through the central opening 8242C to the right opening 8242R of the front duct base 8240 is also the space 8247 of the front duct cover 8245 and the air passage opening of the front panel 8197. After passing through 8199, it travels backward through the internal space of the rear duct 8250 and reaches the air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260.

In FIG. 318, the bonus lamp unit 8210, the front panel 8197, the rear duct 8250, and the duct seal 8260 are shown when the upper door mechanism UD is cut on the surface passing through the left opening 8242L (vertical facing in the front-rear direction). It is extracted and shown. For clarity, the cut surface of the front duct base 8240 is shown in black, the cut surface of the front duct cover 8245 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the front panel 8197 is shaded, and the rear duct 8250 (rear duct base). The cut surface of 8255 and the rear duct cover 8265) is shown in black. The duct seal 8260 is indicated by diagonal lines including a portion other than the cut surface. Further, the upper wall portion 8197X of the front panel 8197 and the upper wall portion 8215X of the first bonus lamp lens 8215 are shown in black. The upper wall portion 8197X and the upper wall portion 8215X together with the upper wall portion 8225X of the bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 arranged continuously thereof constitute the upper wall portion of the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 299). The cut surface of the first bonus lamp lens 8215 and the cut surface of the second bonus lamp lens 8220 are shaded, and the cut surface of the bonus lamp substrate cover 8225 is shaded. Two lamps 8200 are embedded in the front panel 8197 through an opening provided in the upper wall portion 8197X (see FIG. 299).

Inside the cabinet G, the cover portion B2000 (see FIG. 124) described in the sixth embodiment is arranged. The air passage opening 8261 of the duct seal 8260 is positioned in the vicinity of the opening B2108e of the cover portion B2000 (a position where at least a part of the opening B2108e overlaps with the opening B2108e in the front view). As a result, the air that has reached the air passage opening 8261 is taken into the inside of the cover portion B2000 through the opening B2108e. The air that has entered the inside of the cover portion B2000 moves rearward and downward in the space P (see FIG. 128), passes through the opening B2010 (see FIG. 130), and passes through the opening B2010 (see FIG. 130), and then passes through the intake port B22A, as in the sixth embodiment. It enters the inside of the case B22 via (see FIG. 22). The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 travels to the right while taking away the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 23). The air exiting the case B22 is naturally discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 through a hole (for example, a gap formed in the medal payout outlet DD14 or the side wall of the cabinet G) of the game machine 1.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. In the second embodiment, it has been described that the intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 138). ..

In addition, in order to facilitate the formation of the above-mentioned air flow, an intake fan or an exhaust fan may be appropriately arranged. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the intake fan may be installed inside the case B22. Further, a fan similar to the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening (see FIG. 33) may be installed in the opening B2108 of the duct cover B2100. Further, the duct seal 8260 may be arranged so that the back surface of the duct seal 8260 is in contact with the opening B2108e (the front end edge of each wall surface B2108a to d constituting the opening B2108). As the duct seal 8260, a cushioning member (for example, rubber packing) can be appropriately adopted. For example, as with the speaker seal 8095 (see FIG. 250) described in the ninth embodiment, an EPT SEALER (registered trademark; ethylene / propylene / diene rubber foam, manufactured by Nitto Denko KK) may be used. As a result, the space between the rear duct 8250 and the duct cover B2100 can be sealed, and the air taken in from the outside of the game machine 1 is efficiently transported to the inside of the case B22 (the position where the projector device B2 is arranged). can do.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has been described.

<Appendix J>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

In a game machine equipped with such a projector, it is important to improve the appearance including the image displayed on the screen.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of realizing good-looking visibility.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(J-1-1) A screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) having a projected portion that is at least partially curved,
A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image onto the screen member is provided.
A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) that makes it difficult for the player to see a predetermined area near the edge of the projected portion is arranged on the outer side of the screen member.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) has a projected portion that is at least partially curved, and is more than the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) that makes it difficult for the player to see a predetermined area near the edge of the projected portion is arranged on the outer side of the screen. With this configuration, the present inventor has succeeded in improving the appearance including the image displayed on the projected portion, and has arrived at the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment.

(J-1-2) The gaming machine of the above (J-1-1).
The predetermined area includes an area where it is difficult to project an image from the projector, and an area where the visibility of the projected image is lower than other areas when the image is projected from the projector. Includes at least one of the areas,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projection is performed in an area where it is difficult to project an image from the projector (projector device B2) or when the image is projected from the projector (projector device B2). Areas where the visibility of the image is lower than other areas can be made difficult for the player to see. As a result, the appearance including the image displayed on the projected portion can be effectively improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the upper edge portion of the projected portion (projected region 8133c) is located on the outer side of the game machine (downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) with respect to the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). This has been described as arranging a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) that makes it difficult for the player to see a predetermined region (projection difficult region 8133e) in the vicinity. In the present invention, the place where the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged is not particularly limited, and the area where it is difficult to project the image from the projector (projector device B2) or the projection of the image from the projector (projector device B2). A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is appropriately placed on the outer side (downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) of the region where the visibility of the projected image is lower than that of the other regions. It is possible to place it. For example, a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is placed on the front side (downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector) near the lower edge portion of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k) of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). It may be arranged. Further, the side of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) near the side edge portion (left edge portion to right edge portion) of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k) (downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector). A predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) may be arranged in the.

As the "region where it is difficult to project an image from the projector", for example, the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) reaches due to the structure near the edge of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k). Areas that cannot or are difficult to reach (areas where shadows are cast) can be mentioned. Further, as "a region where the visibility of the projected image is lower than other regions when the image is projected from the projector", for example, the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k) is excessively curved. The image is distorted due to the region where the distortion of the image becomes extremely large due to the fact that the image is distorted, or the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is affected by unintended reflection or refraction. The area to be stored can be mentioned. For example, in the vicinity of the lower edge portion of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k), the light reflected by the lower flat surface 8133g (see FIG. 276) is incident on the rear curved surface 8133i and displayed on the front curved surface 8133k. Since it is assumed that the image to be projected may be distorted, a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is placed on the outer side (front side) near the lower edge of the projected portion (front curved surface 8133k). It is possible to place.

In particular, if both the "area where it is difficult to project an image from the projector" (the area where shadows are generated) and the normal projection area are visually recognized by the player, there is an area where the image is not partially displayed. There is a concern that the player will know what to do and the appearance will be very bad. According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, by arranging a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140), it is possible to blindfold the area where such a shadow is generated, so that the appearance is deteriorated. Can be prevented. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the predetermined decoration is applied to the front surface side of the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140). As a result, the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) can be shown to the player as a design part, and the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140) is arranged with the intention of providing the blindfold as described above. Can be made difficult for the player to be aware of.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the cover member 8131 and the lens member 8132 are arranged between the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the predetermined member (decorative frame 8140). By disposing the cover member, it is possible to prevent the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the lens member from being scratched. Further, by arranging the lens member, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect by enlarging the image displayed on the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), and the visibility is more realistic (for example). , It is possible to realize the appearance of a flame swaying inside a predetermined member (decorative frame 8140). Further, by enlarging the image displayed on the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to make the area where the above-mentioned shadow is generated less conspicuous. However, in the present invention, one or both of the cover member and the lens member may not be arranged.

When the cover member is arranged, the cover member may also be used as the decorative member by applying a predetermined color or decoration to the cover member. When the lens members are arranged, the number of lens members is not particularly limited, and the first translucent member (outer lens 8021) and the second translucent member (inner lens 8022) described in the ninth embodiment are used. As described above, a plurality of translucent members (lens members) may be arranged. Further, such a translucent member (lens member) may be manufactured by laminating two translucent members (lens members) with an adhesive or the like. Here, in order to effectively exert the function of enlarging an image, it is necessary to give a predetermined thickness to the translucent member (lens member), and resin parts having such a thickness can be provided at once. When it is attempted to be produced, it is difficult to perform die cutting, and there is a concern that mass productivity will decrease. Further, in order to manufacture a resin part having such a thickness, a large mold is required, which may increase the cost. In this regard, if one translucent member (lens member) is manufactured by laminating two translucent members (lens members), mass productivity can be improved and the cost can be kept low. be able to.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the decorative unit 8120 is an integrated unit (a unit in which the decorative frame 8140, the cover member 8131, the lens member 8132, and the decorative screen sheet 8133 are integrated). As a result, the manufacturing efficiency can be improved, and parts can be easily replaced when the product is damaged.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the front light transmitting plate 8111 is arranged on the back side of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). A gap is likely to occur near the edge of the curved screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), and there is a concern that a wire-shaped instrument may be inserted through the gap to cause a goto action. Will be done. In this regard, in the eleventh embodiment, since the front light transmitting plate 8111 is arranged on the back side of the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to prevent such an act of goggling. On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, the member having translucency is not arranged on the inner side of the game machine than the screen (upper screen sheet 8023) and in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). It was explained as. In the present invention, as described above, the member having translucency (front side transparency) on the inner side of the game machine and in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) than the screen member (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light plate 8111) may not be arranged.

In the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the outer shape of the front light transmitting plate 8111 is a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 272. The shape of the front light transmitting plate 8111 is not particularly limited, and the decorative unit 8120 (first decorative unit 8120a, second decorative unit 8120b, third decorative unit 8120c, fourth decorative unit 8120d, and fifth decorative unit 8120e). A shape (or a portion located on the back side of the decorative unit 8120 does not exist in the first place) having an opening formed in a portion located on the back side of the decorative unit 8120 (the entire decorative unit 8120 overlaps with the opening in the front view). Shape). 319 and 320 show such a modification.

FIG. 319 is a front view of the front light transmitting plate. FIG. 320 is a schematic view for explaining a mounting mode of the decorative unit. As shown in FIG. 319, the front light-transmitting plate 8111 according to this modification has a shape in which the shaded portion is eliminated from the front light-transmitting plate 8111 according to the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 320, the front translucent plate 8111 does not exist on the back side of the decorative unit 8120, but the decorative unit back cover is provided instead of the front transmissive plate 8111. The back cover of the decorative unit has a substantially elliptical shape, and is formed of a translucent material like the front translucent plate 8111. Further, the back cover of the decorative unit is formed with screw holes similar to those of the upper screw holes 8111a and the lower screw holes 8111b of the front light transmitting plate 8111. The screw through which the upper screw hole of the back cover of the decorative unit is inserted is screwed into the hole formed in the upper boss portion 8145a of the decorative frame 8140, and the screw through which the lower screw hole of the back cover of the decorative unit is inserted is inserted into the decorative frame 8140. The decorative unit back cover can be fixed to the decorative unit 8120 by screwing into the hole formed in the lower boss portion 8145b. By adopting such a configuration, the arrangement position of the decorative unit 8120 is not regulated by the front light transmitting plate 8111, and the degree of freedom regarding the arrangement of the decorative unit 8120 can be increased. For example, it is also possible to arrange the decoration unit 8120 so as to be recessed into the back side of the game machine 1. As a result, the position of the decorative screen sheet 8133 is also on the back side of the game machine 1 as compared with the eleventh embodiment, so that the light projected by the projector device B2 can be easily reached. The lower portion of the decorative unit 8120 is attached to the decorative unit holding member. For example, the lower portion of the decorative unit 8120 may be attached to a predetermined portion of the navigation lamp cover 8161, or may be attached to another member.

<Appendix K>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor cannot create new entertainment by devising the arrangement of the screen and the light emitting means in the process of diligently studying the game machine using the projector as described above. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(K-1-1) Screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
It is equipped with a light emitting means (LED8177 for irradiating a decorative unit) capable of emitting light.
A plurality of colors are provided as the colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
The light emitting means is arranged so that light can be projected onto the screen.
When the projector projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means can emit light of the second color (blue).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, a light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is arranged so that light can be projected onto a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and a projector (projector device B2) is arranged. ) Projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) can emit light of the second color (blue). It is configured as follows. This makes it possible to coordinate the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177), and the image displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel production effect by arranging the shades of.

In the eleventh embodiment, when light for displaying an image including the first color (red) is projected by the projector (projector device B2), the second color is projected by the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177). It was explained that it may emit (blue) light. This makes the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) visible in the third color (purple) produced by the first color (red) and the second color (blue). In the present invention, different colors can be adopted as the first color, the second color, and the third color, but the first color, the second color, and the third color are used. The color of is basically the same color. For example, when the projector (projector device B2) projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) of the second color (red). By emitting light, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) can be made visible in a third color (bright red). In this way, it is possible to create vivid colors that cannot be projected by the projector (projector device B2) alone due to the limit of brightness. Examples of the image including the first color (red) include an image corresponding to the flame of the first color (red). The image including the first color (red) may be an image composed entirely of the first color (red), or may be an image containing a color other than the first color (red). Good.

(K-1-2) The game machine according to (K-1-1).
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen.
The light emitting means is located diagonally behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is arranged so as to be incident on the back side, and is at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and is a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). ) Is placed diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) can be efficiently arranged while securing the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Further, by arranging the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) diagonally with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is deviated from the center of the player's field of view, and the player However, since it is difficult to see the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-1-) The gaming machine according to (K-1-1) or (K-1-2).
The screen has at least a curved surface to be projected.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since the image is displayed on the curved projected surface, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the displayed image, and a more realistic image expression can be obtained. It can be realized.

(K-2-1) Screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
It is equipped with a light emitting means (LED8177 for irradiating a decorative unit) capable of emitting light.
The light emitting means is arranged so that light can be projected onto the screen, and is a directional member (a bullet-shaped lens provided with a bullet-shaped LED) that directs the projected light toward a specific position on the screen. With
When the projector projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means can emit light of the second color (blue).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, a light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is arranged so that light can be projected onto a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and a projector (projector device B2) is arranged. ) Projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) can emit light of the second color (blue). It is configured as follows. This makes it possible to coordinate the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177), and the image displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel production effect by arranging the shades of. Further, the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) includes a directional member (bullet-shaped lens included in the bullet-shaped LED) that directs the projected light toward a specific position on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). Therefore, it is possible to realize an image expression in which the display at a specific position is particularly emphasized.

When an LED is used as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of LED is not particularly limited, and a so-called surface mount type LED may be adopted, or a so-called bullet type LED may be adopted. As the surface mount type LED, one in which a light emitting element is placed in a concave storage portion and the light emitting element is filled with a resin can be used. As the bullet-shaped LED, one in which the shape of the resin constituting the outer surface is formed in a bullet-shaped shape can be used. Since the bullet-shaped LED includes a bullet-shaped sealing resin, it generally has directivity and a narrow irradiation range as compared with a surface-mounted LED. As a result, for example, when a bullet-shaped LED (a narrow-angle type LED having a bullet-shaped cap made of transparent resin) is used as the light emitting means (LED 8177 for irradiating the decorative unit), a predetermined portion of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) is used. Can be locally irradiated. For example, when an image corresponding to the character's face is displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), it is possible to perform an effect such as irradiating a portion corresponding to the character's eyes.

On the other hand, when a surface mount type LED (LED provided with a light diffusing member) is used as the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177), a relatively wide range of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) can be evenly irradiated. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) can reach substantially the entire area of the projected portion (projected area 8133c) on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In addition, by irradiating from diagonally below, it is possible to give the player the impression of being brightly illuminated from below. Further, since the amount of light contained per unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the position of the light source. In this regard, if the position of the light source (LED particles) is completely visible to the player, there is a concern that the appearance will be poor. However, if a wide-angle type LED is used, such LED particles are conspicuous. It is difficult and good design can be ensured. Further, when a surface mount type LED is used as the light emitting means (navigation lamp LED8179), the amount of light passing through the uneven portion 8173d can be increased, and the convex portion 8166 of the navigation lamp lens 8165 is evenly irradiated. You can also. As the light emitting means in the present invention, a full-color LED or a monochromatic LED may be used.

(K-2-2) The gaming machine of the above (K-2-1).
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen.
The light emitting means is located diagonally behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is arranged so as to be incident on the back side, and is at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and is a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). ) Is placed diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) can be efficiently arranged while securing the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Further, by arranging the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) diagonally with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is deviated from the center of the player's field of view, and the player However, since it is difficult to see the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-2-3) The gaming machine according to (K-2-1) or (K-2-2).
The screen has at least a curved surface to be projected.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since the image is displayed on the curved projected surface, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the displayed image, and a more realistic image expression can be obtained. It can be realized.

(K-3-1) Screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and
A projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A light emitting board (navigation lamp LED board 8175) on which a light source is arranged and
It is equipped with a light emitting decoration part (navigation lamp lens 8165) that can be seen by the player.
The light emitting substrate is provided with a first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) and a second light emitting means (navigation lamp LED8179) as light sources.
The first light emitting means is arranged so that light can be projected onto the screen.
The second light emitting means is arranged so that light can be projected onto the light emitting decorative portion.
When the projector projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the first light emitting means can emit light of the second color (blue).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is arranged so that light can be projected onto the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), and the projector (projector). When the device B2) projects light for displaying an image containing the first color (red), the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) emits light of the second color (blue). It is configured to be possible. As a result, it is possible to coordinate the projection of light by the projector (projector device B2) and the projection of light by the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177), and the light is displayed on the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). It is possible to create a novel effect by arranging the hue of the image. Further, a second light emitting means (navigation lamp LED8179) is arranged so that light can be projected onto the light emitting decoration unit (navigation lamp lens 8165), and the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) and the second light emitting means (LED 8177 for irradiating the decoration unit) and the second Both the light emitting means (navigation lamp LED8179) are arranged on one light emitting board (navigation lamp LED board 8175). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the space related to the arrangement of the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) and the second light emitting means (navigation lamp LED8179), and the space is projected by the projector (projector device B2). A wide path for light can be secured.

The light emitting decoration portion may be entirely translucent, or only a part thereof may be translucent. For example, the light emitting decoration portion may be formed by the navigation lamp lens 8165 and the navigation lamp cover 8161. The navigation lamp cover 8161 basically does not have translucency, but a part of the navigation lamp cover 8161 may have translucency.

(K-3-2) The gaming machine of the above (K-3-1).
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen.
The light emitting substrate is located diagonally behind the screen at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (projector device B2) and the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) are such that the light projected by the projector (projector device B2) is the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). The light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) is arranged so as to be incident on the back side, and is a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector device B2), and is a screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). ) Is placed diagonally behind. As a result, the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133) and the light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) can be efficiently arranged while securing the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector device B2). Further, by arranging the light emitting substrate (navigation lamp LED substrate 8175) diagonally with respect to the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), the light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is deviated from the center of the player's field of view, and the player However, since it is difficult to see the light source, the design can be improved.

(K-3-3) The gaming machine according to (K-3-1) or (K-3-2).
The screen has at least a curved surface to be projected.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, since the image is displayed on the curved projected surface, it is possible to give a stereoscopic effect to the displayed image, and a more realistic image expression can be obtained. It can be realized.

In the eleventh embodiment, the light projected by the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) is incident on the back side of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In the present invention, the light projected by the first light emitting means (decorative unit irradiation LED8177) may be configured to enter the front side of the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting board (navigation lamp LED board 8175) is arranged diagonally below the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133), but the light emitting board (navigation lamp LED board 8175) is It may be arranged diagonally above the screen (decorative screen sheet 8133). In this case, as described in the ninth embodiment, the light projected from the projector may be configured to travel diagonally upward. As the configuration related to the projector and the mirror in the present invention, the configuration described in the ninth embodiment may be adopted, or the configuration described in the eleventh embodiment may be adopted. Further, the projector in the present invention may be a rear projector that projects from the back side, or may be a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side.

<Appendix L>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, since the projector tends to generate heat and become hot as compared with a liquid crystal display device or the like, there is a problem that the projector does not function normally unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of releasing heat generated by an electronic component.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(L-1-1) With a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2),
A first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) communicating with the space in which the predetermined electronic component is arranged,
A second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space is provided.
The second space forming portion includes openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the game machine.
The opening is open downward,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) has a first air passage space (1st air passage space) communicating with a space in which a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) is arranged. Space P) is formed. Further, in the second space forming portion (front duct 8235), a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P) is formed. At the same time, openings communicating with the outside of the game machine (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed. As a result, the first air passage space (space P), the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the space in which the predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) are arranged are arranged. The heat generated by the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between them. Further, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed so as to open downward. As a result, the opening (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) is blocked by placing an object, and the opening (left side opening 8242L) is opened from the outside of the game machine. , The central opening 8242C and the right opening 8242R) can effectively prevent foreign matter such as liquid from entering.

(L-1-2) The game machine according to (L-1-1).
The predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first air passage space (space P), the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the projector (projector device B2). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between the arrangement space and the space. Further, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign substances such as liquids that may enter from the outside of the game machine, and the foreign substances may cause the projector (projector device B2) to break down. It can be avoided.

(L-2-1) With a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2),
A first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passing space (space P) through which air toward the predetermined electronic component can pass, and a first space forming portion (cover portion B2000).
A second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space is provided.
The second space forming portion includes openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) through which air outside the game machine can enter.
The opening allows air below the opening to enter the second air passage space.
The air that has passed through the second air passage space and the first air passage space and reached the predetermined electronic component is discharged into the game machine.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) is a first air passing space (space P) through which air directed toward a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can pass. ) Is formed. Further, in the second space forming portion (front duct 8235), a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P) is formed. At the same time, openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed so that air outside the game machine can enter. Then, the air that has passed through the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the first air passage space (space P) and reached a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) , Is discharged into the game machine. As a result, the air that has passed through the second air passage space (left side space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right side space 8247R) and the first air passage space (space P) is allowed to flow into a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2). After that, it is possible to discharge the air warmed by the heat generated by the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2), and the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be cooled through the flow of the air. it can. Further, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are the air below the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R). Can enter the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R). That is, since the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed so as to open downward, the opening (left side opening 8242L, The central opening 8242C and the right opening 8242R) are blocked, and the liquid is liquid from the outside of the game machine through the openings (left opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right opening 8242R). It is possible to effectively prevent foreign substances such as those from entering.

(L-2-2) The gaming machine of the above (L-2-1).
The predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the projector (space P) transmits the air that has passed through the second air passage space (left side space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right side space 8247R) and the first air passage space (space P). It can flow into the projector device B2), and the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of the air. Further, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign substances such as liquids that may enter from the outside of the game machine, and the foreign substances may cause the projector (projector device B2) to break down. It can be avoided.

(L-3-1) With a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2),
A first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) having a first air passage space (space P) communicating with the space in which the predetermined electronic component is arranged,
A second space forming portion (front duct 8235) having a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space is provided.
The second space forming portion includes openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) communicating with the outside of the game machine.
The opening is formed on the lower side of the second space forming portion and has a plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w).
The plurality of individual vents are partitioned from each other by a partition structure (first compartment 8243a and second compartment 8243b).
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) has a first air passage space (1st air passage space) communicating with a space in which a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) is arranged. Space P) is formed. Further, in the second space forming portion (front duct 8235), a second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicating with the first air passage space (space P) is formed. At the same time, openings communicating with the outside of the game machine (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed. As a result, the first air passage space (space P), the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the space in which the predetermined electronic components (projector device B2) are arranged are arranged. The heat generated by the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between them. Further, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed below the second space forming portion (front duct 8235). As a result, the opening (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) is blocked by placing an object, and the opening (left side opening 8242L) is opened from the outside of the game machine. , The central opening 8242C and the right opening 8242R) can effectively prevent foreign matter such as liquid from entering. Further, the plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by a partition structure (first compartment 8243a and second compartment 8243b). As a result, the diameter of each individual vent (opening 8242a to 8242w) can be reduced, and foreign matter enters through the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R). The possibility of coming can be further reduced.

(L-3-2) The gaming machine according to (L-3-1).
The predetermined electronic component is a projector capable of projecting a predetermined image.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the first air passage space (space P), the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) and the projector (projector device B2). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be released through the flow of air moving between the arrangement space and the space. Further, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign substances such as liquids that may enter from the outside of the game machine, and the foreign substances may cause the projector (projector device B2) to break down. It can be avoided.

In the eleventh embodiment, the second air passage space (left side space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right side space 8247R) is taken in from the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R). It has been described that the air that has passed through the first air passage space (space P) flows into a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2). In the present invention, the traveling direction of air is not limited to this example, and the air passing through a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) passes through the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (left space 8247L). , Central space 8247C and right side space 8247R) may be discharged from the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R). As the predetermined electronic component, an electronic component that generates heat during operation can be appropriately adopted. For example, an electronic device such as an image output device, a control board on which a CPU or the like is mounted, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a motor. , Solenoids, sensors and the like. Examples of the image output device include a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel) in addition to the projector.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, an air passage path (for intake air) from the opening (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) to a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2). It has been described that while the duct) is provided, the air passage path (duct for exhaust) after passing through the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) is not provided. Even if the exhaust duct is not provided, the air after passing through the predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) (the air discharged from the case B22 into the cabinet G) is a hole (for example, the air discharged into the cabinet G) of the game machine 1. , The gap is formed in the medal payout outlet DD14 and the side wall of the cabinet G), and the air is naturally discharged to the outside of the game machine 1. However, in the present invention, an exhaust duct may be provided. The duct structure from the opening (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) to a predetermined electronic component (projector device B2) may be continuously configured. , A gap may be formed between one duct and the other duct. For example, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) may be directly connected or may be arranged apart from each other. When the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) are arranged apart from each other, the first space forming portion (cover portion B2000) and the second space forming portion (front duct) When the air moves to and from 8235), the air may be once discharged into the cabinet (outside the duct). Even in this case, the first air passage space (space P) and the second air passage space (left space 8247L, central space 8247C, and right space 8247R) communicate with each other via the space inside the cabinet. It can be said that there is.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it is described that the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed below the second space forming portion (front duct 8235). did. That is, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) are formed at positions that can be visually recognized when the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is viewed from the bottom. This makes it possible to prevent the player from pouring a liquid such as a drink through the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a structure for storing the liquid (see FIG. 36), and a wide projection area by the projector (projector device B2) can be secured. At the same time, it is possible to prevent dust from accumulating inside the duct. Further, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) may be formed at positions that are difficult or invisible in front view or side view. As a result, the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) can be made difficult to see from the player, and good decorativeness (aesthetics) can be realized.

In the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 261 which is a front view, it is difficult to visually recognize the openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) of the front duct base 8240 in the front view. It has become. Only when you look into it from almost directly below as shown in Fig. 317, you can barely see a part of the opening, and from slightly below the front (general position where the player is seated for the game). Even when viewed, the opening can be made inconspicuous (compared to a mode in which the opening is arranged facing the front). In this way, by arranging the openings downward to make them difficult to see or stand out in the front view, it is possible to enhance the aesthetic appearance of the game machine when viewed from the front.

It is also possible to adopt the following modified examples. FIG. 321 is a schematic view for explaining an arrangement mode of the front duct base. As shown in FIG. 321, the front duct base 8240 may be tilted so that the front side (player side) of the game machine is low and becomes higher toward the back side (cabinet side (cabinet side)). With such an arrangement, the opening can be made more difficult to see when viewed from the front. Further, at least a part of the bottom surface of the front duct base 8240 is provided with an inclined portion that is inclined so that the front side (player side) of the game machine is low and becomes higher toward the back side (housing side (cabinet side)). Therefore, openings (left side opening 8242L, central opening 8242C, and right side opening 8242R) may be provided in the inclined portion. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the opening inconspicuous in the front view. Further, the same effect can be obtained by providing the front duct base 8240 with an inclined portion and then arranging the front duct base 8240 in an inclined manner.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that the second space forming portion (front duct 8235) is configured as a part of the bonus lamp unit 8210. In the present invention, the duct may be integrally formed with the decorative portion (light emitting unit) in this way. That is, the air passage path may be provided inside the decorative portion (light emitting unit). As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the space related to the arrangement of the ducts, and it is possible to secure a wide projection area by the projector (projector device B2) by that amount.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are partitioned from each other by a partition structure (first compartment 8243a and second compartment 8243b). As a result, the diameters of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) are all less than a predetermined value (for example, 25 mm). Therefore, since the diameter of each individual vent (opening 8242a to 8242w) is smaller than the diameter of the medal, it is possible to prevent the player from inserting the medal through the individual vent (opening 8242a to 8242w). it can. In the present invention, the diameter of the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) is not particularly limited, and for example, the size is such that the player cannot throw in dust such as cigarettes through the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w). You may also design it. Further, the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) may be designed so as to prevent the human fingers from being pinched. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a finger is caught in the individual vents (openings 8242a to 8242w) and injured when assembling or transporting the game machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from sticking his finger in mischief. The partition structure is not particularly limited as long as it can make the opening fine while ensuring air permeability, and is a grid-like beam such as the first section 8243a and the second section 8243b. It may have a mesh structure (mesh-like structure) such as the punching B450 shown in FIG. 31, or a structure having a large number of small through holes such as the punching B450 shown in FIG. 150. Good. By adopting such a partition structure, even if a player inserts a wire-shaped device, it is difficult for the player to penetrate deep into the game machine (the device can reach the projector at most through the duct). , It is also possible to prevent the act of goto.

[12th Embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the twelfth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to eleventh embodiments also applies to the twelfth embodiment.

<Right side decoration unit 8310>
FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 323 is a front view of the right decorative unit. FIG. 324 is a perspective view showing the right light emitting unit removed from the right decorative unit and the right light emitting unit being disassembled.

As shown in FIG. 322, a right lamp unit 8301 is provided on the right side of the screen unit 8150 described in the eleventh embodiment, and a left lamp unit 8302 is provided on the left side of the screen unit 8150. The right lamp unit 8301 and the left lamp unit 8302 are arranged so as to project forward from the front panel 8197, respectively, like the bonus lamp unit 8210. The upper portion of the right lamp unit 8301 and the upper portion of the left lamp unit 8302 are connected to the right end and the left end of the bonus lamp unit 8210, respectively.

The right side decoration unit 8310 shown in FIG. 323 has a configuration that can be arranged in front of the front panel 8197 instead of the right side lamp unit 8301 in the eleventh embodiment. Although not shown, it is also possible to employ a left decorative unit instead of the left lamp unit 8302 in the eleventh embodiment. Since the left side decoration unit has a symmetrical structure with the right side decoration unit 8310, only the right side decoration unit 8310 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 323, a speaker punching 8311 is provided in the vicinity of the upper portion of the right side decoration unit 8310. The speaker punching 8311 is arranged in front of the speaker 8042 (see FIG. 246). A plurality of holes are formed in the speaker punching 8311, and the sound output from the speaker 8042 is emitted forward through the holes. Although not shown, the front panel 8197 in the present embodiment has a structure in which a plurality of holes are formed as in the right side portion 8001b and the left side portion 8001c (see FIG. 233) of the front panel 8001 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 233). It has a speaker sound emitting part). The speaker punching 8311 is attached to the front side of the speaker sound emitting portion.

The right side decoration unit 8310 includes a right side light emitting unit 8320 below the speaker punching 8311. As shown in FIG. 324, the right light emitting unit 8320 includes a right LED substrate 8330, a right substrate cover 8340, a right first lens 8350, a right second lens 8370, and a right third lens 8380. ..

The right LED substrate 8330 is installed on the front side of the right substrate cover 8340 so that the surface substantially coincides with the vertical plane in the left-right direction. On the surface of the right LED substrate 8330, a plurality of first side irradiation LEDs 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d), and , A plurality of second side irradiation LEDs 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, second side irradiation LED 8332c, and second side irradiation LED 8332d) are provided.

The first side irradiation LED 8331 and the second side irradiation LED 8332 are installed so as to emit light in the forward direction. Further, the first side irradiation LED 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d), and the second side irradiation LED 8332 (first side irradiation LED 8331). The two-side irradiation LED 8332a, the second side irradiation LED 8332b, the second side irradiation LED 8332c, and the second side irradiation LED 8332d) are arranged side by side on a straight line (straight line in the vertical direction).

The right first lens 8350 is arranged on the front side of the right LED substrate 8330, the right second lens 8370 is arranged on the front side of the right first lens 8350, and the right third lens 8380 is on the right second lens 8370. It is located on the front side. As a result, the right first lens 8350 is in a state of being covered by the right second lens 8370 from the front to the side. Further, the right second lens 8370 is in a state of being covered from the front to the side by the right third lens 8380. The right first lens 8350, the right second lens 8370, and the right third lens 8380 are each made of a translucent material. As a result, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 and the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 are emitted from the right third lens 8380 to the outside of the game machine 1. There is.

<Right side first lens 8350>
FIG. 325 is a perspective view of the first lens on the right side as viewed from the front. FIG. 326 is a perspective view of the first lens on the right side as viewed from below and from the left. 327 and 328 are partially enlarged perspective views in the vicinity of the third protrusion. 329 and 330 are partially enlarged perspective views of the first protrusion and the vicinity of the second protrusion. FIG. 331 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the front surface of the first lens on the right side. FIG. 332 is a perspective view of the first lens on the right side as viewed from the rear. FIG. 333 is a cross-sectional view of the first lens on the right side as viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 325, the right first lens 8350 includes a main body 8351 and a left side 8352 and a right side 8353 formed by bending the left and right ends of the main body 8351 rearward, respectively. The main body 8351 is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the right LED substrate 8330. The front surface 8354 (front surface) of the main body 8351 includes a first front surface 8354a, a second front surface 8354b, a third front surface 8354c, a fourth front surface 8354d, a fifth front surface 8354e, a sixth front surface 8354f, and a third. It has 7 front surface 8354 g, 8th front surface 8354h, and 9th front surface 8354i.

The first front surface 8354a is provided with a first projecting portion 8355a and a second projecting portion 8356a formed so as to project forward. The second front surface 8354b is provided with a third projecting portion 8357a formed so as to project forward. The third front surface 8354c is provided with a first projecting portion 8355b and a second projecting portion 8356b formed so as to project forward. The fourth front surface 8354d is provided with a third projecting portion 8357b formed so as to project forward. The fifth front surface 8354e is provided with a first protruding portion 8355c and a second protruding portion 8356c formed so as to project forward. The sixth front surface 8354f is provided with a third protruding portion 8357c formed so as to project forward. The seventh front surface 8354g is provided with a first protruding portion 8355d and a second protruding portion 8356d formed so as to project forward. The eighth front surface 8354h is provided with a third protruding portion 8357d formed so as to project forward.

As shown in FIG. 326, the forward protrusion length (from the front surface 8354 to the third protrusion 8357d) of the third protrusion 8357 (third protrusion 8357a, third protrusion 8357b, third protrusion 8357c, and third protrusion 8357d). 3 The length to the front end of the protruding portion 8357) is such that the first protruding portion 8355 (the first protruding portion 8355a, the first protruding portion 8355b, the first protruding portion 8355c, and the first protruding portion 8355d) protrudes forward. It is longer than the length (the length from the front surface 8354 to the front end of the first protrusion 8355). Further, the forward protrusion length of the first protrusion 8355 (first protrusion 8355a, first protrusion 8355b, first protrusion 8355c, and first protrusion 8355d) (from the front surface 8354 to the first protrusion 8355). The length to the front end) is the forward protrusion length (from the front surface 8354) of the second protrusion 8356 (second protrusion 8356a, second protrusion 8356b, second protrusion 8356c, and second protrusion 8356d). It is longer than the length to the front end of the second protrusion 8356).

The first protruding portion 8355a is arranged on the right side of the second protruding portion 8356a. On the other hand, the first protruding portion 8355b, the first protruding portion 8355c, and the first protruding portion 8355d are arranged on the left side of the second protruding portion 8356b, the second protruding portion 8356c, and the second protruding portion 8356d, respectively. Has been done. In FIG. 326, the second protrusion 8356b, the second protrusion 8356c, and the second protrusion 8356d are almost invisible due to the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first protrusion 8355d. It has become.

1st protrusion 8355 (1st protrusion 8355a, 1st protrusion 8355b, 1st protrusion 8355c, and 1st protrusion 8355d) and 2nd protrusion 8356 (2nd protrusion 8356a, 2nd protrusion) The portion 8356b, the second protruding portion 8356c, and the second protruding portion 8356d) are formed so as to extend in the vertical direction, respectively. The first protruding portion 8355 (first protruding portion 8355a, first protruding portion 8355b, first protruding portion 8355c, and first protruding portion 8355d) and the second protruding portion 8356 (second protruding portion 8356a, second protruding portion). 8356b, the second protruding portion 8356c, and the second protruding portion 8356d) are arranged at a predetermined interval.

Further, the second protruding portion 8356a, the first protruding portion 8355b, the first protruding portion 8355c, and the first protruding portion 8355d are arranged on a substantially straight line (first straight line in the vertical direction). The first protruding portion 8355a, the second protruding portion 8356b, the second protruding portion 8356c, and the second protruding portion 8356d are arranged on a substantially straight line (a second straight line substantially parallel to the first straight line).

FIG. 327 shows a state in which the vicinity of the third protrusion 8357d is viewed from below and from the left. FIG. 328 shows a view of the vicinity of the third protrusion 8357d as viewed from below and from the right. The third protruding portion 8357a, the third protruding portion 8357b, and the third protruding portion 8357c have the same configuration as the third protruding portion 8357d. The third protrusion 8357a is arranged slightly to the right of the third protrusion 8357b, the third protrusion 8357c, and the third protrusion 8357d.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the third protruding portion 8357d has a substantially pentagonal shape (like a shogi piece) in bottom view or top view, and a shape in which irregularities are formed on the peripheral edge. Specifically, the peripheral edge of the third protruding portion 8357d includes the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f formed from the front end of the left uneven portion 8357e toward the right side (toward the front end of the third protruding portion 8357d), and the right side. It has a concavo-convex portion 8357 g and a right front concavo-convex portion 8357h formed from the front end of the right concavo-convex portion 8357 g toward the left side (toward the front end of the third protruding portion 8357d).

The left uneven portion 8357e is formed by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357i (a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half). The left front uneven portion 8357f is formed by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357j and a concave curved surface 8357k. The right uneven portion 8357 g is formed by continuously forming a concave curved surface 8357 l (a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half). The right front uneven portion 8357h is formed by continuously forming a convex curved surface 8357m and a concave curved surface 8357n.

As a result, the left front concavo-convex portion 8357f and the right front concavo-convex portion 8357h are configured as a smooth curved surface as a whole, whereas the left concavo-convex portion 8357e has a shape in which the contact point of the adjacent convex curved surface 8357i is sharp. The right-side uneven portion 8357g has a shape in which the contact point of the adjacent concave curved surface 8357l is sharp. The convex curved surface 8357i, the convex curved surface 8357j, the concave curved surface 8357k, the concave curved surface 8357l, the convex curved surface 8357m, and the concave curved surface 8357n are each formed so as to extend in the vertical direction.

FIG. 329 shows a state in which the vicinity of the first protruding portion 8355d and the second protruding portion 8356d is viewed from below and from the left. FIG. 330 shows a state in which the vicinity of the first protruding portion 8355d and the second protruding portion 8356d is viewed from below and from the right. The first protruding portion 8355a, the first protruding portion 8355b, and the first protruding portion 8355c have the same configuration as the first protruding portion 8355d, and the second protruding portion 8356a, the second protruding portion 8356b, The second protruding portion 8356c has the same configuration as the second protruding portion 8356d.

As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the first protruding portion 8355d and the second protruding portion 8356d have a columnar shape, and the front surface (front surface) thereof is formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. Specifically, the front surface of the first protruding portion 8355d is a surface on which an inclined surface 8355e that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8355f that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed. Further, the front surface of the second protruding portion 8356d is a surface on which an inclined surface 8356e that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8356f that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed.

In the first protrusion 8355d, the inclined surface 8355e is formed so that the normal direction is obliquely right front, and the inclined surface 8355f is formed so that the normal direction is obliquely left front. Further, in the second protruding portion 8356d, the inclined surface 8356e is formed so that the normal direction is obliquely right front, and the inclined surface 8356f is formed so that the normal direction is obliquely left front. .. The normal direction with respect to the inclined surface 8356e has a larger rightward component than the normal direction with respect to the inclined surface 8355e. The normal direction with respect to the inclined surface 8355f has a larger leftward component than the normal direction with respect to the inclined surface 8356f.

FIG. 331 shows a state in which the vicinity of the third protrusion 8357d is viewed from below and from the left. As shown in FIG. 331, the ninth front surface 8354i has a shape in which a large number of hexagonal pyramids having vertices at the rear and an open bottom surface are arranged in a matrix. That is, the ninth front surface 8354i has a shape in which a large number of a plurality of triangular slopes 8354j having different normal directions are laid out. As a result, the ninth front surface 8354i has a zigzag structure in cross-sectional view. The first front surface 8354a, the third front surface 8354c, the fifth front surface 8354e, and the seventh front surface 8354g have the same structure as the ninth front surface 8354i. The first protruding portion 8355 and the second protruding portion 8356 are provided on the front surface side of such a structure.

On the other hand, the eighth front surface 8354h is a surface on which an inclined surface 8354k that descends from the front to the rear and an inclined surface 8354l that descends from the rear to the front are continuously formed. The inclined surface 8354k and the inclined surface 8354l are formed so as to extend in the left-right direction, respectively. As a result, the eighth front surface 8354h is formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. The second front surface 8354b, the fourth front surface 8354d, and the sixth front surface 8354f have the same structure as the eighth front surface 8354h. The third protrusion 8357 is provided on the front surface side of such a structure.

As shown in FIG. 332, the back surface 8358 (rear surface) of the main body 8351 has a rear protrusion 8359 (rear protrusion 8359a, rear protrusion 8359b, rear protrusion 8359c, and rear side). (Protruding portion 8359d), the first rear concavo-convex portion 8360 (first rear concavo-convex portion 8360a, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360b, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360c, and first rear concavo-convex portion 8360d), and The second rear uneven portion 8361 is formed.

The rear protruding portion 8359 (rear protruding portion 8359a, rear protruding portion 8359b, rear protruding portion 8359c, and rear protruding portion 8359d) has a third protruding portion 8357 (third protruding portion 8357a, It is provided at a position where it overlaps with the third protruding portion 8357b, the third protruding portion 8357c, and the third protruding portion 8357d). The first rear concavo-convex portion 8360 (first rear concavo-convex portion 8360a, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360b, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360c, and first rear concavo-convex portion 8360d) is the first in rear view. Protruding portion 8355 (first protruding portion 8355a, first protruding portion 8355b, first protruding portion 8355c, and first protruding portion 8355d) and second protruding portion 8356 (second protruding portion 8356a, second protruding portion 8356b, first It is provided at a position where it overlaps with the two protrusions 8356c and the second protrusion 8356d). The second rear concavo-convex portion 8361 constitutes a portion of the back surface 8358 other than the rear-side protruding portion 8359 and the first rear-side concavo-convex portion 8360.

In FIG. 333, the right first lens 8350 is cut at a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a surface passing through the second protrusion 8356a, the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first protrusion 8355d). Shown. As shown in FIG. 333, the second rear concave-convex portion 8361 has a wavy structure in which an inclined surface 8361e that descends from the rear to the front and an inclined surface 8361f that descends from the front to the rear are alternately formed. have.

The rear side protruding portion 8359 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is formed so as to project rearward from the second rear side uneven portion 8361. The first rear-side uneven portion 8360 has a wavy structure in which an inclined surface 8360e that descends from the rear to the front and an inclined surface 8360f that descends from the front to the rear are alternately formed. The inclined surface 8360e and the inclined surface 8360f are formed so as to extend in the left-right direction, respectively. The first rear concavo-convex portion 8360 is formed so as to project rearward from the second rear concavo-convex portion 8361. The rearward protrusion length of the rear side protrusion 8359 is longer than the rearward protrusion length of the first rear side uneven portion 8360. As a result, the rear end (rear end surface 8359e) of the rear protruding portion 8359 is positioned behind the rear end of the first rear uneven portion 8360. The rear end surface 8359e is a rectangular flat surface.

The inclined surface 8360e and the inclined surface 8360f of the first rear uneven portion 8360 extend straight in the left-right direction, whereas the inclined surface 8361e and the inclined surface 8361f of the second rear side uneven portion 8361 extend to the left and right. It extends like a curve. The curves drawn by the inclined surface 8361e and the inclined surface 8361f are symmetrical with respect to the rear protruding portion 8359. The inclined surface 8361e and the inclined surface 8361f of the second rear uneven portion 8361 are formed from the left end to the right end of the back surface 8358, whereas the inclined surface 8360e and the inclined surface 8360f of the first rear side uneven portion 8360 are the second. The length in the left-right direction is shorter than that of the inclined surface 8361e and the inclined surface 8361f of the rear uneven portion 8361. As a result, the second rear concavo-convex portion 8361 is formed so as to extend to the right side portion of the first rear concavo-convex portion 8360. In the right side portion of the first rear concavo-convex portion 8360, the curvature of the curve drawn by the second rear concavo-convex portion 8361 is larger than that of the other portions. In particular, the second rear concavo-convex portion 8361 is formed so as to have an arc-shaped curved surface 8361 g in the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction of the first rear concavo-convex portion 8360.

<Light irradiation from the right LED board 8330>
FIG. 334 is a perspective view of the right side first lens, the first side irradiation LED, and the second side irradiation LED as viewed from the rear. FIG. 335 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the right first lens, the first side irradiation LED, and the second side irradiation LED shown in FIG. 334. 336 and 337 are cross-sectional views of the right first lens, the first side irradiation LED, and the second side irradiation LED shown in FIG. 334. FIG. 338 is a perspective view of the second right lens as viewed from below and from the right. FIG. 339 is a perspective view of the second lens on the right side as viewed from below and from the left. FIG. 340 is a perspective view of the second lens on the right side as viewed from the rear. FIG. 341 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the second lens on the right side as viewed from the rear. FIG. 342 is a cross-sectional view of the right light emitting unit. FIG. 343 is a perspective view of the third lens on the right side as viewed from the front. FIG. 344 is a perspective view of the third lens on the right side as viewed from the rear.

In FIGS. 334 to 337, the right first lens 8350, the first side irradiation LED 8331, and the second side irradiation LED 8332 in the state where the right light emitting unit 8320 is assembled maintain their relative positional relationship. The figure is shown as it is, and the illustration of other components is omitted. Further, in FIG. 336, the right first lens 8350, the first side irradiation LED 8331, and the second side irradiation LED 8332 in the state shown in FIG. 334 are cut along a horizontal plane along the lower surface 8357q of the third protrusion 8357d. Is shown. Further, in FIG. 337, the right first lens 8350, the first side irradiation LED 8331, and the second side irradiation LED 8332 in the state shown in FIG. 334 are vertically projected in the first protrusion 8355d and the second protrusion 8356d. It shows the state of cutting on the horizontal plane near the center.

As shown in FIGS. 334 and 335, the first side irradiation LED 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d) is on the back surface. At a position where it overlaps with the first rear concavo-convex portion 8360 (first rear concavo-convex portion 8360a, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360b, first rear concavo-convex portion 8360c, and first rear concavo-convex portion 8360d). It is provided. The first side irradiation LED 8331 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction and near the center in the horizontal direction of the first rear side uneven portion 8360.

The second side irradiation LED 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, second side irradiation LED 8332c, and second side irradiation LED 8332d) has a rear side protrusion 8359 (rear) in rear view. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with the side protruding portion 8359a, the rear protruding portion 8359b, the rear protruding portion 8359c, and the rear protruding portion 8359d). The second side irradiation LED 8332 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction and near the center in the horizontal direction of the rear side protrusion 8359.

The vertical length of the second side irradiation LED 8332 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the rear protruding portion 8359. As a result, the upper end edge and the lower end edge of the second side irradiation LED 8332 substantially coincide with the upper end edge and the lower end edge of the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359 in the rear view, respectively. Further, the vertical length of the third protruding portion 8357 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the rear protruding portion 8359. As a result, the distance (thickness of the rear protruding portion 8359) between the upper surface 8359f (upper surface) of the rear protruding portion 8359 and the lower surface 8359 g (lower surface) is 8357p (upper surface) of the upper surface of the third protruding portion 8357. The distance between the lower surface) and the lower surface 8357q (lower surface) is substantially equal to the distance (thickness of the third protrusion 8357). Further, the upper surface 8359f and the lower surface 8359g of the rear protruding portion 8359 and the upper surface 8357p and the lower surface 8357q of the third protruding portion 8357 are formed substantially flat, and the upper surface 8359f and the lower surface 8359g of the rear protruding portion 8359 are formed. They are formed on substantially the same plane as the upper surface 8357p and the lower surface 8357q of the third protrusion 8357, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 336, the second side irradiation LED 8332d is arranged (closely) at a predetermined distance while facing the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359d. Although not shown, the rear protruding portion 8359d is arranged so that the rear end surface 8359e is substantially parallel to the right LED substrate 8330. The light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332d is incident on the rear end surface 8359e, passes through the rear protrusion 8359d, the eighth front 8354h, and the third protrusion 8357d, and then the peripheral edge of the third protrusion 8357d. (Left-side uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right-right uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) is discharged to the outside of the right first lens 8350.

Although only the second side irradiation LED8332d is shown in FIG. 336, the other second side irradiation LED8332 (second side irradiation LED8332a, second side irradiation LED8332b, and second side irradiation LED8332c) are also shown. Similarly, the rear protruding portion 8359 (rear protruding portion 8359a, rear protruding portion 8359b, and rear protruding portion 8359c) is arranged close to the rear end surface 8359e. Alternatively, the second side irradiation LED 8332 may be substantially in contact with the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359.

As a result, the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332a enters the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359a and passes through the rear side protrusion 8359a, the second front surface 8354b, and the third protrusion 8357a. After that, it is discharged from the peripheral edge of the third protruding portion 8357a (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357 g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) to the outside of the right first lens 8350. The light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332b enters the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359b, passes through the rear side protrusion 8359b, the fourth front surface 8354d, and the third protrusion 8357b, and then the second 3 The peripheral edge of the protruding portion 8357b (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) is discharged to the outside of the right first lens 8350. The light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332c enters the rear end surface 8359e of the rear side protrusion 8359c, passes through the rear side protrusion 8359c, the sixth front surface 8354f, and the third protrusion 8357c, and then the third 3 The peripheral edge of the protruding portion 8357c (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) is discharged to the outside of the right first lens 8350.

Here, as described above, unevenness is formed on the peripheral edge of the third protruding portion 8357 (left side uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right side uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h). The left concavo-convex portion 8357e, the left front concavo-convex portion 8357f, the right front concavo-convex portion 8357g, and the right front concavo-convex portion 8357h have predetermined concave or convex portions (convex curved surface 8357i, convex curved surface 8357j to concave curved surface 8357k, concave curved surface, respectively. It has a repeating structure of 8357 l or a convex curved surface 8357 m to a concave curved surface 8357 n). The repeating structure is densely formed, and the pitch of the concave portion to the convex portion (the average distance between the concave portion and the concave portion or the average distance between the convex portion and the convex portion) is relatively small. Further, the adjacent concave portions or convex portions are arranged in the front-rear direction or the left-right direction. Therefore, the direction of the normal at an arbitrary point on the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right front uneven portion 8357g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h basically includes a component in the left-right direction.

As a result, the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 is emitted from the left uneven portion 8357e, the left front uneven portion 8357f, the right front uneven portion 8357 g, and the right front uneven portion 8357h to the outside of the right first lens 8350. At that time, the light is relatively focused in a specific range centered on the left-right direction. Further, the second side irradiation LED 8332 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, in the portion where the third protrusion 8357 is formed, it is possible to illuminate with a specific color (for example, red) mainly in the left-right direction.

A part of the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 may be diffusely reflected and then emitted from the left side portion 8352 to the right side portion 8353 to the outside of the right side first lens 8350. The left surface of the left side portion 8352 is formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. Specifically, on the left side surface of the left side portion 8352, an inclined surface 8352a that descends from left to right and an inclined surface 8352b that descends from right to left are continuously formed. On the other hand, the right surface of the right side portion 8353 is formed to be substantially flat. The shape of the left side surface of the left side portion 8352 and the right side surface of the right side portion 8353 is not particularly limited, and both surfaces may have a zigzag shape, or only any one surface may have a zigzag shape. Good.

As shown in FIG. 337, the first side irradiation LED 8331d is provided so that the central portion in the left-right direction thereof is positioned between the first protrusion 8355d and the second protrusion 8356d. Although only the first side irradiation LED8331d is shown in FIG. 337, other first side irradiation LED8331 (first side irradiation LED8331a, first side irradiation LED8331b, and first side irradiation LED8331c) are also shown. Similarly, the central portion in the left-right direction is the first protruding portion 8355 (first protruding portion 8355a, first protruding portion 8355b, and first protruding portion 8355c) and the second protruding portion 8356 (second protruding portion 8356a, It is provided so as to be positioned between the second protruding portion 8356b and the second protruding portion 8356c). As a result, the first side irradiation LED 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d) can be seen in the rear view (front view). A part overlaps with the first protrusion 8355 (the first protrusion 8355a, the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first protrusion 8355d), and a part overlaps with the second protrusion 8356 ( It overlaps with the second protruding portion 8356a, the second protruding portion 8356b, the second protruding portion 8356c, and the second protruding portion 8356d).

The light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331d enters the first rear side uneven portion 8360d and passes through the first rear side uneven portion 8360d and the seventh front surface 8354g. A part of the light transmitted through the 7th front surface 8354g is incident on the first protrusion 8355d and emitted from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355d to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the 7th front surface 8354g is incident on the second protrusion 8356d and emitted from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356d to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the 7th front surface 8354g is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without being incident on the first protruding portion 8355d and the second protruding portion 8356d.

Similarly, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331a enters the first rear side uneven portion 8360a and passes through the first rear side uneven portion 8360a and the first front surface 8354a. A part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a is incident on the first protrusion 8355a and emitted from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355a to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a is incident on the second protrusion 8356a and emitted from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356a to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the first front surface 8354a is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without being incident on the first protrusion 8355a and the second protrusion 8356a.

Further, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331b enters the first rear side uneven portion 8360b and passes through the first rear side uneven portion 8360b and the third front surface 8354c. A part of the light transmitted through the third front surface 8354c is incident on the first protrusion 8355b and emitted from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355b to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the third front surface 8354c is incident on the second protrusion 8356b and emitted from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356b to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the third front surface 8354c is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without being incident on the first protruding portion 8355b and the second protruding portion 8356b.

Further, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331c enters the first rear side uneven portion 8360c and passes through the first rear side uneven portion 8360c and the fifth front surface 8354e. A part of the light transmitted through the fifth front surface 8354e is incident on the first protrusion 8355c and is emitted from the front surface of the first protrusion 8355c to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the fifth front surface 8354e is incident on the second protrusion 8356c and is emitted from the front surface of the second protrusion 8356c to the outside of the right first lens 8350. Further, a part of the light transmitted through the fifth front surface 8354e is emitted to the outside of the right first lens 8350 as it is without being incident on the first protruding portion 8355c and the second protruding portion 8356c.

Here, as described above, the first protruding portion 8355 and the second protruding portion 8356 are formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Further, irregularities are formed on the front surface of the first protruding portion 8355 (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) and the front surface of the second protruding portion 8356 (inclined surface 8356e and inclined surface 8356f). The front surface of the first protruding portion 8355 has a repeating structure of a predetermined concave portion or convex portion (inclined surface 8355e to inclined surface 8355f). The front surface of the second protruding portion 8356 has a repeating structure of a predetermined concave portion or convex portion (inclined surface 8356e to inclined surface 8356f). The pitch of the concave portion to the convex portion (the average distance between the concave portion and the concave portion or the average distance between the convex portion and the convex portion) is relatively large (more than the pitch at the peripheral edge of the third protruding portion 8357). ..

As a result, when the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 is emitted from the first protrusion 8355 and the second protrusion 8356 to the outside of the right first lens 8350, the light is centered in the vertical direction. It will be in a state of being diffused in a wide range. Further, the first side irradiation LED 8331 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. Therefore, in the portion where the first protrusion 8355 and the second protrusion 8356 are formed, it is possible to dimly shine a predetermined color (for example, blue) in the vertical direction.

Similar to the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332, a part of the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 undergoes diffused reflection and is reflected diffusely from the left side portion 8352 to the right side portion 8353 to the right side first lens 8350. It may be released to the outside of the.

From the above, for example, blue light is emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 (first side irradiation LED 8331a, first side irradiation LED 8331b, first side irradiation LED 8331c, and first side irradiation LED 8331d). , When red light is emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, second side irradiation LED 8332c, and second side irradiation LED 8332d), it glows blue. It is possible to separate the part from the part that glows red. In addition, it is possible to make the portion that shines blue in the vertical direction appear to be mixed with the portion that shines red in the horizontal direction.

When the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 and the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 pass through the right first lens 8350, these lights are incident on the right second lens 8370.

As shown in FIGS. 338 and 339, the right second lens 8370 has a triangular prism shape with one side surface open, and is arranged so that the open surface is rearward. The right side surface 8371 has a right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d). The right flat portion 8372 is formed substantially flat and linearly from the front end to the rear end (right end) of the right side surface 8371. The portion of the right side surface 8371 other than the right flat portion 8372 is a right uneven portion 8373 formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. Similar to the left side portion 8352 of the right side first lens 8350, the right side uneven portion 8373 has a shape in which inclined surfaces in different directions are alternately arranged. The unevenness depth of the right uneven portion 8373 is shallower than that of the left uneven portion 8352.

The left side surface 8374 has a left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, and left flat portion 8375d). The left flat portion 8375 is formed substantially flat and linearly from the front end to the rear end (left end) of the left side surface 8374. The left flat portion 8375a, the left flat portion 8375b, the left flat portion 8375c, and the left flat portion 8375d have the right flat portion 8372a, the right flat portion 8372b, the right flat portion 8372c, and the right flat portion 8372d, respectively, at the front ends. It is continuous. The portion of the left side surface 8374 other than the left flat portion 8375 is a left uneven portion 8376 formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. The left uneven portion 8376 has a shape in which a large number of pyramidal trapezoidal protruding portions are irregularly arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 340 and 341, the back surface 8377 (rear surface) of the right second lens 8370 has a rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c). It also has a rear flat portion 8378d). The rear flat portion 8378 is formed substantially flat and linearly from the front end to the rear end (left end and right end) of the back surface 8377. The portion of the back surface 8377 other than the rear flat portion 8378 is the rear uneven portion 8379. Similar to the second rear concavo-convex portion 8361 of the first lens 8350 on the right side, the rear concavo-convex portion 8379 has a wavy structure in which inclined surfaces (inclined surface 8379a and inclined surface 8379b) in different directions are alternately formed. Have.

The inclined surface 8379a and the inclined surface 8379b extend straight from the front to the right on the back side of the right side surface 8371, while the inclined surface 8374b is curved from the front to the left on the back side of the left side surface 8374. It is postponed. The curvature of the curves drawn by the inclined surface 8379a and the inclined surface 8379b becomes larger as they are separated from the rear flat portion 8378, and the curve is symmetrical with respect to the center of the two rear flat portions 8378. In the vicinity of the center of the two rear flat portions 8378, an inclined surface 8379a and an inclined surface 8379b symmetrical with each other are connected to form a semi-elliptical shape.

FIG. 342 shows a state in which the right light emitting unit 8320 is cut in a horizontal plane passing through the third protrusion 8357d (near the center in the thickness direction of the third protrusion 8357d). For the sake of clarity, the cut surface of the right LED substrate 8330 and the cut surface of the right substrate cover 8340 are shown in black, the cut surface of the right first lens 8350, the cut surface of the right second lens 8370, and the right third lens 8380. The cut surface of is shown by shading.

The formation position of the right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d) in the right second lens 8370, left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375a) 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, left flat portion 8375d) and rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378c) The formation position of 8378d) corresponds to the formation position of the third protrusion 8357 (third protrusion 8357a, third protrusion 8357b, third protrusion 8357c, and third protrusion 8357d) in the right first lens 8350. doing.

Specifically, the right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375b) The upper end edges of the 8375c and the left flat portion 8375d) and the rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d) are The position in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the upper surface 8357p of the third protrusion 8357 (third protrusion 8357a, third protrusion 8357b, third protrusion 8357c, and third protrusion 8357d). Further, the right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, The lower end edges of the left flat portion 8375d) and the rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d) are third. The position in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the lower surface 8357q of the protruding portion 8357 (third protruding portion 8357a, third protruding portion 8357b, third protruding portion 8357c, and third protruding portion 8357d). Therefore, the cut surface in FIG. 342 passes through the third protruding portion 8357d, the right flat portion 8372d, the left flat portion 8375d, and the rear flat portion 8378d.

From the above, the third protruding portion 8357 is emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332 (second side irradiation LED 8332a, second side irradiation LED 8332b, second side irradiation LED 8332c, and second side irradiation LED 8332d). Most of the light emitted from the peripheral edges (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) is the rear flat portion 8378 (rear flat portion 8378a, rear flat portion). 8378b, rear flat portion 8378c, and rear flat portion 8378d), and right flat portion 8372 (right flat portion 8372a, right flat portion 8372b, right flat portion 8372c, and right flat portion 8372d), or right flat portion 8372d. The left flat portion 8375 (left flat portion 8375a, left flat portion 8375b, left flat portion 8375c, and left flat portion 8375d) emits light to the outside of the right second lens 8370.

In this way, the light transmitted through the right second lens 8370 is incident on the right third lens 8380. As shown in FIGS. 343 and 344, the right third lens 8380 has an outer shape similar to the right second lens 8370. The front surface (front surface) of the right third lens 8380 is formed to be substantially flat (except for the portion where the side surface is bent). The back surface (rear surface) of the right third lens 8380 has a right inner wall surface 8381 and a left inner wall surface 8382. A part of the right inner wall surface 8381 and the left inner wall surface 8382 is a rear uneven portion 8383. The rear concave-convex portion 8383 has a wavy structure in which a convex curved surface is repeatedly formed. The light incident on the right third lens 8380 passes through the right third lens 8380 and is emitted to the outside of the game machine 1.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix M>
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a light emitting decoration unit and capable of producing an effect by emitting light from a light source (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013686).

The present inventor can create a new entertainment property by devising the light guide of the light emitted from the light emitting means in the process of diligently studying the game machine provided with such a light emitting means. I came up with the idea that it might be.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a light emitting means.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment has the following features.

(M-1) A plurality of light emitting means (LED 8331 for first side irradiation and LED 8332 for second side irradiation) capable of emitting light, and
A first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) capable of guiding light emitted from the light emitting means, and
A second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) capable of guiding light emitted from one of the light emitting means is provided.
The first light guide unit can guide light emitted from one of the light emitting means in a wide range as compared with the second light guide unit.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide unit (first protruding portion 8355) has one light emitting means (first light emitting means (first protruding portion 8357) as compared with the second light guide unit (third protruding portion 8357). It is configured so that the light emitted from the 1-side irradiation LED 8331 or the 2nd side irradiation LED 8332) can be guided over a wide range. By providing such a first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and a second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357), the present inventor skillfully distinguishes between a brightly shining portion and a vaguely shining portion. I came up with the idea that it is possible to design, and by using the light guide using the first light guide unit (first protrusion 8355) and the second light guide (third protrusion 8357), an attractive light emission effect is produced. I found that I could do it.

(M-2) The gaming machine of the above (M-1).
The first light guide portion extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction).
The length of the second light guide unit along the predetermined direction is shorter than the length of the first light guide unit along the predetermined direction.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction), and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion) The length along the predetermined direction (vertical direction) in 8357) is configured to be shorter than the length along the predetermined direction (vertical direction) in the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). ) Is made into a vague light emitting state, while the formed part of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is made into a bright light emitting state. I found it.

(M-3) The gaming machine according to (M-1) or (M-2).
The first light guide portion has irregularities (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) formed on the end faces on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
The second light guide portion has irregularities (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) formed on the end surface of the light emitted from the light emitting means on the traveling direction side. Ori,
The distance between one concave portion and the other concave portion or the distance between the one convex portion and the other convex portion in the unevenness formed in the first light guide portion is one in the unevenness formed in the second light guide portion. Longer than the distance between the concave part and the other concave part or the distance between one convex part and the other convex part,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, in the first light guide unit (first protrusion 8355) and the second light guide (third protrusion 8357), the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331) Alternatively, unevenness is formed on the end face on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the second side irradiation LED 8332). Then, the distance between one concave portion and the other concave portion or one convex portion and the other convex portion in the unevenness (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) formed in the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). The distance between the two is one recess in the unevenness (left uneven portion 8357e, left front uneven portion 8357f, right front uneven portion 8357g, and right front uneven portion 8357h) formed in the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357). It is longer than the distance between the concave part and the convex part of one and the other convex part. The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). ) Is made into a vague light emitting state, while the formed part of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is made into a bright light emitting state. I found it.

(M-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-3).
The first light guide portion extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction).
In the second light guide unit, the end face on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means is the end face in a specific direction (left-right direction) perpendicular to the predetermined direction and the specific direction. It is formed in a shape that allows the light to be emitted from the
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) extends in a predetermined direction (vertical direction). Then, in the second light guide unit (third protruding portion 8357), the end faces on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED8332) are in a predetermined direction (upper and lower direction) and in the predetermined direction (upper and lower). It is formed in a shape that allows the light to be emitted from the end face in a direction closer to the specific direction (left-right direction) than in a specific direction (left-right direction) perpendicular to the direction). The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). ) Is formed in a vague light emitting state centered on a predetermined direction (vertical direction), while the formed portion of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is in a direction close to a specific direction (horizontal direction). It was found that it is possible to effectively realize a bright light emitting state centered on.

In the second light guide unit (third protruding portion 8357), the end face on the traveling direction side of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED8332) is set in a specific direction (horizontal direction) rather than a predetermined direction (vertical direction). The means for forming the shape so that the light can be emitted from the end face in the direction close to the above is not particularly limited. For example, in a repeating structure of a predetermined concave or convex portion (convex curved surface 8357i, convex curved surface 8357j to concave curved surface 8357k, concave curved surface 8357l, or convex curved surface 8357m to concave curved surface 8357n), the adjacent concave or convex portion or It is possible to configure the convex portion so as to be arranged in a direction closer to a specific direction (horizontal direction) than a predetermined direction (vertical direction). On the other hand, in the repeating structure of the unevenness (inclined surface 8355e and inclined surface 8355f) formed in the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355), the adjacent concave portion or convex portion is defined more than the specific direction (left-right direction). It can be configured to be arranged in a direction close to the direction (vertical direction).

(M-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-4).
The length of the first light guide unit along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means is shorter than the length of the second light guide unit along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the length of the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331) is set. It is configured to be shorter than the length of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) along the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332). The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). ) Is made into a vague light emitting state, while the formed part of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is made into a bright light emitting state. I found it.

(M-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-5).
A plurality of the second light guide portions are provided, and the second light guide unit is provided.
The first light guide portion is arranged between one of the second light guide portions and the other second light guide portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, a plurality of second light guide portions (third protrusion 8357) are provided, and the first light guide portion (first protrusion 8355) is the first second. It is arranged between the light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) and another second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357). The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). It has been found that the light emission at the formed portion of) can be partitioned by the formed portion of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357).

Further, a second light guide unit (third protrusion 8357) is arranged between one first light guide unit (first protrusion 8355) and another first light guide unit (first protrusion 8355). It may be that. In this way, when the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) are alternately arranged, the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) becomes available. In the light emission at the formation location (mainly the region where light is diffused in the vertical direction and shines over a wide area), the light emission at the formation location of the second light guide portion (third protrusion 8357) (mainly the light in the left-right direction A region that is diffused and shines linearly (limitedly as compared with the first light guide portion) can be sandwiched. Further, the emission color of the light emitting means (LED 8331 for first side irradiation) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide unit (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide unit (third protruding portion). The emission color of the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED 8332) capable of emitting light that can be guided by 8357) may be different. By adopting the configuration as in the twelfth embodiment, even when the emission colors of adjacent light sources are different in this way, it is possible to partition the emission regions of different colors without providing a partition plate. It is possible, and the light emission of each color can be appropriately expressed. As a result, even when there is no space for providing the partition plate or when the man-hours for designing the partition plate are required, it is possible to cope well.

(M-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-6).
A third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) capable of guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means is further provided.
The third light guide unit can guide light emitted from one of the light emitting means in a wide range as compared with the second light guide unit.
The first light guide portion and the third light guide portion extend in substantially the same direction.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the light is emitted from one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) as compared with the second light guide unit (third protrusion 8357). A third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) capable of guiding the light to be emitted over a wide range is provided, and a first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and a third light guide portion (second protruding portion) 8356) extends in substantially the same direction. The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). It was found that it is possible to more effectively make the formed part of) into a vague light emitting state.

(M-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-7).
A third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) capable of guiding the light emitted from the light emitting means is further provided.
The third light guide unit can guide light emitted from one of the light emitting means in a wide range as compared with the second light guide unit.
The first light guide unit is arranged so that light emitted from one of the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED8331) can be incident, while the third light guide unit also emits light of the one. It is arranged so that the light emitted from the means can be incident.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the light is emitted from one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) as compared with the second light guide unit (third protruding portion 8357). A third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) capable of guiding the light to be emitted over a wide range is provided, and the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) is one light emitting means (first side irradiation). While the light emitted from the LED 8331) is arranged so as to be incidental, the third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) is also emitted from the one light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331). It is arranged so that light can enter. The present inventor has configured the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the third light guide portion (second protruding portion 8356) in this way to form the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355). It was found that it is possible to more effectively make the formed part of) into a vague light emitting state.

(M-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-8).
The first light guide portion is formed so as to project from a first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g).
The second light guide portion is formed so as to project from a second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h).
The first surface has a higher degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means than the second surface.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) has a first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and first surface. The second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is formed so as to project from the 7 front surface 8354 g), and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) has a second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and the sixth front surface 8354f). The first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g) is formed so as to protrude from the eighth front surface 8354h), and the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g) is a second surface (third surface). 2 Degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) as compared with 2 front surface 8354b, 4th front surface 8354d, 6th front surface 8354f, and 8th front surface 8354h). Is getting bigger. In addition to the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357), the present inventor has a first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth). By configuring the front surface 8354e and the seventh front surface 8354g) and the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h) in this way, the first guide It is effectively realized that the formed portion of the light portion (first protruding portion 8355) is in a vague light emitting state, while the formed portion of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is in a bright light emitting state. Found that it is possible.

The degree of light diffusion on the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g) is determined by the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, first). The means for increasing the degree of light diffusion at the 6 front surface 8354f and the 8th front surface 8354h) is not particularly limited. For example, a predetermined number (for example, two) of the second surfaces (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h) are set as surfaces having different normal directions. The first surface (1st front surface 8354a, 3rd front surface 8354c, 5th front surface 8354e, and 7th front surface 8354g) is specified as having more than a predetermined number of surfaces having different normal directions. It can be configured to have a number (eg, 6) faces. Alternatively, the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and eighth front surface 8354h) is formed substantially flat, while the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface). 8354c, 5th front surface 8354e, and 7th front surface 8354g) may be formed with irregularities.

(M-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-9).
A first translucent member (first lens 8350 on the right side) having the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion is provided.
The distance between the light emitting means (LED 8331 for first side irradiation) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide unit and the first light transmitting member is guided by the second light guide unit. It is longer than the distance between the light emitting means (LED 8332 for second side irradiation) capable of emitting the obtained light and the first translucent member.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, a first light transmitting member (right side first lens) having a first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and a second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357). 8350), a light emitting means (first side irradiation LED8331) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355), and a first translucent member (first lens on the right side). The distance between the 8350) and the light emitting means (second side irradiation LED8332) capable of emitting light that can be guided by the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) and the first translucent member (right side first). It is longer than the distance to 1 lens 8350). The present inventor has configured the arrangement relationship between the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 and second side irradiation LED 8332) and the first translucent member (right side first lens 8350) in this way. It is effective to make the formed portion of the light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) a vague light emitting state, and to make the formed portion of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) a bright light emitting state. We found that it was possible to achieve it.

(M-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (M-1) to (M-10).
A first light-transmitting member (first lens 8350 on the right side) having the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion, and
A second translucent member (right side second lens 8370) is provided so that light emitted from the light emitting means and transmitted through the first transmissive member can be incident.
The second light-transmitting member includes a first light passing portion (right-side uneven portion 8373, left-side uneven portion 8376, and rear-side uneven portion 8379) through which light transmitted through the first light-transmitting portion can pass. (2) A second light passing portion (right side flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear side flat portion 8378) through which light transmitted through the light guide portion can pass is provided.
The first light passing portion has a larger degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means than the second light passing portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment, a first light transmitting member (right side first lens) having a first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) and a second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357). 8350) and the light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) and transmitted through the first translucent member (right side first lens 8350) are arranged so as to be incidentable. It also includes a second translucent member (second right lens 8370). The second light transmitting member (right second lens 8370) is a first light passing portion (right uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376) through which light transmitted through the first light guide portion (first protruding portion 8355) can pass. And the rear side uneven portion 8379) and the second light passing portion (right side flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear side) through which light transmitted through the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) can pass. It is provided with a flat portion 8378). The first light passing portion (right side uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, and rear side uneven portion 8379) is the second light passing portion (right right flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear flat portion). Compared with 8378), the degree of diffusion of light emitted from the light emitting means (first side irradiation LED 8331 or second side irradiation LED 8332) is larger. The present inventor has configured the second translucent member (right side second lens 8370) in addition to the first translucent member (right side first lens 8350) in this way to form a first light guide portion (first protrusion). It is possible to effectively realize that the formed portion of the second light guide portion (third protruding portion 8357) is in a bright light emitting state while the formed portion of the portion 8355) is in a vague light emitting state. I found that.

The degree of light diffusion in the first light passing portion (right side uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, and rear side uneven portion 8379) is determined by the degree of light diffusion in the second light passing portion (right right flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear). The means for increasing the degree of light diffusion in the side flat portion 8378) is not particularly limited. For example, while the second light passing portion (right side flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear side flat portion 8378) is formed substantially flat, the first light passing portion (right side uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion 8376, left uneven portion 8376, In addition, it is possible to form irregularities on the rear uneven portion 8379). Alternatively, the second light passing portion (right side flat portion 8372, left flat portion 8375, and rear side flat portion 8378) can be formed on the second surface (second front surface 8354b, fourth front surface 8354d, sixth front surface 8354f, and the sixth front surface 8354f). , 8th front surface 8354h), while being configured to have a predetermined number (for example, two) of surfaces having different normal directions, while the first light passing portion (right side uneven portion 8373, left uneven portion). The 8376 and the rear concave-convex portion 8379) have different normal directions from each other in the same manner as the first surface (first front surface 8354a, third front surface 8354c, fifth front surface 8354e, and seventh front surface 8354g). It may be configured to have a specific number (for example, 6) of faces that is larger than a predetermined number.

In the twelfth embodiment, it has been described that the surface on the left side (player side) of the left side portion 8352 is formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view. As a result, the light emitted from the first side irradiation LED 8331 to the second side irradiation LED 8332 is diffusely refracted, so that the position of the light source (LED grain) can be made difficult to see from the player, which is good. It is possible to secure a good design. On the other hand, if the right surface of the right side portion 8353 is formed in a zigzag shape in cross-sectional view, it is possible to make the position of the light source (LED grain) difficult to see from the customer who is not playing the game. Further, where the forward protrusion length of the first protrusion 8355 is longer than the forward protrusion length of the second protrusion 8356, the first protrusion 8355b, the first protrusion 8355c, and the first It has been described that the protrusions 8355d are arranged on the left side (player side) of the second protrusion 8356b, the second protrusion 8356c, and the second protrusion 8356d, respectively. As a result, the player side can be made to shine more strongly at the portion where the first protrusion 8355 and the second protrusion 8356 are formed.

[13th Embodiment]
The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to twelfth embodiments also applies to the thirteenth embodiment.

<Screen unit 9200>
FIG. 345 is a perspective view schematically showing the appearance of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 347 is an exploded front view of the screen unit. FIG. 348 (a) is a front view of the screen unit. 348 (b) and 348 (c) are plan views of the left screen portion, the right screen portion, and the center screen portion related to the screen unit. FIG. 349 is a side view showing a main configuration of the screen unit. FIG. 350A is a side view showing a main configuration of the screen unit. FIG. 350 (b) is a front view showing a main part configuration of the screen unit.

In the present embodiment, the display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G as in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, it has been described that the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the screen unit 9200 is provided instead of the cabinet side screen 9040.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the third embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). Then, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 345 to 347, the upper door mechanism UD according to the present embodiment includes an upper display window UD1 and a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light. The upper display window UD1 is composed of a frame having an opening 9150 formed in the center, and the opening 9150 is a rectangular main opening 9151 and a rectangular sub-opening continuously formed above the main opening 9151. It is composed of a part 9152. A transparent panel UD11 is attached to the opening 9150. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment are not provided.

The display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010 (see FIG. 55), a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a screen unit 9200. When the upper door mechanism UD is closed, the screen unit 9200 faces (closely) the transparent panel UD11 at a predetermined distance from the upper door mechanism UD, and the image displayed on the screen unit 9200 is a transparent panel. It becomes visible to the player via the UD11.

The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9200L, a right screen portion 9200R, a center screen portion 9200C, an upper screen portion 9200U, a lower screen portion 9200Lo, and a top screen portion 9200T. The left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the upper screen portion 9200U, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are each formed into an equiangular trapezoidal shape. The central screen portion 9200C and the top screen portion 9200T are each formed in a rectangular shape.

The left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the center screen portion 9200C, the upper screen portion 9200U, the lower screen portion 9200Lo, and the top screen portion 9200T (six screens) each have an even thickness over the entire surface. It is formed. Each of these six screens is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and is incident on the incident surface on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident and on the incident surface. It has a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light. Further, each of the six screens is formed of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film as main materials, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

In the left screen portion 9200L, the long side 9200La of the two parallel sides is positioned in the front, and the short side 9200Lb is positioned in the rear. The short side 9200Lb is positioned on the right side of the long side 9200La, so that the left screen portion 9200L is arranged so as to be inclined to the right from the front to the rear. In the right screen portion 9200R, the long side 9200Ra of the two parallel sides is positioned in the front, and the short side 9200Rb is positioned in the rear. The short side 9200Rb is positioned on the left side of the long side 9200Ra, so that the right screen portion 9200R is arranged so as to be inclined to the left from the front to the rear.

In the upper screen portion 9200U, the long side 9200Ua of the two parallel sides is positioned in the front, and the short side 9200Ub is positioned in the rear. The short side 9200Ub is positioned below the long side 9200Ua, so that the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged with an inclination so as to descend from the front to the rear. In the lower screen portion 9200Lo, the long side 9200Loa of the two parallel sides is positioned in the front, and the short side 9200Lob is positioned in the rear. The short side 9200Lo is positioned above the long side 9200Loa, whereby the lower screen portion 9200Lo is arranged with an inclination so as to rise from the front to the rear.

The position of the short side 9200Lb on the left screen portion 9200L substantially coincides with the position of the left side 9200Ca on the central screen portion 9200C. Further, the length of the short side 9200Lb and the length of the left side 9200Ca are substantially the same. The position of the short side 9200Rb on the right screen portion 9200R substantially coincides with the position of the right side 9200Cb on the central screen portion 9200C. Further, the length of the short side 9200Rb and the length of the right side 9200Cb are substantially the same.

The position of the short side 9200Ub on the upper screen portion 9200U may substantially coincide with the position of the upper side 9200Cc on the central screen portion 9200C, but in the following, the short side 9200Ub is positioned below the upper side 9200Cc (that is,). , The upper portion of the central screen portion 9200C is covered from the front by the upper screen portion 9200U). Further, the position of the short side 9200Lob on the lower screen portion 9200Lo may substantially coincide with the position of the lower side 9200Cd on the central screen portion 9200C, but in the following, the short side 9200Lob is positioned above the lower side 9200Cd. (That is, the lower portion of the central screen portion 9200C is covered from the front by the lower screen portion 9200Lo).

Further, in the following, it will be described that the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are formed in a rectangular shape. For convenience, of the two vertical sides of the left screen portion 9200L, the side arranged in the front (the side corresponding to the long side 9200La) is referred to as the front side 9200La, and the side arranged in the rear (corresponding to the short side 9200Lb). Side) is expressed as the rear side 9200Lb. Further, of the two vertical sides of the right screen portion 9200R, the side arranged in the front (the side corresponding to the long side 9200Ra) is referred to as the front side 9200Ra, and the side arranged in the rear (corresponding to the short side 9200Rb). Side) is referred to as the rear side 9200Rb.

As shown in FIGS. 348 (a) and 348 (b), the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are connected to the central screen portion 9200C, respectively. Specifically, the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L is arranged so as to overlap the left side 9200Ca of the central screen portion 9200C, and the rear side 9200Lb and the left side 9200Ca are fixed by screwing. Further, the rear side 9200Rb of the right side screen portion 9200R is arranged so as to overlap the right side 9200Cb of the central screen portion 9200C, and the rear side 9200Rb and the right side 9200Cb are fixed by screw fastening.

The left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are movable screens, which are driven by the left screen driving mechanism and the right screen driving mechanism, respectively. Although not shown, the left screen drive mechanism and the right screen drive mechanism include a drive motor, a motor shaft gear to which the drive shaft of the drive motor is connected, and a drive force transmission member (drive force transmission meshed with the motor shaft gear), respectively. Gears, crank members, etc.) As a result, the rotational driving force of the drive motor can be transmitted to the left screen portion 9200L to the right screen portion 9200R via the driving force transmission member. Since such a drive mechanism is conventionally known, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The drive motor can be controlled by the sub control device SS (see FIG. 11).

The front side 9200La of the left screen portion 9200L is arranged so as to face the left edge portion of the main opening 9151, and the upper end and the lower end of the front side 9200La are rotatably supported by the unit housing 9010. As a result, the left screen portion 9200L can rotate around the front side 9200La and the rear side 9200Lb. Specifically, the rear side 9200Lb can move between the position of the point A and the position of the point B shown in FIG. 348 (b) in a plan view.

Similarly, the front side 9200Ra of the right screen portion 9200R is arranged so as to face the right edge of the main opening 9151, and the upper and lower ends of the front side 9200Ra are rotatably supported by the unit housing 9010. ing. As a result, the right screen portion 9200R can rotate the rear side 9200Rb with the front side 9200Ra as the center of rotation. Specifically, the rear side 9200Rb can move between the position of the point C and the position of the point D shown in FIG. 348 (b) in a plan view.

Here, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are not flexible, respectively, while the central screen portion 9200C is formed of a flexible material. Further, as described above, the left side 9200Ca of the central screen portion 9200C is connected to the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L, and the right side 9200Cb of the central screen portion 9200C is connected to the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R. ing. Further, the front side 9200La of the left screen portion 9200L and the front side 9200Ra of the right screen portion 9200R are fixed to the unit housing 9010, respectively.

When the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L is at the position of the point A shown in FIG. 348 (b) and the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R is at the position of the point C shown in FIG. The 9200C has a substantially flat shape as a whole. On the other hand, the left screen portion 9200L is rotated so that the rear side 9200Lb moves from the position of the point A shown in FIG. 348 (b) to the position of the point B, and the rear side 9200Rb is shown in FIG. 348 (b). When the right screen portion 9200R is rotated so as to move from the position of the point C to the position of the point D, the central screen portion 9200C has a curved shape as shown in FIG. 348 (c).

Although the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R have been described above as movable screens, the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are also configured as movable screens. The upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are driven by the same drive mechanisms as the left screen drive mechanism and the right screen drive mechanism, respectively.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 349, the long side 9200Ua of the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged so as to face the upper edge portion of the main opening 9151, and the left end and the right end of the long side 9200Ua are the unit housing 9010. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. As a result, the upper screen portion 9200U can rotate around the long side 9200Ua and the short side 9200Ub. Further, the long side 9200Loa of the lower screen portion 9200Lo is arranged so as to face the lower edge portion of the main opening 9151, and the left end and the right end of the long side 9200Loa are rotatably supported by the unit housing 9010. Has been done. As a result, the lower screen portion 9200Lo can rotate around the long side 9200Loa and the short side 9200Lob.

As described above, the upper screen portion 9200U is basically arranged with an inclination so as to descend from the front to the rear, but by rotating the short side 9200Ub upward, it is substantially horizontal. It can be changed to the state arranged in. Further, the lower screen portion 9200Lo is basically arranged with an inclination so as to rise from the front to the rear, but by rotating the short side 9200Lo downward, the lower screen portion 9200Lo is arranged substantially horizontally. It can be changed to the state where it was done.

In this state, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are rotated so as to be displaced from the state shown in FIG. 348 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 348 (c), respectively. The right screen portion 9200R, the center screen portion 9200C, the upper screen portion 9200U, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are arranged as shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b). In this state, the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are arranged substantially straight in the left-right direction. Further, the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are arranged at the upper and lower parts of the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the center screen portion 9200C, respectively, and the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the center screen are arranged. The portion 9200C is not covered by the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo.

The top screen portion 9200T is installed on the upper portion on the back side of the upper door mechanism UD. The top screen portion 9200T is arranged so as to face the portion of the transparent panel UD11 that covers the sub-opening 9152. The top screen portion 9200T may be provided in the unit housing 9010. Further, the top screen portion 9200T may be formed so as to be continuous from the upper screen portion 9200U, or may be formed so as to extend upward from the central portion of the long side of the central screen C, for example.

As described above, in the present embodiment, six screens (left screen portion 9200L, right screen portion 9200R, center screen portion 9200C, upper screen portion 9200U, lower screen portion 9200Lo, and top screen portion 9200T) are arranged. The light projected from the projector 9020 is applied to a range including the six screens.

<Production display example>
351 (a) and 351 (b) are diagrams showing an example of an image displayed on the screen unit.

While the player is playing a game on the game machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, the center screen portion 9200C, the upper screen portion 9200U, the lower screen portion 9200Lo, and the top screen portion 9200T ( Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the front surface).

348 (a) and 348 (b), as well as FIG. 349, show the basic positions of the screen unit 9200. At this time, the display surface of the central screen portion 9200C is maintained in a substantially flat state (flat state) by applying tension from both sides (see FIG. 348 (b)). As a result, when the game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the central portion of the central screen portion 9200C is arranged at the central portion of the main opening 9151. In the normal state during the game, the image is displayed centering on the central portion (planar display surface) of such a central screen portion 9200C.

Here, as the player advances the game, for example, the characters "BONUS confirmed" are displayed in a distorted manner in the central portion of the central screen portion 9200C as shown in FIG. 351 (a). Sometimes. When such a display is performed, the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9200U rotates upward, and at the same time, the short side 9200Lo of the lower screen portion 9200Lo rotates downward. As a result, the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo are arranged substantially horizontally on the upper and lower portions of the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the central screen portion 9200C, respectively.

After that, the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L rotates forward (clockwise), and at the same time, the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R rotates forward (counterclockwise). Then, when the surface of the left screen portion 9200L and the surface of the right screen portion 9200R are positioned on substantially the same plane (see FIG. 348 (c)), the left screen portion 9200L is rotated and the right screen portion 9200R is rotated. The movement stops.

While the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R are rotating, the central screen portion 9200C moves forward while gradually bending so as to bulge rearward (the central portion bends). Then, when the rotation of the left screen portion 9200L and the rotation of the right screen portion 9200R are stopped, the central screen portion 9200C is in a state of being curved to a certain extent toward the rear (see FIG. 348 (c)).

As described above, before the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R rotate, the characters "BONUS confirmed" are displayed in a distorted manner. When the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R rotate, the distortion of the character is corrected as the central screen portion 9200C bends. Then, when the rotation of the left screen portion 9200L and the rotation of the right screen portion 9200R are stopped, as shown in FIG. 351 (b), the distortion of the character is eliminated, and the display content of "BONUS confirmed" can be understood. It becomes easy to see.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a more interesting effect display by changing the degree of curvature (curvature) of the central screen portion 9200C over time. As described in the eighth embodiment, the curvature is a quantity representing the degree of bending of a curve or a curved surface, but the degree of local bending can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is the curvature. It is called a radius. For example, the radius of curvature of the circumference of radius r is 1 / r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc, while if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature is represented by a predetermined function that represents the degree of bending of the curve. Can be done.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 351 (a), the upper screen portion 9200U is arranged with an inclination so as to descend from the front to the rear, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo rises from the front to the rear. It is arranged with such an inclination. At this time, if a predetermined image is displayed on the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo, it is possible to realize an image expression with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) due to the inclination. In the above, it has been described that the upper portion and the lower portion of the central screen portion 9200C are covered from the front by the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo, respectively. However, the central screen portion 9200C may be configured to be smaller so that the light projected from the projector 9020 is directly incident on the upper screen portion 9200U and the lower screen portion 9200Lo (not incident on the central screen portion 9200C).

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix N>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor has come up with the idea that a new type of entertainment can be created by devising a screen in the process of diligently studying a game machine using a projector as described above. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment has the following features.

(N-1) With the projector (projector 9020),
A predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is provided.
The predetermined screen can change the curvature of a predetermined region that is at least a part of the projected surface.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is configured so that the curvature of a predetermined region which is at least a part of the projected surface can be changed. .. As a result, it is possible to change the appearance of the image displayed on the projected surface through the change in the curvature, and it is possible to create a novel effect.

(N-2) The gaming machine of the above (N-1).
The predetermined screen is movable in position at one end and
When the one end is in the first position, the curvature of the predetermined region is the first curvature, while when the one end is in the second position, the curvature of the predetermined region is the first. 2 curvatures
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) can move the position of one end portion, and when the end portion is in the first position, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is predetermined. The curvature of the region is the first curvature, while the curvature of the predetermined region is the second curvature when the end is in the second position. Thereby, by moving the position of the end portion, the degree of bending of the predetermined region (the degree of distortion of the image) can be arbitrarily changed according to the situation of the game.

(N-3) The gaming machine according to (N-1) or (N-2).
The first specific screen (left screen part 9200L) and
A second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R) is provided.
The first specific screen and the second specific screen are movable screens, respectively.
One end of the predetermined screen is connected to the first specific screen, while the other end of the predetermined screen is connected to the second specific screen.
The predetermined screen can move the position of the one end from the first position to the second position in response to the drive of the first specific screen, while the position of the second specific screen of the second specific screen. Depending on the drive, the position of the other end can be moved from the third position to the fourth position.
The curvature of the predetermined region is a curvature corresponding to the position of the one end portion and the position of the other end portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the thirteenth embodiment, one end of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is connected to the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L), while the predetermined screen. The other end of (center screen portion 9200C) is connected to a second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). Further, the position of the one end portion of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) moves from the first position to the second position in response to the drive of the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L). On the other hand, the position of the other end can be moved from the third position to the fourth position in response to the driving of the second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). The curvature of the predetermined region is configured to be a curvature corresponding to the position of the one end portion and the position of the other end portion. As a result, by driving the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L) to the second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R), the degree of bending (the degree of image distortion) in the predetermined area can be arbitrarily adjusted according to the situation of the game. Can be changed.

In the thirteenth embodiment, one end of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is connected to the first specific screen (left screen portion 9200L), while the other on the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C). It has been described that the end portion of the screen is connected to the second specific screen (right screen portion 9200R). In the present invention, the member to which the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is connected is not limited to the screen, and the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) is appropriately fixed to any member other than the screen. It is possible to do. On top of that, while making it possible to drive a member other than the screen, it is possible to change the curvature of a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) by driving the member. At this time, both the member connected to one end of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C) and the member connected to the other end of the predetermined screen (central screen portion 9200C). The curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving one of the members, or the curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving one of the members. Good. Further, a portion other than the end portion of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) may be connected to the member. In this case, the curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is changed by moving the position of the portion other than the end portion by driving the member.

The means for connecting the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) to the other member is not particularly limited, and any fixing means can be appropriately adopted. For example, when a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) and a specific screen (left screen portion 9200L to right screen portion 9200R) are fixed by screw fastening, an image may always be displayed on the screen of the connecting portion. .. As a result, it is possible to make the screws difficult to see in the image, and it is possible to ensure good design. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of ensuring design, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) and the specific screen (left screen portion 9200L to right screen portion 9200R) may be connected by locking or adhesion.

The driving of the member connected to such a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) can be performed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player starts, the curvature of a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) may be changed by driving the member. Then, the curvature may be maintained while the specific gaming state continues. In addition, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state), a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) is driven through the driving of the member. ) May be changed. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific gaming state has been granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state) may be performed. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko gaming machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted.

The curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) before driving the member connected to the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) and the curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) after the driving. Is not particularly limited. Any one of the curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) before driving and the curvature of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9200C) after driving may be 0 (substantially flat). , Both may be curved and their curvatures may be different from each other.

[14th Embodiment]
The first to thirteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 14th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the 14th embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the 1st to 13th embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to thirteenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to thirteenth embodiments also applies to the fourteenth embodiment.

<Screen unit 9200>
FIG. 352 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 352 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 352 (a). FIG. 353 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 352 (a). FIG. 354 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as viewed from the rear. FIG. 354 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rotating screen portion as viewed from the front. FIG. 355 is a schematic view for explaining the arrangement state of the rotating screen portion.

In the present embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes the screen unit 9200. The light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). Then, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. ..

As in the thirteenth embodiment, each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Each of these screens is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and the incident surface on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface. It has a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light. Further, each of these screens is formed mainly of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected. The upper door mechanism UD has basically the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, the screen unit 9200 according to the present embodiment has a different configuration from the screen unit 9200 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9201L, a right screen portion 9201R, a rotating screen portion 9201RT, and a top screen portion 9201T. The left screen portion 9201L, the right screen portion 9201R, and the top screen portion 9201T are each formed in a rectangular shape.

The left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R face the left side region and the right side region in the main opening 9151, respectively, similarly to the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion 9200R (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment. As such, it is installed in the unit housing 9010. Instead of the left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R, the door side left screen 9060 and the door side right screen 9050 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment may be provided. The top screen portion 9201T is arranged so as to face the portion of the transparent panel UD11 covering the sub-opening 9152, similarly to the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment.

The rotating screen unit 9201RT is installed in the unit housing 9010 so as to be arranged between the left screen unit 9201L and the right screen unit 9201R in front view. The rotating screen portion 9201RT is formed to have the outer shape of a pillar whose bottom surface has a missing circle shape (a shape obtained by removing the bow shape from the circle). The rotating screen unit 9201RT is a movable screen, and is driven by a drive mechanism as described in the thirteenth embodiment. As a result, the rotating screen unit 9201RT rotates and stops (clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view) in a manner similar to a reel. Hereinafter, the rotating screen unit 9201RT will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 354 (a) and 354 (b), the rotating screen unit 9201RT includes a screen unit 9301, a support unit 9302, and a support unit 9303. The screen portion 9301 includes a flat screen portion 9310, a curved screen portion 9320, and an open portion 9330. The rotating screen portion 9201RT has the outer shape of the pillar body, and the inside thereof is hollow. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 354 (a) and 354 (b), the flat screen portion 9310 is shaded and the curved screen portion 9320 is shaded.

The flat screen portion 9310 is formed to be substantially flat, and has a straight line portion in a missing circle shape (a chord defining an arch shape: a line segment ab connecting a point a and a point b shown in FIG. It has a rectangular shape including a line segment de) connecting with and. The curved screen portion 9320 is continuous from the lower end of the flat screen portion 9310 and has an arc portion in a missing circle shape (an arc ac connecting the points a and c shown in FIG. 354 and an arc connecting the points d and f). It is formed in a curved shape including df). As a result, the curved screen portion 9320 forms a part of the side surface of the pillar body, and has a curved surface similar to the side surface of the cylinder. The flat screen portion 9310 and the curved screen portion 9320 constitute the transmissive screen described above.

The point b (upper right corner of the flat screen portion 9310) and the point c (right rear corner of the curved screen portion 9320) are bridged in an arc shape, and the point e (upper left corner of the flat screen portion 9310) and the point f (the upper left corner of the flat screen portion 9310) are bridged. The curved screen portion 9320 (left rear corner portion) is bridged in an arc shape, but the side surfaces corresponding to these arc portions are open. As a result, as an opening surrounded by the arc bc, the arc ef, the line segment be (the upper end edge of the flat screen portion 9310), and the line segment cf (the edge of the curved screen portion 9320 opposite to the flat screen portion 9310). An open portion 9330 is formed.

The length of the line segment ab and the length of the line segment bc are set to be substantially equal to each other, and the length of the line segment de and the length of the line segment df are set to be substantially equal to each other. Further, the length of the line segment ab and the length of the line segment de (the length in the vertical direction in the flat screen portion 9310) are the vertical length in the left screen portion 9201L and the vertical direction in the right screen portion 9201R. It is set to be approximately equal to the length.

The support portion 9302 is a member attached to one side of the screen portion 9301 in the axial direction (left-right direction), and includes a rotating shaft 9302a. The support portion 9303 is a member attached to the other side of the screen portion 9301 in the axial direction (left-right direction), and includes a rotating shaft 9303a. When the support portion 9302 and the support portion 9303 are attached to the screen portion 9301, the rotation shaft 9302a and the rotation shaft 9303a are arranged on the central axis of a cylinder (cylinder) including the arc ab and the arc de. As a result, the rotating shaft 9302a and the rotating shaft 9303a are arranged so as to extend outward from both ends in the axial direction of the screen portion 9301. Then, the rotary shaft 9302a and the rotary shaft 9303a are rotatably supported at a predetermined portion of the unit housing 9010.

FIG. 355 (a) shows the arrangement state when the rotating screen unit 9201RT is in the basic position. In this state, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged so as to face the main opening 9151. At this time, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged between the left screen portion 9201L and the right screen portion 9201R, and displays the display surface of the flat screen portion 9310, the display surface of the left screen portion 9201L, and the right screen portion 9201R. The faces are positioned on substantially the same plane.

FIG. 355 (b) shows the arrangement state when the rotating screen unit 9201RT is rotated by 90 ° from the basic position (clockwise in the right side view). In this state, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged so as to face the main opening 9151. At this time, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged in a convex state in the front, and is positioned in front of the main opening 9151. On the other hand, in the upper door mechanism UD, the transparent panel UD11 is mounted so as to project forward from the upper display window UD1. As a result, a gap is formed between the main opening 9151 and the transparent panel UD11, and the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged so as to be accommodated in the gap portion.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by rotating the rotating screen unit 9201RT, the screen that can be seen by the player via the transparent panel UD11 is switched between the flat screen unit 9310 and the curved screen unit 9320. Can be done.

<Production display example>
FIG. 356 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the flat screen portion. FIG. 356 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the curved screen portion. FIG. 357 (a) is a schematic view for explaining the arrangement state of the rotating screen portion. FIG. 357 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 357 (a).

While the player is playing a game on the game machine 1, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the rotating screen unit 9201RT (flat screen unit 9310 and curved screen unit 9320). Is displayed.

For example, an image in which a number pattern is moved from top to bottom as in a slot game is projected from the projector 9020. FIG. 356 (a) shows a state in which such a numerical symbol is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 355 (a). At this time, the image displayed on the flat screen unit 9310 allows the player to visually recognize the numerical symbols as if they were moving from top to bottom. On the other hand, FIG. 356 (b) shows a state in which such a numerical symbol is displayed in the state shown in FIG. 355 (b). At this time, the image displayed on the curved screen unit 9320 allows the player to visually recognize the number symbols as if they were rotating, in addition to moving the number symbols from top to bottom.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by switching the screen capable of displaying the image projected from the projector 9020 between the flat screen unit 9310 and the curved screen unit 9320, different impressions can be obtained even if the same image is used. Can be given to a person.

FIG. 357 (a) shows the arrangement state when the rotating screen unit 9201RT is rotated by 270 ° from the basic position (clockwise in the right side view). In this state, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged so as to face the main opening 9151. At this time, the curved screen portion 9320 is arranged in a rearward convex state, contrary to the state shown in FIG. 355 (b), and is positioned considerably behind the main opening 9151.

Further, the flat screen portion 9310 is arranged substantially horizontally at a height near the lower end portion of the main opening 9151. A predetermined gap is formed between the front end of the flat screen portion 9310 and the upper display window UD1. Here, a patrol lamp 9350 (light emitting effect member) is housed below the gap as an effect member that can move up and down. When the rotating screen unit 9201RT is in the arrangement state shown in FIG. 357 (a), the patrol lamp 9350 moves upward and is arranged in front of the curved screen unit 9320.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 357 (b), the effect using the image displayed on the curved screen portion 9320, the left screen portion 9201L, the right screen portion 9201R, and the top screen portion 9201T is used. , A more attractive effect can be realized by cooperating with the light emission effect using the patrol lamp 9350.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the 14th embodiment has been described.

<Appendix O>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor has come up with the idea that a new type of entertainment can be created by devising a screen in the process of diligently studying a game machine using a projector as described above. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the 14th embodiment has the following features.

(O-1) A predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen is provided.
The predetermined screen is a movable screen, and as a projected surface, a first projected surface (flat screen portion 9310) and a second projected surface (curved surface screen) having a curvature different from that of the first projected surface. Part 9320) and
When the predetermined screen is in the first arrangement state, the image is displayed on the first projected surface, while when the predetermined screen is in the second arrangement state, the second projected surface is displayed. The image is displayed on
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 14th embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is a movable screen, and the projected surface includes the first projected surface (flat screen unit 9310) and the first projected surface. It has a second projected surface (curved screen portion 9320) having a curvature different from that of one projected surface (flat screen portion 9310). Then, when the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is in the first arrangement state, the image is displayed on the first projected surface (flat screen unit 9310), while the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT). Is configured to display an image on the second projected surface (curved screen portion 9320) when is in the second arrangement state. This makes it possible to change the appearance of the image displayed on the projected surface through a change in the arrangement state of a predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) (change in the curvature of the projected surface), which is novel. It is possible to create a directing effect.

(O-2) The gaming machine of the above (O-1).
The predetermined screen is a portion that serves as a passage path for light projected by the projector when in the first arrangement state, and light projected by the projector when in the second arrangement state. An opening (open portion 9330) is provided at a portion serving as a passage path.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is a portion that becomes a passage path of light projected by the projector (projector 9020) when it is in the first arrangement state. In addition, an opening (open portion 9330) is provided at a portion that serves as a passage path for light projected by the projector (projector 9020) in the second arrangement state. Thereby, the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) can be appropriately secured.

(O-3) The gaming machine according to (O-1) or (O-2).
The predetermined screen can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in side view.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fourteenth embodiment, the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view. As a result, the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) can be easily changed (switching between the first projected surface and the second projected surface) through the rotation of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT). be able to.

In the 14th embodiment, one of the curvature of the first projected surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the curvature of the second projected surface (curved screen portion 9320) (flat screen portion 9310) is 0 (substantially flat). Explained as being. In the present invention, any one of the curvature of the first projected surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the curvature of the second projected surface (curved screen portion 9320) can be set to 0 (substantially flat). Is. Further, both the first projected surface (flat screen portion 9310) and the second projected surface (curved screen portion 9320) may be curved and their curvatures may be different from each other.

The predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) can be driven when the predetermined conditions are satisfied. For example, when a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player starts, the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is first arranged by driving the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT). The state (the state shown in FIG. 355 (a)) may be switched to the second arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355 (b)). Then, the arranged state may be maintained while the specific gaming state continues. In addition, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state), a predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is driven to determine the predetermined size. The arrangement state of the screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) may be switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (a)) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (b)). .. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific gaming state has been granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state) may be performed. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko gaming machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted.

Further, for example, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state is won), the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is given. Is switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (a)) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (b)), and further, when the specific gaming state starts, a predetermined state is determined. The arrangement state of the screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) may be switched from the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 355 (b)) to the third arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 357 (a)). .. Further, when the specific game state starts, the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is changed from the first arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 355 (a)) to the second arrangement state (FIG. 355 (b). ) Is switched to the state shown in), and when the game state is changed to a more advantageous game state than the specific game state during the specific game state, the arrangement state of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) is changed to the second arrangement. The state (the state shown in FIG. 355 (b)) may be switched to the third arrangement state (the state shown in FIG. 357 (a)).

In the third arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 357 (a)), it is possible to make the effect using the screen and the effect using the movable accessory (pat lamp 9350) cooperate with each other. In the fourteenth embodiment, it has been described that a gap between the flat screen portion 9310 and the upper display window UD1 is used as a space for moving the movable accessory (patrol lamp 9350). As the space, an opening (opening portion 9330) formed in a predetermined screen (rotating screen portion 9201RT) may be used. For example, while keeping the movable accessory (patrol lamp 9350) above the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT), the movable accessory (patrol lamp 9350) is moved downward (curved surface) in the state shown in FIG. 357 (a). It may be moved to the front of the screen unit 9320). Further, while keeping the movable accessory (pat lamp 9350) below the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT), the movable accessory (pat lamp 9350) is moved upward (curved surface) in the state shown in FIG. 355 (b). It may be moved to the rear of the screen unit 9320). The movable accessory is not particularly limited, and for example, a movable member including a light emitting means (LED) can be configured to rotate along a predetermined circumference in front of or behind the rotating screen unit 9201RT. Is.

As the movement mode of the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT), a plurality of modes may be provided, and the predetermined screen (rotating screen unit 9201RT) may be moved in a mode according to the situation of the game. Examples of such a movement mode include a mode in which the vehicle is rotated at a high speed, a mode in which the vehicle moves only for a moment with rattling, a mode in which the vehicle is rotated slowly, and the like.

[15th Embodiment]
The first to fourteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the fifteenth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fourteenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first embodiment to the fourteenth embodiment also applies to the fifteenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper door mechanism UD and display unit 9000>
FIG. 358 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 359 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 359 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 359 (a). FIG. 360A is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as viewed from the front. FIG. 360 (b) is a perspective view of the rear screen portion as viewed from the rear. FIG. 361 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 361 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 361 (a).

In the present embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes the screen unit 9200. The light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). Then, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. ..

As in the thirteenth embodiment, each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Each of these screens is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and the incident surface on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface. It has a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light. Further, each of these screens is formed mainly of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

As shown in FIG. 358, the upper door mechanism UD according to the present embodiment has a different configuration from the upper door mechanism UD according to the thirteenth embodiment. An illumination unit 9210 and a liquid crystal panel 9220 are arranged in the upper door mechanism UD. The illumination unit 9210 is arranged on the front side of the upper display window UD1 along the edge of the opening 9150. The liquid crystal panel 9220 is arranged on the back side of the transparent panel UD11.

Although not shown, the illumination unit 9210 includes a lens that is translucent and is formed in a U shape (to follow the shape of the opening 9150), an LED substrate arranged on the back side of the lens, and an LED substrate. It includes a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED substrate. The LED is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction, and the light is emitted from the lens to the outside of the game machine 1. As a result, the illumination unit 9210 lights up along the edge of the transparent panel UD11. Alternatively, the illumination unit 9210 may have the same configuration as the indirect lighting unit 1060 (see FIG. 66).

The liquid crystal panel 9220 has substantially the same shape as the transparent panel UD11 when viewed from the front. The liquid crystal panel 9220 has a configuration that can be controlled by a sub control device SS (see FIG. 11) to display an image (still image or moving image) related to the game. Further, the liquid crystal panel 9220 has transparency so that the rear region can be visually recognized from the front, and constitutes a transmissive liquid crystal display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device controls the light transmittance so that the player can see the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 and the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 cannot be seen or is difficult for the player to see. It is possible to switch between the state and the state.

As shown in FIG. 359, the screen unit 9200 according to the present embodiment has a different configuration from the screen unit 9200 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The screen unit 9200 includes a left screen portion 9202L, a right screen portion 9202R, an upper screen portion 9202U, a lower screen portion 9202Lo, a top screen portion 9202T, and a rear screen portion 9202B.

The left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo are each formed into an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and the left screen portion 9200L and the right screen portion described in the thirteenth embodiment are described. It has the same configuration as the portion 9200R, the upper screen portion 9200U, and the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347). The top screen portion 9202T is formed in a rectangular shape and has the same configuration as the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment.

Specifically, the front side 9200La (see FIG. 347) of the left screen portion 9202L is arranged so as to face the left edge portion of the main opening 9151, and the front side 9200Ra (see FIG. 347) of the right screen portion 9200R is arranged. The long side 9200Ua (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9202U is arranged so as to face the right edge of the main opening 9151 and faces the upper edge of the main opening 9151, and the lower screen The long side 9200Loa (see FIG. 347) of the portion 9202Lo is arranged so as to face the lower edge portion of the main opening 9151. Further, the top screen portion 9202T is arranged so as to face the portion of the transparent panel UD11 covering the sub-opening 9152.

In this state, the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo are installed in the unit housing 9010. The two hypotenuses in the left screen portion 9202L are arranged so as to overlap the left hypotenuse in the upper screen portion 9202U and the left hypotenuse in the lower screen portion 9202Lo, respectively. Further, the two hypotenuses in the right screen portion 9200R are arranged so as to overlap the right hypotenuse in the upper screen portion 9202U and the right hypotenuse in the lower screen portion 9202Lo, respectively.

As a result, the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion 9202Lo form a quadrangular pyramid shape with the front and rear open. The front opening 9401 has substantially the same shape as the main opening 9151, and the rear opening 9402 is smaller than this. The rear screen portion 9202B has a shape substantially matching the opening 9402 in the front view, and is arranged so as to close the opening 9402.

As shown in FIG. 360, the rear screen portion 9202B includes a curved screen portion 9420, a support portion 9421, and a support portion 9422. The curved screen portion 9420 constitutes the above-mentioned transmissive screen, and has a shape in which the vertical sides (left side and right side) of the rectangular screen are curved. The upper side of the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged close to the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9202U (see FIG. 347), and the lower side of the curved screen portion 9420 is the short side 9200Lob of the lower screen portion 9202Lo (see FIG. 347). It is placed in close proximity to.

The support portion 9421 is attached to the left end edge of the curved screen portion 9420 (the curve connecting the point g and the point h shown in FIG. 360), and is a flat plate member having a graphic shape surrounded by the curve gh and the line segment gh. Is. The support portion 9421 includes a rotation shaft 9421a projecting to the left from the midpoint of the line segment gh. The support portion 9422 is attached to the right end edge of the curved screen portion 9420 (the curve connecting the point i and the point j shown in FIG. 360), and is a flat plate member having a graphic shape surrounded by the curve ij and the line segment ij. Is. The support portion 9422 includes a rotation shaft 9422a protruding to the right from the midpoint of the line segment ij. The support portion 9421 and the support portion 9422 are made of transparent members.

The rotation shaft 9421a and the rotation shaft 9422a are arranged so as to extend to the outside of the curved screen portion 9420. A hole is formed in the center of the rear end portion of the left screen portion 9202L and the right screen portion 9202R, respectively, and the rotary shaft 9421a and the rotary shaft 9422a are loosely fitted in the holes to form a predetermined portion of the unit housing 9010. It is rotatably supported. The curved screen portion 9420 is a movable screen, and is driven by a drive mechanism as described in the thirteenth embodiment. As a result, the curved screen portion 9420 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view with the axis of the rotating shaft 9421a and the axis of the rotating shaft 9422a as the rotating axes.

The length (X in the figure) of the curved screen portion 9420 in the rotation axis direction (horizontal direction) is set slightly shorter than the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9202U and the short side 9200Lob of the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347). Has been done. The length (Y in the figure) between both ends of the curved screen portion 9420 in the bending direction (vertical direction) is set to be slightly shorter than the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9200L and the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9200R. That is, the rectangle formed by connecting the four corners of the curved screen portion 9420 is set to be slightly smaller than the opening 9402. As a result, a space for the curved screen portion 9420 to rotate is secured in the vicinity of the opening 9402.

FIG. 359 shows the arrangement state when the curved screen portion 9420 is in the basic position. In this state, the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged in a rearwardly convex state. On the other hand, FIG. 361 shows the arrangement state when the curved screen portion 9420 is rotated 180 ° from the basic position (clockwise in the right side view). In this state, the curved screen portion 9420 is arranged in a state of being convex forward. By rotating the curved screen portion 9420 in this way, the display surface of the screen that can be seen by the player via the transparent panel UD11 can be switched between the concave surface and the convex surface.

<Production display example>
FIG. 362 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 359. FIG. 362 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an effect performed in the state shown in FIG. 361.

While the player is playing a game on the game machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, the lower screen portion 9202Lo, the top screen portion 9202T, and the rear screen portion 9202B ( Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the front surface).

For example, when the player has acquired the regular bonus (RB) (the symbol combination corresponding to the RB is stopped and displayed), the display surface of the curved screen portion 9420 becomes concave as shown in FIG. 362 (a). The characters "REG BONUS" are displayed on the concave surface. As a result, the character can be visually recognized by the player in a manner in which the central portion is recessed. At this time, the illumination unit 9210 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, blue).

Further, when the player has acquired the big bonus (BB) (the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed), the display surface of the curved screen portion 9420 becomes a convex surface as shown in FIG. 362 (b). The characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed on the convex surface. As a result, the character can be visually recognized by the player in a manner in which the central portion is bulged. Further, at this time, the illumination unit 9210 emits light in a color (for example, red) different from that shown in FIG. 362 (a).

Further, the characters "REG BONUS" are displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 when shown in FIG. 362 (a), and the characters "BIG BONUS" are displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 when shown in FIG. 362 (b). It is also possible. As a result, it is possible to superimpose the characters displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9220 and the characters displayed on the curved screen unit 9420, and the characters "REG BONUS" to "BIG BONUS" are three-dimensionalized for the player. It can also be visually recognized.

While the player is playing the game on the game machine 1, the image is basically displayed only on the liquid crystal panel 9220, and the left screen portion 9202L, the right screen portion 9202R, the upper screen portion 9202U, and the lower screen portion No image is displayed on the 9202Lo, the top screen portion 9202T, and the rear screen portion 9202B. At that time, the liquid crystal display device is controlled so that the player cannot see or the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 is invisible or difficult to see. Then, when a specific situation occurs, the back side of the liquid crystal panel 9220 is switched to a state in which the player can see it, and an image is displayed on each screen. As a result, a more attractive effect can be realized by linking the image display on the liquid crystal panel 9220 and the image display on the screen.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix P>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor has come up with the idea that a new type of entertainment can be created by devising a screen in the process of diligently studying a game machine using a projector as described above. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment has the following features.

(P-1) With a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220)
Screen (curved screen part 9420) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen is provided.
The liquid crystal display device is arranged on the front side of the screen at a position that does not block the passage of light projected by the projector.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and a screen (curved screen portion 9420) are provided, and the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) is a projector (projector 9020). ), Which is a position that does not block the passage of light projected by) and is arranged on the front side of the screen (curved screen portion 9420). As a result, the effect using the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the effect using the screen (curved screen portion 9420) can be made to cooperate with each other, and a novel effect can be created.

(P-2) The gaming machine of the above (P-1).
The screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident from the back side, and the light incident from the back side is used. It is possible to display an image on the front side. This makes it easier to arrange the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) so as not to block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector 9020), and the projector (projector 9020). It is possible to appropriately secure the passage path of the light projected by the projector.

(P-3) The gaming machine according to (P-1) or (P-2).
The screen has at least a curved surface to be projected.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the fifteenth embodiment, since the image is displayed on the curved projected surface, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the screen (curved screen portion 9420). In combination with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220), a more realistic image expression can be realized.

In the fifteenth embodiment, it has been described that the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) has transparency so that the rear region can be visually recognized from the front. In the present invention, instead of the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220), it is also possible to appropriately adopt a device having transparency so that the rear region can be visually recognized from the front. Examples of such a device include a display device such as an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel, in addition to the liquid crystal display device. Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, it has been described that a rear projector that projects from the back side is used. It is desirable to adopt such a rear projector as the projector in the present invention. When the rear projector is adopted, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) can be easily arranged close to each other while not blocking the passage of the light projected by the projector. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the cooperation between the effect using the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the effect using the screen (curved screen portion 9420). However, the projector in the present invention is not limited to the rear projector, and may be a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side. When a transmissive liquid crystal projector is adopted, the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the screen (curved screen portion 9420) may be arranged at a certain distance in order to secure a passage path for the light projected by the projector. ..

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, a state in which the player cannot see or is difficult to see behind the liquid crystal panel 9220 (first state) and a state in which the player can see behind the liquid crystal panel 9220 (second state). ) And can be switched. In the present invention, the timing for switching between the first state and the second state is not particularly limited, and the switching can be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it may be possible to switch from the first state to the second state when a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player starts, while setting the first state in the normal time. Then, the second state may be maintained while the specific gaming state continues. In addition, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (winning a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state), switching from the first state to the second state is performed. May be good. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific gaming state has been granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state) may be performed. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko gaming machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, it has been described that a plurality of arrangement states (the state shown in FIG. 359 and the state shown in FIG. 361) are provided as the arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420). In the present invention, a plurality of conditions are provided as the above-mentioned predetermined conditions, and each condition corresponds to one arrangement state, and when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, The arrangement state of the screen (curved surface screen portion 9420) may be set to the arrangement state according to the established condition. For example, when the first condition is satisfied as a predetermined condition, the arrangement state of the screen (curved surface screen portion 9420) is set to the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 359), while the first condition is set as a predetermined condition. When the second condition, which is more advantageous to the player than the condition of the above, is satisfied, the arrangement state of the screen (curved surface screen portion 9420) may be set to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 361).

Further, for example, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state is won), the state of the liquid crystal display device is changed from the first state to the first state. While switching to the state of 2, the arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is set to the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 359), and further, when the specific game state starts, the state of the liquid crystal display device is changed. While maintaining the second state, the arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 359) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 361). May be good. Further, when the specific game state starts, the state of the liquid crystal display device is switched from the first state to the second state, and the arrangement state of the screen (curved screen portion 9420) is changed to the first arrangement state (FIG. 359). The screen (curved screen unit 9420) while maintaining the state of the liquid crystal display device in the second state when the game state shifts to a more advantageous game state than the specific game state during the specific game state. The arrangement state of the above may be switched from the first arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 359) to the second arrangement state (state shown in FIG. 361).

When the state of the liquid crystal display device is the second state, the image may or may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220). As a result, the effect of the effect may be enhanced by appropriately switching between the flat image display on the liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal panel 9220) and the stereoscopic image display on the screen (curved screen portion 9420).

[16th Embodiment]
The first to fifteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 16th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 1 according to the 1st to 15th embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to fifteenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description will be omitted for the portion where the description in the first to fifteenth embodiments also applies to the sixteenth embodiment.

<Upper door mechanism UD and display unit 9000>
FIG. 363A is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 363 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 363 (a).

In the present embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes the screen unit 9200. The light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). Then, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. ..

As in the thirteenth embodiment, each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Each of these screens is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and the incident surface on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface. It has a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light. Further, each of these screens is formed mainly of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

As shown in FIGS. 363 (a) and 363 (b), the upper door mechanism UD according to the present embodiment is the upper door mechanism UD according to the fifteenth embodiment except that the liquid crystal panel 9220 is not provided. It has the same configuration as. The door-side left screen 9060 and the door-side right screen 9050 (see FIG. 58) described in the third embodiment may be provided on the side of the illumination unit 9210. Further, the liquid crystal panel 9220 may be provided. The screen unit 9200 according to the present embodiment includes a left screen portion 9203L, a right screen portion 9203R, a center screen portion 9203C, an upper screen portion 9203U, a lower screen portion 9510, and a top screen portion 9203T.

The left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, and the upper screen portion 9203U are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and the left screen portion 9200L, the right screen portion 9200R, and the upper side are described in the thirteenth embodiment, respectively. It has the same configuration as the screen unit 9200U (see FIG. 347). The top screen portion 9202T is formed in a rectangular shape and has the same configuration as the top screen portion 9200T (see FIG. 348) described in the thirteenth embodiment. The central screen portion 9203C is formed in a rectangular shape, and unlike the rear screen portion 9202B described in the fifteenth embodiment, has a substantially flat shape.

The lower screen portion 9510 seems to have a rectangular notch formed in the front portion including a part of the short side 9200Lo with respect to the lower screen portion 9200Lo (see FIG. 347) described in the thirteenth embodiment. It has a U-shape. A half mirror portion 9511 is arranged in the notch portion so as to fit. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 363 (a), the half mirror portion 9511 is shown with diagonal lines.

The half mirror portion 9511 has a rectangular half mirror 9511a. The half mirror 9511a is a mirror having a light transmittance of about 50%, reflects a part of the incident light, and transmits a part of the incident light. Rotation axes (not shown) projecting to the left and right from the left end and the right end are provided at the left end and the right end of the rear side of the half mirror 9511a, respectively. These rotating shafts are rotatably supported at a predetermined portion of the unit housing 9010. The half mirror 9511a is driven by a drive mechanism as described in the thirteenth embodiment, and can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view around the rotation axis.

The lower portion 9203Lo composed of the lower screen portion 9510 and the half mirror portion 9511 has a trailing edge 9511b similar to the short side 9200Lo of the lower screen portion 9200Lo described in the thirteenth embodiment, and has a rear end edge 9511b. The edge 9511b substantially coincides with the rotation center axis of the half mirror 9511a. Further, by the rear end edge 9511b, the rear side 9200Lb of the left screen portion 9203L (see FIG. 347), the rear side 9200Rb of the right screen portion 9203R (see FIG. 347), and the short side 9200Ub of the upper screen portion 9203U (see FIG. 347). , An opening similar to the opening 9402 (see FIG. 359) described in the fifteenth embodiment is formed. The central screen portion 9203C has substantially the same shape as the opening, and is arranged so as to close the opening.

From the above, the half mirror 9511a can rotate in the space surrounded by the left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, the upper screen portion 9203U, and the lower side portion 9203Lo. The state in which the half mirror 9511a is fitted to the lower screen portion 9510 is the basic position of the half mirror 9511a.

A liquid crystal panel 9512 is arranged below the half mirror portion 9511. The liquid crystal panel 9512 is arranged with an inclination so as to descend from the front to the rear. The liquid crystal panel 9512 constitutes a liquid crystal display device, and is controlled by a sub control device SS (see FIG. 11) to display an image (still image or moving image) related to the game in a display area provided on the upper surface. It is possible. The liquid crystal panel 9512 may be arranged substantially horizontally.

The half mirror 9511a is arranged at a basic position with an inclination so as to rise from the front to the rear. When the half mirror 9511a rotates and is in an arrangement state having an inclination such that it descends from the front to the rear (for example, a state at an angle of 45 ° with respect to the horizontal plane), it is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9512. The image is visible to the player via the half mirror 9511a.

<Production display example>
FIG. 364 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using a half mirror.

While the player is playing a game on the game machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, the center screen portion 9203C, the upper screen portion 9203U, the lower screen portion 9510, and the top screen portion 9203T ( Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the front surface).

In FIG. 364, the half mirror 9511a is arranged with an inclination so as to descend from the front to the rear. By rotating the half mirror 9511a by about 60 ° from the basic position (clockwise in the right side view) and then stopping the rotation, the arrangement state of the half mirror 9511a can be changed to the state shown in FIG. 364. .. In this state, when a predetermined image (for example, a character image) is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 9512, a mirror image of the predetermined image is displayed on the half mirror 9511a.

Further, in this state, the half mirror 9511a is arranged on the front side of the central screen portion 9203C, and the half mirror 9511a and the central screen portion 9203C are overlapped with each other in the front view. Here, since the half mirror 9511a has a predetermined transmittance, when the image projected from the projector 9020 is displayed on the central screen portion 9203C, the image is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the mirror image displayed on the half mirror 9511a and the image displayed on the central screen portion 9203C in a superimposed manner. For example, it is possible to make the characters displayed on the half mirror 9511a appear to appear in the background displayed on the central screen portion 9203C. In this way, by linking the image display on the half mirror 9511a and the image display on the central screen portion 9203C, a more attractive effect can be realized.

<Modification example>
FIG. 365A is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 365 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 365 (a). FIG. 366 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 366 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 366 (a).

In the above, the half mirror portion 9511 has been described as having one half mirror 9511a, but the half mirror portion 9511 may have a plurality of half mirrors.

In the example shown in FIG. 365, the half mirror portion 9511 includes a half mirror 9511L, a half mirror 9511C, and a half mirror 9511R. The half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R have a size and a shape as if the half mirror 9511a was evenly divided into three parts. The half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R can be driven individually, and like the half mirror 9511a, the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R can be driven individually. It can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in a side view.

In FIG. 365, the degree of displacement (rotation angle) from the basic position is different for each of the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R. In this state, the rotation of the half mirror 9511L is completed, the half mirror 9511C is just rotating, and the half mirror 9511R is still arranged at the basic position. For example, it can be configured to drive the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R in conjunction with the stop rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR (see FIG. 168). .. As a result, as the rotation of each reel RL, RC, RR is stopped (operation of the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R), a mirror image is sequentially displayed on the half mirror 9511L, the half mirror 9511C, and the half mirror 9511R. It is possible to perform such a production.

In the above, the half mirror portion 9511 has been described as being arranged in the vicinity of the lower screen portion 9510, but the half mirror portion 9511 may be arranged in the vicinity of the upper screen portion 9203U.

In the example shown in FIG. 366, the half mirror portion 9511 is arranged along the lower surface of the upper screen portion 9203U at the basic position. The front side of the half mirror 9511a is arranged close to the long side 9200Ua (see FIG. 347) of the upper screen portion 9200U, and the left end and the right end of the front side are the left end and the right end to the left, respectively. A rotating shaft (not shown) protruding to the right is provided. These rotating shafts are rotatably supported at a predetermined portion of the unit housing 9010. As a result, the half mirror 9511a can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in the side view with the axis in the left-right direction close to the long side 9200Ua of the upper screen portion 9200U as the rotation center axis. ..

Further, in this example, the lower screen portion 9510 is not provided. As a result, when the half mirror 9511a rotates and is in an arrangement state having an inclination such that it descends from the front to the rear (for example, a state at which the angle is 45 ° with respect to the horizontal plane), the liquid crystal panel 9512 The image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized by the player via the half mirror 9511a.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment has been described.

<Appendix Q>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor has come up with the idea that a new type of entertainment can be created by devising a screen in the process of diligently studying a game machine using a projector as described above. It was.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment has the following features.

(Q-1) A predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen, and
Half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and
A display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) different from that of the predetermined screen is provided.
The image displayed on the display means can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C), the half mirror (half mirror 9511a), and the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) are different display means (liquid crystal panel). 9512), and the image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) is displayed on the front side by the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C). It is configured to be reflective to the screen. This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the image displayed on the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) and the mirror image displayed on the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) in a superposed manner. Can create various visual effects.

(Q-2) The gaming machine according to (Q-1) above.
The predetermined screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) is arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident from the back side, and is incident from the back side. It is possible to display an image on the front side by light. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) to block the passage of light projected by the projector (projector 9020), and the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C). ) Can be facilitated in the layout design.

(Q-3) The gaming machine according to (Q-1) or (Q-2).
A drive mechanism for driving the half mirror is provided.
The half mirror can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the drive mechanism, and when the half mirror is arranged at the second position, the display means. The image displayed in can be reflected to the front side,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 16th embodiment, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the drive mechanism. When arranged at the second position, the image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) is configured to be reflective to the front side. As a result, when the effect using the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) and the effect using the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) are made to cooperate, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is used as the predetermined screen (center screen portion). While arranging the effects on the front side of the 9203C), when these effects are not coordinated, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be retracted from the front side of the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C), and the effects can be removed. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the image displayed on the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) from being hindered by the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) when they are not made to cooperate.

In the 16th embodiment, it has been described that the image displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror (half mirror 9511a). The display means in the present invention is not limited to the liquid crystal panel, and any means capable of displaying an image can be adopted. For example, an organic or inorganic electroluminescence (EL) panel may be used as the display means, or a screen different from the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) may be used as the display means. Alternatively, in the present invention, an image of a physical object other than an image may be configured to be reflected to the front side by a half mirror (half mirror 9511a). For example, instead of the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512), a light emitting accessory (for example, a movable member including an LED) is arranged, and an image of the accessory emitting light is captured by a half mirror (half mirror 9511a). It may be reflected on the front side. As a result, it is possible to superimpose a mirror image of the accessory emitting light on the image displayed on a predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) so that the player can visually recognize the image.

The half mirror (half mirror 9511a) in the present invention is not limited to one having a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror having an arbitrary transmittance can be appropriately adopted. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30% or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of silver or aluminum to be vapor-deposited. When the front side of the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is brighter than the back side, it is displayed on the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) rather than the image displayed on the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C). You can see the mirror image more clearly. Further, the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) in the present invention may be a screen having a substantially flat projected surface or a screen having a curved projected surface. Further, as the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C), a movable screen as described in the fifteenth embodiment may be adopted.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, it has been described that a rear projector that projects from the back side is used. It is desirable to adopt such a rear projector as the projector in the present invention. When the rear projector is adopted, it becomes easy to arrange the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) close to each other while not blocking the passage of the light projected by the projector. .. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the cooperation between the effect using the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the effect using the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C). However, the projector in the present invention is not limited to the rear projector, and may be a transmissive liquid crystal projector that projects from the front side. When a transmissive liquid crystal projector is adopted, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) and the predetermined screen (center screen portion 9203C) are arranged at a certain distance in order to secure a passage path for the light projected by the projector. Good.

Further, in the 16th embodiment, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) can be moved from the first position (the position shown in FIG. 363 (a)) to the second position (the position shown in FIG. 364). Explained as being. In the present invention, the timing of moving the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) from the first position to the second position is not particularly limited, and the movement can be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is. For example, in the normal state, the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is arranged at the first position, and when the gaming state (specific gaming state) advantageous to the player starts, the position is from the first position to the second position. It may be moved to. Then, the second position may be maintained while the specific gaming state continues. In addition, when the right to shift to the specific gaming state is granted (the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state is won), the movement from the first position to the second position is performed. May be. As a result, an effect suggesting that the right to shift to the specific gaming state has been granted (winning a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state) may be performed. Further, in the normal state (when the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is arranged at the first position), the image is not displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512), and the half mirror (half mirror 9511a) is used. The image may be displayed on the display means (liquid crystal panel 9512) when it is arranged at the second position. Specific gaming states include bonus gaming states (BB gaming states, MB gaming states, etc.), RT gaming states, AT gaming states (ART gaming states), jackpot gaming states, probabilistic gaming states, and time reductions in pachinko gaming machines. A gaming state such as a gaming state can be appropriately adopted. The half mirror in the present invention may not be movable, and may be configured to be always arranged at the second position.

[17th Embodiment]
The first to sixteenth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the 17th embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment is the same as that of the game machine 1 according to the 1st to 16th embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the game machine 1 according to the first to sixteenth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to sixteenth embodiments applies to the seventeenth embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper door mechanism UD and display unit 9000>
FIG. 367 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 367 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 367 (a).

In the present embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment, the display unit 9000 is arranged in the cabinet G, and the display unit 9000 includes the screen unit 9200. The light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 55). Then, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen unit 9200 from the rear (rear side), and the image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of each screen constituting the screen unit 9200. ..

As in the thirteenth embodiment, each screen constituting the screen unit 9200 is formed so as to have an even thickness over the entire surface. Each of these screens is a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projected image from the rear, and the incident surface on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident and the light incident on the incident surface. It has a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting light. Further, each of these screens is formed mainly of, for example, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, and a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

As shown in FIGS. 367 (a) and 367 (b), the upper door mechanism UD according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the upper door mechanism UD according to the 16th embodiment. The illumination unit 9210 may not be provided. Further, the display unit 9000 according to the present embodiment does not include the half mirror unit 9511 and the liquid crystal panel 9512. Further, the screen unit 9200 according to the present embodiment includes a left screen portion 9204L, a right screen portion 9204R, a central screen portion 9204C, an upper screen portion 9204U, a lower screen portion 9204Lo, and a top screen portion 9204T.

The left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, and the upper screen portion 9204U are each formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and the left screen portion 9203L, the right screen portion 9203R, and the upper side are described in the 16th embodiment, respectively. It has the same configuration as the screen unit 9203U (see FIG. 363). The lower screen portion 9204Lo is formed in an equiangular trapezoidal shape, and has the same configuration as the lower screen portion 9202Lo (see FIG. 359) described in the fifteenth embodiment. The central screen portion 9204C and the top screen portion 9204T are each formed in a rectangular shape, and have the same configuration as the central screen portion 9203C and the top screen portion 9203T (see FIG. 363) described in the 16th embodiment. There is.

On the back side of the screen unit 9200, the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215c) so as to be close to (substantially abutted) the back surface of the screen unit 9200. 9215d) is arranged. The illumination unit 9215a is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the left screen portion 9204L and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215b is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the left screen portion 9204L and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215c is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the right screen portion 9204R and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215d is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the right screen portion 9204R and the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

Specifically, the illumination unit 9215a has substantially the same length as the upper hypotenuse of the left screen portion 9204L and the left hypotenuse of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap these hypotenuses in front view. .. The illumination unit 9215b has substantially the same length as the lower hypotenuse of the left screen portion 9204L and the left hypotenuse of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap these hypotenuses in front view. The illumination unit 9215c has substantially the same length as the upper hypotenuse of the right screen portion 9204R and the right hypotenuse of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap these hypotenuses in front view. The illumination unit 9215d has substantially the same length as the lower hypotenuse of the right screen portion 9204R and the right hypotenuse of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap these hypotenuses in front view.

The illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are each composed of an LED array in which a plurality of LEDs are installed on an LED substrate. A plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side along the extending direction of each illumination unit 9215, and each LED is installed so as to emit light in the front direction. As a result, the light emitted from the LED can illuminate the vicinity of the boundary between two adjacent screens. The LED substrate is composed of a transparent flexible substrate having a light transmittance of 80% or more (for example, about 90%). Further, as the LED, an extremely small LED (for example, a length of about 1.0 mm to 1.6 mm and a width of about 0.5 mm to 0.8 mm) is used. This makes it difficult for the shadow of the illumination unit 9215 to be reflected on the screen. Since the illumination unit 9215 is provided on the back side of the screen unit 9200, it is basically invisible from the front, but for the sake of clarity, in FIG. 367, the illumination unit 9215a and the illumination unit 9215b, The illumination unit 9215c and the illumination unit 9215d are shown.

<Production display example>
FIG. 368 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit.

While the player is playing a game on the game machine 1, the display surfaces of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the center screen portion 9204C, the upper screen portion 9204U, the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the top screen portion 9204T ( Images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the front surface).

In FIG. 367, it has been described that the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are arranged on the back side of the screen unit 9200. In the example shown in FIG. 368, the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination are placed so as to be close to (substantially abutting) the back surface of the screen unit 9200 on the back side of the screen unit 9200. In addition to the unit 9215d, an illumination unit 9215e, an illumination unit 9215f, an illumination unit 9215g, and an illumination unit 9215h are arranged.

The illumination unit 9215e is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the central screen portion 9204C and the left screen portion 9204L. The illumination unit 9215f is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the central screen portion 9204C and the right screen portion 9204R. The illumination unit 9215g is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the central screen portion 9204C and the upper screen portion 9204U. The illumination unit 9215h is arranged so as to extend along the boundary portion between the central screen portion 9204C and the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

Specifically, the illumination unit 9215e has substantially the same length as the left side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the left side screen portion 9204L, and is arranged so as to overlap these sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215f has substantially the same length as the right side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the right side screen portion 9204R, and is arranged so as to overlap these sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215g has substantially the same length as the upper side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the upper screen portion 9204U, and is arranged so as to overlap these sides in front view. The illumination unit 9215h has substantially the same length as the lower side of the central screen portion 9204C and the rear side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and is arranged so as to overlap these sides in front view.

These four lighting units 9215 (lighting unit 9215e, lighting unit 9215f, lighting unit 9215g, and lighting unit 9215h) are the above-mentioned four lighting units 9215 (lighting unit 9215a, lighting unit 9215h). It has the same configuration as the 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d), and can illuminate the vicinity of the boundary between two adjacent screens. Of eight lighting units 9215 (lighting unit 9215a, lighting unit 9215b, lighting unit 9215c, lighting unit 9215d, lighting unit 9215e, lighting unit 9215f, lighting unit 9215g, and lighting unit 9215h) Each LED can individually control the light emission by the sub-control device SS (see FIG. 11).

For example, as shown in FIG. 368 (a), four lighting units 9215 (lighting unit 9215a, lighting unit 9215b, lighting unit 9215c, and lighting) extending radially from four corners of the central screen portion 9204C. In the decoration unit 9215d), the LEDs are sequentially emitted from the front to the rear. As a result, it is possible to make the light seem to run from the outside toward the center side (central screen portion 9204C) around the central screen portion 9204C, and the player can pay attention to the central screen portion 9204C.

Further, as shown in FIG. 368 (b), the peripheral edge of the central screen portion 9204C is obtained when the light emission of the LEDs in the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d is all completed. All the LEDs in the four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215e, illumination unit 9215f, illumination unit 9215g, and illumination unit 9215h) arranged along the above are made to emit light. As a result, it is possible to irradiate the central screen portion 9204C along the four sides at the same time as the light reaches the central screen portion 9204C, and it is possible to further emphasize the effect performed by the central screen portion 9204C.

Further, as an effect different from the example shown in FIG. 368, for example, a roulette effect can be performed. As shown in FIG. 368, by lighting each of the illumination units 9215, it is possible to give an appearance as if the adjacent screens are partitioned from each other. By utilizing this, the display mode of each screen is sequentially changed (highlighted in order), so that an image expression as if roulette is performed can be realized.

Alternatively, the light emission of the LEDs in the three illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, and illumination unit 9215e) arranged along the peripheral edge of the left screen portion 9204L and the peripheral edge of the upper screen portion 9204U. LED light emission in the three illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215g) arranged along the right screen portion 9204R and three arranged along the peripheral edge of the right screen portion 9204R. LED light emission in the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215c, illumination unit 9215d, and illumination unit 9215f) and three illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215) arranged along the peripheral edge of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The roulette may be expressed by repeatedly emitting light from the LEDs in the unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215d, and the illumination unit 9215h).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 369, the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are driven by the drive mechanism as described in the thirteenth embodiment to rotate. It is configured to be possible. Specifically, the illumination unit 9215a can rotate about an axis passing through a point near the left end on the front side of the upper screen portion 9204U and the upper end on the front side of the left screen portion 9204L. The illumination unit 9215b can rotate about an axis passing through a lower end on the front side of the left screen portion 9204L and a point near the left end on the front side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215c can rotate about an axis passing through a point near the right end on the front side of the upper screen portion 9204U and the upper end on the front side of the right screen portion 9204R. The illumination unit 9215d can rotate about an axis passing through a lower end on the front side of the right screen portion 9204R and a point near the right end on the front side of the lower screen portion 9204Lo.

As a result, the illumination unit 9215a can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369 (a) to the position shown in FIG. 369 (b) (a position substantially coincident with the front side of the left screen portion 9204L). There is. The illumination unit 9215b can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369 (a) to the position shown in FIG. 369 (b) (a position substantially coincident with the front side of the left screen portion 9204L). The illumination unit 9215c can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369 (a) to the position shown in FIG. 369 (b) (a position substantially coincident with the front side of the right screen portion 9204R). The illumination unit 9215d can be moved from the position shown in FIG. 369 (a) to the position shown in FIG. 369 (b) (a position substantially coincident with the front side of the right screen portion 9204R).

Here, the length of the illumination unit 9215a and the length of the illumination unit 9215b are substantially half the length of the front side of the left screen portion 9204L, respectively. As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 369 (b), the illumination unit 9215a and the illumination unit 9215b are arranged so as to extend over the entire front side of the left screen portion 9204L. Further, the length of the illumination unit 9215c and the length of the illumination unit 9215d are substantially half the length of the front side of the right screen portion 9204R, respectively. As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 369 (b), the illumination unit 9215c and the illumination unit 9215d are arranged so as to extend over the entire front side of the right screen portion 9204R.

In this way, by switching the arrangement state of the four illumination units 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d), X is as shown in FIG. 369 (a). The illumination unit 9215 can be lit in a character shape (X line shape), or the illumination unit 9215 can be lit in a straight line (vertical line shape on both sides) as shown in FIG. 369 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a variety of effects in combination with the image displayed on the screen unit 9200.

In the example shown in FIG. 369, the lighting unit 9215a may be set longer than the upper hypotenuse of the left screen portion 9204L and the left hypotenuse of the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lighting unit 9215b is set to be longer than the left side screen. The lower hypotenuse in the portion 9204L and the left hypotenuse in the lower screen portion 9204Lo may be set longer than the left hypotenuse in the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the lighting unit 9215c has the upper hypotenuse in the right screen portion 9204R and the right hypotenuse in the upper screen portion 9204U. The lighting unit 9215d may be set longer than the lower hypotenuse of the right screen portion 9204R and the right hypotenuse of the lower screen portion 9204Lo. A part of the lighting unit 9215a, a part of the lighting unit 9215b, a part of the lighting unit 9215c, and a part of the lighting unit 9215d are arranged on the back side of the central screen portion 9204C, respectively. It may be that. In this case, in the state shown in FIG. 369 (a), the portion of the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d that overlaps with the central screen portion 9204C in the front view is , The LED may not emit light.

Further, the extending directions of the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d are not limited to the direction along the boundary portion between the two adjacent screens. For example, the direction along the diagonal line of a rectangle (opening 9401 shown in FIG. 359 (a)) composed of the front sides of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. The illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d may be extended. The illumination unit 9215e, the illumination unit 9215f, the illumination unit 9215g, and the illumination unit 9215h may not be provided.

<Modification example 1>
FIG. 370 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 370 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 370 (a). FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit.

In the above, it has been described that the illumination unit 9215 is arranged on the back side of the screen unit 9200, but the illumination unit 9215 may be arranged on the front side of the screen unit 9200.

In the example shown in FIG. 370, the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215A, illumination unit 9215B, illumination unit 9215C, and illumination unit 9215D) is arranged on the front side of the screen unit 9200. The lighting unit 9215A, the lighting unit 9215B, the lighting unit 9215C, and the lighting unit 9215D are the same as the lighting unit 9210 described in the fifteenth embodiment, respectively. It is provided with an LED substrate arranged on the back side of the LED substrate and a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED substrate. The LED is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction, and the light is emitted from the lens to the outside of the game machine 1. Similar to the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d, a transparent flexible substrate may be used as the LED substrate, or a very small LED may be used as the LED. May be.

Each lens included in the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D has a triangular pyramid shape. Specifically, the lens included in the illumination unit 9215A includes a triangular pyramid having the upper left corner portion of the central screen portion 9204C as the apex, the left screen portion 9204L, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. It is configured. The lens included in the illumination unit 9215B constitutes a triangular pyramid having the lower left corner of the central screen portion 9204C as the apex, and the left screen portion 9204L, the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. There is. The lens included in the illumination unit 9215C constitutes a triangular pyramid in which the upper right corner of the central screen portion 9204C is the apex, and the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the central screen portion 9204C are included as three surfaces. .. The lens included in the illumination unit 9215D constitutes a triangular pyramid having the lower right corner portion of the central screen portion 9204C as the apex, and the right screen portion 9204R, the lower screen portion 9204Lo, and the central screen portion 9204C as three surfaces. There is.

As a result, the central screen portion 9204C has an appearance in which the four corners are cut out in a triangular shape, and can be visually recognized as an octagonal shape. The lenses included in the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D may be decorated.

Using such an illumination unit 9215A, an illumination unit 9215B, an illumination unit 9215C, and an illumination unit 9215D, an effect as shown in FIG. 371 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 371 (a), an image prompting the pressing of the effect button is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, an image notifying whether or not the predetermined effect (effect for notifying whether or not the bonus has been won) is continued is displayed on the central screen unit 9204C. .. In the example shown in FIG. 371 (b), an image indicating that the effect is continued is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C, and the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit are displayed. Each LED of 9215D is emitting light. As a result, in the vicinity of the four corners of the central screen portion 9204C, each illumination unit 9215 lights up in a triangular shape, and the central screen portion 9204C has an appearance as if it has an octagonal shape. It is possible to make the player stand out, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus winning.

In this example, it has been described that the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D have a triangular pyramid shape, but the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, and the illumination unit 9215B are described. The decoration unit 9215C and the lighting unit 9215D, like the lighting unit 9215a, the lighting unit 9215b, the lighting unit 9215c, and the lighting unit 9215d, were along the boundary between two adjacent screens, respectively. It may be arranged so as to extend linearly in the direction.

<Modification 2>
FIG. 372 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. 372 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 372 (a). FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, the screen unit 9200 cuts the rear four corners (the portion including each of the four corners of the central screen portion 9204C) of the screen unit 9200 shown in FIG. It has a shape in which four screen portions (upper left screen portion 9204UL, lower left screen portion 9204LoL, upper right screen portion 9204UR, and lower right screen portion 9204LoR) are arranged.

As a result, in front view, the rectangular shape (opening 9401 shown in FIG. 359 (a)) composed of the front sides of the left screen portion 9204L, the right screen portion 9204R, the upper screen portion 9204U, and the lower screen portion 9204Lo. Inside, the left screen part 9204L, the right screen part 9204R, the center screen part 9204C, the upper screen part 9204U, the lower screen part 9204Lo, the upper left screen part 9204UL, the lower left screen part 9204LoL, the upper right screen part 9204UR, and the lower right screen. Nine screens called a part 9204LoR are formed. The central screen portion 9204C is formed in an octagonal shape.

Although detailed description will be omitted, a plurality of illumination units 9215 are arranged on the back side of the screen unit 9200 so as to be close to (substantially abutted against) the back surface of the screen unit 9200. Similar to FIG. 368, each illumination unit 9215 is arranged so as to extend linearly in a direction along a boundary portion between two adjacent screens. As a result, a total of 16 illumination units 9215 are provided. Each illumination unit 9215 has the same configuration as the illumination unit 9215 (illumination unit 9215a, illumination unit 9215b, illumination unit 9215c, and illumination unit 9215d) described above.

Using such 16 illumination units 9215, the effect as shown in FIG. 373 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 373 (a), an image prompting the pressing of the effect button is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C. Further, each LED of the eight illumination units 9215 arranged along the eight sides of the central screen portion 9204C is emitting light. This makes it possible to arouse the player's desire to press the effect button. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, an image notifying whether or not the predetermined effect (effect for notifying whether or not the bonus has been won) is continued is displayed on the central screen unit 9204C. .. In the example shown in FIG. 373 (b), an image indicating that the effect is continued is displayed on the central screen portion 9204C, and each LED of the remaining eight lighting units 9215 is emitting light. As a result, the peripheral edge of the central screen portion 9204C (octagon) is bordered, and the appearance of triangles protruding in all directions is exhibited, which makes it possible to make the central screen portion 9204 stand out. The expectation of the person can be inflated.

<Modification example 3>
FIG. 374 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 374 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 374 (a). FIG. 375 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit. FIG. 376 (a) is a front view schematically showing the upper door mechanism and the display unit. FIG. 376 (b) is a side view of the upper door mechanism and the display unit shown in FIG. 376 (a). FIG. 377 is a diagram showing an example of an effect using the illumination unit.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, the screen unit 9200 has only one screen 9205. An illumination unit 9215X and an illumination unit 9215Y are arranged on the left side portion and the right side portion of the screen 9205 so as to be close to (substantially abutted against) the front surface of the screen 9205, respectively. The illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y are the same as the illumination unit 9215A, the illumination unit 9215B, the illumination unit 9215C, and the illumination unit 9215D, respectively. It includes an LED substrate arranged on the side and a plurality of LEDs provided on the surface of the LED substrate. The LED is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction, and the light is emitted from the lens to the outside of the game machine 1.

Each lens included in the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y has a rod-like (straight-line) shape. As a result, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y are similar to the illumination unit 9215a and the illumination unit 9215b in the state shown in FIG. 369 (b), and the illumination unit 9215c and the illumination unit 9215d, respectively. It is arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction. The extending direction of the illumination unit 9215X and the extending direction of the illumination unit 9215Y are substantially parallel.

Using such an illumination unit 9215X and an illumination unit 9215Y, the effect as shown in FIG. 375 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 375 (a), an image indicating a symbol (for example, “7”) to be stopped by pressing the stop button is displayed on the screen 9205, and each of the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y is displayed. The LED is emitting light. In this state, if the player succeeds in stopping the instructed symbol, the screen 9205 displays advantageous contents that the player can acquire. In the example shown in FIG. 375 (b), the number of games advantageous to the player (for example, the number of times the AT number is added) is displayed on the screen 9205, and the LEDs of the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y are displayed. It emits light (for example, blinking) in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 375 (a). Thereby, the effect performed on the screen 9205 can be emphasized.

Further, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y can be rotated like the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d in the example shown in FIG. 369. It may be configured as follows. For example, in the effect shown in FIG. 375, before the player presses the stop button, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y are arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and the instructed symbols are arranged. Taking the opportunity of the player's success in stopping the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y may be rotated and arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 376, an illumination unit 9215p, an illumination unit 9215q, an illumination unit 9215r, and an illumination unit 9215s are arranged on the front side of the screen 9205. The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s have the same configurations as the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, respectively. The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are arranged so as to extend diagonally from the four corners of the virtual rectangular area in the central portion of the screen 9205, respectively. ..

Using such an illumination unit 9215p, an illumination unit 9215q, an illumination unit 9215r, and an illumination unit 9215s, the effect as shown in FIG. 377 is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 377 (a), an image prompting the pressing of the effect button is displayed in the center of the screen 9205. Further, the LEDs of the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are emitting light. This makes it possible to arouse the player's desire to press the effect button. In this state, when the player presses the effect button, a privilege advantageous to the player may be given. In the example shown in FIG. 377 (b), the number of games advantageous to the player (for example, the number of times the AT number is added) is added, and that fact is displayed in the center of the screen 9205, and the illumination unit 9215p, Each LED of the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s emits light (for example, blinking) in a mode different from that shown in FIG. 377 (a). Thereby, the effect performed on the screen 9205 can be emphasized.

The illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215s in the example shown in FIG. 369, respectively. Similar to the illumination unit 9215d, it may be configured to be rotatable. As a result, as shown in FIG. 369, the state in which the illumination unit 9215 is lit in an X shape (X line shape) and the state in which the illumination unit 9215 is lit in a straight line (vertical line shape on both sides) are set. It may be possible to switch. For example, in the effect shown in FIG. 377, before the player presses the effect button, the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are in the vertical direction (FIG. 369 (FIG. 369). b) It was decided to arrange it so as to extend to), and when the effect button was pressed, the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s were rotated. They may be moved and arranged so as to extend in an oblique direction (see FIG. 377 (b)).

In the above, it has been described that the illumination unit 9215X and the illumination unit 9215Y, and the illumination unit 9215p, the illumination unit 9215q, the illumination unit 9215r, and the illumination unit 9215s are arranged on the front side of the screen 9205. However, these may be arranged on the back side of the screen 9205. In this case, as the configuration of these illumination units 9215, it is possible to adopt the same configurations as those of the illumination unit 9215a, the illumination unit 9215b, the illumination unit 9215c, and the illumination unit 9215d described above. ..

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment has been described.

<Appendix R>
Conventionally, a game machine capable of producing an effect by using a projector is known (see JP-A-6-035066 and JP-A-2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

The present inventor cannot create new entertainment by devising the arrangement of the screen and the light emitting means in the process of diligently studying the game machine using the projector as described above. I came up with the idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to create a new entertainment property in a game machine provided with a projector and a screen.

In this respect, the gaming machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment has the following features.

(R-1-1) The screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
A light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) having a light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided.
The light emitting unit can emit light by the light emitting means in a state where at least a part of the light emitting unit is arranged so as to overlap with the screen in front view.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment, at least a part of the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is a screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen) in front view. It is configured so that light can be emitted by the light emitting means in a state where it is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the portion 9204U and the lower screen portion 9204Lo). As a result, the player can see the image displayed on the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) and emit light by the light emitting means. It is possible to visually recognize the aspect in an overlapping manner, and it is possible to create a novel visual effect.

(R-1-2) The gaming machine according to (R-1-1).
As the screen, a first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and a second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) are provided.
A part of the first screen and the second screen are arranged so as to be close to each other.
The light emitting unit is arranged so as to extend along the boundary between the first screen and the second screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment, the first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) are arranged so that a part thereof is close to each other and emits light. The unit (illumination unit 9215) is arranged so as to extend along the boundary between the first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U). As a result, it is possible to give an appearance as if the first screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) are separated by a light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215). The image displayed on the screen (left screen portion 9204L) and the image displayed on the second screen (upper screen portion 9204U) can be shown separately.

(R-1-3) The gaming machine according to (R-1-1) or (R-1-2).
A drive mechanism for driving the light emitting unit is provided.
The light emitting unit can be moved from the first position (position shown in FIG. 369 (a)) to the second position (position shown in FIG. 369 (b)) by being driven by the drive mechanism. It is possible, and when it is arranged at least in the second position, it is possible to emit light by the light emitting means in a state where at least a part thereof is arranged so as to overlap with the screen in front view. is there,
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment, the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is driven by a drive mechanism to be driven from a first position (position shown in FIG. 369 (a)) to a second position. It is possible to move to a position (the position shown in FIG. 369 (b)), and when it is located at least in a second position (the position shown in FIG. 369 (b)), at least one in front view. Light is emitted by the light emitting means in a state where the part is arranged so as to overlap with the screen (left screen part 9204L, right side screen part 9204R, center screen part 9204C, upper screen part 9204U, and lower screen part 9204Lo). Is configured to be possible. As a result, depending on the arrangement state of the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215), the game for the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). It is possible to change the way people are conscious, and it is possible to produce a wide variety of effects.

(R-2-1) Screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) and
A projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen, and
It is equipped with a light emitting means (LED provided in the illumination unit 9215) capable of emitting light.
The light emitting means is arranged in a passage path of light projected by the projector.
The mode of light emission by the light emitting means and the mode of displaying an image on the screen can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment, the light emitting means (LED included in the lighting unit 9215) is arranged in the passage path of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020), which is caused by this. The light emitting means (illumination unit 9215) is located close to the image display area on the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). It is easy to make it emit light by the LED) provided in. As a result, the light emitting mode by the light emitting means (LED provided in the lighting unit 9215) and the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) can be obtained. It is possible to effectively create a situation in which the display mode of the image can be visually recognized in an superimposed manner, and the projection of light by the light emitting means (LED provided in the lighting unit 9215) and the projection of light by the projector (projector 9020). It is possible to realize a novel production in collaboration with.

(R-2-2) The gaming machine of the above (R-2-1).
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen.
The light emitting means is arranged so that light can be projected from the back side with respect to the screen.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the 17th embodiment, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). Is such that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the back side of the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). The light emitting means (LED provided in the lighting unit 9215) is provided on the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). On the other hand, it is arranged so that light can be projected from the back side. As a result, the light emitting means (LED included in the lighting unit 9215) is emitted on the back side of the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). By making the screen (LED provided in the lighting unit 9215) provided, the screens (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower) are provided. It is possible to irradiate the part of the side screen portion 9204Lo), and by coordinating the image display in the portion and the irradiation by the light emitting means (LED provided in the lighting unit 9215), a more attractive effect is produced. be able to.

(R-2-3) The gaming machine according to (R-2-1) or (R-2-2).
The light emitting means is arranged on a predetermined substrate having translucency.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game machine 1 according to the seventeenth embodiment, the light emitting means (LED included in the illumination unit 9215) is arranged on a predetermined substrate having translucency. As a result, the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) easily passes through the substrate, and it is possible to create a situation in which shadows are unlikely to occur at the arrangement position of the substrate.

In the seventeenth embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is arranged along the boundary portion of the adjacent screens. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is not particularly limited, and the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) may be arranged regardless of the boundary portion. Further, the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) may be arranged on the front side or the back side of the screen in close proximity (substantially in contact with) the screen, or may be arranged at a predetermined distance from the screen. Good. The light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) can be attached to an arbitrary member (for example, a front panel or the like) arranged in the vicinity of the screen.

The specific configuration of the light emitting unit is not particularly limited, and the light emitting unit described in the above-described embodiment (for example, the indirect lighting unit 1060, the navigation lamp unit 8160, the right light emitting unit 8320, and the left light emitting unit symmetrical thereto, etc. ), It is possible to appropriately adopt the same configuration. Further, the light emitting means (LED) in the present invention may be smaller than the LED provided in the light emitting unit described in the above-described embodiment. For example, as the gaming machine in the present invention, in addition to the illumination unit 9215, the light emitting unit described in the above-described embodiment (for example, the indirect lighting unit 1060, the navigation lamp unit 8160, or the right light emitting unit 8320 and its left-right symmetry The left light emitting unit) may be provided, and the LED provided in the illumination unit 9215 may be smaller than the LED provided in the light emitting unit. Further, the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, central screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo) in the present invention may be a screen having a substantially flat projected surface. However, the screen may have a curved surface to be projected. If the light emitting means (LED provided in the illumination unit 9215) is arranged on the flexible substrate, the light emitting means (LED provided in the illumination unit 9215) can be easily arranged close to the curved projected surface. Can be done.

In the present invention, the timing at which the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is made to emit light is not particularly limited, and the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) can be made to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied. As predetermined conditions, for example, as described in the above-described embodiment, a condition that a gaming state (specific gaming state) advantageous to the player starts, and a right to shift to the specific gaming state are granted ( It is possible to adopt the condition (winning a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state). Further, when a movable light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is adopted, the position of the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) is changed when such a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may. At this time, for example, the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) before driving does not overlap with the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). While being arranged at the position, the light emitting unit (illumination unit 9215) after driving is connected to the screen (left screen portion 9204L, right screen portion 9204R, center screen portion 9204C, upper screen portion 9204U, and lower screen portion 9204Lo). It may be arranged at the overlapping position. Further, the light emitting unit before driving (illumination unit 9215) is arranged in a portion different from the boundary portion (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 369 (b)), while the light emitting unit after driving (illumination unit 9215). May be arranged along the boundary portion (for example, the portion shown in FIG. 369 (a)).

<Additional notes (others)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) are inserted, and it is detected that the start lever is operated by the player, and the plurality of reels are used. Detects that the start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the multiple reels have been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal requesting the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. The stepping motor is operated based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and transmitting the driving force of each reel to each reel, and the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch. It is equipped with a reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery (“internal winning combination”). A so-called pachislot game machine that stops the rotation of the reel based on the timing at which it is detected that the stop button has been operated is known.

However, since the conventional pachislot machine does not have the configuration and function as a game machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The first to seventeenth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

The first to seventeenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but only specific examples are exemplified, and the present invention is not particularly limited. Specific configurations of each means and the like are appropriately redesigned. It is possible. In addition, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable effects arising from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not it.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description described above, and can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. In addition, the terms and usages used in the present specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Further, those skilled in the art will find it easy to infer other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in the present specification. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims must be regarded as including an equal structure without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and essence of this application by the Japan Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a prompt judgment through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the statement of claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the peculiar effect of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation is made with full consideration of the documents and the like already disclosed.

The detailed description described above includes processing performed on the computer. The above explanations and expressions are described for the purpose of being understood by those skilled in the art most efficiently. In the present specification, each process used to derive the result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, transmission / reception, recording, etc. of an electric or magnetic signal are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, letters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in the present specification is, in principle, executed by various devices. In addition, other configurations required to perform each process are self-evident from the above description.

1 Game machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device D Fixed screen mechanism G Cabinet E1 Front screen mechanism F1 Reel screen mechanism UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism

Claims (3)

With the given screen
A projector that projects light for displaying an image on the predetermined screen, and
With a half mirror
A display means different from that of the predetermined screen is provided.
The image displayed on the display means can be reflected to the front side by the half mirror arranged on the front side of the predetermined screen.
A game machine characterized by that. The predetermined screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and the image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. A drive mechanism for driving the half mirror is provided.
The half mirror can be moved from the first position to the second position by being driven by the drive mechanism, and when the half mirror is arranged at the second position, the display means. The image displayed in can be reflected to the front side,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.

Images